Teledyne T320 Users Manual

t320u to the manual 143577a8-6851-4124-b1df-dcd55bb6005b

2015-02-03

: Teledyne Teledyne-T320-Users-Manual-464432 teledyne-t320-users-manual-464432 teledyne pdf

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 426

Download
Open PDF In Browser	View PDF

Operation Manual

Model T300/T300M
Carbon Monoxide Analyzer
Also supports operation of:

Models T320 and T320U Analyzers
(when used in conjunction with T320/320U Addendum, PN07406)

© TELEDYNE ADVANCED POLLUTION INSTRUMENTATION (TAPI)
9480 CARROLL PARK DRIVE
SAN DIEGO, CA 92121-5201
USA
Toll-free Phone: 800-324-5190
Phone: 858-657-9800
Fax: 858-657-9816
Email: api-sales@teledyne.com
Website: http://www.teledyne-api.com/

06864B DCN6314

Teledyne Advanced Pollution Instrumentation

14 February 2012

ABOUT TELEDYNE ADVANCED POLLUTION INSTRUMENTATION (TAPI)
Teledyne Advanced Pollution Instrumentation (TAPI), a business unit of Teledyne
Instruments, Inc., is a worldwide market leader in the design and manufacture of
precision analytical instrumentation used for air quality monitoring, continuous
emissions monitoring, and specialty process monitoring applications. Founded in San
Diego, California, in 1988, TAPI introduced a complete line of Air Quality Monitoring
(AQM) instrumentation, which comply with the United States Environmental Protection
Administration (EPA) and international requirements for the measurement of criteria
pollutants, including CO, SO2, NOX and Ozone.
Since 1988 TAPI has combined state-of-the-art technology, proven measuring
principles, stringent quality assurance systems and world class after-sales support to
deliver the best products and customer satisfaction in the business.
For further information on our company, our complete range of products, and the
applications that they serve , please visit www.teledyne-api.com or contact
sales@teledyne-api.com.
NOTICE OF COPYRIGHT
© 2010-2012 Teledyne Advanced Pollution Instrumentation, Inc. All rights reserved.
TRADEMARKS
All trademarks, registered trademarks, brand names or product names appearing in this
document are the property of their respective owners and are used herein for
identification purposes only.

06864B DCN6314

Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer

This page intentionally left blank.

06864B DCN6314

IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION
Important safety messages are provided throughout this manual. Please read these messages carefully.
A safety message alerts you to potential hazards that could hurt you or others. Each safety message is
associated with a safety alert symbol. These symbols are found in the manual and inside the instrument. The
definition of these symbols is described below:

WARNING: Electrical Shock Hazard

HAZARD: Strong oxidizer

GENERAL WARNING/CAUTION: Read the accompanying
message for specific information.

CAUTION: Hot Surface Warning

Technician Symbol: All operations marked with this symbol are to
be performed by qualified maintenance personnel only.
DO NOT TOUCH: Touching some parts of the instrument without
protection or proper tools could result in damage to the part(s)
and/or the instrument.
Electrical Ground: This symbol inside the instrument marks the
central safety grounding point for the instrument.

CAUTION - General Safety Hazard
This instrument should only be used for the purpose and in the manner
described in this manual. If you use this instrument in a manner other
than that for which it was intended, unpredictable behavior could ensue
with possible hazardous consequences.
NEVER use any gas analyzer to sample combustible gas(es).
Note

06864B DCN6314

Technical Assistance regarding the use and maintenance of the
T300/T300M or any other Teledyne API product can be obtained by
contacting Teledyne API’s Customer Service Department:
Phone: 800-324-5190
Email: api-customerservice@teledyne.com
or by accessing various service options on our website at
7http://www.teledyne-api.com/.

iii

Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer

CONSIGNES DE SÉCURITÉ
Des consignes de sécurité importantes sont fournies tout au long du présent manuel dans le but d’éviter des
blessures corporelles ou d’endommager les instruments. Veuillez lire attentivement ces consignes. Chaque
consigne de sécurité est représentée par un pictogramme d’alerte de sécurité; ces pictogrammes se retrouvent
dans ce manuel et à l’intérieur des instruments. Les symboles correspondent aux consignes suivantes :

AVERTISSEMENT : Risque de choc électrique

DANGER : Oxydant puissant
AVERTISSEMENT GÉNÉRAL / MISE EN GARDE :
complémentaire pour des renseignements spécifiques

Lire

consigne

MISE EN GARDE : Surface chaude
Ne pas toucher : Toucher à certaines parties de l’instrument sans protection ou
sans les outils appropriés pourrait entraîner des dommages aux pièces ou à
l’instrument.
Pictogramme « technicien » : Toutes les opérations portant ce symbole doivent
être effectuées uniquement par du personnel de maintenance qualifié.
Mise à la terre : Ce symbole à l’intérieur de l’instrument détermine le point central
de la mise à la terre sécuritaire de l’instrument.

MISE EN GARDE
Cet instrument doit être utilisé aux fins décrites et de la manière décrite
dans ce manuel. Si vous utilisez cet instrument d’une autre manière que
celle pour laquelle il a été prévu, l’instrument pourrait se comporter de
façon imprévisible et entraîner des conséquences dangereuses.
NE JAMAIS utiliser un analyseur de gaz pour échantillonner des gaz
combustibles!

06864B DCN6314

WARRANTY
WARRANTY POLICY (02024D)

Teledyne Advanced Pollution Instrumentation (TAPI), a business unit of Teledyne
Instruments, Inc., warrants its products as follows:
Prior to shipment, TAPI equipment is thoroughly inspected and tested. Should
equipment failure occur, TAPI assures its customers that prompt service and support
will be available.
COVERAGE

After the warranty period and throughout the equipment lifetime, TAPI stands ready to
provide on-site or in-plant service at reasonable rates similar to those of other
manufacturers in the industry.
All maintenance and the first level of field
troubleshooting are to be performed by the customer.
NON-TAPI MANUFACTURED EQUIPMENT

Equipment provided but not manufactured by TAPI is warranted and will be repaired to
the extent and according to the current terms and conditions of the respective equipment
manufacturer’s warranty.
GENERAL

During the warranty period, TAPI warrants each Product manufactured by TAPI to be
free from defects in material and workmanship under normal use and service.
Expendable parts are excluded.
If a Product fails to conform to its specifications within the warranty period, TAPI shall
correct such defect by, in TAPI's discretion, repairing or replacing such defective
Product or refunding the purchase price of such Product.
The warranties set forth in this section shall be of no force or effect with respect to any
Product: (i) that has been altered or subjected to misuse, negligence or accident, or (ii)
that has been used in any manner other than in accordance with the instruction provided
by TAPI, or (iii) not properly maintained.
THE WARRANTIES SET FORTH IN THIS SECTION AND THE REMEDIES
THEREFORE ARE EXCLUSIVE AND IN LIEU OF ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR OTHER
WARRANTY OF QUALITY, WHETHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED. THE REMEDIES
SET FORTH IN THIS SECTION ARE THE EXCLUSIVE REMEDIES FOR BREACH OF
ANY WARRANTY CONTAINED HEREIN. API SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY
INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF OR RELATED TO
THIS AGREEMENT OF TAPI'S PERFORMANCE HEREUNDER, WHETHER FOR
BREACH OF WARRANTY OR OTHERWISE.
TERMS AND CONDITIONS

All units or components returned to Teledyne API should be properly packed for
handling and returned freight prepaid to the nearest designated Service Center. After the
repair, the equipment will be returned, freight prepaid.

ATTENTION

AVOID WARRANTY INVALIDATION
Failure to comply with proper anti-Electro-Static Discharge (ESD)
handling and packing instructions and Return Merchandise Authorization
(RMA) procedures when returning parts for repair or calibration may void
your warranty. For anti-ESD handling and packing instructions please
refer to “Packing Components for Return to Teledyne API’s Customer
Service” in the Primer on Electro-Static Discharge section of this manual,
and for RMA procedures please refer to our Website at http://www.teledyneapi.com under Customer Support > Return Authorization.

06864B DCN6314

Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer

This page intentionally left blank.

06864B DCN6314

ABOUT THIS MANUAL
Presented here is information regarding the documents that are included with this
manual (Structure), its history of release and revisions (Revision History), how the
content is organized (Organization), a description of other information related to this
manual (Related Information), and the conventions used to present the information in
this manual (Conventions Used).
STRUCTURE
This T300 manual, PN 06864, is comprised of multiple documents, assembled in PDF
format, as listed below.
Part No.

Rev

Name/Description

06864

Operation Manual, T300 Carbon Monoxide Analyzer

04906

Appendix A, Menu Trees and related software documentation

06849

Spare Parts List (in Appendix B of this manual)

04301

Recommended Spares Stocking Levels List/T300 (in Appendix B of this manual)

04834

Recommended Spares Stocking Levels List/T300M (in Appendix B of this manual)

04305

Appendix C, Repair Form

06912

Interconnect Diagram (in Appendix D of this manual)

069120100

Interconnect Table (in Appendix D of this manual)
Schematics (in Appendix Dof this manual)

03297

PCA, 03296, IR Photodetector Preamp and Sync Demodulator

03632

PCA, 03631, 0-20mA driver

04354

PCA, 04003, Pressure/Flow Transducer Interface

05033

PCA, 05032, Opto-Interrupter

04136

PCA, 04135, Relay Board

04468

PCA, 04467, Analog Output Isolator

05803

SCH, PCA 05802, MOTHERBOARD, GEN-5

06698

SCH, PCA 06670, INTRFC, LCD TCH SCRN,

06882

SCH, LVDS TRANSMITTER BOARD

06731

SCH, AUX-I/O BOARD

Note

06864B DCN6314

We recommend that this manual be read in its entirety before any attempt
is made to operate the instrument.

vii

Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer

ORGANIZATION
This manual is divided among three main parts and a collection of appendices at the end.
Part I contains introductory information that includes an overview of the analyzer,
descriptions of the available options, specifications, installation and connection
instructions, and the initial calibration and functional checks. The last two sections
contain Frequently Asked Questions (FAQs) followed by a glossary, and a description
of available options.
Part II comprises the operating instructions, which include basic, advanced and remote
operation, calibration, diagnostics, testing, validating and verifying, and ends with
specifics of calibrating for use in EPA monitoring.
Part III provides detailed technical information, such as theory of operation,
maintenance, and troubleshooting and repair. It also contains a section that provides
important information about electro-static discharge and avoiding its consequences.
The appendices at the end of this manual provide support information such as, versionspecific software documentation, lists of spare parts and recommended stocking levels,
and schematics.
CONVENTIONS USED
In addition to the safety symbols as presented in the Important Safety Information page,
this manual provides special notices related to the safety and effective use of the
analyzer and other pertinent information.
Special Notices appear as follows:

ATTENTION

COULD DAMAGE INSTRUMENT AND VOID WARRANTY
This special notice provides information to avoid damage to your
instrument and possibly invalidate the warranty.

IMPORTANT

IMPACT ON READINGS OR DATA
Could either affect accuracy of instrument readings or cause loss of data.

Note

Pertinent information associated with the proper care, operation or
maintenance of the analyzer or its parts.

viii

06864B DCN6314

REVISION HISTORY
This section provides information regarding changes to this manual.
2012, February 14, T300/300M Manual, PN06864 Rev B
Document
Top Assy Manual

PN
06864

Rev DCN
B

6314

Change Summary
Administrative changes: restructure to new T-Series format:
 Consolidated Options sections and restructured into tabular
format; moved to Section 1.
 Corrected Safety Compliance (was: IEC 61010-1:90 + A1:92 +
A2:95; is: IEC 61010-1:2001).
 Added North American Certification statement.
nd
 Section 2.1 – added 2
gas sensor options specs.
 Replaced Fig 3-5 with correct internal layout illustration (was
short box; is long box).
 Move pneumatic illustrations from Options section to
pneumatic setup section.
 Gathered communications setup and operation into one group
(Section 6).
 Renamed Part III from “Technical Information” to “Maintenance
and Service”.
 Renamed “Troubleshooting and Repair” to “Troubleshooting
and Service”.
 Renamed section “Theory of Operation” to “Principles of
Operation”.
 Moved “Principles of Operation” section after “Maintenance”
and “Troubleshooting and Service” sections.
 Moved FAQs to end of Troubleshooting/Service section
 Moved Glossary to end of manual before Index.
Technical changes:
 Status Outputs: added connection line for +5V to external
device (Fig 3-11) and corrected DC Power pin description
(Table 3-6, deleted “combined rating w/Control Output if used”).
 Section 3.3.1.8: modify Multidrop connection section to clarify
insructions and add detail.
 Correct COM1 default baud rate value to 115,200 (was:
19,200)
 Added USB driver download instructions (Section 6.6)
 Replaced Appendix D Wiring List Rev A with Rev B.
 Replaced Appendix D Wiring Diagram Rev A with Rev B.
 Swapped Appendix D Prss/Flow Transducer was 04003
(assembly dwg) is 04354 (elec. schematic).
 Replaced Appendix D Schematic 06731 Rev A with Rev B.

2010, September 14, T300 Manual, PN06864 Rev A, DCN 5840 Initial Release

06864B DCN6314

Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer

This page intentionally left blank.

06864B DCN6314

TABLE OF CONTENTS
PART I GENERAL INFORMATION ....................................................................................... 23
1. INTRODUCTION, FEATURES AND OPTIONS .................................................................. 25
1.1. T300 Family Overview .................................................................................................................................25
1.2. Features .......................................................................................................................................................26
1.3. T300/T300M Documentation .......................................................................................................................26
1.4. Options.........................................................................................................................................................27

2. SPECIFICATIONS AND APPROVALS............................................................................... 31
2.1. Specifications...............................................................................................................................................31
2.2. EPA Equivalency Designation .....................................................................................................................33
2.3. Approvals and Certifications ........................................................................................................................34
2.3.1. Safety .....................................................................................................................................................34
2.3.2. EmC .......................................................................................................................................................34
2.3.3. Other Type Certifications .......................................................................................................................34

3. GETTING STARTED ........................................................................................................... 35
3.1. Unpacking the T300/T300M Analyzer .........................................................................................................35
3.1.1. Ventilation Clearance.............................................................................................................................36
3.2. Instrument Layout ........................................................................................................................................37
3.2.1. Front Panel ............................................................................................................................................37
3.2.2. Rear panel .............................................................................................................................................41
3.2.3. T300/T300M Analyzer Layout................................................................................................................43
3.3. Connections and Setup................................................................................................................................46
3.3.1. Electrical Connections ...........................................................................................................................46
3.3.1.1. Connecting Power ..........................................................................................................................46
3.3.1.2. Connecting Analog Inputs (Option) ................................................................................................47
3.3.1.3. Connecting Analog Outputs ...........................................................................................................47
3.3.1.4. Current Loop Analog Outputs (Option 41) Setup ..........................................................................48
3.3.1.5. Connecting the Status Outputs ......................................................................................................50
3.3.1.6. Connecting the Control Inputs........................................................................................................51
3.3.1.7. Connecting the Concentration Alarm Relay (Option 61) ................................................................53
3.3.1.8. Connecting the Communication Interfaces ....................................................................................54
3.3.2. Pneumatic Connections .........................................................................................................................61
3.3.2.1. Pneumatic Connections for Basic Configuration............................................................................63
3.3.2.2. Pneumatic Layout for Basic configuration ......................................................................................65
3.3.2.3. Pneumatic Connections for Ambient Zero/Ambient Span Valve Option ........................................65
3.3.2.4. Pneumatic Layout for Ambient Zero/Ambient Span Valve Option .................................................67
3.3.2.5. Pneumatic Connections for Ambient Zero/Pressurized Span ........................................................67
3.3.2.6. Pneumatic Layout for Ambient Zero/Pressurized Span Option......................................................69
3.3.2.7. Pneumatic Connections for Zero Scrubber/Pressurized Span Option...........................................70
3.3.2.8. Pneumatic Layout for Zero Scrubber/Pressurized Span Option ....................................................71
3.3.2.9. Pneumatic Connections for Zero Scrubber/Ambient Span Option.................................................72
3.3.2.10. Pneumatic Layout for Zero scrubber/ Ambient Span OPTion ......................................................74
3.3.2.11. Calibration Gases .........................................................................................................................74
3.4. Startup, Functional Checks, and Initial Calibration ......................................................................................76
3.4.1. Startup....................................................................................................................................................76
3.4.2. Warning Messages ................................................................................................................................76
3.4.3. Functional Checks .................................................................................................................................78
3.4.4. Initial Calibration ....................................................................................................................................79
3.4.4.1. Interferents for CO Measurements.................................................................................................80
3.4.4.2. Initial Calibration Procedure ...........................................................................................................80
3.4.4.3. O2 Sensor Calibration Procedure ..................................................................................................85
3.4.4.4. CO2 Sensor Calibration Procedure................................................................................................85

06864B DCN6314

Table of Contents

Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer

PART II OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS .................................................................................. 87
4. OVERVIEW OF OPERATING MODES ............................................................................... 89
4.1. Sample Mode...............................................................................................................................................90
4.1.1. Test Functions .......................................................................................................................................90
4.1.2. Warning Messages ................................................................................................................................93
4.2. Calibration Mode..........................................................................................................................................94
4.3. Setup MODE................................................................................................................................................95
4.3.1. Password Security .................................................................................................................................95
4.3.2. Primary Setup Menu ..............................................................................................................................95
4.3.3. The areas accessible under the Setup mode are shown in Table 4-4 and Secondary Setup Menu
(SETUP>MORE)..............................................................................................................................................95
4.3.4. Secondary Setup Menu (SETUP>MORE).............................................................................................96

5. SETUP MENU 97

5.1. SETUP  CFG: Configuration Information .................................................................................................97
5.2. SETUP  ACAL: Automatic Calibration......................................................................................................98
5.3. SETUP DAS: Internal Data Acquisition System.......................................................................................98
5.4. SETUP  RNGE: Analog Output Reporting Range Configuration .............................................................98
5.4.1. Analog Output Ranges for CO Concentration .......................................................................................98
5.4.2. Physical Range vs Analog Output Reporting Ranges ........................................................................ 100
5.4.3. Reporting Range Modes: Single, Dual, Auto Ranges ........................................................................ 100
5.4.3.1. SINGLE Range Mode (SNGL) .................................................................................................... 102
5.4.3.2. DUAL Range Mode (DUAL) ........................................................................................................ 103
5.4.3.3. AUTO Range Mode (AUTO) ....................................................................................................... 105
5.4.4. Range Units ........................................................................................................................................ 107
5.4.5. Dilution Ratio (Option)......................................................................................................................... 108
5.5. SETUP  PASS: Password Protection.................................................................................................... 109
5.6. SETUP  CLK: Setting the Internal Time-of-Day Clock and Adjusting Speed........................................ 111
5.6.1.1. Setting the Internal Clock’s Time and Day .................................................................................. 111
5.6.1.2. Adjusting the Internal Clock’s Speed........................................................................................... 111
5.7. SETUP Comm: Communications Ports ................................................................................................ 113
5.7.1. ID (Machine Identification) .................................................................................................................. 113
5.7.2. INET (Ethernet)................................................................................................................................... 113
5.7.3. COM1 and COM2 (Mode, Baud Rate and Test Port)......................................................................... 113
5.8. SETUP VARS: Variables Setup and Definition ..................................................................................... 114
5.9. SETUP Diag: Diagnostics Functions..................................................................................................... 116
5.9.1. Signal I/O ............................................................................................................................................ 118
5.9.2. Analog Output ..................................................................................................................................... 119
5.9.3. Analog I/O Configuration..................................................................................................................... 120
5.9.3.1. Analog Output Voltage / Current Range Selection...................................................................... 122
5.9.3.2. Analog Output Calibration ........................................................................................................... 124
5.9.3.3. Enabling or Disabling the AutoCal for an Individual Analog Output............................................ 124
5.9.3.4. Automatic Calibration of the Analog Outputs .............................................................................. 126
5.9.3.5. Individual Calibration of the Analog Outputs ............................................................................... 127
5.9.3.6. Manual Calibration of the Analog Outputs Configured for Voltage Ranges................................ 128
5.9.3.7. Manual Adjustment of Current Loop Output Span and Offset .................................................... 130
5.9.3.8. Turning an Analog Output Over-Range Feature ON/OFF .......................................................... 133
5.9.3.9. Adding a Recorder Offset to an Analog Output........................................................................... 134
5.9.3.10. AIN Calibration .......................................................................................................................... 135
5.9.3.11. Analog Inputs (XIN1…XIN8) Option Configuration ................................................................... 136
5.9.4. Electrical Test ..................................................................................................................................... 137
5.9.5. Dark Calibration .................................................................................................................................. 137
5.9.6. Pressure Calibration ........................................................................................................................... 137
5.9.7. Flow Calibration .................................................................................................................................. 138
5.9.8. Test Chan Output................................................................................................................................ 138
5.9.8.1. Selecting a Test Channel Function for Output A4....................................................................... 138

xii

06864B DCN6314

Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer

Table of Contents

5.10. SETUP MORE  ALRM (Option): Using the Gas Concentration Alarms.......................................... 140
5.10.1. Setting the T300 Concentration Alarm Limits ................................................................................... 141

6. COMMUNICATIONS SETUP AND OPERATION ............................................................. 143
6.1. Data Terminal/Communication Equipment (DTE DCE)............................................................................ 143
6.2. Communication Modes, Baud Rate and Port Testing .................................................................................. 143
6.2.1. Communication Modes ....................................................................................................................... 144
6.2.2. COM Port Baud Rate .......................................................................................................................... 146
6.2.3. Com Port Testing ................................................................................................................................ 147
6.3. RS-232 ...................................................................................................................................................... 147
6.4. RS-485 (Option)........................................................................................................................................ 148
6.5. Ethernet..................................................................................................................................................... 148
6.5.1. Configuring Ethernet Communication Manually (Static IP Address) .................................................. 149
6.5.2. Configuring Ethernet Communication Using Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) ............ 151
6.5.3. Changing the Analyzer’s HOSTNAME ............................................................................................... 152
6.6. USB Port (Option) for Remote Access ..................................................................................................... 153
6.7. Communications Protocols ....................................................................................................................... 155
6.7.1. MODBUS ............................................................................................................................................ 155
6.7.2. Hessen ................................................................................................................................................ 156
6.7.2.1. Hessen COMM Port Configuration.............................................................................................. 157
6.7.2.2. Activating Hessen Protocol ......................................................................................................... 159
6.7.2.3. Selecting a Hessen Protocol Type .............................................................................................. 160
6.7.2.4. Setting The Hessen Protocol Response Mode ........................................................................... 161
6.7.3. Hessen Protocol Gas List Entries ....................................................................................................... 162
6.7.3.1. Hessen Protocol Gas ID .............................................................................................................. 162
6.7.3.2. Editing or Adding HESSEN Gas List Entries............................................................................... 163
6.7.3.3. Deleting HESSEN Gas List Entries ............................................................................................. 164
6.7.3.4. Setting Hessen Protocol Status Flags......................................................................................... 165
6.7.3.5. Instrument ID ............................................................................................................................... 166

7. DATA ACQUISITION SYSTEM (DAS) AND APICOM...................................................... 167
7.1. DAS Structure ........................................................................................................................................... 168
7.1.1. DAS Data Channels............................................................................................................................ 169
7.1.2. Default DAS Channels ........................................................................................................................ 169
7.1.3. Viewing DAS Channels and Individual Records ................................................................................. 172
7.1.4. Editing DAS Channels ........................................................................................................................ 173
7.1.4.1. Editing DAS Data Channel Names.............................................................................................. 174
7.1.5. Editing DAS Triggering Events ........................................................................................................... 175
7.1.6. Editing DAS Parameters ..................................................................................................................... 176
7.1.7. Sample Period and Report Period ...................................................................................................... 178
7.1.8. Number of Records............................................................................................................................. 181
7.1.9. RS-232 Report Function ..................................................................................................................... 183
7.1.9.1. The Compact Report Feature...................................................................................................... 183
7.1.9.2. The Starting Date Feature........................................................................................................... 184
7.1.10. Disabling/Enabling Data Channels ................................................................................................... 184
7.1.11. HOLDOFF Feature ........................................................................................................................... 185
7.2. Remote DAS Configuration....................................................................................................................... 186
7.2.1. DAS Configuration via APICOM ......................................................................................................... 186
7.2.2. DAS Configuration Using Terminal Emulation Programs ................................................................... 188

8. REMOTE OPERATION ..................................................................................................... 189
8.1. Computer Mode ........................................................................................................................................ 189
8.1.1. Remote Control via APICOM .............................................................................................................. 189
8.2. Interactive Mode ....................................................................................................................................... 190
8.2.1. Remote Control via a Terminal Emulation Program ........................................................................... 190
8.2.1.1. Help Commands in Interactive Mode .......................................................................................... 190
8.2.1.2. Command Syntax ........................................................................................................................ 190
8.2.1.3. Data Types .................................................................................................................................. 191

06864B DCN6314

xiii

Table of Contents

Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer

8.2.1.4. Status Reporting.......................................................................................................................... 192
8.2.1.5. General Message Format............................................................................................................ 192
8.3. Remote Access by Modem ....................................................................................................................... 192
8.4. Password Security for Serial Remote Communications ........................................................................... 195

9. CALIBRATION PROCEDURES........................................................................................ 197
9.1. Calibration Preparations ........................................................................................................................... 197
9.1.1. Required Equipment, Supplies, and Expendables ............................................................................. 197
9.1.1.1. Zero Air ........................................................................................................................................ 198
9.1.1.2. Span Gas..................................................................................................................................... 198
9.1.1.3. Calibration Gas Standards and Traceability................................................................................ 198
9.1.2. Data Recording Devices ..................................................................................................................... 199
9.2. Manual Calibration .................................................................................................................................... 199
9.2.1. Setup for Basic Calibration Checks and Calibration........................................................................... 200
9.2.2. Performing a Basic Manual Calibration Check ................................................................................... 201
9.2.3. Performing a Basic Manual Calibration .............................................................................................. 202
9.2.3.1. Setting the Expected Span Gas Concentration........................................................................... 202
9.2.3.2. Zero/Span Point Calibration Procedure....................................................................................... 204
9.3. Manual Calibration with Zero/Span Valves............................................................................................... 205
9.3.1. Setup for Calibration Using Valve Options ......................................................................................... 205
9.3.2. Manual Calibration Checks with Valve Options Installed ................................................................... 208
9.3.3. Manual Calibration Using Valve Options ............................................................................................ 209
9.3.3.1. Setting the Expected Span Gas Concentration........................................................................... 209
9.3.3.2. Zero/Span Point Calibration Procedure....................................................................................... 210
9.3.3.3. Use of Zero/Span Valve with Remote Contact Closure .............................................................. 212
9.4. Automatic Zero/Span Cal/Check (AutoCal) .............................................................................................. 212
9.4.1. SETUP  ACAL: Programming and AUTO CAL Sequence.............................................................. 215
9.4.1.1. AutoCal with Auto or Dual Reporting Ranges Modes Selected .................................................. 217
9.5. CO Calibration Quality .............................................................................................................................. 218
9.6. Calibration of the T300/T300M’s Electronic Subsystems ......................................................................... 219
9.6.1. Dark Calibration Test .......................................................................................................................... 219
9.6.2. Pressure Calibration ........................................................................................................................... 220
9.6.3. Flow Calibration .................................................................................................................................. 222
9.7. Calibration of Optional Sensors ................................................................................................................ 223
9.7.1. O2 Sensor Calibration ......................................................................................................................... 223
9.7.1.1. O2 Pneumatics Connections....................................................................................................... 223
9.7.1.2. Set O2 Span Gas Concentration................................................................................................. 224
9.7.1.3. Activate O2 Sensor Stability Function ......................................................................................... 225
9.7.1.4. O2 ZERO/SPAN CALIBRATION................................................................................................. 226
9.7.2. CO2 Sensor Calibration Procedure ..................................................................................................... 227
9.7.2.1. CO2 Pneumatics Connections .................................................................................................... 227
9.7.2.2. Set CO2 Span Gas Concentration: ............................................................................................. 228
9.7.2.3. Activate CO2 Sensor Stability Function ...................................................................................... 229
9.7.2.4. CO2 Zero/Span Calibration ......................................................................................................... 230

10. EPA CALIBRATION PROTOCOL .................................................................................. 231
10.1. Calibration Requirements ....................................................................................................................... 231
10.1.1. Calibration of Equipment - General Guidelines ................................................................................ 231
10.1.2. Calibration Equipment, Supplies, and Expendables......................................................................... 232
10.1.2.1. Data Recording Device.............................................................................................................. 232
10.1.2.2. Spare Parts and Expendable Supplies...................................................................................... 232
10.1.3. Recommended Standards for Establishing Traceability................................................................... 233
10.1.4. Calibration Frequency....................................................................................................................... 234
10.1.5. Level 1 Calibrations versus Level 2 Checks ..................................................................................... 234
10.2. ZERO and SPAN Checks....................................................................................................................... 235
10.2.1. Zero/Span Check Procedures .......................................................................................................... 236
10.2.2. Precision Check ................................................................................................................................ 236

xiv

06864B DCN6314

Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer

Table of Contents

10.3. Precisions Calibration ............................................................................................................................. 237
10.3.1. Precision Calibration Procedures ..................................................................................................... 237
10.4. Auditing Procedure ................................................................................................................................. 237
10.4.1. Calibration Audit................................................................................................................................ 237
10.4.2. Data Reduction Audit ........................................................................................................................ 238
10.4.3. System Audit/Validation .................................................................................................................... 238
10.5. Dynamic Multipoint Calibration Procedure ............................................................................................. 238
10.5.1. Linearity test...................................................................................................................................... 238
10.6. References ............................................................................................................................................. 240

PART III TECHNICAL INFORMATION ................................................................................ 241
11. MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE & PROCEDURES............................................................ 245
11.1. Maintenance Schedule ........................................................................................................................... 245
11.2. Predicting Failures Using the Test Functions......................................................................................... 249
11.3. Maintenance Procedures........................................................................................................................ 250
11.3.1. Replacing the Sample Particulate Filter............................................................................................ 250
11.3.2. Rebuilding the Sample Pump ........................................................................................................... 251
11.3.3. Performing Leak Checks................................................................................................................... 251
11.3.3.1. Vacuum Leak Check and Pump Check..................................................................................... 251
11.3.3.2. Pressure Leak Check ................................................................................................................ 251
11.3.4. Performing a Sample Flow Check .................................................................................................... 252
11.3.5. Cleaning the Optical Bench .............................................................................................................. 252
11.3.6. Cleaning Exterior Surfaces of the T300/T300M................................................................................ 252

12. TROUBLESHOOTING AND SERVICE ........................................................................... 253
12.1. General Troubleshooting ........................................................................................................................ 253
12.1.1. Fault Diagnosis with WARNING Messages...................................................................................... 254
12.1.2. Fault Diagnosis with TEST Functions............................................................................................... 258
12.1.3. the Diagnostic Signal I/O Function ................................................................................................... 261
12.1.4. Status LEDs ...................................................................................................................................... 263
12.1.4.1. Motherboard Status Indicator (Watchdog) ................................................................................ 263
12.1.4.2. Sync Demodulator Status LEDs................................................................................................ 264
12.1.4.3. Relay Board Status LEDs.......................................................................................................... 265
12.2. Gas Flow Problems ................................................................................................................................ 267
12.2.1. T300/T300M Internal Gas Flow Diagrams........................................................................................ 268
12.2.2. Typical Sample Gas Flow Problems................................................................................................. 271
12.2.2.1. Flow is Zero ............................................................................................................................... 271
12.2.2.2. Low Flow ................................................................................................................................... 272
12.2.2.3. High Flow................................................................................................................................... 272
12.2.2.4. Displayed Flow = “Warnings” .................................................................................................... 273
12.2.2.5. Actual Flow Does Not Match Displayed Flow ........................................................................... 273
12.2.2.6. Sample Pump ............................................................................................................................ 273
12.3. Calibration Problems .............................................................................................................................. 273
12.3.1. Miscalibrated..................................................................................................................................... 273
12.3.2. Non-Repeatable Zero and Span....................................................................................................... 274
12.3.3. Inability to Span – No SPAN Button (CALS)..................................................................................... 274
12.3.4. Inability to Zero – No ZERO Button (CALZ)...................................................................................... 274
12.4. Other Performance Problems................................................................................................................. 275
12.4.1. Temperature Problems ..................................................................................................................... 275
12.4.1.1. Box or Sample Temperature ..................................................................................................... 275
12.4.1.2. Bench Temperature................................................................................................................... 275
12.4.1.3. GFC Wheel Temperature .......................................................................................................... 276
12.4.1.4. IR Photo-Detector TEC Temperature........................................................................................ 277
12.4.2. Excessive Noise................................................................................................................................ 277
12.5. Subsystem Checkout.............................................................................................................................. 278
12.5.1. AC Mains Configuration .................................................................................................................... 278
12.5.2. DC Power Supply.............................................................................................................................. 279

06864B DCN6314

Table of Contents

Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer

12.5.3. I2C Bus .............................................................................................................................................. 279
12.5.4. Touchscreen Interface ...................................................................................................................... 280
12.5.5. LCD Display Module ......................................................................................................................... 280
12.5.6. Relay Board ...................................................................................................................................... 280
12.5.7. Sensor Assembly .............................................................................................................................. 281
12.5.7.1. Sync/Demodulator Assembly .................................................................................................... 281
12.5.7.2. Electrical Test ............................................................................................................................ 281
12.5.7.3. Opto Pickup Assembly .............................................................................................................. 282
12.5.7.4. GFC Wheel Drive ...................................................................................................................... 282
12.5.7.5. IR Source................................................................................................................................... 282
12.5.7.6. Pressure/Flow Sensor Assembly .............................................................................................. 283
12.5.8. Motherboard...................................................................................................................................... 284
12.5.8.1. A/D Functions ............................................................................................................................ 284
12.5.8.2. Test Channel / Analog Outputs Voltage .................................................................................... 284
12.5.8.3. Analog Outputs: Current Loop................................................................................................... 285
12.5.8.4. Status Outputs........................................................................................................................... 286
12.5.8.5. Control Inputs – Remote Zero, Span......................................................................................... 286
12.5.9. CPU................................................................................................................................................... 287
12.5.10. RS-232 Communications ................................................................................................................ 287
12.5.10.1. General RS-232 Troubleshooting............................................................................................ 287
12.5.10.2. Troubleshooting Analyzer/Modem or Terminal Operation ...................................................... 288
12.5.11. The Optional CO2 Sensor ............................................................................................................... 288
12.6. Repair Procedures.................................................................................................................................. 289
12.6.1. Repairing Sample Flow Control Assembly ....................................................................................... 289
12.6.2. Removing/Replacing the GFC Wheel............................................................................................... 290
12.6.3. Checking and Adjusting the Sync/Demodulator, Circuit Gain (CO MEAS) ..................................... 292
12.6.3.1. Checking the Sync/Demodulator Circuit Gain........................................................................... 292
12.6.3.2. Adjusting the Sync/Demodulator, Circuit Gain .......................................................................... 293
12.6.4. Disk-On-Module Replacement.......................................................................................................... 294
12.7. Frequently Asked Questions .................................................................................................................. 295
12.8. Technical Assistance.............................................................................................................................. 296

13. THEORY OF OPERATION.............................................................................................. 297
13.1. Measurement Method............................................................................................................................. 297
13.1.1. Beer’s Law ........................................................................................................................................ 297
13.2. Measurement Fundamentals.................................................................................................................. 298
13.2.1. Gas Filter Correlation........................................................................................................................ 299
13.2.1.1. The GFC Wheel......................................................................................................................... 299
13.2.1.2. The Measure Reference Ratio .................................................................................................. 300
13.2.1.3. Summary Interference Rejection............................................................................................... 303
13.3. Flow Rate Control ................................................................................................................................... 304
13.3.1.1. Critical Flow Orifice.................................................................................................................... 305
13.3.2. Particulate Filter ................................................................................................................................ 306
13.3.3. Pneumatic Sensors........................................................................................................................... 306
13.3.3.1. Sample Pressure Sensor .......................................................................................................... 306
13.3.3.2. Sample Flow Sensor ................................................................................................................. 306
13.4. Electronic Operation ............................................................................................................................... 306
13.4.1. CPU................................................................................................................................................... 309
13.4.1.1. Disk-On-Module (DOM)............................................................................................................. 309
13.4.1.2. Flash Chip ................................................................................................................................. 309
13.4.2. Optical Bench & GFC Wheel ............................................................................................................ 310
13.4.2.1. Temperature Control ................................................................................................................. 310
13.4.2.2. IR Source................................................................................................................................... 310
13.4.2.3. GFC Wheel................................................................................................................................ 310
13.4.2.4. IR Photo-Detector...................................................................................................................... 312
13.4.3. Synchronous Demodulator (Sync/Demod) Assembly ...................................................................... 312
13.4.3.1. Signal Synchronization and Demodulation ............................................................................... 313

xvi

06864B DCN6314

Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer

Table of Contents

13.4.3.2. Sync/Demod Status LEDs......................................................................................................... 314
13.4.3.3. Photo-Detector Temperature Control ........................................................................................ 315
13.4.3.4. Dark Calibration Switch ............................................................................................................. 315
13.4.3.5. Electric Test Switch ................................................................................................................... 315
13.4.4. Relay Board ...................................................................................................................................... 315
13.4.4.1. Heater Control ........................................................................................................................... 315
13.4.4.2. GFC Wheel Motor Control......................................................................................................... 315
13.4.4.3. Zero/Span Valve Options .......................................................................................................... 316
13.4.4.4. IR Source................................................................................................................................... 316
13.4.4.5. Status LEDs............................................................................................................................... 317
13.4.4.6. I2C Watch Dog Circuitry............................................................................................................ 317
13.4.5. MotherBoard ..................................................................................................................................... 318
13.4.5.1. A to D Conversion ..................................................................................................................... 318
13.4.5.2. Sensor Inputs ............................................................................................................................ 318
13.4.5.3. Thermistor Interface .................................................................................................................. 319
13.4.5.4. Analog Outputs.......................................................................................................................... 319
13.4.5.5. Internal Digital I/O...................................................................................................................... 319
13.4.5.6. External Digital I/O..................................................................................................................... 319
13.4.6. I2C Data Bus ..................................................................................................................................... 320
13.4.7. Power Supply/ Circuit Breaker.......................................................................................................... 320
13.4.8. Front Panel Touchscreen/Display Interface...................................................................................... 322
13.4.8.1. LVDS Transmitter Board ........................................................................................................... 322
13.4.8.2. Front Panel Touchscreen/Display Interface PCA...................................................................... 322
13.5. Software Operation................................................................................................................................. 323
13.5.1. Adaptive Filter ................................................................................................................................... 323
13.5.2. Calibration - Slope and Offset........................................................................................................... 324
13.5.3. Measurement Algorithm.................................................................................................................... 324
13.5.4. Temperature and Pressure Compensation....................................................................................... 324
13.5.5. Internal Data Acquisition System (DAS) ........................................................................................... 324

14. A PRIMER ON ELECTRO-STATIC DISCHARGE .......................................................... 325
14.1. How Static Charges are Created............................................................................................................ 325
14.2. How Electro-Static Charges Cause Damage ......................................................................................... 326
14.3. Common Myths About ESD Damage ..................................................................................................... 327
14.4. Basic Principles of Static Control............................................................................................................ 328
14.4.1. General Rules ................................................................................................................................... 328
14.4.2. Basic anti-ESD Procedures for Analyzer Repair and Maintenance ................................................. 329
14.4.2.1. Working at the Instrument Rack ................................................................................................ 329
14.4.2.2. Working at an Anti-ESD Work Bench........................................................................................ 330
14.4.2.3. Transferring Components from Rack to Bench and Back......................................................... 330
14.4.2.4. Opening Shipments from Teledyne API’ Customer Service ..................................................... 331
14.4.2.5. Packing Components for Return to Teledyne API’s Customer Service .................................... 331

LIST OF APPENDICES
APPENDIX A - VERSION SPECIFIC SOFTWARE DOCUMENTATION
APPENDIX B - T300/T300M SPARE PARTS LIST
APPENDIX C - REPAIR QUESTIONNAIRE - T300
APPENDIX D - SCHEMATICS

06864B DCN6314

xvii

Table of Contents

Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer

LIST OF FIGURES
Figure 3-1:
Figure 3-2:
Figure 3-3:
Figure 3-4:
Figure 3-5:
Figure 3-6:
Figure 3-7:
Figure 3-8:
Figure 3-9:
Figure 3-10:
Figure 3-11:
Figure 3-12:
Figure 3-13:
Figure 3-14:
Figure 3-15:
Figure 3-16:
Figure 3-17:
Figure 3-18:
Figure 3-19:
Figure 3-20:
Figure 3-21:
Figure 3-22:
Figure 3-23:
Figure 3-24:
Figure 3-25:
Figure 3-26:
Figure 3-27:
Figure 3-28:
Figure 3-29:
Figure 4-1:
Figure 4-2:
Figure 4-3:
Figure 5-1:
Figure 5-2:
Figure 5-3:
Figure 5-4:
Figure 5-5:
Figure 5-6:
Figure 5-7.
Figure 6-1:
Figure 6-2:
Figure 6-3:
Figure 6-4:
Figure 6-5 :
Figure 7-1:
Figure 7-2:
Figure 7-3:
Figure 7-4:
Figure 9-1:
Figure 9-2:
Figure 9-3:
Figure 9-4:
Figure 9-5:

xviii

Front Panel Layout.......................................................................................................................37
Display Screen and Touch Control ..............................................................................................38
Display/Touch Control Screen Mapped to Menu Charts .............................................................40
Rear Panel Layout .......................................................................................................................41
Internal Layout – T300 .................................................................................................................43
Internal Layout – T300M ..............................................................................................................44
Optical Bench Layout (shorter bench, T300M, shown) ...............................................................45
Analog In Connector ....................................................................................................................47
Analog Output Connector ............................................................................................................48
Current Loop Option Installed on Motherboard ...........................................................................49
Status Output Connector .............................................................................................................50
Control Input Connector...............................................................................................................52
Concentration Alarm Relay ..........................................................................................................53
Rear Panel Connector Pin-Outs for RS-232 Mode......................................................................56
Default Pin Assignments for CPU COM Port connector (RS-232) ..............................................57
Multidrop/LVDS PCA Seated on CPU .........................................................................................59
RS-232-Multidrop PCA Host/Analyzer Interconnect Diagram .....................................................60
Pneumatic Connections–Basic Configuration–Using Bottled Span Gas.....................................63
Pneumatic Connections–Basic Configuration–Using Gas Dilution Calibrator.............................63
T300/T300M Internal Gas Flow (Basic Configuration) ................................................................65
Pneumatic Connections – Option 50A: Zero/Span Calibration Valves........................................66
Internal Pneumatic Flow OPT 50A – Zero/Span Valves..............................................................67
Pneumatic Connections – Option 50B: Ambient Zero/Pressurized Span Calibration Valves .....68
Internal Pneumatic Flow OPT 50B – Zero/Span/Shutoff Valves .................................................69
Pneumatic Connections – Zero Scrubber/Pressurized Span Calibration Valves (Opt 50E) .......70
Internal Pneumatic Flow OPT 50E – Zero Scrubber/Pressurized Span......................................71
Pneumatic Connections – Option 50H: Zero/Span Calibration Valves .......................................72
Internal Pneumatic Flow OPT 50H – Zero Scrubber/Ambient Span ...........................................74
Zero/Span Calibration Procedure ................................................................................................84
Front Panel Display......................................................................................................................89
Viewing T300/T300M Test Functions ..........................................................................................91
Viewing and Clearing T300/T300M WARNING Messages .........................................................94
Analog Output Connector Pin Out ...............................................................................................99
COMM– Machine ID ................................................................................................................. 113
Accessing the Analog I/O Configuration Submenus................................................................. 121
Setup for Checking / Calibrating DCV Analog Output Signal Levels........................................ 128
Setup for Checking / Calibration Current Output Signal Levels Using an Ammeter................. 130
Alternative Setup Using 250Ω Resistor for Checking Current Output Signal Levels ............... 132
DIAG – Analog Inputs (Option) Configuration Menu ................................................................ 136
COM1[2] – Communication Modes Setup ................................................................................ 145
COMM Port Baud Rate ............................................................................................................. 146
COMM – COM1 Test Port......................................................................................................... 147
COMM – LAN / Internet Manual Configuration......................................................................... 150
COMM – LAN / Internet Automatic Configuration (DHCP) ....................................................... 151
Default DAS Channel Setup ..................................................................................................... 171
APICOM Remote Control Program Interface............................................................................ 186
APICOM User Interface for Configuring the DAS..................................................................... 187
DAS Configuration Through a Terminal Emulation Program.................................................... 188
Pneumatic Connections – Basic Configuration – Using Bottled Span Gas.............................. 200
Pneumatic Connections – Basic Configuration – Using Gas Dilution Calibrator...................... 200
Pneumatic Connections – Option 50A: Ambient Zero/Ambient Span Calibration Valves ........ 205
Pneumatic Connections – Option 50B: Ambient Zero/Pressurized Span Calibration Valves .. 206
Pneumatic Connections – Option 50H: Zero/Span Calibration Valves .................................... 206

06864B DCN6314

Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer

Figure 9-6:
Figure 9-7:
Figure 9-8:
Figure 11-1:
Figure 12-1:
Figure 12-2:
Figure 12-3:
Figure 12-4:
Figure 12-5:
Figure 12-6:
Figure 12-7:
Figure 12-8:
Figure 12-9:
Figure 12-10:
Figure 12-11:
Figure 12-12:
Figure 12-13:
Figure 12-14:
Figure 12-15:
Figure 12-16:
Figure 12-17:
Figure 12-18:
Figure 12-19:
Figure 12-20:
Figure 13-1:
Figure 13-2:
Figure 13-3:
Figure 13-4:
Figure 13-5:
Figure 13-6:
Figure 13-7:
Figure 13-8:
Figure 13-9:
Figure 13-10.
Figure 13-11:
Figure 13-12:
Figure 13-13:
Figure 13-14:
Figure 13-15:
Figure 13-16:
Figure 13-17:
Figure 13-18:
Figure 14-1:
Figure 14-2:

06864B DCN6314

Table of Contents

Pneumatic Connections – Option 50E: Zero/Span Calibration Valves..................................... 207
O2 Sensor Calibration Set Up ................................................................................................... 223
CO2 Sensor Calibration Set Up................................................................................................. 227
Sample Particulate Filter Assembly .......................................................................................... 250
Viewing and Clearing Warning Messages ................................................................................ 256
Example of Signal I/O Function ................................................................................................ 262
CPU Status Indicator ................................................................................................................ 263
Sync/Demod Board Status LED Locations ............................................................................... 264
Relay Board Status LEDs ......................................................................................................... 265
T300/T300M – Basic Internal Gas Flow ................................................................................... 268
Internal Pneumatic Flow OPT 50A – Zero/Span Valves (OPT 50A & 50B) ............................. 268
Internal Pneumatic Flow OPT 50B – Zero/Span/Shutoff Valves .............................................. 269
Internal Pneumatic Flow OPT 50H – Zero/Span Valves with Internal Zero Air Scrubber ........ 269
Internal Pneumatic Flow OPT 50E – Zero/Span/Shutoff w/ Internal Zero Air Scrubber........... 270
T300/T300M – Internal Pneumatics with O2 Sensor Option 65A ............................................. 270
T300/T300M – Internal Pneumatics with CO2 Sensor Option 67A........................................... 271
Location of Diagnostic LEDs onCO2 Sensor PCA .................................................................... 288
Critical Flow Restrictor Assembly/Disassembly........................................................................ 289
Opening the GFC Wheel Housing ............................................................................................ 290
Removing the Opto-Pickup Assembly ...................................................................................... 291
Removing the GFC Wheel Housing.......................................................................................... 291
Removing the GFC Wheel ........................................................................................................ 292
Location of Sync/Demod Housing Mounting Screws................................................................ 293
Location of Sync/Demod Gain Potentiometer........................................................................... 293
Measurement Fundamentals .................................................................................................... 299
GFC Wheel ............................................................................................................................... 299
Measurement Fundamentals with GFC Wheel......................................................................... 300
Affect of CO in the Sample on CO MEAS & CO REF .............................................................. 301
Effects of Interfering Gas on CO MEAS & CO REF ................................................................. 302
Chopped IR Signal.................................................................................................................... 302
Internal Pneumatic Flow – Basic Configuration........................................................................ 304
Flow Control Assembly & Critical Flow Orifice.......................................................................... 305
Electronic Block Diagram.......................................................................................................... 308
CPU Board................................................................................................................................ 309
GFC Light Mask ........................................................................................................................ 311
Segment Sensor and M/R Sensor Output ................................................................................ 312
T300/T300M Sync/Demod Block Diagram ............................................................................... 313
Sample & Hold Timing .............................................................................................................. 314
Location of relay board Status LEDs ........................................................................................ 317
Power Distribution Block Diagram ............................................................................................ 321
Front Panel and Display Interface Block Diagram.................................................................... 322
Basic Software Operation ......................................................................................................... 323
Triboelectric Charging............................................................................................................... 325
Basic anti-ESD Workbench....................................................................................................... 328

xix

Table of Contents

Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer

LIST OF TABLES
Table 1-1:
Table 2-1:
Table 2-2:
Table 2-3:
Table 3-1:
Table 3-2:
Table 3-3:
Table 3-4:
Table 3-5:
Table 3-6:
Table 3-7:
Table 3-8:
Table 3-9:
Table 3-10:
Table 3-11:
Table 3-12:
Table 3-13:
Table 3-14:
Table 4-1:
Table 4-2:
Table 4-3:
Table 4-4:
Table 4-5:
Table 5-1:
Table 5-2:
Table 5-3:
Table 5-4:
Table 5-5:
Table 5-6:
Table 5-7:
Table 5-8:
Table 5-9:
Table 5-10:
Table 6-1:
Table 6-2:
Table 6-3:
Table 6-4:
Table 6-5:
Table 6-6:
Table 7-1:
Table 7-2:
Table 7-3:
Table 8-1:
Table 8-2:
Table 9-1:
Table 9-2:
Table 9-3:
Table 9-4:
Table 9-5:
Table 10-1:
Table 10-2:
Table 10-3:
Table 11-1:
Table 11-2:

Analyzer Options..........................................................................................................................27
T300/T300M Basic Unit Specifications ........................................................................................31
O2 Sensor Option Specifications..................................................................................................32
CO2 Sensor Option Specifications ...............................................................................................33
Ventilation Clearance...................................................................................................................36
Display Screen and Touch Control Description ...........................................................................39
Rear Panel Description ................................................................................................................42
Analog Input Pin Assignments.....................................................................................................47
Analog Output Pin-Outs ...............................................................................................................48
Status Output Signals ..................................................................................................................51
Control Input Signals....................................................................................................................52
Zero/Span Valve Operating States for Option 50A......................................................................67
Zero/Span Valve Operating States for Option 50B......................................................................69
Zero/Span Valve Operating States for Option 51E......................................................................71
Zero/Span Valve Operating States for Option 50H .....................................................................74
NIST-SRM's Available for Traceability of CO Calibration Gases..................................................75
Possible Warning Messages at Start-Up .....................................................................................77
Possible Startup Warning Messages – T300 Analyzers with Options.........................................78
Analyzer Operating Modes ..........................................................................................................90
Test Functions Defined ................................................................................................................92
List of Warning Messages............................................................................................................93
Primary Setup Mode Features and Functions .............................................................................95
Secondary Setup Mode (SETUP>MORE) Features and Functions............................................96
T300 Family Physical Range by Model .................................................................................... 100
Password Levels....................................................................................................................... 109
Variable Names (VARS) ........................................................................................................... 114
Diagnostic Mode (DIAG) Functions .......................................................................................... 116
DIAG - Analog I/O Functions .................................................................................................... 120
Analog Output Voltage Ranges ................................................................................................ 122
Voltage Tolerances for the TEST CHANNEL Calibration......................................................... 128
Current Loop Output Check ...................................................................................................... 132
Test Channels Functions available on the T300/T300M’s Analog Output ............................... 138
CO Concentration Alarm Default Settings ................................................................................ 140
COMM Port Communication Modes ......................................................................................... 144
Ethernet Status Indicators......................................................................................................... 148
LAN/Internet Default Configuration Properties ......................................................................... 149
RS-232 Communication Parameters for Hessen Protocol ....................................................... 157
Teledyne API’s Hessen Protocol Response Modes ................................................................. 161
Default Hessen Status Flag Assignments ................................................................................ 165
Front Panel LED Status Indicators for DAS.............................................................................. 167
DAS Data Channel Properties .................................................................................................. 169
DAS Data Parameter Functions ............................................................................................... 176
Interactive Mode Software Commands..................................................................................... 190
Teledyne API’s Serial I/O Command Types ............................................................................. 191
NIST-SRMs Available for Traceability of CO Calibration Gases ............................................... 198
AUTOCAL Modes ..................................................................................................................... 212
AutoCal Attribute Setup Parameters......................................................................................... 213
Example AutoCal Sequence..................................................................................................... 214
Calibration Data Quality Evaluation .......................................................................................... 218
Matrix for Calibration Equipment & Supplies ............................................................................ 233
Activity Matrix for Quality Assurance Checks ........................................................................... 234
Definition of Level 1 and Level 2 Zero and Span Checks......................................................... 235
T300/T300M Maintenance Schedule........................................................................................ 247
T300/T300M Test Function Record .......................................................................................... 248

06864B DCN6314

Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer

Table 11-3:
Table 12-1:
Table 12-2:
Table 12-3:
Table 12-4:
Table 12-5:
Table 12-6:
Table 12-7:
Table 12-8:
Table 12-9:
Table 12-10:
Table 12-11:
Table 12-12:
Table 13-1:
Table 13-2:
Table 13-3:
Table 13-4:
Table 14-1:
Table 14-2:

06864B DCN6314

Table of Contents

Predictive uses for Test Functions............................................................................................ 249
Warning Messages - Indicated Failures ................................................................................... 257
Test Functions - Indicated Failures........................................................................................... 259
Sync/Demod Board Status Failure Indications ......................................................................... 264
I2C Status LED Failure Indications............................................................................................ 265
Relay Board Status LED Failure Indications............................................................................. 266
DC Power Test Point and Wiring Color Codes ......................................................................... 279
DC Power Supply Acceptable Levels ....................................................................................... 279
Relay Board Control Devices.................................................................................................... 280
Opto Pickup Board Nominal Output Frequencies..................................................................... 282
Analog Output Test Function - Nominal Values Voltage Outputs ............................................ 284
Analog Output Test Function - Nominal Values Voltage Outputs ............................................ 285
Status Outputs Check ............................................................................................................... 286
Absorption Path Lengths for T300 and T300M......................................................................... 298
Sync DEMOD Sample and Hold Circuits.................................................................................. 314
Sync/Demod Status LED Activity.............................................................................................. 314
Relay Board Status LEDs ......................................................................................................... 317
Static Generation Voltages for Typical Activities ...................................................................... 326
Sensitivity of Electronic Devices to Damage by ESD ............................................................... 326

xxi

Table of Contents

Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer

This page intentionally left blank.

xxii

06864B DCN6314

PART I
GENERAL INFORMATION

06864B DCN6314

1. INTRODUCTION, FEATURES AND OPTIONS
This section provides an overview of the Model T300 or T300M Analyzer, its features
and its options, followed by a description of how this user manual is arranged.

1.1. T300 FAMILY OVERVIEW
The family includes the T300 and the T300M Gas Filter Correlation Carbon Monoxide
Analyzer. The T300 family of analyzers is a microprocessor-controlled analyzer that
determines the concentration of carbon monoxide (CO) in a sample gas drawn through
the instrument. It uses a method based on the Beer-Lambert law, an empirical
relationship that relates the absorption of light to the properties of the material through
which the light is traveling over a defined distance. In this case the light is infrared
radiation (IR) traveling through a sample chamber filled with gas bearing a varying
concentration of CO.
The T300/T300M uses Gas Filter Correlation (GFC) to overcome the interfering effects
of various other gases (such as water vapor) that also absorb IR. The analyzer passes the
IR beam through a spinning wheel made up of two separate chambers: one containing a
high concentration of CO known as the reference, and the other containing a neutral gas
known as the measure. The concentration of CO in the sample chamber is computed by
taking the ratio of the instantaneous measure and reference values and then
compensating the ratio for sample temperature and pressure.
The T300/T300M Analyzer’s multi-tasking software gives the ability to track and report
a large number of operational parameters in real time. These readings are compared to
diagnostic limits kept in the analyzers memory and should any fall outside of those
limits the analyzer issues automatic warnings.
Built-in data acquisition capability, using the analyzer's internal memory, allows the
logging of multiple parameters including averaged or instantaneous concentration
values, calibration data, and operating parameters such as pressure and flow rate. Stored
data are easily retrieved through the serial port or Ethernet port via our APICOM
software or from the front panel, allowing operators to perform predictive diagnostics
and enhanced data analysis by tracking parameter trends. Multiple averaging periods of
one minute to 365 days are available for over a period of one year.

06864B DCN6314

Introduction, Features and Options

Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer

1.2. FEATURES
Some of the common features of your T300 family of analyzers include:


LCD color graphics with touch screen interface



Microprocessor controlled for versatility



Multi-tasking software allows viewing of test variables during operation



Continuous self checking with alarms



Bi-directional USB, RS-232, and 10/100Base-T Ethernet ports for remote operation
(optional RS-485)



Front panel USB ports for peripheral devices and software downloads



Digital status outputs indicate instrument operating condition



Adaptive signal filtering optimizes response time



Gas Filter Correlation (GFC) Wheel for CO specific measurement



GFC Wheel guaranteed against leaks for 5 years



Temperature and pressure compensation



Comprehensive internal data logging with programmable averaging periods



Remote operation when used with Teledyne API’s APICOM software

T300 FEATURES:


Ranges, 0-1 ppm to 0-1000 ppm, user selectable



14 meter path length for sensitivity

T300M FEATURES:


Ranges, 0-1 ppm; Max: 0-5000 ppm, user selectable



2.5 meter path length for dynamic range

1.3. T300/T300M DOCUMENTATION
In addition to this operation manual (part number 06807), two other manuals are
available for download from Teledyne API’s website at http://www.teledyneapi.com/manuals/, to support the operation of this instrument:.



APICOM software manual, part number 03945



DAS Manual, part number 02837

06864B DCN6314

Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer

Introduction, Features and Options

1.4. OPTIONS
The options available for your analyzer are presented in Table 1-1 with name, option
number, a description and/or comments, and if applicable, cross-references to technical
details in this manual, such as setup and calibration. To order these options or to learn
more about them, please contact the Sales department of Teledyne - Advanced Pollution
Instruments at:

Table 1-1:
Option

TOLL-FREE:

800-324-5190

TEL:

+1 858-657-9800

FAX:

+1 858-657-9816

E-MAIL:

apisales@teledyne.com

WEB SITE:

http://www.teledyne-api.com/

Analyzer Options
Option
Number

Description/Notes

Reference

Pumps meet all typical AC power supply standards while exhibiting same pneumatic
performance.

Pumps
10A

External Pump 100V - 120V @ 60 Hz

N/A

10B

External Pump 220V - 240V @ 50 Hz

N/A

10C

External Pump 220V - 240V @ 60 Hz

N/A

10D

External Pump 100V – 12V @ 50 Hz

N/A

10E

External Pump 100V @ 60 Hz

N/A

Pumpless, internal or external Pump Pack

N/A

High Voltage Internal Pump 240V @ 50Hz

N/A

Rack Mount
Kits

Options for mounting the analyzer in standard 19” racks
20A

Rack mount brackets with 26 in. chassis slides

N/A

20B

Rack mount brackets with 24 in. chassis slides

N/A

Rack mount brackets only (compatible with carrying strap, Option 29)

N/A

Rack mount for external pump pack (no slides)

N/A

23
Carrying Strap/Handle

Side-mounted strap for hand-carrying analyzer
Extends from “flat” position to accommodate hand for carrying.
Recesses to 9mm (3/8”) dimension for storage.
Can be used with rack mount brackets, Option 21.
Cannot be used with rack mount slides.

N/A

CAUTION - GENERAL SAFETY HAZARD
A fully loaded T300 with valve options weighs about 18 kg
or 40 lbs. (T300M weighs 22.7 kg or 50 lbs).
To avoid personal injury we recommend that two persons
lift and carry the analyzer. Disconnect all cables and
tubing from the analyzer before moving it.
Used for connecting external voltage signals from other instrumentation (such as
meteorological instruments).

Analog Inputs
64

06864B DCN6314

Also can be used for logging these signals in the analyzer’s internal
DAS

Sections 3.3.1.2,
5.9.3.11, and 7

Introduction, Features and Options

Option
Number

Option

Current Loop Analog
Outputs
41
Parts Kits

Description/Notes

Reference

Adds isolated, voltage-to-current conversion circuitry to the analyzer’s analog
outputs.
Can be configured for any output range between 0 and 20 mA.
May be ordered separately for any of the analog outputs.
Can be installed at the factory or retrofitted in the field.

Sections 3.3.1.3,
3.3.1.4, 5.9.1,
5.9.2 and 5.9.3.7

Spare parts and expendables
42A

Expendables Kit includes a recommended set of expendables for
one year of operation of this instrument including replacement sample
particulate filters.

Appendix B

Spare Parts Kit includes spares parts for one unit.

Appendix B

Calibration Valves

Used to control the flow of calibration gases generated from external sources, rather
than manually switching the rear panel pneumatic connections.

50A

Ambient Zero and Ambient Span.

Sections 3.3.2.3
and 3.3.2.4

50B

Ambient Zero and Pressurized Span

Sections 3.3.2.5
and 3.3.2.6

50E

Zero Scrubber and Pressurized Span

Sections 3.3.2.7
and 3.3.2.8

50H

Zero Scrubber and Ambient Span

Sections 3.3.2.9
and 3.3.2.10

Communication Cables

For remote serial, network and Internet communication with the analyzer.
Type

Description
Shielded, straight-through DB-9F to DB-25M cable, about
1.8 m long. Used to interface with older computers or
code activated switches with DB-25 serial connectors.

Section 3.3.1.8
and 6.3

60A

RS-232

60B

RS-232

Shielded, straight-through DB-9F to DB-9F cable of about
1.8 m length.

Sections 3.3.1.8,
and 6.3

60C

Ethernet

Patch cable, 2 meters long, used for Internet and LAN
communications.

Sections 3.3.1.8
and 6.5

60D

USB

Cable for direct connection between instrument (rear
panel USB port) and personal computer.

Sections 3.3.1.8
and 6.6

Concentration Alarm Relay
61
RS-232 Multidrop
62
Second Gas Sensors

Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer

Issues warning when gas concentration exceeds limits set by user.
Four (4) “dry contact” relays on the rear panel of the instrument. This
relay option is different from and in addition to the “Contact Closures”
that come standard on all TAPI instruments.

Section 3.3.1.7

Enables communications between host computer and up to eight analyzers.
Multidrop card seated on the analyzer’s CPU card.
Each instrument in the multidrop network requires this card and a
communications cable (Option 60B).

Sections 3.3.1.8
and 5.7.1

Choice of one additional gas sensor.

65A

Oxygen (O2) Sensor

• Sections 3.3.1.3
and 9.7.1

67A

Carbon Dioxide (CO2) Sensor

• Sections 3.3.1.3
and 9.7.2

06864B DCN6314

Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer

Option

Option
Number

Special Features

Introduction, Features and Options

Description/Notes

Reference

Built in features, software activated

N/A

Maintenance Mode Switch, located inside the instrument, places the
analyzer in maintenance mode where it can continue sampling, yet
ignore calibration, diagnostic, and reset instrument commands. This
feature is of particular use for instruments connected to Multidrop or
Hessen protocol networks.

N/A

Call Customer Service for activation.

N/A

Second Language Switch activates an alternate set of display
messages in a language other than the instrument’s default language.
Call Customer Service for a specially programmed Disk on Module containing
the second language.

Dilution Ratio Option allows the user to compensate for diluted
sample gas, such as in continuous emission monitoring (CEM) where
the quality of gas in a smoke stack is being tested and the sampling
method used to remove the gas from the stack dilutes the gas.

N/A

Sections 3.4.4.2
and 5.4.5

Call Customer Service for activation.

06864B DCN6314

Introduction, Features and Options

Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer

This page intentionally left blank.

06864B DCN6314

2. SPECIFICATIONS AND APPROVALS
This section presents specifications for the T300/T300M analyzer and for its second gas
sensor options, EPA equivalency designation, and compliance statements.

2.1. SPECIFICATIONS
Table 2-1:

T300/T300M Basic Unit Specifications

Parameter

Specification

Ranges

Min: 0-1 ppm Full scale
Max: 0-1,000 ppm Full scale (selectable, dual ranges and auto ranging supported)

Measurement Units

T300: ppb, ppm, µg/m3, mg/m3 (user selectable)
T300M: ppm, mg/m3 (user selectable)

Zero Noise1

T300: < 0.02 ppm RMS
T300M: ≤ 0.1 ppm RMS
T300:<0.5% of rdg RMS over 5ppm 3
T300M:>0.5% of rdg RMS over 20ppm
T300: < 0.04 ppm
T300M: 0.2 ppm
T300: < 0.1 ppm
T300M: <0.5 ppm
T300: < 0.5% of reading
T300M: 0.5ppm
10 seconds
<60 seconds to 95%
T300: 1% of full scale5;
T300M: 0 - 3000 ppm: 1% full scale;

Span Noise1
Lower Detectable Limit1
Zero Drift (24 hours) 2
Span Drift (24 hours) 2
Lag Time1
Rise/Fall Time 1
Linearity

3000 - 5000 ppm: 2% full scale

Precision

T300: The greater of 0.5% of reading or 0.2ppm;
T300M: The greater of 1.0% of reading or 1ppm

Sample Flow Rate

800 cm3/min. ±10%
(O2 Sensor option adds 120 cm³/min to total flow when installed)

AC Power

100V-120V, 220V-240V, 50/60 Hz

Analog Output Ranges

All Outputs: 10V, 5V, 1V, 0.1V (selectable)
Three outputs convertible to 4-20 mA isolated current loop.
All Ranges with 5% under/over-range

Analog Output Resolution

1 part in 4096 of selected full-scale voltage

Recorder Offset

±10%

Standard I/O

1 Ethernet: 10/100Base-T
2 RS-232 (300 – 115,200 baud)
2 USB device ports
8 opto-isolated digital status outputs
6 opto-isolated digital control inputs (2 defined, 4 spare)
4 user configurable analog outputs

06864B DCN6314

Specifications and Approvals

Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer

Parameter

Specification

Optional I/O

1 USB com port
1 RS485
8 analog inputs (0-10V, 12-bit)
4 digital alarm outputs (2 opto-isolated and 2 dry contact)
Multidrop RS232
3 4-20mA current outputs

Temperature Range

5 - 40C operating, 10 - 40C EPA Equivalency (T300 only)

Humidity Range

0-95% RH, Non-Condensing

Temp Coefficient

< 0.05 % per C (minimum 50 ppb/C)

Voltage Coefficient

< 0.05 % per V

Dimensions (HxWxD)

7" x 17" x 23.5" (178 mm x 432 mm x 597 mm)

Weight

T300: 40 lbs (18.1 kg); T300M: 38.4 lbs (17.2)

Environmental Conditions

Installation Category (Over voltage Category) II Pollution Degree 2

As defined by the USEPA

Table 2-2:

At constant temperature and pressure

O2 Sensor Option Specifications

Parameter

Description

Ranges

0-1% to 0-100% user selectable. Dual ranges and auto-ranging supported.

Zero Noise1

<0.02% O2

Lower Detectable Limit2
Zero Drift (24 hours)

<0.04% O2
<± 0.02% O2

Zero Drift (7 days)

<±- 0.05% O2

Span Noise1

<± 0.05% O2

Span Drift (7 days)

<± 0.1% O2

Accuracy

(intrinsic error) <± 0.1% O2

Linearity

<± 0.1 % O2

Temp Coefficient

<± 0.05% O2 /°C,

Rise and Fall Time

<60 seconds to 95%

1
2

As defined by the USEPA

Defined as twice the zero noise level by the USEPA
3
Note: zero drift is typically <± 0.1% O2 during the first 24 hrs of operation

06864B DCN6314

Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer
Table 2-3:

CO2 Sensor Option Specifications

Parameter

Description

Ranges

0-1% to 0-20% user selectable. Dual ranges and auto-ranging supported.

Zero Noise1
Lower Detectable Limit

<0.02% CO2
2

<0.04% CO2

Zero Drift (24 hours)

<± 0.02% CO2

Zero Drift (7 days)

<± 0.05% CO2

Span Noise

<± 0.1% CO2

Span Drift (7 days)

<± 0.1% CO2

Accuracy

<± (0.02% CO2 + 2% of reading)

Linearity

<± 0.1% CO2

Temperature Coefficient

<± 0.01% CO2 /°C

Rise and Fall Time

<60 seconds to 95%

1
2

Specifications and Approvals

As defined by the USEPA
Defined as twice the zero noise level by the USEPA

2.2. EPA EQUIVALENCY DESIGNATION
Note

T300M: EPA equivalency does not apply to this model.
Teledyne API’s Model T300, Carbon Monoxide Analyzer, is designated as Reference
Method Number RFCA-1093-093 as defined in 40 CFR Part 53, when operated under
the following conditions:





06864B DCN6314

Range: Any range from 10 ppm to 50 ppm
Ambient temperature range of 10 to 40C
Sample filter: Equipped with 5-micron PTFE filter element in the internal filter
assembly
Software settings:
Dilution factor

1.0

AutoCal

ON or OFF

Dynamic Zero

ON or OFF

Dynamic Span

OFF

Dual Range

ON or OFF

Auto Range

ON or OFF

Temp/Pres Compensation

Specifications and Approvals

Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer

Under the designation, the analyzer may be operated with or without the following
options:






Rack mount with slides
Rack mount without slides, ears only
Zero/span valve options


Option 50A – Sample/Cal valves, or



Option 50B – Sample/Cal valves with span shutoff & flow control

Internal zero/span (IZS) option with either:


Option 51A – Sample/Cal valves, or



Option 51C – Sample/Cal valves with span shutoff & flow control

4-20mA, isolated output

2.3. APPROVALS AND CERTIFICATIONS
The Teledyne API Model T300/T300M analyzer was tested and certified for Safety and
Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC). This section presents the compliance statements
for those requirements and directives.

2.3.1. SAFETY
IEC 61010-1:2001, Safety requirements for electrical equipment for measurement,
control, and laboratory use.
CE: 2006/95/EC, Low-Voltage Directive
North American:
cNEMKO (Canada): CAN/CSA-C22.2 No. 61010-1-04
NEMKO-CCL (US): UL No. 61010-1 (2nd Edition)

2.3.2. EMC
EN 61326-1 (IEC 61326-1), Class A Emissions/Industrial Immunity
EN 55011 (CISPR 11), Group 1, Class A Emissions
FCC 47 CFR Part 15B, Class A Emissions
CE: 2004/108/EC, Electromagnetic Compatibility Directive

2.3.3. OTHER TYPE CERTIFICATIONS
MCERTS: Sira MC 050069/04
For additional certifications, please contact Customer Service.

06864B DCN6314

3. GETTING STARTED
This section first introduces you to the instrument, then presents the procedures for
getting started, i.e., unpacking and inspection, making electrical and pneumatic
connections, and conducting an initial calibration check.

3.1. UNPACKING THE T300/T300M ANALYZER
CAUTION
GENERAL SAFETY HAZARD
To avoid personal injury, always use two persons to lift and carry the T300/T300M.

ATTENTION

CAUTION!
Do not operate this instrument until you’ve removed dust plugs from SAMPLE and
EXHAUST ports on the rear panel!

Note

Teledyne API recommends that you store shipping containers/materials
for future use if/when the instrument should be returned to the factory for
repair and/or calibration service. See Warranty section in this manual and
shipping procedures on our Website at http://www.teledyne-api.com
under Customer Support > Return Authorization.
Verify that there is no apparent external shipping damage. If damage has occurred,
please advise the shipper first, then Teledyne API.

06864B DCN6314

Getting Started

Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer

Included with your analyzer is a printed record (Final Test and Validation Data Sheet:
PN 04307; PN 04311) of the final performance characterization performed on your
instrument at the factory. This record is an important quality assurance and calibration
record for this instrument. It should be placed in the quality records file for this
instrument.
With no power to the unit, craefully remove the top cover of the analyzer and check for
internal shipping damage by carrying out the following steps:
1. Carefully remove the top cover of the analyzer and check for internal shipping
damage by:



Removing the setscrew located in the top, center of the Front panel;



Removing the two flat head, Phillips screws on the sides of the instrument (one
per side towards the rear);



Sliding the cover backwards until it clears the analyzer’s front bezel, and;



Lifting the cover straight up.

2. Inspect the interior of the instrument to make sure all circuit boards and other
components are in good shape and properly seated.
3. Check the connectors of the various internal wiring harnesses and pneumatic hoses
to make sure they are firmly and properly seated.
4. Verify that all of the optional hardware ordered with the unit has been installed.
These are listed on the paperwork accompanying the analyzer.

WARNING - ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARD
Never disconnect PCAs, wiring harnesses or electronic subassemblies
while instrument is under power.

3.1.1. VENTILATION CLEARANCE
Whether the analyzer is set up on a bench or installed into an instrument rack, be sure to
leave sufficient ventilation clearance.
Table 3-1:

Ventilation Clearance
AREA

MINIMUM REQUIRED CLEARANCE

Back of the instrument

4 in.

Sides of the instrument

1 in.

Above and below the instrument

1 in.

Various rack mount kits are available for this analyzer. See Table 1-1 of this manual for
more information.

06864B DCN6314

Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer

Getting Started

3.2. INSTRUMENT LAYOUT
Instrument layout includes front panel and display, rear panel connectors, and internal
chassis layout.

3.2.1. FRONT PANEL
Figure 3-1 shows the analyzer’s front panel layout, followed by a close-up of the display
screen in Figure 3-2, which is described in Table 3-2. The two USB ports on the front
panel are provided for the connection of peripheral devices:


plug-in mouse (not included) to be used as an alternative to the thouchscreen
interface



thumb drive (not included) to download updates to instruction software (contact
TAPI Customer Service for information).

Figure 3-1:

06864B DCN6314

Front Panel Layout

Getting Started

Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer

Figure 3-2:

Display Screen and Touch Control

The front panel liquid crystal display screen includes touch control. Upon analyzer startup, the screen shows a splash screen and other initialization indicators before the main
display appears, similar to Figure 3-2 above (may or may not display a Fault alarm). The
LEDs on the display screen indicate the Sample, Calibration and Fault states; also on the
screen is the gas concentration field (Conc), which displays real-time readouts for the
primary gas and for the secondary gas if installed. The display screen also shows what
mode the analyzer is currently in, as well as messages and data (Param). Along the
bottom of the screen is a row of touch control buttons; only those that are currently
applicable will have a label. Table 3-2 provides detailed information for each component
of the screen.

ATTENTION

COULD DAMAGE INSTRUMENT AND VOID WARRANTY
Do not use hard-surfaced instruments such as pens to touch the control
buttons.

06864B DCN6314

Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer

Table 3-2:
Field
Status

Conc

Getting Started

Display Screen and Touch Control Description
Description/Function
LEDs indicating the states of Sample, Calibration and Fault, as follows:
Name
Color
State
Definition
Off
Unit is not operating in Sample Mode, DAS is disabled.
On
Sample Mode active; Front Panel Display being updated; DAS data
SAMPLE Green
being stored.
Unit is operating in Sample Mode, front panel display being updated,
Blinking
DAS hold-off mode is ON, DAS disabled
Off
Auto Cal disabled
CAL
Yellow
On
Auto Cal enabled
Blinking
Unit is in calibration mode
Off
No warnings exist
FAULT
Red
Blinking
Warnings exist
Displays the actual concentration of the sample gas currently being measured by the analyzer in the
currently selected units of measure

Mode

Displays the name of the analyzer’s current operating mode

Param

Displays a variety of informational messages such as warning messages, operational data, test function
values and response messages during interactive tasks.

Control Buttons

Displays dynamic, context sensitive labels on each button, which is blank when inactive until applicable.

Figure 3-3 shows how the front panel display is mapped to the menu charts that are
illustrated throughout this manual. The Mode, Param (parameters), and Conc (gas
concentration) fields in the display screen are represented across the top row of each
menu chart. The eight touch control buttons along the bottom of the display screen are
represented in the bottom row of each menu chart.

06864B DCN6314

Getting Started

Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer

Figure 3-3:

Note

Display/Touch Control Screen Mapped to Menu Charts

The menu charts in this manual contain condensed representations of the
analyzer’s display during the various operations being described. These
menu charts are not intended to be exact visual representations of the
actual display.

06864B DCN6314

Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer

Getting Started

3.2.2. REAR PANEL

Figure 3-4:

Rear Panel Layout

Table 3-3 provides a description of each component on the rear panel.

06864B DCN6314

Getting Started

Table 3-3:

Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer

Rear Panel Description

Component

Function

cooling fan Pulls ambient air into chassis through side vents and exhausts through rear.
Connector for three-prong cord to apply AC power to the analyzer.

AC power CAUTION! The cord’s power specifications (specs) MUST comply with the power
connector specs on the analyzer’s rear panel Model number label
Model/specs label Identifies the analyzer model number and provides voltage and frequency specs
Connect a gas line from the source of sample gas here.

SAMPLE Calibration gases are also inlet here on units without zero/span/shutoff valve options
installed.
Connect an exhaust gas line of not more than 10 meters long here that leads outside

EXHAUST the shelter or immediate area surrounding the instrument.

On units with zero/span/shutoff valve options installed, connect a gas line to the source

SPAN 1 of calibrated span gas here.

Used as a second cal gas input line when instrument is configured with zero/span

SPAN2/VENT valves and a dual gas option, or as a cal gas vent line when instrument is configured
with a pressurized span option (Call factory for details).

Internal Zero Air: On units with zero/span/shutoff valve options installed but no internal

ZERO AIR zero air scrubber attach a gas line to the source of zero air here.

RX TX LEDs indicate receive (RX) and transmit (TX) activity on the when blinking.
COM 2 Serial communications port for RS-232 or RS-485. (Sections 3.3.1.8, 5.7.3, 6).
RS-232 Serial communications port for RS-232 only. (Sections 3.3.1.8, 5.7, 6.3, 6.7.2.1)
Switch to select either data terminal equipment or data communication equipment

DCE DTE during RS-232 communication. (Section 6.1).

For ouputs to devices such as Programmable Logic Controllers (PLCs). (Section

STATUS 3.3.1.5).

For voltage or current loop outputs to a strip chart recorder and/or a data logger.

ANALOG OUT (Sections 3.3.1.3 and 3.3.1.4).

CONTROL IN For remotely activating the zero and span calibration modes. (Section 3.3.1.6).
ALARM Option for concentration alarms and system warnings. (Section 3.3.1.7).
Connector for network or Internet remote communication, using Ethernet cable

ETHERNET (Section 3.3.1.8).

Option for external voltage signals from other instrumentation and for logging these

ANALOG IN signals (Section 3.3.1.2)

USB Connector for direct connection to laptop computer, using USB cable. (Section 3.3.1.8).

06864B DCN6314

Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer

Getting Started

3.2.3. T300/T300M ANALYZER LAYOUT
Figure 3-5 shows the T300 internal layout.

Figure 3-5:

06864B DCN6314

Internal Layout – T300

Getting Started

Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer

Figure 3-6 shows the T300M internal layout.

Figure 3-6:

Internal Layout – T300M

06864B DCN6314

Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer

Getting Started

Sample Gas Outlet
fitting

Sample Gas Flow
Sensor

Sample Chamber
Sync/Demod PCA
Housing

Pressure Sensor(s)

Bench
Temperature
Thermistor
Shock Absorbing
Mounting Bracket
Opto-Pickup
PCA

Purge Gas
Pressure Regulator
IR Source
GFC Wheel
Heat Sync

GFC Wheel Motor
GFC Temperature
Sensor

Purge Gas
Inlet
GFC Heater

Figure 3-7:

06864B DCN6314

Optical Bench Layout (shorter bench, T300M, shown)

Getting Started

Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer

3.3. CONNECTIONS AND SETUP
This section presents the electrical (Section 3.3.1) and pneumatic (Section 3.3.2)
connections for setup and preparing for instrument operation

3.3.1. ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS
Note

To maintain compliance with EMC standards, it is required that the cable
length be no greater than 3 meters for all I/O connections, which include
Analog In, Analog Out, Status Out, Control In, Ethernet/LAN, USB, RS-232,
and RS-485.

3.3.1.1. CONNECTING POWER
Attach the power cord to the analyzer and plug it into a power outlet capable of carrying
at least 10 A current at your AC voltage and that it is equipped with a functioning earth
ground.

WARNING
ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARD
High Voltages are present inside the analyzer’s case.
Power connection must have functioning ground connection.
Do not defeat the ground wire on power plug.
Turn off analyzer power before disconnecting or
connecting electrical subassemblies.
Do not operate with cover off.

CAUTION
GENERAL SAFETY HAZARD
The T300/T300M Analyzer can be configured for both
100-130 V and 210-240 V at either 47 Hz or 63 Hz.
To avoid damage to your analyzer, make sure that the AC power voltage matches
the voltage indicated on the analyzer’s model/specs label (See Figure 3-4) before
plugging the T300/T300M into line power.

06864B DCN6314

Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer

Getting Started

3.3.1.2. CONNECTING ANALOG INPUTS (OPTION)
The Analog In connector is used for connecting external voltage signals from other
instrumentation (such as meteorological instruments) and for logging these signals in the
analyzer’s internal DAS. The input voltage range for each analog input is 0-10 VDC.

Figure 3-8:

Analog In Connector

Pin assignments for the Analog In connector are presented in Table 3-4.
Table 3-4:
PIN

DESCRIPTION

DAS
PARAMETER1

Analog input # 1

AIN 1

Analog input # 2

AIN 2

Analog input # 3

AIN 3

Analog input # 4

AIN 4

Analog input # 5

AIN 5

Analog input # 6

AIN 6

Analog input # 7

AIN 7

8
GND
1

Analog Input Pin Assignments

Analog input # 8

AIN 8

Analog input Ground

N/A

See Section 7 for details on setting up the DAS.

3.3.1.3. CONNECTING ANALOG OUTPUTS
The T300 is equipped with several analog output channels accessible through a
connector on the back panel of the instrument. The standard configuration for these
outputs is mVDC. An optional current loop output is available for each.
When the instrument is in its default configuration, channels A1 and A2 output a signal
that is proportional to the CO concentration of the sample gas. Either can be used for
connecting the analog output signal to a chart recorder or for interfacing with a
datalogger.
Output A3 is only used on the T300/T300M if the optional CO2 or O2 sensor is installed.
Channel A4 is special. It can be set by the user (see Section 5.9.8.1) to output any one
of the parameters accessible through the buttons of the units sample
display.
To access these signals attach a strip chart recorder and/or data-logger to the appropriate
analog output connections on the rear panel of the analyzer.

06864B DCN6314

Getting Started

Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer

ANALOG OUT

A1
+

A2
-

Figure 3-9:
Table 3-5:
PIN
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8

A3
-

A4
-

Analog Output Connector

Analog Output Pin-Outs
ANALOG OUTPUT
A1
A2
A3
(Only used if CO2 or
O2 Sensor is
installed)
A4

VOLTAGE SIGNAL

CURRENT SIGNAL

V Out

I Out +

Ground

I Out -

V Out

I Out +

Ground

I Out -

V Out

I Out +

Ground

I Out -

V Out

I Out +

Ground

I Out -

3.3.1.4. CURRENT LOOP ANALOG OUTPUTS (OPTION 41) SETUP
If your analyzer had this option installed at the factory, there are no further connections
to be made. Otherwise, it can be installed as a retrofit for each of the analog outputs of
the analyzer . This option converts the DC voltage analog output to a current signal with
0-20 mA output current. The outputs can be scaled to any set of limits within that 0-20
mA range. However, most current loop applications call for either 2-20 mA or 4-20 mA
range.
Figure 3-10 provides installation instructions and illustrates a sample combination of
one current output and two voltage outputs configuration. Following Figure 3-10 are
instructions for converting current loop analog outputs to standard 0-to-5 VDC outputs.
Information on calibrating or adjusting these outputs can be found in Section 5.9.3.7

CAUTION – AVOID INVALIDATING WARRANTY
Servicing or handling of circuit components requires electrostatic
discharge protection, i.e. ESD grounding straps, mats and containers.
Failure to use ESD protection when working with electronic assemblies will
void the instrument warranty. Refer to Section 14 for more information on
preventing ESD damage.

06864B DCN6314

Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer

Figure 3-10:

Getting Started

Current Loop Option Installed on Motherboard

CONVERTING CURRENT LOOP ANALOG OUTPUTS TO STANDARD VOLTAGE
OUTPUTS
To convert an output configured for current loop operation to the standard 0 to 5 VDC
output operation:
1. Turn off power to the analyzer.
2. If a recording device was connected to the output being modified, disconnect it.
3. Remove the top cover.



Remove the screw located in the top, center of the front panel.



Remove the screws fastening the top cover to the unit (both sides).



Slide the cover back and lift straight up.

4. Remove the screw holding the current loop option to the motherboard.
5. Disconnect the current loop option PCA from the appropriate connector on the
motherboard (see Figure 3-10).
6. Each connector, J19 and J23, requires two shunts. Place one shunt on the two leftmost pins and the second shunt on the two pins next to it (see Figure 3-10).
7. Reattach the top case to the analyzer.


The analyzer is now ready to have a voltage-sensing, recording device attached
to that output.

8. Calibrate the analog output as described in Section 5.9.3.2.

06864B DCN6314

Getting Started

Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer

3.3.1.5. CONNECTING THE STATUS OUTPUTS
The status outputs report analyzer conditions via optically isolated NPN transistors,
which sink up to 50 mA of DC current. These outputs can be used interface with
devices that accept logic-level digital inputs, such as Programmable Logic Controllers
(PLCs). Each status bit is an open collector output that can withstand up to 40 VDC.
All of the emitters of these transistors are tied together and available at D.

ATTENTION

COULD DAMAGE INSTRUMENT AND VOID WARRANTY
Most PLC’s have internal provisions for limiting the current that the input
will draw from an external device. When connecting to a unit that does
not have this feature, an external dropping resistor must be used to limit
the current through the transistor output to less than 50 mA. At 50 mA, the
transistor will drop approximately 1.2V from its collector to emitter.
The status outputs are accessed via a 12-pin connector on the analyzer’s rear panel
labeled STATUS (see Figure 3-4). Pin-outs for this connector are:

Optional O2 CAL

DIAG MODE

SPAN CAL

3
HIGH RANGE

2
CONC VALID

SYSTEM OK

ZERO CAL

STATUS

+5V to external device

Figure 3-11:

Status Output Connector

06864B DCN6314

Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer

Getting Started

Table 3-6: Status Output Signals
REAR PANEL
LABEL
1

STATUS
DEFINITION

CONDITION

SYSTEM OK

ON if no faults are present.

CONC VALID

OFF any time the HOLD OFF feature is active, such as during calibration or when
other faults exist possibly invalidating the current concentration measurement
(example: sample flow rate is outside of acceptable limits).
ON if concentration measurement is valid.

HIGH RANGE

ON if unit is in high range of either the DUAL or AUTO range modes.

ZERO CAL

ON whenever the instrument’s ZERO point is being calibrated.

SPAN CAL

ON whenever the instrument’s SPAN point is being calibrated.

DIAG MODE

ON whenever the instrument is in DIAGNOSTIC mode.

CO2 CAL

If this analyzer is equipped with an optional CO2 sensor, this Output is ON when that
sensor is in calibration mode.
Otherwise this output is unused.

O2 CAL

If this analyzer is equipped with an optional O2 sensor, this Output is ON when that
sensor is in calibration mode.
Otherwise this output is unused.

EMITTER BUS

The emitters of the transistors on pins 1-8 are bussed together.

SPARE
+

DC POWER

+ 5 VDC, 300 mA source maximum.

Digital Ground

The ground level from the analyzer’s internal DC power supplies.

3.3.1.6. CONNECTING THE CONTROL INPUTS
To remotely activate the zero and span calibration modes, several digital control inputs
are provided through a 10-pin connector labeled CONTROL IN on the analyzer’s rear
panel.
There are two methods for energizing the control inputs. The internal +5V available
from the pin labeled “+” is the most convenient method. However, if full isolation is
required, an external 5 VDC power supply should be used.

06864B DCN6314

Getting Started

Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer

CONTROL IN

Figure 3-12:

INPUT #

5 VDC Power
Supply

Control Input Connector

Control Input Signals
STATUS DEFINITION

ON CONDITION

REMOTE ZERO CAL

The analyzer is placed in Zero Calibration mode. The mode field of the
display will read ZERO CAL R.

REMOTE SPAN CAL

The analyzer is placed in span calibration mode as part of performing a low
span (midpoint) calibration. The mode field of the display will read LO CAL
R.

REMOTE CAL HIGH RANGE

The analyzer is forced into high range for zero or span calibrations. This
only applies when the range mode is either DUAL or AUTO. The mode field
of the display will read HI CAL R.

D, E
&F

External Power Connections

Local Power Connections

Table 3-7:

HIGH SPAN

LOW SPAN

ZERO

C
HIGH SPAN

B
LOW SPAN

ZERO

SPARE
Digital Ground

The ground level from the analyzer’s internal DC power supplies (same as
chassis ground).

External Power input

Input pin for +5 VDC required to activate pins A – F.

5 VDC output

Internally generated 5V DC power. To activate inputs A – F, place a jumper
between this pin and the “U” pin. The maximum amperage through this port
is 300 mA (combined with the analog output supply, if used).

06864B DCN6314

Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer

Getting Started

3.3.1.7. CONNECTING THE CONCENTRATION ALARM RELAY (OPTION 61)
The concentration alarm option is comprised of four (4) “dry contact” relays on the rear
panel of the instrument. This relay option is different from and in addition to the
“Contact Closures” that come standard on all Teledyne API instruments. Each relay has
3 pins: Normally Open (NO), Common (C), and Normally Closed (NC).

Figure 3-13:

Concentration Alarm Relay

Alarm 1

“System OK 2”

Alarm 2

“Conc 1”

Alarm 3

“Conc 2”

Alarm 4

“Range Bit”

“ALARM 1” RELAY
Alarm 1 which is “System OK 2” (system OK 1, is the status bit) is in the energized
state when the instrument is “OK” & there are no warnings. If there is a warning active
or if the instrument is put into the “DIAG” mode, Alarm 1 will change states. This
alarm has “reverse logic” meaning that if you put a meter across the Common &
Normally Closed pins on the connector you will find that it is OPEN when the
instrument is OK. This is so that if the instrument should turn off or lose power, it will
change states and you can record this with a data logger or other recording device.
“ALARM 2” RELAY & “ALARM 3” RELAY
Alarm 2 relay is associated with the “Concentration Alarm 1” set point in the software;
Alarm 3 Relay is associated with the “Concentration Alarm 2” set point in the software.
Alarm 2 Relay

CO Alarm 1 = xxx PPM

Alarm 3 Relay

CO2 Alarm 2 = xxx PPM

Alarm 2 Relay

CO Alarm 1 = xxx PPM

Alarm 3 Relay

CO2 Alarm 2 = xxx PPM

The Alarm 2 Relay will be turned on any time the concentration set-point is exceeded &
will return to its normal state when the concentration value goes back below the
concentration set-point.
Even though the relay on the rear panel is a NON-Latching alarm & resets when the
concentration goes back below the alarm set point, the warning on the front panel of the

06864B DCN6314

Getting Started

Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer

instrument will remain latched until it is cleared. You can clear the warning on the front
panel by either pushing the CLR button on the front panel or through the serial port.
In instruments that sample more than one gas type, there could be more than one gas
type triggering the Concentration 1 Alarm (“Alarm 2” Relay). For example, the T300M
instrument can monitor both CO & CO2 gas. The software is flexible enough to allow
you to configure the alarms so that you can have 2 alarm levels for each gas.
CO Alarm 1 = 20 PPM
CO Alarm 2 = 100 PPM
CO2 Alarm 1 = 20 PPM
CO2 Alarm 2 = 100 PPM
In this example, CO Alarm 1 & CO2 Alarm 1 will both be associated with the “Alarm 2”
relay on the rear panel. This allows you do have multiple alarm levels for individual
gasses.
A more likely configuration for this would be to put one gas on the “Alarm 1” relay &
the other gas on the “Alarm 2” relay.
CO Alarm 1 = 20 PPM
CO Alarm 2 = Disabled
CO2 Alarm 1 = Disabled
CO2 Alarm 2 = 100 PPM
“ALARM 4” RELAY
This relay is connected to the “range bit”. If the instrument is configured for “Auto
Range” and the instrument goes up into the high range, it will turn this relay on.
3.3.1.8. CONNECTING THE COMMUNICATION INTERFACES
The T-Series analyzers are equipped with connectors for remote communications
interfaces: Ethernet, USB, RS-232, optional RS-232 Multidrop, and optional RS-485.
In addition to using the appropriate cables, each type of communication method must be
configured using the SETUP>COMM menu, Section 6. Although Ethernet is DHCPenabled by default, it can also be configured manually (Section 6.5.1) to set up a static
IP address, which is the recommended setting when operating the instrument via
Ethernet.
ETHERNET CONNECTION
For network or Internet communication with the analyzer, connect an Ethernet cable
from the analyzer’s rear panel Ethernet interface connector to an Ethernet access port.
Please see Section 6.5 for description and setup instructions.
For manual configuration, see Section 6.5.1.
For automatic configuration (default), see Section 6.5.2.

06864B DCN6314

Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer

Getting Started

USB CONNECTION
For direct communication between the analyzer and a PC, connect a USB cable between
the analyzer and desktop or laptop USB ports. The baud rate for the analyzer and the
computer must match; you may elect to change one or the other: to view and/or change
the analyzer’s baud rate, see Section 6.2.2.
Note

If this option is installed, the COM2 port cannot be used for anything
other than Multidrop communication.
For configuration, see 6.6.
RS-232 CONNECTION
For RS-232 communications with data terminal equipment (DTE) or with data
communication equipment (DCE) connect either a DB9-female-to-DB9-female cable
(Teledyne API part number WR000077) or a DB9-female-to-DB25-male cable (Option
60A, Section 1.4), as applicable, from the analyzer’s rear panel RS-232 port to the
device. Adjust the DCE-DTE switch (Figure 3-4) to select DTE or DCE as appropriate.
Configuration: Sections 5.7 and 6.3.

IMPORTANT

06864B DCN6314

IMPACT ON READINGS OR DATA
Cables that appear to be compatible because of matching connectors
may incorporate internal wiring that makes the link inoperable. Check
cables acquired from sources other than Teledyne API for pin
assignments (Figure 3-14) before using.

Getting Started

Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer

RS-232 COM PORT CONNECTOR PIN-OUTS
Electronically, the difference between the DCE and DTE is the pin assignment of the
Data Receive and Data Transmit functions.


DTE devices receive data on pin 2 and transmit data on pin 3.



DCE devices receive data on pin 3 and transmit data on pin 2.

Figure 3-14:

Rear Panel Connector Pin-Outs for RS-232 Mode

The signals from these two connectors are routed from the motherboard via a wiring
harness to two 10-pin connectors on the CPU card, J11 (COM1) and J12 (COM2)
(Figure 3-15).

06864B DCN6314

Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer

Figure 3-15:

Getting Started

Default Pin Assignments for CPU COM Port connector (RS-232)

RS-232 COM PORT DEFAULT SETTINGS
Received from the factory, the analyzer is set up to emulate a DCE or modem, with Pin
3 of the DB-9 connector designated for receiving data and Pin 2 designated for sending
data.




06864B DCN6314

RS-232 (COM1): RS-232 (fixed) DB-9 male connector.


Baud rate: 115200 bits per second (baud)



Data Bits: 8 data bits with 1 stop bit



Parity: None

COM2: RS-232 (configurable to RS-485), DB-9 female connector.


Baud rate: 19200 bits per second (baud)



Data Bits: 8 data bits with 1 stop bit



Parity: None

Getting Started

Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer

RS-232 MULTIDROP OPTION CONNECTION
When the RS-232 Multidrop option is installed, connection adjustments and
configuration through the menu system are required. This section provides instructions
for the internal connection adjustments, then for external connections, and ends with
instructions for menu-driven configuration.
Note

ATTENTION

Because the RS-232 Multidrop option uses both the RS232 and COM2
DB9 connectors on the analyzer’s rear panel to connect the chain of
instruments, COM2 port is no longer available for separate RS-232 or
RS-485 operation.

COULD DAMAGE INSTRUMENT AND VOID WARRANTY
Printed Circuit Assemblies (PCAs) are sensitive to electro-static
discharges too small to be felt by the human nervous system. Failure to
use ESD protection when working with electronic assemblies will void
the instrument warranty. Refer to Section 14 for more information on
preventing ESD damage.
In each instrument with the Multidrop option there is a shunt jumpering two pins on the
serial Multidrop and LVDS printed circuit assembly (PCA), as shown in Figure 3-16.
This shunt must be removed from all instruments except that designated as last in the
multidrop chain, which must remain terminated. This requires powering off and opening
each instrument and making the following adjustments:
1. With NO power to the instrument, remove its top cover and lay the rear panel open
for access to the Multidrop/LVDS PCA, which is seated on the CPU.
2. On the Multidrop/LVDS PCA’s JP2 connector, remove the shunt that jumpers Pins
21  22 as indicated in. (Do this for all but the last instrument in the chain where
the shunt should remain at Pins 21  22).
3. Check that the following cable connections are made in all instruments (again refer
to Figure 3-16):
 J3 on the Multidrop/LVDS PCA to the CPU’s COM1 connector
(Note that the CPU’s COM2 connector is not used in Multidrop)
 J4 on the Multidrop/LVDS PCA to J12 on the motherboard
 J1 on the Multidrop/LVDS PCS to the front panel LCD

06864B DCN6314

Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer

Figure 3-16:

Getting Started

Jumper and Cables for Multidrop Mode

Note: If you are adding an instrument to the end of a previously configured chain,
remove the shunt between Pins 21  22 of JP2 on the Multidrop/LVDS PCA in the
instrument that was previously the last instrument in the chain.
4. Close the instrument.
5. Referring to Figure 3-17 use straight-through DB9 male  DB9 female cables to
interconnect the host RS232 port to the first analyzer’s RS232 port; then from the
first analyzer’s COM2 port to the second analyzer’s RS232 port; from the second
analyzer’s COM2 port to the third analyzer’s RS232 port, etc., connecting in this
fashion up to eight analyzers, subject to the distance limitations of the RS-232
standard.
6. On the rear panel of each analyzer, adjust the DCE DTE switch so that the green
and the red LEDs (RX and TX) of the COM1 connector (labeled RS232) are both lit.
(Ensure you are using the correct RS-232 cables internally wired specifically for RS232 communication; see Table 1-1: Analyzer Options, “Communication Cables” and
Section 3.3.1.8: Connecting the Communications Inerfaces, “RS-232 Connection”).

06864B DCN6314

Getting Started

Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer

Female DB9

Host

Male DB9

RS-232 port

Analyzer

Last Analyzer

COM2

RS-232

Ensure jumper is
installed between
JP2 pins 21  22 in
last instrument of
multidrop chain.

Figure 3-17:

RS-232-Multidrop PCA Host/Analyzer Interconnect Diagram

7. BEFORE communicating from the host, power on the instruments and check that
the Machine ID code is unique for each (Section 5.7.1).
a. In the SETUP Mode menu go to SETUP>MORE>COMM>ID. The default ID is
typically the model number or “0”.
b. to change the identification number, press the button below the digit to be
changed.
c. Press/select ENTER to accept the new ID for that instrument.
8. Next, in the SETUP>MORE>COMM>COM1 menu (do not use the COM2 menu for
multidrop), edit the COM1 MODE parameter as follows: press/select EDIT and set
only QUIET MODE, COMPUTER MODE, and MULTIDROP MODE to ON. Do not
change any other settings.
9. Press/select ENTER to accept the changed settings, and ensure that COM1 MODE
now shows 35.
10. Press/select SET> to go to the COM1 BAUD RATE menu and ensure it reads the
same for all instruments (edit as needed so that all instruments are set at the same
baud rate).

Note

 The Instrument ID’s should not be duplicated.
 The (communication) Host instrument can only address one instrument at a time.

Teledyne API recommends setting up the first link, between the Host and
the first analyzer, and testing it before setting up the rest of the chain.

06864B DCN6314

Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer

Getting Started

RS-485 CONNECTION
As delivered from the factory, COM2 is configured for RS-232 communications. This
port can be reconfigured for operation as a non-isolated, half-duplex RS-485 port. Using
COM2 for RS-485 communication disables the USB port. To configure the instrument
for RS-485 communication, please contact the factory.

3.3.2. PNEUMATIC CONNECTIONS
This section provides not only pneumatic connection information, but also important
information about the gases required for accurate calibration; it also illustrates the
pneumatic layouts for the analyzer in its basic configuration and with options.
Before making the pneumatic connections, carefully note the following cautionary and
special messages:

CAUTION
GENERAL SAFETY HAZARD
CARBON MONOXIDE (CO) IS A TOXIC GAS.
Do not vent calibration gas and sample gas into enclosed areas. Obtain
a Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) for this material. Read and
rigorously follow the safety guidelines described there.

CAUTION
GENERAL SAFETY HAZARD
Sample and calibration gases should only come into contact with PTFE
(Teflon), FEP, glass, stainless steel or brass.
The exhaust from the analyzer’s internal pump MUST be vented outside
the immediate area or shelter surrounding the instrument.
It is important to conform to all safety requirements regarding exposure
to CO.

06864B DCN6314

Getting Started

ATTENTION

Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer

COULD DAMAGE INSTRUMENT AND VOID WARRANTY
Maximum Pressure:
Ideally the maximum pressure of any gas at the sample inlet should
equal ambient atmospheric pressure and should NEVER exceed
1.5 in-hg above ambient pressure.
Venting Pressurized Gas:
In applications where any gas (span gas, zero air supply, sample gas
is) received from a pressurized manifold, a vent must be provided to
equalize the gas with ambient atmospheric pressure before it enters
the analyzer to ensure that the gases input do not exceed the
maximum inlet pressure of the analyzer, as well as to prevent back
diffusion and pressure effects. These vents should be:
• at least 0.2m long
• no more than 2m long
• vented outside the shelter or immediate area surrounding the
instrument.
Dust Plugs:
Remove dust plugs from rear panel exhaust and supply line fittings
before powering on/operating instrument. These plugs should be kept
for reuse in the event of future storage or shipping to prevent debris
from entering the pneumatics.

IMPORTANT

Leak Check
Run a leak check once the appropriate pneumatic connections have been
made; check all pneumatic fittings for leaks using the procedures
defined in Section 11.3.3.
See Figure 3-4 and Table 3-3 for the location and descriptions of the various pneumatic
inlets/outlets referenced in this section.

06864B DCN6314

Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer

Getting Started

3.3.2.1. PNEUMATIC CONNECTIONS FOR BASIC CONFIGURATION

Figure 3-18:

Figure 3-19:

06864B DCN6314

Pneumatic Connections–Basic Configuration–Using Bottled Span Gas

Pneumatic Connections–Basic Configuration–Using Gas Dilution Calibrator

Getting Started

Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer

SAMPLE GAS SOURCE
Attach a sample inlet line to the SAMPLE inlet port. The sample input line should not
be more than 2 meters long.


Maximum pressure of any gas at the sample inlet should not exceed 1.5 in-hg above
ambient pressure and ideally should equal ambient atmospheric pressure.



In applications where the sample gas is received from a pressurized manifold, a
vent must be placed on the sample gas before it enters the analyzer.

CALIBRATION GAS SOURCES
The source of calibration gas is also attached to the SAMPLE inlet, but only when a
calibration operation is actually being performed.

Note

Zero air and span gas inlets should supply their respective gases in
excess of the 800 cc3/min demand of the analyzer.
INPUT GAS VENTING
The span gas, zero air supply and sample gas line MUST be vented in order to ensure
that the gases input do not exceed the maximum inlet pressure of the analyzer as well as
to prevent back diffusion and pressure effects. These vents should be:


At least 0.2m long;



No more than 2m long and;



Vented outside the shelter or immediate area surrounding the instrument.

EXHAUST OUTLET
Attach an exhaust line to the analyzer’s EXHAUST outlet fitting. The exhaust line
should be:



PTEF tubing; minimum O.D ¼”;



A maximum of 10 meters long;



Vented outside the T300/T300M Analyzer’s enclosure.

06864B DCN6314

Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer

Getting Started

3.3.2.2. PNEUMATIC LAYOUT FOR BASIC CONFIGURATION

Figure 3-20:

T300/T300M Internal Gas Flow (Basic Configuration)

3.3.2.3. PNEUMATIC CONNECTIONS FOR AMBIENT ZERO/AMBIENT SPAN VALVE OPTION
This valve option is intended for applications where:


Zero air is supplied by a zero air generator like the Teledyne API’s T701 and;



Span gas is supplied by Gas Dilution Calibrator like the Teledyne API’s T700.

Internal zero/span and sample/cal valves control the flow of gas through the instrument,
but because the generator and calibrator limit the flow of zero air and span gas, no
shutoff valves are required.
See Figure 3-4 for the location of gas inlets.

06864B DCN6314

Getting Started

Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer

Figure 3-21:

Pneumatic Connections – Option 50A: Zero/Span Calibration Valves

SAMPLE GAS SOURCE
Attach a sample inlet line to the sample inlet port. The SAMPLE input line should not
be more than 2 meters long.


Maximum pressure of any gas at the sample inlet should not exceed 1.5 in-hg above
ambient pressure and ideally should equal ambient atmospheric pressure.



In applications where the sample gas is received from a pressurized manifold, a
vent must be placed on the sample gas before it enters the analyzer.

CALIBRATION GAS SOURCES
A vent may or may not be required when a T700-series is used with this option,
depending on how the T700-series model output manifold is configured.
SPAN GAS:


Attach a gas line from the source of calibration gas (e.g. a Teledyne API’s T700
Dynamic Dilution Calibrator) to the SPAN inlet at 30 psig.

ZERO AIR:


Zero air is supplied via a zero air generator such as a Teledyne API’s T701.



An adjustable valve is installed in the zero air supply line to regulate the gas flow.

INPUT GAS VENTING
The zero air supply and sample gas line MUST be vented in order to ensure that the
gases input do not exceed the maximum inlet pressure of the analyzer as well as to
prevent back diffusion and pressure effects. These vents should be:


At least 0.2m long;



No more than 2m long and;

Vented outside the shelter or immediate area surrounding the instrument.
66

06864B DCN6314

Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer

Getting Started

EXHAUST OUTLET
Attach an exhaust line to the analyzer’s EXHAUST outlet fitting. The exhaust line
should be:


PTEF tubing; minimum O.D ¼”;



A maximum of 10 meters long;



Vented outside the analyzer’s enclosure.

3.3.2.4. PNEUMATIC LAYOUT FOR AMBIENT ZERO/AMBIENT SPAN VALVE OPTION

Figure 3-22:
Table 3-8:

Internal Pneumatic Flow OPT 50A – Zero/Span Valves
Zero/Span Valve Operating States for Option 50A

MODE

VALVE

CONDITION

SAMPLE
(Normal
State)

Sample/Cal

Open to SAMPLE inlet

Zero/Span

Open to IZS inlet

Sample/Cal

Open to ZERO/SPAN valve

Zero/Span

Open to IZS inlet

ZERO CAL
SPAN CAL

Sample/Cal

Open to ZERO/SPAN valve

Zero/Span

Open to PRESSURE SPAN inlet

3.3.2.5. PNEUMATIC CONNECTIONS FOR AMBIENT ZERO/PRESSURIZED SPAN
This option requires that both zero air and span gas be supplied from external sources.

06864B DCN6314

Getting Started

Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer



Figure 3-23:

Span gas will be supplied from a pressurized bottle of calibrated CO gas.


A critical flow control orifice, internal to the instrument ensures that the proper
flow rate is maintained.



An internal vent line ensures that the gas pressure of the span gas is reduced to
ambient atmospheric pressure.



A SHUTOFF valve preserves the span gas source when it is not in use.

Zero gas is supplied by either an external scrubber or a zero air generator such as
the Teledyne API’s T701.

Pneumatic Connections – Option 50B: Ambient Zero/Pressurized Span Calibration Valves

SAMPLE GAS SOURCE
Attach a sample inlet line to the sample inlet port. The SAMPLE input line should not
be more than 2 meters long.


Maximum pressure of any gas at the sample inlet should not exceed 1.5 in-hg above
ambient pressure and ideally should equal ambient atmospheric pressure.



In applications where the sample gas is received from a pressurized manifold, a
vent must be placed on the sample gas before it enters the analyzer.

CALIBRATION GAS SOURCES
SPAN GAS


Attach a gas line from the pressurized source of calibration gas (e.g. a bottle of nistsrm gas) to the SPAN inlet at 30 psig.

ZERO AIR


Zero air is supplied via a zero air generator such as a Teledyne API’s T701.



An adjustable valve is installed in the zero air supply line to regulate the gas flow.

06864B DCN6314

Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer

Getting Started



At least 0.2m long;



No more than 2m long and;



Vented outside the shelter or immediate area surrounding the instrument.

A similar vent line should be connected to the VENT SPAN outlet on the back of the
analyzer.
EXHAUST OUTLET
Attach an exhaust line to the analyzer’s EXHAUST outlet fitting. The exhaust line
should be:


PTEF tubing; minimum O.D ¼”;



A maximum of 10 meters long;



Vented outside the analyzer’s enclosure.

3.3.2.6. PNEUMATIC LAYOUT FOR AMBIENT ZERO/PRESSURIZED SPAN OPTION

Figure 3-24:

Internal Pneumatic Flow OPT 50B – Zero/Span/Shutoff Valves

Table 3-9:
MODE
SAMPLE
(Normal
State)
ZERO CAL

SPAN CAL

06864B DCN6314

Zero/Span Valve Operating States for Option 50B
VALVE
Sample/Cal
Zero/Span
Shutoff Valve
Sample/Cal
Zero/Span
Shutoff Valve
Sample/Cal
Zero/Span
Shutoff Valve

CONDITION
Open to SAMPLE inlet
Open to IZS inlet
Closed
Open to ZERO/SPAN valve
Open to IZS inlet
Closed
Open to ZERO/SPAN valve
Open to SHUTOFF valve
Open to PRESSURE SPAN Inlet

Getting Started

Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer

3.3.2.7. PNEUMATIC CONNECTIONS FOR ZERO SCRUBBER/PRESSURIZED SPAN OPTION

Figure 3-25:

Pneumatic Connections – Zero Scrubber/Pressurized Span Calibration Valves (Opt 50E)

SAMPLE GAS SOURCE
Attach a sample inlet line to the sample inlet port. The SAMPLE input line should not
be more than 2 meters long.


Maximum pressure of any gas at the sample inlet should not exceed 1.5 in-hg above
ambient pressure and ideally should equal ambient atmospheric pressure.



In applications where the sample gas is received from a pressurized manifold, a
vent must be placed on the sample gas before it enters the analyzer.

CALIBRATION GAS SOURCES
SPAN GAS:


Attach a gas line from the pressurized source of calibration gas (e.g. a bottle of
NIST-SRM gas) to the span inlet.



Span gas can by generated by a T700 Dynamic Dilution Calibrator.

ZERO AIR:


Zero air is supplied internally via a zero air scrubber that draws ambient air through
the ZERO AIR inlet.

At least 0.2m long;



No more than 2m long and;



Vented outside the shelter or immediate area surrounding the instrument.

A similar vent line should be connected to the VENT SPAN outlet on the back of the
analyzer.

06864B DCN6314

Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer

Getting Started

EXHAUST OUTLET
Attach an exhaust line to the analyzer’s EXHAUST outlet fitting. The exhaust line
should be:


PTEF tubing; minimum O.D ¼”;



A maximum of 10 meters long;



Vented outside the analyzer’s enclosure.

3.3.2.8. PNEUMATIC LAYOUT FOR ZERO SCRUBBER/PRESSURIZED SPAN OPTION

Figure 3-26:

Internal Pneumatic Flow OPT 50E – Zero Scrubber/Pressurized Span

Table 3-10: Zero/Span Valve Operating States for Option 51E
Mode
SAMPLE
(Normal State)

ZERO CAL

SPAN CAL

06864B DCN6314

Valve

Condition

Sample/Cal

Open to SAMPLE inlet

Zero/Span

Open to internal ZERO AIR
scrubber

Shutoff Valve

Closed

Sample/Cal

Open to zero/span valve

Zero/Span

Open to internal ZERO AIR
scrubber

Shutoff Valve

Closed

Sample/Cal

Open to ZERO/SPAN valve

Zero/Span

Open to SHUTOFF valve

Shutoff Valve

Open to PRESSURE SPAN
inlet

Getting Started

Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer

3.3.2.9. PNEUMATIC CONNECTIONS FOR ZERO SCRUBBER/AMBIENT SPAN OPTION
Option 50H is operationally and pneumatically similar to Option 50A described earlier,
except that the zero air is generated by an internal zero air scrubber. This means that the
IZS inlet can simply be left open to ambient air.
Internal zero/span and sample/cal valves control the flow of gas through the instrument,
but because the generator and calibrator limit the flow of zero air and span gas no
shutoff valves are required.
See Figure 3-4 for the location of gas inlets and outlets and span gas no shutoff valves
are required.

Figure 3-27:

Pneumatic Connections – Option 50H: Zero/Span Calibration Valves

SAMPLE GAS SOURCE
Attach a sample inlet line to the sample inlet port. The SAMPLE input line should not
be more than 2 meters long.



Maximum pressure of any gas at the sample inlet should not exceed 1.5 in-Hg
above ambient pressure and ideally should equal ambient atmospheric pressure.



In applications where the sample gas is received from a pressurized manifold, a
vent must be placed on the sample gas before it enters the analyzer.

06864B DCN6314

Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer

Getting Started

CALIBRATION GAS SOURCES
SPAN GAS


Attach a gas line from the source of calibration gas (e.g. a Teledyne API’s T700E
Dynamic Dilution Calibrator) to the SPAN inlet.

ZERO AIR


Zero air is supplied internally via a zero air scrubber that draws ambient air through
the IZS inlet.

At least 0.2m long;



No more than 2m long and;



Vented outside the shelter or immediate area surrounding the instrument.

EXHAUST OUTLET
Attach an exhaust line to the analyzer’s EXHAUST outlet fitting. The exhaust line
should be:

06864B DCN6314



PTEF tubing; minimum O.D ¼”;



A maximum of 10 meters long;



Vented outside the analyzer’s enclosure.

Getting Started

Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer

3.3.2.10. PNEUMATIC LAYOUT FOR ZERO SCRUBBER/ AMBIENT SPAN OPTION

Figure 3-28:

Internal Pneumatic Flow OPT 50H – Zero Scrubber/Ambient Span

Table 3-11: Zero/Span Valve Operating States for Option 50H
MODE

VALVE

CONDITION

SAMPLE
(Normal
State)

Sample/Cal

Open to SAMPLE inlet

Zero/Span

Open to ZERO AIR scrubber

ZERO CAL
SPAN CAL

Sample/Cal

Open to ZERO/SPAN valve

Zero/Span

Open to ZERO AIR scrubber

Sample/Cal

Open to ZERO/SPAN valve

Zero/Span

Open to PRESSURE SPAN inlet

3.3.2.11. CALIBRATION GASES
Zero air and span gas are required for accurate calibration.
ZERO AIR
Zero air is a gas that is similar in chemical composition to the earth’s atmosphere but
scrubbed of all components that might affect the analyzer’s readings, in this case CO
and water vapor. If your analyzer is equipped with an Internal Zero Span (IZS) or an
external zero air scrubber option, it is capable of creating zero air.

06864B DCN6314

Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer

Getting Started

If the analyzer is NOT equipped with the optional CO2 sensor, zero air should be
scrubbed of CO2 as well, as this gas can also have an interfering effect on CO
measurements.
For analyzers without an IZS or external zero air scrubber option, a zero air generator
such as the Teledyne API Model T701 can be used.
SPAN GAS
Span gas is a gas specifically mixed to match the chemical composition of the type of
gas being measured at near full scale of the desired measurement range. In the case of
CO measurements made with the T300 or T300M Analyzer, it is recommended that you
use a span gas with a CO concentration equal to 80-90% of the measurement range for
your application.
EXAMPLE: If the application is to measure between 0 ppm and 500 ppb, an appropriate
span gas concentration would be 400-450 ppb CO in N2.
Cylinders of calibrated CO gas traceable to NIST-Standard Reference Material
specifications (also referred to as SRMs or EPA protocol calibration gases) are
commercially available. Table 3-12 lists specific NIST-SRM reference numbers for
various concentrations of CO.
Table 3-12:

NIST-SRM's Available for Traceability of CO Calibration Gases

NIST-SRM

TYPE

1680b

CO in N2

500 ppm

1681b

CO in N2

1000 ppm

2613a

CO in Zero Air

20 ppm

2614a

CO in Zero Air

45 ppm

2659a

O2 in N2

21% by weight

2626a

CO2 in N2

4% by weight

2745*

CO2 in N2

16% by weight

1
2

NOMINAL CONCENTRATION

Used to calibrate optional O2 sensor.
Used to calibrate optional CO2 sensor.

SPAN GAS FOR MULTIPOINT CALIBRATION
Some applications, such as EPA monitoring, require a multipoint calibration procedure
where span gases of different concentrations are needed. We recommend using a bottle
of calibrated CO gas of higher concentration in conjunction with a gas dilution calibrator
such as a Teledyne API’s T700. This type of calibrator precisely mixes a high
concentration gas with zero air (both supplied externally) to accurately produce span gas
of the correct concentration. Linearity profiles can be automated with this model and
run unattended over night.

06864B DCN6314

Getting Started

Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer

3.4. STARTUP, FUNCTIONAL CHECKS, AND INITIAL
CALIBRATION
IMPORTANT

IMPACT ON READINGS OR DATA
The analyzer’s cover must be installed to ensure that the temperatures of
the GFC Wheel and absorption cell assemblies are properly controlled.
If you are unfamiliar with the T300/T300M theory of operation, we recommend that you
read Section 13. For information on navigating the analyzer’s software menus, see the
menu trees described in Appendix A.

3.4.1. STARTUP
After the electrical and pneumatic connections are made, an initial functional check is in
order. Turn on the instrument. The pump and exhaust fan should start immediately. The
display will briefly show a momentary splash screen of the Teledyne API logo and other
information during the initialization process while the CPU loads the operating system,
the firmware and the configuration data at the start of initialization.
The analyzer should automatically switch to Sample Mode after completing the boot-up
sequence and start monitoring CO gas. However, there is an approximately one hour
warm-up period before reliable gas measurements can be taken. During the warm-up
period, the front panel display may show messages in the Parameters field.

3.4.2. WARNING MESSAGES
Because internal temperatures and other conditions may be outside the specified limits
during the analyzer’s warm-up period, the software will suppress most warning
conditions for 30 minutes after power up. If warning messages persist after the 60
minutes warm-up period is over, investigate their cause using the troubleshooting
guidelines in Section 12.
To view and clear warning messages, press:

06864B DCN6314

Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer

Getting Started

Table 3-13 lists brief descriptions of the warning messages that may occur during start
up.

Table 3-13: Possible Warning Messages at Start-Up
Message

MEANING

ANALOG CAL WARNING

The instrument's A/D circuitry or one of its analog outputs is not calibrated.

BENCH TEMP WARNING

Optical bench temperature is outside the specified limits.

BOX TEMP WARNING

The temperature inside the T300/T300M chassis is outside the specified limits.

CANNOT DYN SPAN2

Remote span calibration failed while the dynamic span feature was set to
turned on.

CANNOT DYN ZERO3

Remote zero calibration failed while the dynamic zero feature was set to turned
on.

CONFIG INITIALIZED

Configuration was reset to factory defaults or was erased.

DATA INITIALIZED
PHOTO TEMP WARNING

Photometer temperature outside of warning limits specified by
PHOTO_TEMP_SET variable.

REAR BOARD NOT DET

Motherboard was not detected during power up.

RELAY BOARD WARN

CPU is unable to communicate with the relay PCA.

SAMPLE FLOW WARN

The flow rate of the sample gas is outside the specified limits.

SAMPLE PRESS WARN

Sample pressure outside of operational parameters.

SAMPLE TEMP WARN

2
3

The temperature of the sample gas is outside the specified limits.

SOURCE WARNING

The IR source may be faulty.

SYSTEM RESET1

The computer was rebooted.

WHEEL TEMP WARNING
1

DAS data storage was erased.

The Gas Filter Correlation Wheel temperature is outside the specified limits.

Typically clears 45 minutes after power up.
Clears the next time successful zero calibration is performed.
Clears the next time successful span calibration is performed.

Table 3-14 lists brief descriptions of the warning messages that may occur during start
up for T300 analyzers with optional second gas options or alarms installed.

06864B DCN6314

Getting Started

Table 3-14:

Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer

Possible Startup Warning Messages – T300 Analyzers with Options
Message

Meaning

O2 CELL TEMP WARN1
IZS TEMP WARNING2

On units with IZS options installed: The permeation tube temperature is outside
of specified limits.

O2 ALARM 1 WARN1, 4

O2 Alarm limit #1 has been triggered.4

O2 ALARM 2 WARN1, 4

O2 Alarm limit #2 has been triggered.4

CO2 ALARM 1 WARN3, 4

CO2 Alarm limit #1 has been triggered.4

CO2 ALARM 2 WARN3, 4`

CO2 Alarm limit #2 has been triggered.4

SO2 ALARM1 WARN4

SO2 Alarm limit #1 has been triggered.4

SO2 Alarm limit #2 has been triggered.4

SO2 ALARM2 WARN
1
2
3
4

O2 sensor cell temperature outside of warning limits specified by
O2_CELL_SET variable.

Only appears when the optional O2 sensor is installed.
Only appears when the optional internal zero span (IZS) option is installed.
Only appears when the optional CO2 sensor is installed.
Only Appears when the optional gas concentration alarms are installed

3.4.3. FUNCTIONAL CHECKS
After the analyzer’s components have warmed up for at least 60 minutes, verify that the
software properly supports any hardware options that were installed: navigate through
the analyzer’s software menus, see the menu trees described in Appendix A.
Then check to make sure that the analyzer is functioning within allowable operating
parameters:


Appendix C includes a list of test functions viewable from the analyzer’s front panel
as well as their expected values.



These functions are also useful tools for diagnosing performance problems with your
analyzer (see Section 12.1.2).



The enclosed Final Test and Validation Data Sheet (P/N 04271) lists these values
as they were before the instrument left the factory.

To view the current values of these parameters press the following control button
sequence on the analyzer’s front panel. Remember that until the unit has completed its
warm-up these parameters may not have stabilized.

06864B DCN6314

Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer

Getting Started

3.4.4. INITIAL CALIBRATION
To perform the following calibration you must have sources for zero air and span gas
available for input into the sample port on the back of the analyzer. See Section 3.3.2
for instructions for connecting these gas sources.
The initial calibration should be carried out using the same reporting range set up as
used during the analyzer’s factory calibration. This will allow you to compare your
calibration results to the factory calibration as listed on the Final Test and Validation
Data Sheet.
If both available DAS parameters for a specific gas type are being reported via the
instruments analog outputs e.g. CONC1 and CONC2 when the DUAL range mode is
activated, separate calibrations should be carried out for each parameter.

NOTE

06864B DCN6314



Use the LOW button when calibrating for CONC1 (equivalent to RANGE1).



Use the HIGH button when calibrating for CONC2 (equivalent to RANGE2).

The following procedure assumes that the instrument does not have any
of the available Valve Options installed. See Section 9.3 for instructions
for calibrating instruments that have valve options.

Getting Started

Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer

3.4.4.1. INTERFERENTS FOR CO MEASUREMENTS
It should be noted that the gas filter correlation method for detecting CO is subject to
interference from a number of other gases that absorb IR in a similar fashion to CO.
Most notable of these are water vapor, CO2, N2O (nitrous oxide) and CH4 (methane).
The T300/T300M has been successfully tested for its ability to reject interference from
of these sources, however high concentrations of these gases can interfere with the
instrument’s ability to make low-level CO measurements.
For a more detailed discussion of this topic, see Section 13.2.1.3.
3.4.4.2. INITIAL CALIBRATION PROCEDURE
The following procedure assumes that:


The instrument DOES NOT have any of the available calibration valve or gas inlet
options installed;



Cal gas will be supplied through the SAMPLE gas inlet on the back of the analyzer
(see Figure 3-4)



The pneumatic setup matches that described in Section 3.3.2.1.

VERIFYING THE T300/T300M REPORTING RANGE SETTINGS
While it is possible to perform the following procedure with any range setting we
recommend that you perform this initial checkout using following reporting range
settings:



Unit of Measure: PPM



Analog Output Reporting Range: 50 ppm



Mode Setting: SNGL

06864B DCN6314

Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer

Getting Started

While these are the default setting for the T300/T300M Analyzer, it is recommended
that you verify them before proceeding with the calibration procedure, by pressing:
SAMPLE
CAL

SETUP X.X

SETUP

PRIMARY SETUP MENU

CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE

Verify that the MODE
is set for SNGL.
If it is not, press
SINGL ENTR.

Verify that the RANGE is
set for 50.0
If it is not, toggle each
numeric button until the
proper range is set, then
press ENTR.

Verify that the UNIT
is set for PPM
If it is not, press
PPM ENTR.

06864B DCN6314

SETUP X.X

RANGE CONTROL MENU

MODE SET

UNIT

SETUP X.X

RANGE MODE:SINGL

DIL

EXIT

SNGL DUAL AUTO

ENTR EXIT

SETUP X.X

RANGE CONTROL MENU

MODE SET

UNIT

SETUP X.X

RANGE: 50.0 Conc

DIL

EXIT

SETUP X.X

RANGE CONTROL MENU

MODE SET

UNIT

SETUP X.X

CONC UNITS:PPM

PPB

EXIT

DIL

PPM UGM MGM

ENTR EXIT

EXIT

Press EXIT as
needed to
return to
SAMPLE
mode.

ENTR EXIT

Getting Started

Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer

DILUTION RATIO SET UP
If the dilution ratio option is enabled on your T300/T300M Analyzer and your
application involves diluting the sample gas before it enters the analyzer, set the dilution
ratio as follows:

06864B DCN6314

Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer

Getting Started

SET CO SPAN GAS CONCENTRATION
Set the expected CO pan gas concentration. This should be 80-90% of range of
concentration range for which the analyzer’s analog output range is set.

06864B DCN6314

Getting Started

Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer

ZERO/SPAN CALIBRATION
To perform the zero/span calibration procedure, press:

Figure 3-29:
84

Zero/Span Calibration Procedure
06864B DCN6314

Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer

Getting Started

3.4.4.3. O2 SENSOR CALIBRATION PROCEDURE
If your T300/T300M is equipped with the optional O2 sensor, this sensor should be
calibrated during installation of the instrument. See Section 9.7.1 for instructions.
3.4.4.4. CO2 SENSOR CALIBRATION PROCEDURE
If your T300/T300M is equipped with the optional CO2 sensor, this sensor should be
calibrated during installation of the instrument. See Section 9.7.2 for instructions.
Note

06864B DCN6314

Once you have completed the above set-up procedures, please fill out
the Quality Questionnaire that was shipped with your unit and return it
to Teledyne API. This information is vital to our efforts in continuously
improving our service and our products. THANK YOU.

Getting Started

Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer

This page intentionally left blank.

06864B DCN6314

PART II
OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS

06864B DCN6314

Getting Started

Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer

06864B DCN6314

4. OVERVIEW OF OPERATING MODES
To assist in navigating the analyzer’s software, a series of menu trees can be found in
Appendix A of this manual.
Note

Some control buttons on the touch screen do not appear if they are not
applicable to the menu that you’re in, the task that you are performing, the
command you are attempting to send, or to incorrect settings input by the
user. For example, the ENTR button may disappear if you input a setting
that is invalid or out of the allowable range for that parameter, such as
trying to set the 24-hour clock to 25:00:00. Once you adjust the setting to
an allowable value, the ENTR button will re-appear.
The T300/T300M software has a variety of operating modes. Most commonly, the
analyzer will be operating in Sample Mode. In this mode a continuous read-out of the
CO concentration can be viewed on the front panel and output as an analog voltage from
rear panel terminals, calibrations can be performed and TEST functions and WARNING
messages can be examined. If the analyzer is configured to measure a second gas (e.g.
CO along with O2 or CO2) the display will show a readout of both concentrations.
The second most important operating mode is SETUP mode. This mode is used for
performing certain configuration operations, such as for the DAS system, the reporting
ranges, or the serial (RS 232 / RS 485 / Ethernet) communication channels. The SETUP
mode is also used for performing various diagnostic tests during troubleshooting.

Figure 4-1:

06864B DCN6314

Front Panel Display

Overview of Operating Modes

Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer

The mode field of the front panel display indicates to the user which operating mode the
unit is currently running.
Besides SAMPLE and SETUP, other modes the analyzer can be operated in are:
Table 4-1:

Analyzer Operating Modes

MODE

EXPLANATION

DIAG

One of the analyzer’s diagnostic modes is active (refer to Section 5.9).

LO CAL A

Unit is performing LOW SPAN (midpoint) calibration initiated automatically by the analyzer’s
AUTOCAL feature

LO CAL R

Unit is performing LOW SPAN (midpoint) calibration initiated remotely through the COM ports or
digital control inputs.

M-P CAL

This is the basic calibration mode of the instrument and is activated by pressing the CAL button.

SAMPLE

Sampling normally, flashing text indicates adaptive filter is on.

SAMPLE A

Indicates that unit is in SAMPLE mode and AUTOCAL feature is activated.

SETUP X.#2

SETUP mode is being used to configure the analyzer. The gas measurement will continue during
this process.

SPAN CAL A1

Unit is performing SPAN calibration initiated automatically by the analyzer’s AUTOCAL feature

SPAN CAL M1

Unit is performing SPAN calibration initiated manually by the user.

SPAN CAL R

1
2

Unit is performing SPAN calibration initiated remotely through the COM ports or digital control
inputs.

ZERO CAL A1

Unit is performing ZERO calibration procedure initiated automatically by the AUTOCAL feature

ZERO CAL M1

Unit is performing ZERO calibration procedure initiated manually by the user.

ZERO CAL R1

Unit is performing ZERO calibration procedure initiated remotely through the COM ports or digital
control inputs.

Only Appears on units with Z/S valve or IZS options.
The revision of the analyzer firmware is displayed following the word SETUP, e.g., SETUP G.3.

4.1. SAMPLE MODE
This is the analyzer’s standard operating mode. In this mode the instrument is analyzing
the gas in the sample chamber, calculating CO concentration and reporting this
information to the user via the front panel display, the analog outputs and, if set up
properly, the RS-232/RS-485/Ethernet/USB ports.

4.1.1. TEST FUNCTIONS
A series of TEST functions is available for viewing at the front panel whenever the
analyzer is at the SAMPLE mode. These parameters provide information about the
present operating status of the instrument and are useful during troubleshooting (refer to
Section 12.1.2). They can also be recorded in one of the DAS channels (refer to Section
7.2) for data analysis. To view the test functions, press one of the buttons
repeatedly in either direction.

06864B DCN6314

Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer

Figure 4-2:

IMPORTANT

Overview of Operating Modes

Viewing T300/T300M Test Functions

IMPACT ON READING OR DATA
A value of “XXXX” displayed for any of the TEST functions indicates an
out-of-range reading or the analyzer’s inability to calculate it. All
pressure measurements are represented in terms of absolute pressure.
Absolute, atmospheric pressure is 29.92 in-Hg-A at sea level. It
decreases about 1 in-Hg per 300 m gain in altitude. A variety of factors
such as air conditioning and passing storms can cause changes in the
absolute atmospheric pressure.

06864B DCN6314

Overview of Operating Modes
Table 4-2:

Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer

Test Functions Defined

PARAMETER

DISPLAY TITLE

UNITS

MEANING

Stability

STABIL

PPB3, PPM
UGM3, MGM

Standard deviation of CO concentration readings. Data points are
recorded every ten seconds using the last 25 data points. This
function can be reset to show O2 or CO2 stability in instruments with
those sensor options installed.

Range

RANGE
RANGE11
RANGE21

PPB, PPM,
UGM, MGM

The full scale limit at which the reporting range of the analyzer is
currently set. THIS IS NOT the Physical Range of the instrument.
See Section 5.4.1 for more information.

O2 RANGE

CO2 RANGE

O2 Range 1
2

CO2 Range

The range setting for the optional O2 Sensor.
The range setting for the optional CO2 Sensor.

CO Measure

CO MEAS

The demodulated, peak IR detector output during the measure
portion of the GFC Wheel cycle.

CO Reference

CO REF

The demodulated, peak IR detector output during the reference
portion of the GFC Wheel cycle.

Measurement /
Reference Ratio

MR Ratio

The result of CO MEAS divided by CO REF. This ratio is the
primary value used to compute CO concentration. The value
displayed is not linearized.

Sample Pressure

PRES

In-Hg-A

The absolute pressure of the Sample gas as measured by a
pressure sensor located inside the sample chamber.

Sample Flow

SAMPLE FL

3
cm /min

Sample mass flow rate as measured by the flow rate sensor in the
sample gas stream.

Sample
Temperature
Bench
Temperature
Wheel
Temperature

SAMP TEMP

C

The temperature of the gas inside the sample chamber.

BENCH TEMP

C

Optical bench temperature.

WHEEL TEMP

C

GFC Wheel temperature.

Box Temperature

BOX TEMP

C

The temperature inside the analyzer chassis.

O2 Cell
1
Temperature
Photo-detector
Temp. Control
Voltage

O2 CELL TEMP3

C

The current temperature of the O2 sensor measurement cell.

PHT DRIVE

The drive voltage being supplied to the thermoelectric coolers of the
IR photo-detector by the sync/demod Board.

Slope

SLOPE

The sensitivity of the instrument as calculated during the last
calibration activity.

Offset

OFFSET

The overall offset of the instrument as calculated during the last
calibration activity.

O2 Sensor
Slope 1
O2 Sensor Offset

O2 SLOPE

O2 slope, computed during zero/span calibration.

O2 OFFSET

O2 offset, computed during zero/span calibration.

CO2 SLOPE

CO2 slope, computed during zero/span calibration.

CO2 OFFSET

CO2 offset, computed during zero/span calibration.

TIME

The current time. This is used to create a time stamp on DAS
readings, and by the AUTOCAL feature to trigger calibration events.

CO2 Sensor
Slope2
CO2 Sensor
Offset 2
Current Time
1

Only appears when the optional O2 sensor is installed.
Only appears when the optional CO2 sensor is installed.
3
Only available on the T300.
2

06864B DCN6314

Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer

Overview of Operating Modes

4.1.2. WARNING MESSAGES
The most common instrument failures will be reported as a warning on the analyzer’s
front panel and through the COMM ports. Section 12.1.1 explains how to use these
messages to troubleshoot problems. Section 4.1.2 shows how to view and clear warning
messages.
Table 4-3:

List of Warning Messages

MEANING

MESSAGE
ANALOG CAL WARNING

The instrument’s A/D circuitry or one of its analog outputs is not calibrated.

BENCH TEMP WARNING

The temperature of the optical bench is outside the specified limits.

BOX TEMP WARNING

The temperature inside the chassis is outside the specified limits.

CANNOT DYN SPAN

Remote span calibration failed while the dynamic span feature was set to turned on.

CANNOT DYN ZERO

Remote zero calibration failed while the dynamic zero feature was set to turned on.

CONC ALRM1 WARNING

CONC ALRM2 WARNING

CONFIG INITIALIZED

DAS data storage was erased.
2

O2 CELL TEMP WARN

O2 sensor cell temperature outside of warning limits.

PHOTO TEMP WARNING

The temperature of the IR photo detector is outside the specified limits.

REAR BOARD NOT DET

The CPU is unable to communicate with the motherboard.

RELAY BOARD WARN

The firmware is unable to communicate with the relay board.

SAMPLE FLOW WARN

The flow rate of the sample gas is outside the specified limits.

SAMPLE PRESS WARN

Sample gas pressure outside of operational parameters.

SAMPLE TEMP WARN
SOURCE WARNING
SYSTEM RESET

WHEEL TEMP WARNING
2

Concentration alarm 2 is enabled and the measured CO level is ≥ the set point.
Configuration storage was reset to factory configuration or erased.

DATA INITIALIZED

Concentration alarm 1 is enabled and the measured CO level is ≥ the set point.

The temperature of the sample gas is outside the specified limits.

The IR source may be faulty.
The computer was rebooted.
The Gas Filter Correlation Wheel temperature is outside the specified limits.

Alarm warnings only present when 0ptional alarm package is activated.
Only enabled when the optional O2 Sensor is installed.

06864B DCN6314

Overview of Operating Modes

Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer

To view and clear warning messages:

Figure 4-3:

Viewing and Clearing T300/T300M WARNING Messages

4.2. CALIBRATION MODE
Pressing the CAL button switches the T300/T300M into calibration mode. In this mode
the user can calibrate the instrument with the use of calibrated zero or span gases. This
mode is also used to check the current calibration status of the instrument.


For more information about setting up and performing standard calibration
operations or checks, see Section 9.



For more information about setting up and performing EPA equivalent calibrations,
see Section 10.

If the instrument includes one of the available zero/span valve options, the SAMPLE
mode display will also include CALZ and CALS buttons. Pressing either of these
buttons also puts the instrument into calibration mode.


The CALZ button is used to initiate a calibration of the analyzer’s zero point using
internally generated zero air.



The CALS button is used to calibrate the span point of the analyzer’s current
reporting range using span gas.

For more information concerning calibration valve options, see Table 1-1.
For information on using the automatic calibration feature (ACAL) in conjunction with
the one of the calibration valve options, see Section 9.4.

IMPORTANT

IMPACT ON READINGS OR DATA
It is recommended that this span calibration be performed at 80-90% of
full scale of the analyzer’s currently selected reporting range.
EXAMPLES: If the reporting range is set for 0 to 50 ppm, an appropriate
span point would be 40-45 ppm. If the of the reporting range is set for 0
to 1000 ppb, an appropriate span point would be 800-900 ppb.

06864B DCN6314

Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer

Overview of Operating Modes

4.3. SETUP MODE
The SETUP mode contains a variety of choices that are used to configure the analyzer’s
hardware and software features, perform diagnostic procedures, gather information on
the instrument’s performance, and configure or access data from the internal data
acquisition system (DAS). For a visual representation of the software menu trees, refer
to Appendix A.
Setup Mode is divided between Primary and Secondary Setup menus and can be
protected through password security.

4.3.1. PASSWORD SECURITY
Setup Mode can be protected by password security through the SETUP>PASS menu
(Section 5.5) to prevent unauthorized or inadvertent configuration adjustments.

4.3.2. PRIMARY SETUP MENU
4.3.3. THE AREAS ACCESSIBLE UNDER THE Setup MODE ARE SHOWN IN
TABLE 4-4 AND SECONDARY SETUP MENU (SETUP>MORE)
Table 4-5.
Table 4-4:

Primary Setup Mode Features and Functions

MODE OR FEATURE

CONTROL
BUTTON

Analyzer Configuration

CFG

Auto Cal Feature

ACAL

Internal Data Acquisition
(DAS)
Analog Output Reporting
Range Configuration
Calibration Password Security

DAS
RNGE

Internal Clock Configuration

PASS
CLK

Advanced SETUP features

06864B DCN6314

DESCRIPTION

Lists button hardware and software configuration information
Used to set up and operate the AutoCal feature.
Only appears if the analyzer has one of the internal valve
options installed.
Used to set up the DAS system and view recorded data
Used to configure the output signals generated by the
instruments Analog outputs.
Turns the calibration password feature ON/OFF.
Used to Set or adjust the instrument’s internal clock.
This button accesses the instruments secondary setup menu.

MANUAL
SECTION

5
5.2
and
9.4
7
5.7
5.3
5.6
See
Table 6-5

Overview of Operating Modes

Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer

4.3.4. SECONDARY SETUP MENU (SETUP>MORE)
Table 4-5:

Secondary Setup Mode (SETUP>MORE) Features and Functions
CONTROL
BUTTON

MODE OR FEATURE

External Communication
Channel Configuration

COMM

System Status Variables

VARS

System Diagnostic Features
and
Analog Output Configuration

DIAG

Alarm Limit Configuration1

ALRM

MANUAL
SECTION

DESCRIPTION

Used to set up and operate the analyzer’s various serial
channels including RS-232,RS-485, modem communication,
Ethernet and/or USB.
Used to view various variables related to the instruments current
operational status.
 Changes made to any variable are not recorded in the
instrument’s memory until the ENTR button is pressed.
 Pressing the EXIT button ignores the new setting.
Used to access a variety of functions that are used to configure,
test or diagnose problems with a variety of the analyzer’s basic
systems.
Most notably, the menus used to configure the output signals
generated by the instruments Analog outputs are located here.
Used to turn the instrument’s two alarms on and off as well as
set the trigger limits for each.

5.7

5.8

5.9

5.10

Alarm warnings only present when optional alarm package is activated.

IMPORTANT

IMPACT ON READINGS OR DATA
Any changes made to a variable during the SETUP procedures are not
acknowledged by the instrument until the ENTR button is pressed. If the
EXIT button is pressed before the ENTR button, the analyzer will beep,
alerting the user that the newly entered value has not been accepted.

06864B DCN6314

5. SETUP MENU
The SETUP menu is sued to set instrument parameters for performing configuration,
calibration, reporting and diagnostics operations according to user needs.

5.1. SETUP  CFG: CONFIGURATION INFORMATION
Pressing the CFG button displays the instrument’s configuration information. This
display lists the analyzer model, serial number, firmware revision, software library
revision, CPU type and other information.


Special instrument or software features or installed options may also be listed here.



Use this information to identify the software and hardware installed in your
T300/T300M Analyzer when contacting customer service.

To access the configuration table, press:
SAMPLE
CAL

MODEL TYPE AND NUMBER
PART NUMBER
SERIAL NUMBER
SOFTWARE REVISION
LIBRARY REVISION
iCHIP SOFTWARE REVISION
CPU TYPE & OS REVISION
DATE FACTORY CONFIGURATION
SAVED

06864B DCN6314

SETUP

PRIMARY SETUP MENU

CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE
Press NEXT or PREV to move back and
forth through the following list of
Configuration information:

CO= XX.XX

SETUP
PREV NEXT

EXIT

T300 CO Analyzer
EXIT

Press EXIT at
any time to
return to the
SETUP menu.

Setup Menu

Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer

5.2. SETUP  ACAL: AUTOMATIC CALIBRATION
Instruments with one of the internal valve options installed can be set to automatically
run calibration procedures and calibration checks. These automatic procedures are
programmed using the submenus and functions found under the ACAL menu.
A menu tree showing the ACAL menu’s entire structure can be found in Appendix A-1
of this manual.
Instructions for using the ACAL feature are located in the Section 9.4 of this manual
along with all other information related to calibrating the T300/T300M Analyzer.

5.3. SETUP DAS: INTERNAL DATA ACQUISITION SYSTEM
Use the SETUP>DAS menu to capture and record data. Refer to Section 7 for
configuration and operation details.

5.4. SETUP  RNGE: ANALOG OUTPUT REPORTING RANGE
CONFIGURATION
Use the SETUP>RNGE menu to configure output reporting ranges, including scaled
reporting ranges to handle data resolution challenges. This section also describes
configuration for Single, Dual, and Auto Range modes.

5.4.1. ANALOG OUTPUT RANGES FOR CO CONCENTRATION
The analyzer has several active analog output signals, accessible through the ANALOG
OUT connector on the rear panel.

06864B DCN6314

Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer

Setup Menu

ANALOG OUT
Only active if the Optional
CO2 or O2 Sensor is

CO concentration
outputs

Test Channel
A1
+

LOW range when DUAL
mode is selected

Figure 5-1:

A2
-

A3
-

A4
-

HIGH range when DUAL
mode is selected

Analog Output Connector Pin Out

The outputs can be configured either at the factory or by the user for full scale outputs of
0.1 VDC, 1VDC, 5VDC or 10VDC.
Additionally, A1, A2 and A3 may be equipped with optional 0-20 mADC current loop
drivers and configured for any current output within that range (e.g. 0-20, 2-20, 4-20,
etc.). The user may also adjust the signal level and scaling of the actual output voltage
or current to match the input requirements of the recorder or datalogger (See Section
5.9.3.9).
In its basic configuration, the A1 and A2 channels output a signal that is proportional to
the CO concentration of the sample gas. Several modes are available which allow them
to operate independently or be slaved together (See Section 5.4.3).
EXAMPLE:
A1 OUTPUT: Output Signal = 0-5 VDC representing 0-1000 ppm concentration values
A2 OUTPUT: Output Signal = 0 – 10 VDC representing 0-500 ppm concentration
values.
Output A3 is only active if the CO2 or O2 sensor option is installed. In this case a signal
representing the currently measured CO2 or O2 concentration is output on this channel.
The output, labeled A4 is special. It can be set by the user (See Section 5.9.8.1) to
output several of the test functions accessible through the buttons of the
units sample display.

06864B DCN6314

Setup Menu

Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer

5.4.2. PHYSICAL RANGE VS ANALOG OUTPUT REPORTING RANGES
Functionally, the T300 Family of CO Analyzers have one hardware PHYSICAL
RANGE that is capable of determining CO concentrations between across a very wide
array of values.
Table 5-1:

T300 Family Physical Range by Model
MODEL

RANGE

T300

0 – 1000 ppm

T300M

0 – 5000 ppm

This architecture improves reliability and accuracy by avoiding the need for extra,
switchable, gain-amplification circuitry. Once properly calibrated, the analyzer’s front
panel will accurately report concentrations along the entire span of its physical range.
Because many applications use only a small part of the analyzer’s full physical range,
this can create data resolution problems for most analog recording devices. For
example, in an application where an T300 is being used to measure an expected
concentration of typically less than 50 ppm CO, the full scale of expected values is only
4% of the instrument’s full 1000 ppm measurement range. Unmodified, the
corresponding output signal would also be recorded across only 2.5% of the range of the
recording device.
The T300/T300M Analyzers solve this problem by allowing the user to select a scaled
reporting range for the analog outputs that only includes that portion of the physical
range relevant to the specific application.
Only this REPORTING RANGE of the analog outputs is scaled; the physical range of
the analyzer and the readings displayed on the front panel remain unaltered.
Note

Neither the DAS values stored in the CPU’s memory nor the concentration
values reported on the front panel are affected by the settings chosen for
the reporting range(s) of the instrument.

5.4.3. REPORTING RANGE MODES: SINGLE, DUAL, AUTO RANGES
The T300/T300M provides three analog output range modes to choose from.


Single range (SNGL) mode sets a single maximum range for the analog output. If
single range is selected both outputs are slaved together and will represent the
same measurement span (e.g. 0-50 ppm), however their electronic signal levels
may be configured for different ranges (e.g. 0-10 VDC vs. 0-.1 VDC).



Dual range (DUAL) allows the A1 and A2 outputs to be configured with different
measurement spans as well as separate electronic signal levels.



Auto range (AUTO) mode gives the analyzer to ability to output data via a low range
and high range. When this mode is selected the analyzer will automatically switch
between the two ranges dynamically as the concentration value fluctuates.

Range status is also output via the external digital I/O status outputs (See Section
3.3.1.4).

100

06864B DCN6314

Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer

Setup Menu

To select the Analog Output Range Type press:

Upper span limit setting for the individual range modes are shared. Resetting the span
limit in one mode also resets the span limit for the corresponding range in the other
modes as follows:
SNGL
Range

06864B DCN6314



DUAL
Range1
Range2




AUTO
Low Range
High Range

101

Setup Menu

Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer

5.4.3.1. SINGLE RANGE MODE (SNGL)
Single Range Mode (SNGL) is the default reporting range mode for the analyzer.
When the single range mode is selected (SNGL), all analog CO concentration outputs
(A1 and A2) are slaved together and set to the same reporting range limits (e.g. 500.0
ppb). The span limit of this reporting range can be set to any value within the physical
range of the analyzer.
Although both outputs share the same concentration reporting range, the electronic
signal ranges of the analog outputs may still be configured for different values (e.g. 0-5
VDC, 0-10 VDC, etc; see Section 5.9.3.1)
To select SNGL range mode and to set the upper limit of the range, press:

102

06864B DCN6314

Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer

Setup Menu

5.4.3.2. DUAL RANGE MODE (DUAL)
Selecting the DUAL range mode allows the A1 and A2 outputs to be configured with
different reporting ranges. The analyzer software calls these two ranges low and high.


The LOW range setting corresponds with the analog output labeled A1 on the rear
panel of the instrument.



The HIGH range setting corresponds with the A2 output.

While the software names these two ranges low and high, they do not have to be
configured that way. For example: The low range can be set for a span of 0-1000 ppm
while the high range is set for 0-500 ppm.
In DUAL range mode the RANGE test function displayed on the front panel will be
replaced by two separate functions:


RANGE1: The range setting for the A1 output.



RANGE2: The range setting for the A2 output.

To select the DUAL range mode press following buttonstroke sequence

When the instrument’s range mode is set to DUAL, the concentration field in the upper
right hand corner of the display alternates between displaying the low range value and
the high range value. The concentration currently being displayed is identified as
follows: C1= LOW (or A1) and C2 = HIGH (or A2).

IMPORTANT

06864B DCN6314

IMPACT ON READINGS OR DATA
In DUAL range mode the LOW and HIGH ranges have separate slopes
and offsets for computing CO concentrations. The two ranges must be
independently calibrated.

103

Setup Menu

Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer

To set the upper range limit for each independent reporting range, press:
.

104

06864B DCN6314

Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer

Setup Menu

5.4.3.3. AUTO RANGE MODE (AUTO)
In AUTO range mode, the analyzer automatically switches the reporting range between
two user-defined ranges (low and high).


The unit will switch from low range to high range when the CO2 concentration
exceeds 98% of the low range span.



The unit will return from high range back to low range once both the CO2
concentration falls below 75% of the low range span.

In AUTO Range Mode the instrument reports the same data in the same range on both
the A1 and A2 outputs and automatically switches both outputs between ranges as
described above. Also the RANGE test function displayed on the front panel will be
replaced by two separate functions:


RANGE1: The LOW range setting for all analog outputs.



RANGE2: The HIGH range setting for all analog outputs.

The high/low range status is also reported through the external, digital status bits (See
Section 3.3.1.4).

06864B DCN6314

105

Setup Menu

Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer

To set individual ranges press the following control button sequence.

106

06864B DCN6314

Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer

Setup Menu

5.4.4. RANGE UNITS
The T300/T300M can display concentrations in parts per million (106 mols per mol,
PPM) or milligrams per cubic meter (mg/m3, MG). Changing units affects all of the
display, COMM port and DAS values for all reporting ranges regardless of the
analyzer’s range mode. To change the concentration units:

IMPORTANT

IMPACT ON READINGS OR DATA
In order to avoid a reference temperature bias, the analyzer must be
recalibrated after every change in reporting units.

IMPORTANT

IMPACT ON READINGS OR DATA
Concentrations displayed in mg/m3 and ug/m3 use 0° C and 760 mmHg for
Standard Temperature and Pressure (STP). Consult your local regulations
for the STP used by your agency.
(Example: US EPA uses 25 oC as the reference temperature).
Once the Units of Measurement have been changed from volumetric (ppb or
ppm) to mass units (µg/m3 or mg/m3) the analyzer MUST be recalibrated, as
the “expected span values” previously in effect will no longer be valid.
Simply entering new expected span values without running the entire
calibration routine IS NOT sufficient.
This will also counteract any discrepancies between STP definitions.

06864B DCN6314

107

Setup Menu

Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer

5.4.5. DILUTION RATIO (OPTION)
This feature is a optional software utility that allows the user to compensate for any
dilution of the sample gas that may occur before it enters the sample inlet. Typically this
occurs in continuous emission monitoring (CEM) applications where the sampling
method used to remove the gas from the stack dilutes it.
Using the dilution ratio option is a 4-step process:
1. Select the appropriate units of measure (see Section 5.4.4).
2. Select the reporting range mode and set the reporting range upper limit (see Section
5.4.3).


Ensure that the upper span limit entered for the reporting range is the maximum
expected concentration of the UNDILUTED gas.

3. Set the dilution factor as a gain (e.g., a value of 20 means 20 parts diluent and 1
part of sample gas):

4. Calibrate the analyzer.


Make sure that the calibration span gas is either supplied through the same dilution
system as the sample gas or has an appropriately lower actual concentration.
EXAMPLE: If the reporting range limit is set for 100 ppm and the dilution ratio
of the sample gas is 20 gain, either:

108



a span gas with the concentration of 100 ppm can be used if the span gas passes
through the same dilution steps as the sample gas, or;



a 5 ppm span gas must be used if the span gas IS NOT routed through the dilution
system.

06864B DCN6314

Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer

Setup Menu

5.5. SETUP  PASS: PASSWORD PROTECTION
The menu system provides password protection of the calibration and setup functions to
prevent unauthorized adjustments. When the passwords have been enabled in the PASS
menu item, the system will prompt the user for a password anytime a passwordprotected function (e.g., SETUP) is selected. This allows normal operation of the
instrument, but requires the password (101) to access to the menus under SETUP. When
PASSWORD is disabled (SETUP>OFF), any operator can enter the Primary Setup
(SETUP) and Secondary Setup (SETUP>MORE) menus. Whether PASSWORD is
enabled or disabled, a password (default 818) is required to enter the VARS or DIAG
menus in the SETUP>MORE menu.
Table 5-2:

Password Levels

PASSWORD

LEVEL

MENU ACCESS ALLOWED

Null (000)

Operation

101

Configuration/Maintenance

818

Configuration/Maintenance Access to Secondary SETUP Submenus VARS and DIAG whether
PASSWORD is enabled or disabled.

All functions of the main menu (top level, or Primary, menu)
Access to Primary and Secondary SETUP Menus when PASSWORD is
enabled

To enable or disable passwords, press:

If the password feature is enabled, then when entering either Calibration or Setup Mode,
the default password displayed will be 000, and the new password must be input.
Example: If all passwords are enabled, the following control button sequence would be
required to enter the SETUP menu:

06864B DCN6314

109

Setup Menu

Note

Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer

The instrument still prompts for a password when entering the VARS and
DIAG menus, even if passwords are disabled. It will display the default
password (818) upon entering these menus.
The user only has to press ENTR to access the password-protected
menus but does not have to enter the required number code.

110

06864B DCN6314

Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer

Setup Menu

5.6. SETUP  CLK: SETTING THE INTERNAL TIME-OF-DAY
CLOCK AND ADJUSTING SPEED
5.6.1.1. SETTING THE INTERNAL CLOCK’S TIME AND DAY
The T300/T300M has a time of day clock that supports the DURATION step of the
automatic calibration (ACAL) sequence feature, time of day TEST function, and time
stamps on for the DAS feature and most COMM port messages.
To set the clock’s time and day, press:

5.6.1.2. ADJUSTING THE INTERNAL CLOCK’S SPEED
In order to compensate for CPU clocks which run faster or slower, you can adjust a
variable called CLOCK_ADJ to speed up or slow down the clock by a fixed amount
every day.
The CLOCK_AD variable is accessed via the VARS submenu: To change the value of
this variable, press:

06864B DCN6314

111

Setup Menu

112

Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer

06864B DCN6314

Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer

Setup Menu

5.7. SETUP COMM: COMMUNICATIONS PORTS
This section introduces the communications setup menu; Section 6 provides the setup
instructions and operation information. Press SETUP>ENTR>MORE>COMM to arrive
at the communications menu.

5.7.1. ID (MACHINE IDENTIFICATION)
Press ID to display and/or change the Machine ID, which must be changed to a unique
identifier (number) when more than one instrument of the same model is used:


in an RS-232 multidrop configuration (Sections 3.3.1.8 and 6.7.2)



on the same Ethernet LAN (Section 6.5)



when applying MODBUS protocol (Section 6.7.1)



when applying Hessen protocol (Section 6.7.2)

The default ID is the same as the model number; for the Model T100, the ID is 0100.
Press any button(s) in the MACHINE ID menu (Figure 5-2) until the Machine ID
Parameter field displays the desired identifier.
SETUP X.X
ID
Toggle to cycle
through the available
character set: 0-9

INET

COMMUNICATIONS MENU
COM1

SETUP X.
0

COM2

EXIT

ENTR accepts the new
settings

MACHINE ID: 300 ID
0

Figure 5-2:

ENTR EXIT

EXIT ignores the new
settings

COMM– Machine ID

The ID can be any 4-digit number and can also be used to identify analyzers in any
number of ways (e.g. location numbers, company asset number, etc.)

5.7.2. INET (ETHERNET)
Use SETUP>COMM>INET to configure Ethernet communications, whether manually
or via DHCP. Please see Section 6.5 for configuration details.

5.7.3. COM1 AND COM2 (MODE, BAUD RATE AND TEST PORT)
Use the SETUP>COMM>COM1[COM2] menus to:


configure communication modes (Section 6.2.1



view/set the baud rate (Section 6.2.2)



test the connections of the com ports (Section 6.2.3).

Configuring COM1 or COM2 requires setting the DCE DTE switch on the rear panel.
Section 6.1 provides DCE DTE information.

06864B DCN6314

113

Setup Menu

Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer

5.8. SETUP VARS: VARIABLES SETUP AND DEFINITION
The T300/T300M has several user-adjustable software variables, which define certain
operational parameters.
Usually, these variables are automatically set by the
instrument’s firmware, but can be manually redefined using the VARS menu.
The following table lists all variables that are available within the 818 password
protected level. See Appendix A-2 for a detailed listing of all of the T300/T300M
variables that are accessible through the remote interface.
Table 5-3:
NO.

1
2

Variable Names (VARS)
VARIABLE

DESCRIPTION

DAS_HOLD_OFF

CONC_PRECISION

Changes the Internal Data Acquisition System (DAS)
HOLDOFF timer (Section 7.1.11).
No data is stored in the DAS channels during situations
when the software considers the data to be questionable
such as during warm up of just after the instrument returns
from one of its calibration mode to SAMPLE Mode.

VARS
DEFAULT
VALUES

ALLOWED
VALUES
May be set for
intervals
between
0.5 – 20 min

15 min.

Allows the user to set the number of significant digits to the
right of the decimal point display of concentration and stability
values.

AUTO, 1, 2,
3, 4

AUTO

DYN_ZERO 1

Dynamic zero automatically adjusts offset and slope of the
CO response when performing a zero point calibration during
an AutoCal (see Section 9.4).

ON/OFF

OFF

DYN_SPAN 1

Dynamic span automatically adjusts the offsets and slopes of
the CO response when performing a slope calibration during
an AutoCal (see Section 9.4).

ON/OFF

OFF

-60 to +60
s/day

0 sec

CLOCK_ADJ

STABIL_GAS2

Adjusts the speed of the analyzer’s clock. Choose the +
sign if the clock is too slow, choose the - sign if the clock is
too fast.

Selects which gas measurement is displayed when the STABIL
CO; CO2 & O2
test function is selected.

Use of the DYN_ZERO and DYN_SPAN features are not allowed for applications requiring EPA equivalency.

This VARS only appears if either the optional O2 or CO2 sensors are installed.

IMPORTANT

114

IMPACT ON READINGS OR DATA
There are more VARS available when using the password, 929, for
configuration. Use caution when pressing any buttons while in this setup.
Any changes made may alter the performance of the instrument or cause
the instrument to not function properly. Note that if there is an accidental
change to a setup parameter, press EXIT to discard the changes.

06864B DCN6314

Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer

Setup Menu

To access and navigate the VARS menu, use the following button sequence.
SAMPLE
CAL

SETUP X.X

SETUP

PRIMARY SETUP MENU

CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE

SETUP X.X

8
Toggle these
buttons to enter
the correct
PASSWORD.

SETUP X.X

EXIT

SECONDARY SETUP MENU

COMM VARS

SETUP X.X

Concentration display
continuously cycles
through all gasses.

DIAG

In all cases:
EXIT discards the new
setting.

EXIT

ENTR accepts the
new setting.

ENTER PASSWORD:818
8

ENTR EXIT

0) DAS_HOLD_OFF=15.0 Minutes

PREV NEXT JUMP

EDIT PRNT EXIT
SETUP X.X
1

SETUP X.X

ENTR EXIT
Toggle these buttons to set
the iDAS HOLDOFF time
period in minutes
(MAX = 20 minutes).

1) CONC_PRECISION=AUTO

PREV NEXT JUMP

EDIT PRNT EXIT
SETUP X.X
AUTO

SETUP X.X

DAS_HOLD_OFF=15.0 Minutes
.0

CONC_PRECISION=AUTO
2

Use these buttons to select
the precision of the o33
concentration display.

2) DYN_ZERO=OFF

PREV NEXT JUMP

EDIT PRNT EXIT
SETUP X.X

DYN_ZERO=OFF

OFF

SETUP X.X

ENTR EXIT
Toggle this button to turn
the Dynamic Zero
calibration feature ON/
OFF.

3) DYN_SPAN=OFF

PREV NEXT JUMP

EDIT PRNT EXIT
SETUP X.X

DYN_SPAN=OFF

OFF

SETUP X.X

ENTR EXIT

4) CLOCK_ADJUST=0 Sec/Day

PREV NEXT JUMP

EDIT ENTR EXIT

SETUP X.X
+

SETUP X.X

ENTR EXIT
Enter sign and number of
seconds per day the clock
gains (-) or loses(+).

EDIT PRNT EXIT
SETUP X.X

06864B DCN6314

Toggle this button to turn
the Dynamic Span
calibration feature ON/
OFF.

CLOCK_ADJUST=0 Sec/Day
0

5) STABIL_GAS=CO

PREV NEXT JUMP

Press NEXT for additional
VARS; press NEXT or
PREV to move back and
forth throughout the list of
VARS.

ENTR EXIT

CO2

STABIL_GAS=O2
O2

ENTR EXIT

Use these buttons to select
which gas will be reported
by the sTABIL test
function.
(O2 is only available if the
optional O2 sensor is
installed)

115

Setup Menu

Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer

5.9. SETUP DIAG: DIAGNOSTICS FUNCTIONS
A series of diagnostic tools is grouped together under the SETUPMOREDIAG
menu, as these parameters are dependent on firmware revision (see Appendix A). These
tools can be used in a variety of troubleshooting and diagnostic procedures and are
referred to in many places of the maintenance and trouble-shooting sections of this
manual.
The various operating modes available under the DIAG menu are:
Table 5-4:

Diagnostic Mode (DIAG) Functions

DIAG SUBMENU

SUBMENU FUNCTION

Front Panel Mode
Indicator

MANUAL
SECTION

SIGNAL I/O

Allows observation of all digital and analog signals in
the instrument. Allows certain digital signals such as
valves and heaters to be toggled ON and OFF.

DIAG SIGNAL
I/O

5.9.1,
12.1.3 and
12.5.8.1

ANALOG OUTPUT

When entered, the analyzer performs an analog
output step test. This can be used to calibrate a
chart recorder or to test the analog output accuracy.

DIAG ANALOG
OUTPUT

5.9.2 and
12.5.8.2

ANALOG I/O
CONFIGURATION

This submenu allows the user to configure the
analyzer’s analog output channels, including
choosing what parameter will be output on each
channel. Instructions that appear here allow
adjustment and calibration of the voltage signals
associated with each output as well as calibration of
the analog to digital converter circuitry on the
motherboard.

DIAG ANALOG
I/O
CONFIGURATI
ON

5.9.3

ELECTRICAL
TEST

When activated, the analyzer performs an electrical
test, which generates a voltage intended to simulate
the measure and reference outputs of the
SYNC/DEMOD board to verify the signal handling
and conditioning of these signals.

DIAG
ELECTRICAL
TEST

5.9.4 and
12.5.7.2

DARK
CALIBRATION1

Disconnects the preamp from synchronous
demodulation circuitry on the SYNC/DEMOD PCA to
establish the dark offset values for the measure and
reference channel.

DIAG DARK
CALIBRATION

5.9.5 and
9.6.1

PRESSURE
CALIBRATION1

Allows the user to calibrate the sample pressure
sensor.

DIAG
PRESSURE
CALIBRATION

5.9.6 and
9.6.2

FLOW
CALIBRATION1

This function is used to calibrate the gas flow output
signals of sample gas and ozone supply.

DIAG FLOW
CALIBRATION

5.9.7 and
9.6.3

TEST CHAN
OUTPUT

Selects one of the available test channel signals to
output over the A4 analog output channel.

DIAG TEST
CHAN OUTPUT

5.9.8 and
12.5.8.2

116

These settings are retained after exiting DIAG mode.

06864B DCN6314

Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer

Setup Menu

To access the DIAG functions press the following buttons:

06864B DCN6314

117

Setup Menu

Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer

5.9.1. SIGNAL I/O
The signal I/O diagnostic mode allows a user to review and change the digital and
analog input/output functions of the analyzer. Refer to Appendix A-4 for a full list of
the parameters available for review under this menu.

IMPORTANT

IMPACT ON READINGS OR DATA
Any changes of signal I/O settings will remain in effect only until the
signal I/O menu is exited. Exceptions are the ozone generator override
and the flow sensor calibration, which remain as entered when exiting.
Access the SIGNAL I/O test mode from the DIAG Menu:

118

06864B DCN6314

Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer

Setup Menu

5.9.2. ANALOG OUTPUT
Analog Output is used as a step test to check the accuracy and proper operation of the
analog outputs. The test forces all four analog output channels to produce signals
ranging from 0% to 100% of the full scale range in 20% increments. This test is useful
to verify the operation of the data logging/recording devices attached to the analyzer.
(See also Section 12.5.8.2).
Access the Analog Output Step Test from the DIAG Menu as follows:

06864B DCN6314

119

Setup Menu

Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer

5.9.3. ANALOG I/O CONFIGURATION
The T300/T300M Analyzer comes equipped with four analog outputs.


The first two outputs (A1 & A2) carry analog signals that represent the currently
measured concentration of CO (see Section 5.4.1).



The third output (A3) is only active if the analyzer is equipped with one of the
optional 2nd gas sensors (e.g. O2 or CO2).



The fourth output (A4) outputs a signal that can be set to represent the current value
of one of several test functions (see Table 5-9).

Table 5-5 lists the analog I/O functions that are available in the T300/T300M Analyzer.
Table 5-5:

DIAG - Analog I/O Functions

SUB MENU

AOUT
CALIBRATED

OUTPUT
CHANNEL

ALL

FUNCTION
Initiates a calibration of the A1, A2, A3 and A4 analog output channels that
determines the slope and offset inherent in the circuitry of each output.
These values are stored and applied to the output signals by the CPU
automatically.
Sets the basic electronic configuration of the A1 output (CO Concentration).
There are four options:
 RANGE1: Selects the signal type (voltage or current loop) and level of the
output.
 REC OFS1: Allows them input of a DC offset to let the user manually adjust
the output level.
 AUTO CAL: Enables / Disables the AOUT CALIBRATED feature.
 CALIBRATED: Performs the same calibration as AOUT CALIBRATED,
but on this one channel only.

CONC_OUT_1

CONC_OUT_2

 Same as for CONC_OUT_1 but for analog channel A2.

CONC_OUT_3

 Same as for CONC_OUT_1 but for analog channel A3 but only if either the
optional O2 or CO2 sensors are installed.

TEST OUTPUT

 Same as for CONC_OUT_1 but for analog channel A4 (TEST CHANNEL).

AIN
CALIBRATED

N/A

XIN1
.
.
.

Initiates a calibration of the A-to-D Converter circuit located on the
Motherboard.

For each of 8 external analog input channels, shows the gain, offset,
engineering units, and whether the channel is to show up as a Test function.

XIN8
1

Any changes made to RANGE or REC_OFS require recalibration of this output.

120

06864B DCN6314

Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer

Setup Menu

To access the ANALOG I/O CONFIGURATION submenu, press:

Figure 5-3:

06864B DCN6314

Accessing the Analog I/O Configuration Submenus

121

Setup Menu

Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer

5.9.3.1. ANALOG OUTPUT VOLTAGE / CURRENT RANGE SELECTION
In its standard configuration, each of the analog outputs is set to output a 0–5 VDC
signals. Several other output ranges are available. Each range has is usable from -5% to
+ 5% of the rated span.
Table 5-6:

Analog Output Voltage Ranges

RANGE NAME

RANGE SPAN

MINIMUM OUTPUT

MAXIMUM OUTPUT

0.1V

0-100 mVDC

-5 mVDC

105 mVDC

0-1 VDC

-0.05 VDC

1.05 VDC

0-5 VDC

-0.25 VDC

5.25 VDC

10V

0-10 VDC

-0.5 VDC

10.5 VDC

0 mA

20 mA

 The default offset for all VDC ranges is 0-5 VDC.
CURR

0-20 mA

 While these are the physical limits of the current loop modules, typical applications use 2-20 or 4-20 mA for the lower and upper
limits. Please specify desired range when ordering this option.

 The default offset for all current ranges is 0 mA.
 Current outputs are available only on A1-A3.

122

06864B DCN6314

Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer

Setup Menu

To change the output type and range, select the ANALOG I/O CONFIGURATION
submenu from the DIAG Menu (see Figure 5-3) then press:

06864B DCN6314

123

Setup Menu

Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer

5.9.3.2. ANALOG OUTPUT CALIBRATION
Analog output calibration should to be carried out on first startup of the analyzer
(performed in the factory as part of the configuration process) or whenever recalibration
is required. The analog outputs can be calibrated automatically, either as a group or
individually, or adjusted manually.
In its default mode, the instrument is configured for automatic calibration of all
channels, which is useful for clearing any analog calibration warnings associated with
channels that will not be used or connected to any input or recording device, e.g.,
datalogger.
Manual calibration should be used for the 0.1V range or in cases where the outputs must
be closely matched to the characteristics of the recording device. Manual calibration
requires the AUTOCAL feature to be disabled.
Automatic calibration can be performed via the CAL button located inside The AOUTS
CALIBRATION submenu. By default, the analyzer is configured so that calibration of
analog outputs can be initiated as a group with the AOUT CALIBRATION command.
The outputs can also be calibrated individually, but this requires the AUTOCAL feature
be disabled.
5.9.3.3. ENABLING OR DISABLING THE AUTOCAL FOR AN INDIVIDUAL ANALOG OUTPUT
To enable or disable the AutoCal feature for an individual analog output, elect the
ANALOG I/O CONFIGURATION submenu (see Figure 5-3) then press:

124

06864B DCN6314

Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer

06864B DCN6314

Setup Menu

125

Setup Menu

Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer

5.9.3.4. AUTOMATIC CALIBRATION OF THE ANALOG OUTPUTS
To calibrate the outputs as a group with the AOUTS CALIBRATION command, select
the ANALOG I/O CONFIGURATION submenu (see Figure 5-3) then press:

IMPORTANT

IMPACT ON READINGS OR DATA
Before performing this procedure, make sure that the AUTO CAL for each
analog output is enabled. (See Section 5.9.3.3).

IMPORTANT

IMPACT ON READINGS OR DATA
Manual calibration should be used for any analog output set for a 0.1V
output range or in cases where the outputs must be closely matched to
the characteristics of the recording device.

126

06864B DCN6314

Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer

Setup Menu

5.9.3.5. INDIVIDUAL CALIBRATION OF THE ANALOG OUTPUTS
To use the AUTO CAL feature to initiate an automatic calibration for an individual
analog output, select the ANALOG I/O CONFIGURATION submenu (see Figure 5-3)
then press:

06864B DCN6314

127

Setup Menu

Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer

5.9.3.6. MANUAL CALIBRATION OF THE ANALOG OUTPUTS CONFIGURED FOR VOLTAGE
RANGES
For highest accuracy, the voltages of the analog outputs can be manually calibrated.
Note

The menu for manually adjusting the analog output signal level will only
appear if the AUTO-CAL feature is turned off for the channel being
adjusted (see Section 5.9.3.3).
Calibration is performed with a voltmeter connected across the output terminals and by
changing the actual output signal level using the front panel buttons in 100, 10 or 1
count increments. See Figure 3-9 for pin assignments and diagram of the analog output
connector.

+DC

Figure 5-4:

Gnd

Setup for Checking / Calibrating DCV Analog Output Signal Levels

Table 5-7: Voltage Tolerances for the TEST CHANNEL Calibration

128

FULL SCALE

ZERO TOLERANCE

SPAN VOLTAGE

SPAN
TOLERANCE

MINIMUM ADJUSTMENT
(1 count)

0.1 VDC

±0.0005V

90 mV

±0.001V

0.02 mV

1 VDC

±0.001V

900 mV

±0.001V

0.24 mV

5 VDC

±0.002V

4500 mV

±0.003V

1.22 mV

10 VDC

±0.004V

4500 mV

±0.006V

2.44 mV

06864B DCN6314

Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer

Setup Menu

To adjust the signal levels of an analog output channel manually, select the ANALOG
I/O CONFIGURATION submenu (see Figure 5-3) then press:

06864B DCN6314

129

Setup Menu

Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer

5.9.3.7. MANUAL ADJUSTMENT OF CURRENT LOOP OUTPUT SPAN AND OFFSET
A current loop option may be purchased for the A1, A2 and A3 analog outputs of the
analyzer. This option places circuitry in series with the output of the D-to-A converter
on the motherboard that changes the normal DC voltage output to a 0-20 milliamp signal
(see Section 3.3.1.4).


The outputs can be ordered scaled to any set of limits within that 0-20 mA range,
however most current loop applications call for either 0-20 mA or 4-20 mA range
spans.



All current loop outputs have a +5% over range. Ranges whose lower limit is set
above 1 mA also have a –5% under range.

To switch an analog output from voltage to current loop, follow the instructions in
Section 5.9.3.1 (select CURR from the list of options on the “Output Range” menu).
Adjusting the signal zero and span levels of the current loop output is done by raising or
lowering the voltage output of the D-to-A converter circuitry on the analyzer’s
motherboard. This raises or lowers the signal level produced by the current loop option
circuitry.
The software allows this adjustment to be made in 100, 10 or 1 count increments. Since
the exact amount by which the current signal is changed per D-to-A count varies from
output-to-output and instrument-to-instrument, you will need to measure the change in
the signal levels with a separate, current meter placed in series with the output circuit.
See Figure 3-9 for pin assignments and diagram of the analog output connector.

Figure 5-5:

Setup for Checking / Calibration Current Output Signal Levels Using an Ammeter

CAUTION
GENERAL SAFETY HAZARD
Do not exceed 60 V peak voltage between current loop outputs and instrument ground.

130

06864B DCN6314

Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer

Setup Menu

To adjust the zero and span signal levels of the current outputs, select the ANALOG I/O
CONFIGURATION submenu (see Figure 5-3) then press:

06864B DCN6314

131

Setup Menu

Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer

An alternative method for measuring the output of the Current Loop converter is to
connect a 250 ohm 1% resistor across the current loop output in lieu of the current
meter (see Figure 3-9 for pin assignments and diagram of the analog output connector).
This allows the use of a voltmeter connected across the resistor to measure converter
output as VDC or mVDC.

+DC

Figure 5-6:

Gnd

Alternative Setup Using 250Ω Resistor for Checking Current Output Signal Levels

In this case, follow the procedure above but adjust the output for the following values:

Table 5-8:

132

Current Loop Output Check

% FS

Voltage across Resistor for
2-20 mA

Voltage across
Resistor for 4-20 mA

500 mVDC

1000 mVDC

100

5000 mVDC

06864B DCN6314

Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer

Setup Menu

5.9.3.8. TURNING AN ANALOG OUTPUT OVER-RANGE FEATURE ON/OFF
In its default configuration, a ± 5% over-range is available on each of the T300/T300M
Analyzer’s analog outputs. This over-range can be disabled if your recording device is
sensitive to excess voltage or current.
To turn the over-range feature on or off, select the ANALOG I/O CONFIGURATION
submenu (see Figure 5-3) then press:

06864B DCN6314

133

Setup Menu

Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer

5.9.3.9. ADDING A RECORDER OFFSET TO AN ANALOG OUTPUT
Some analog signal recorders require that the zero signal is significantly different from
the baseline of the recorder in order to record slightly negative readings from noise
around the zero point. This can be achieved in the T300/T300M by defining a zero
offset, a small voltage (e.g., 10% of span).
To add a zero offset to a specific analog output channel, select the ANALOG I/O
CONFIGURATION submenu (see Figure 5-3) then press:

134

06864B DCN6314

Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer

Setup Menu

5.9.3.10. AIN CALIBRATION
This is the submenu to conduct a calibration of the T300/T300M Analyzer’s analog
inputs. This calibration should only be necessary after major repair such as a
replacement of CPU, motherboard or power supplies.
To perform an analog input calibration, select the ANALOG I/O CONFIGURATION
submenu (see Figure 5-3) then press:

06864B DCN6314

135

Setup Menu

Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer

5.9.3.11. ANALOG INPUTS (XIN1…XIN8) OPTION CONFIGURATION
To configure the analyzer’s external analog inputs option, define for each channel:


gain (number of units represented by 1 volt)



offset (volts)



engineering units to be represented in volts (each press of the touchscreen
button scrolls the list of alphanumeric characters from A-Z and 0-9)



whether to display the channel in the Test functions

To access and adjust settings for the external Analog Inputs option channels press:
DIAG
PREV

ANALOG I / O CONFIGURATION
NEXT

DIAG AIO
< SET SET>

ENTR
AOUTS CALIBRATED: NO
CAL

XIN1:1.00,0.00,V,OFF
EDIT

XIN1 OFFSET:0.00V

SET>

DIAG AIO
< SET

< SET

EDIT

EXIT

DIAG AIO
EXIT

EDIT

XIN1 GAIN:1.00V/V

EXIT

ENTR EXIT

Press to change
Gain value

XIN1 DISPLAY:OFF
EDIT

Figure 5-7.

136

XIN1 GAIN:1.00V/V

XIN1 UNITS:V

SET>

DIAG AIO

EDIT

Press EDIT at any channel
to to change Gain, Offset,
Units and whether to display
the channel in the Test
functions (OFF/ON).

EXIT

SET>

< SET

Press SET> to scroll to the first
channel. Continue pressing SET>
to view each of 8 channels.

EXIT

DIAG AIO

EXIT

Pressing ENTR records the new setting
and returns to the previous menu.
Pressing EXIT ignores the new setting and
returns to the previous menu.

DIAG – Analog Inputs (Option) Configuration Menu

06864B DCN6314

Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer

Setup Menu

5.9.4. ELECTRICAL TEST
The electrical test function creates a current, which substitutes the PMT signal, and
feeds it into the preamplifier board. This signal is generated by circuitry on the preamplifier board itself and tests the filtering and amplification functions of that assembly
along with the A/D converter on the motherboard. It does not test the PMT itself. (See
also Section 12.5.7.2).

5.9.5. DARK CALIBRATION
The dark calibration test interrupts the signal path between the IR photo-detector and the
remainder of the sync/demod board circuitry. This allows the instrument to compensate
for any voltage levels inherent in the sync/demod circuitry that might affect the
calculation of CO concentration. For details see Section 9.6.1.

5.9.6. PRESSURE CALIBRATION
A sensor at the exit of the sample chamber continuously measures the pressure of the
sample gas. The data are used to compensate the final CO concentration calculation for
changes in atmospheric pressure and are stored in the CPU’s memory as the test function
PRES (also viewable via the front panel). For details see Section 9.6.2.

06864B DCN6314

137

Setup Menu

Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer

5.9.7. FLOW CALIBRATION
The flow calibration allows the user to adjust the values of the sample flow rates as they
are displayed on the front panel and reported through COMM ports to match the actual
flow rate measured at the sample inlet. This does not change the hardware measurement
of the flow sensors, only the software-calculated values. For details see Section 9.6.3.

5.9.8. TEST CHAN OUTPUT
When activated, output channel A4 can be used in the standard configuration to report
one of the test functions viewable from the SAMPLE mode display. (See also Section
12.5.8.2).

5.9.8.1. SELECTING A TEST CHANNEL FUNCTION FOR OUTPUT A4
The test functions available to be reported are listed in Table 5-9:
Table 5-9: Test Channels Functions available on the T300/T300M’s Analog Output
ZERO

FULL SCALE *

The demodulated, peak IR detector output
during the measure portion of the GFC Wheel
cycle.

0 mV

5000 mV

The demodulated, peak IR detector output
during the reference portion of the GFC
Wheel cycle.

0 mV

5000 mV

The absolute pressure of the Sample gas as
measured by a pressure sensor located inside
the sample chamber.

0 "Hg

40 "Hg

3
0 cm /m

1000 cm 3/m

TEST CHANNEL
NONE

DESCRIPTION
TEST CHANNEL IS TURNED OFF.

CO MEASURE

CO REFERENCE

SAMPLE PRESSURE
SAMPLE FLOW

Sample mass flow rate as measured by the
flow rate sensor in the sample gas stream.

SAMPLE TEMP

The temperature of the gas inside the sample
chamber.

0C

70C

BENCH TEMP

Optical bench temperature.

0C

70C

WHEEL TEMP

GFC Wheel temperature.

0C

70C

0C

70C

0 mV

5000 mV

O2 CELL TEMP1

The current temperature of the O2 sensor
measurement cell.

CHASSIS TEMP

The temperature inside the analyzer chassis.

PHT DRIVE

The drive voltage being supplied to the
thermoelectric coolers of the IR photodetector by the Sync/Demod Board.

* Maximum test signal value at full scale of test channel output.
1

When option installed.

Once a function is selected, the instrument not only begins to output a signal on the
analog output, but also adds TEST to the list of test functions viewable via the front
panel display.

138

06864B DCN6314

Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer

Setup Menu

To activate the TEST Channel and select the CO MEASURE function, press:
SAMPLE
CAL

SETUP X.X

SETUP

PRIMARY SETUP MENU

CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE

SETUP X.X

SECONDARY SETUP MENU

COMM VARS

SETUP X.X
8
Toggle these
buttons to enter
the correct
PASSWORD.

EXIT

DIAG

EXIT

ENTER PASSWORD:818

DIAG

ENTR EXIT

SIGNAL I/O

PREV NEXT

ENTR

EXIT

Continue pressing NEXT until ...

DIAG
PREV NEXT

DIAG
PREV NEXT
Toggle to scroll and
select a mass flow
controller TEST
channel parameter.

DIAG
PREV NEXT

TEST CHAN OUTPUT
ENTR

EXIT

TEST CHAN:NONE
ENTR

EXIT

TEST CHANNEL:CO MEASURE
ENTR

EXIT

EXIT discards the new
setting.
ENTR accepts the
new setting.

06864B DCN6314

139

Setup Menu

Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer

5.10. SETUP MORE  ALRM (OPTION): USING THE GAS
CONCENTRATION ALARMS
The T300/T300M includes two CO concentration alarms if OPT 61 is installed on your
instrument. Each alarm has a user settable limit, and is associated with a Single Pole
Double Throw relay output accessible via the alarm output connector on the
instrument’s back panel (See Section 3.3.1.4). If the CO concentration measured by the
instrument rises above that limit, the alarm‘s status output relay is closed.
The default settings for ALM1 and ALM2 are:
Table 5-10:

CO Concentration Alarm Default Settings

ALARM

STATUS

LIMIT SET POINT1

alm1

Disabled

100 ppm

alm2

Disabled

300 ppm

Set points listed are for PPM. Should the reporting range units of measure be changed (See
Section 5.4.3) the analyzer will automatically scale the set points to match the new range unit
setting.

Note

140

To prevent the concentration alarms from activating during span
calibration operations ensure that the CAL or CALS button is pressed
prior to introducing span gas into the analyzer.

06864B DCN6314

Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer

Setup Menu

5.10.1. SETTING THE T300 CONCENTRATION ALARM LIMITS
To enable either of the CO concentration alarms and set the limit points, press:
SAMPLE
CAL

SETUP X.X

SETUP

PRIMARY SETUP MENU

CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE

SETUP X.X
COMM VARS

EXIT

Continue pressing NEXT until the desired
Alarm is selected

SECONDARY SETUP MENU
DIAG ALRM

EXIT

SETUP X.X

CO ALRM 2, DISALBED

SETUP X.X

EDIT PRNT EXIT

CO ALRM 2: OFF

ENTR EXIT

Toggle this button to
enable/disable
the alarm
DIAG FCAL
3
Toggle these
buttons to Set
the alarm point

06864B DCN6314

CO ALARM 2=300.00 PPM
0

ENTR

EXIT

EXIT discards the new
setting
ENTR accepts the
new setting

141

Setup Menu

Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer

This page intentionally left blank.

142

06864B DCN6314

6. COMMUNICATIONS SETUP AND OPERATION
This instrument rear panel connections include an Ethernet port, a USB port (option) and
two serial communications ports (labeled RS232, which is the COM1 port, and COM2)
located on the rear panel (refer to Figure 3-4). These ports give the user the ability to
communicate with, issue commands to, and receive data from the analyzer through an
external computer system or terminal.
This section provides pertinent information regarding communication equipment,
describes the instrument’s communications modes, presents configuration instructions
for the communications ports, and provides instructions for their use, including
communications protocol. Data acquisition is presented in Section 7.

6.1. DATA TERMINAL/COMMUNICATION EQUIPMENT (DTE DCE)
RS-232 was developed for allowing communications between data terminal equipment
(DTE) and data communication equipment (DCE). Basic terminals always fall into the
DTE category whereas modems are always considered DCE devices. The difference
between the two is the pin assignment of the Data Receive and Data Transmit functions.
• DTE devices receive data on pin 2 and transmit data on pin 3.
• DCE devices receive data on pin 3 and transmit data on pin 2.
To allow the analyzer to be used with terminals (DTE), modems (DCE) and computers
(which can be either), a switch mounted below the serial ports on the rear panel allows
the user to set the RS-232 configuration for one of these two data devices. This switch
exchanges the Receive and Transmit lines on RS-232 emulating a cross-over or nullmodem cable. The switch has no effect on COM2.

6.2. COMMUNICATION MODES, BAUD RATE AND PORT TESTING
Use the SETUP>MORE>COMM menu to configure COM1 (labeled RS232 on
instrument rear panel) and/or COM2 (labeled COM2 on instrument rear panel) for
communication modes, baud rate and/or port testing for correct connection. If using a
USB option communication connection, setup requires configuring the COM2 baud rate
(Section 6.2.2).

06864B DCN6314

143

Communications Setup and Operation

Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer

6.2.1. COMMUNICATION MODES
Either of the analyzer’s serial ports (RS232 or COM2 on rear panel) can be configured
to operate in a number of different modes, which are described in Table 6-1. As modes
are selected, the analyzer sums the mode ID numbers and displays this combined
number on the front panel display. For example, if quiet mode (01), computer mode
(02) and Multidrop-Enabled mode (32) are selected, the analyzer would display a
combined MODE ID of 35.
Table 6-1:

COMM Port Communication Modes
1

MODE

DESCRIPTION

QUIET

Quiet mode suppresses any feedback from the analyzer (such as warning messages) to
the remote device and is typically used when the port is communicating with a computer
program where such intermittent messages might cause communication problems.
Such feedback is still available but a command must be issued to receive them.

COMPUTER

Computer mode inhibits echoing of typed characters and is used when the port is
communicating with a computer operated control program.

HESSEN
PROTOCOL

E, 8, 1

8192

When turned on this mode switches the COMM port settings from
● NO PARITY; 8 data bits; 1 stop bit to EVEN PARITY; 8 data bits; 1 stop bit.

E, 7, 1

2048

When turned on this mode switches the COM port settings from
● NO PARITY; 8 DATA BITS; 1 stop bit to EVEN PARITY; 7 DATA BITS; 1 stop bit.

RS-485

1024

Configures the COM2 Port for RS-485 communication. RS-485 mode has precedence
over multidrop mode if both are enabled.

SECURITY

When enabled, the serial port requires a password before it will respond (see Section
5.5). If not logged on, the only active command is the '?' request for the help screen.

MULTIDROP
PROTOCOL

Multidrop protocol allows a multi-instrument configuration on a single communications
channel. Multidrop requires the use of instrument IDs.

ENABLE
MODEM

Enables to send a modem initialization string at power-up. Asserts certain lines in the
RS-232 port to enable the modem to communicate.

ERROR
2
CHECKING

128

Fixes certain types of parity errors at certain Hessen protocol installations.

XON/XOFF
2
HANDSHAKE

256

Disables XON/XOFF data flow control also known as software handshaking.

HARDWARE
HANDSHAKE

HARDWARE
FIFO2

512

COMMAND
PROMPT

4096

The Hessen communications protocol is used in some European countries. TAPI P/N
02252 contains more information on this protocol.

Enables CTS/RTS style hardwired transmission handshaking. This style of data
transmission handshaking is commonly used with modems or terminal emulation
protocols as well as by Teledyne Instrument’s APICOM software.
Disables the HARDWARE FIFO (First In – First Out). When FIFO is enabled it improves
data transfer rate for that COM port.
Enables a command prompt when in terminal mode.

Modes are listed in the order in which they appear in the
SETUP  MORE  COMM  COM[1 OR 2]  MODE menu
2
The default setting for this feature is ON. Do not disable unless instructed to by Teledyne API’s Customer Service
personnel.

144

06864B DCN6314

Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer

Communications Setup and Operation

Communication Modes for each COM port must be configured independently. To turn
on or off the communication modes for either COM1 or COM2, access the
SETUP>MORE>[COM1 or COM2] menu and at the COM1[2] Mode menu press EDIT.
Select which COM
port to configure

SETUP X.X
ID

The sum of the mode
IDs of the selected
modes is displayed
here

INET

COMMUNICATIONS MENU
COM1

SETUP X.X
SET>

SETUP X.X

COM2

EXIT

COM1 MODE: 32
EDIT

EXIT

COM1 QUIET MODE: OFF

NEXT OFF

ENTR EXIT

Continue pressing NEXT to scroll through the
available Modes and press the ON or OFF button
to enable or disable each mode.

Figure 6-1:

06864B DCN6314

COM1[2] – Communication Modes Setup

145

Communications Setup and Operation

Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer

6.2.2. COM PORT BAUD RATE
To select the baud rate of either COM Port, go to SETUP>MORE>COMM and select
either COM1 or COM2 as follows (use COM2 to view/match your personal computer
baud rate when using the USB port, Section 6.6):

Figure 6-2:

146

COMM Port Baud Rate

06864B DCN6314

Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer

Communications Setup and Operation

6.2.3. COM PORT TESTING
The serial ports can be tested for correct connection and output in the COMM menu.
This test sends a string of 256 ‘w’ characters to the selected COM port. While the test is
running, the red LED labeled TX for that COM port on the instrument’s rear panel
analyzer should flicker.
To initiate the test, access the COMMUNICATIONS Menu (SETUP>MORE>COMM),
then press:
SETUP X.X
ID

INET

COMMUNICATIONS MENU
COM1

SETUP X.X
SET>

EDIT

COM2

Select which
COMM port to
test.

EXIT

TRANSMITTING TO COM1
TEST

Figure 6-3:

EXIT returns to
COMM menu
EXIT

COMM – COM1 Test Port

6.3. RS-232
The RS232 and COM2 communications (COMM) ports operate on the RS-232 protocol
(default configuration). Possible configurations for these two COMM ports are
summarized as follows:


RS232 port can also be configured to operate in single or RS-232 Multidrop mode
(Option 62); refer to Sections 3.3.1.8 and 5.7.1.



COM2 port can be left in its default configuration for standard RS-232 operation
including multidrop, or it can be reconfigured for half-duplex RS-485 operation
(please contact the factory for this configuration).

Note that when the rear panel COM2 port is in use, except for multidrop
communication, the rear panel USB port cannot be used. (Alternatively, when the USB
port is enabled, COM2 port cannot be used except for multidrop).

06864B DCN6314

147

Communications Setup and Operation

Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer

A Code-Activated Switch (CAS), can also be used on either port to connect typically
between 2 and 16 send/receive instruments (host computer(s) printers, data loggers,
analyzers, monitors, calibrators, etc.) into one communications hub. Contact Teledyne
API Sales for more information on CAS systems.
To assist in properly connecting the serial ports to either a computer or a modem, there
are activity indicators just above the RS-232 port. Once a cable is connected between
the analyzer and a computer or modem, both the red and green LEDs should be on.


If the lights are not lit, use small switch on the rear panel to switch it between DTE
and DCE modes.



If both LEDs are still not illuminated, make sure the cable properly constructed.

To configure the analyzer’s communication ports, use the SETUP>MORE>COMM
menu. Refer to Section 5.7.3 for initial setup.

6.4. RS-485 (OPTION)
The COM2 port of the instrument’s rear panel is set up for RS-232 communication but
can be reconfigured for RS-485 communication. Contact Customer Service. If this
option was elected at the time of purchase, the rear panel was preconfigured at the
factory. Choosing this option disallows use of the USB port.

6.5. ETHERNET
When using the Ethernet interface, the analyzer can be connected to any standard
10BaseT or 100BaseT Ethernet network via low-cost network hubs, switches or routers.
The interface operates as a standard TCP/IP device on port 3000. This allows a remote
computer to connect through the network to the analyzer using APICOM, terminal
emulators or other programs.
The Ethernet cable connector on the rear panel has two LEDs indicating the Ethernet’s
current operating status.
Table 6-2:
LED

Ethernet Status Indicators
FUNCTION

amber (link)

On when connection to the LAN is valid.

green (activity

Flickers during any activity on the LAN.

The analyzer is shipped with DHCP enabled by default. This allows the instrument to be
connected to a network or router with a DHCP server. The instrument will automatically
be assigned an IP address by the DHCP server (Section 6.5.2). This configuration is
useful for quickly getting an instrument up and running on a network. However, for
permanent Ethernet connections, a static IP address should be used. Section 6.5.1 below
details how to configure the instrument with a static IP address.

148

06864B DCN6314

Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer

Communications Setup and Operation

6.5.1. CONFIGURING ETHERNET COMMUNICATION MANUALLY (STATIC
IP ADDRESS)
To configure Ethernet communication manually:
1. Connect a cable from the analyzer’s Ethernet port to a Local Area Network (LAN) or
Internet port.
2. From the analyzer’s front panel touchscreen, access the Communications Menu
(SETUP>MORE>COMM).
3. Enter the Ethernet menu (INET), follow the setup sequence as shown in Figure 6-4,
and edit the Instrument and Gateway IP addresses and Subnet Mask to the desired
settings.

Alternatively, from the computer, enter the same information through an application
such as HyperTerminal.
Table 6-3 shows the default Ethernet configuration settings.
Table 6-3:

LAN/Internet Default Configuration Properties

PROPERTY
DHCP

DEFAULT STATE

DESCRIPTION

This displays whether the DHCP is turned ON or OFF. Press
EDIT and toggle ON for automatic configuration after first
consulting network administrator.
This string of four packets of 1 to 3 numbers each (e.g.
192.168.76.55.) is the address of the analyzer itself.

INSTRUMENT IP
ADDRESS
GATEWAY IP
ADDRESS

SUBNET MASK

TCP PORT1

HOST NAME
1

0.0.0.0

3000

[initially blank]

Can only be edited when DHCP is set to OFF.
A string of numbers very similar to the Instrument IP address
(e.g. 192.168.76.1.) that is the address of the computer used
by your LAN to access the Internet.
Can only be edited when DHCP is set to OFF.
Also a string of four packets of 1 to 3 numbers each (e.g.
255.255.252.0) that identifies the LAN to which the device is
connected.
All addressable devices and computers on a LAN must have
the same subnet mask. Any transmissions sent to devices
with different subnets are assumed to be outside of the LAN
and are routed through the gateway computer onto the
Internet.
This number defines the terminal control port by which the
instrument is addressed by terminal emulation software, such
as Internet or Teledyne API’s APICOM.
The name by which your analyzer will appear when
addressed from other computers on the LAN or via the
Internet. To change, see Section 6.5.3.

Do not change the setting for this property unless instructed to by Teledyne API’s Customer Service
personnel.

06864B DCN6314

149

Communications Setup and Operation

SETUP X.X

COMMUNICATIONS MENU

COM1

INET

SAMPLE
8
DHCP: ON is
default setting.
Skip this step
if it has been
set to OFF.

Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer

Internet Configuration Button Functions

COM2

SETUP X.X

ENTR

EXIT

Deletes a character at the cursor location.

ENTR

Accepts the new setting and returns to the previous
menu.

EXIT

Ignores the new setting and returns to the previous
menu.

Some buttons appear only when relevant.

SET> EDIT

EXIT

DHCP: OFF

SET> EDIT

SETUP X.X

[0]

DEL

DHCP: ON

SETUP X.X

FUNCTION
Location of cursor. Press to cycle through the range of
numerals and available characters (“0 – 9” & “ . ”)

Moves the cursor one character left or right.

ENTER SETUP PASS : 818
1

BUTTON
EXIT

EXIT

INST IP: 000.000.000.000

EDIT

EXIT

SETUP X.X

Cursor
location is
indicated by
brackets

INST IP: [0] 00.000.000

DEL [0]

ENTR EXIT

SETUP X.X GATEWAY IP: 000.000.000.000
EDIT

EXIT

SETUP X.X

GATEWAY IP: [0] 00.000.000

DEL [?]

ENTR EXIT

SETUP X.X SUBNET MASK:255.255.255.0
EDIT

EXIT

SETUP X.X SUBNET MASK:[2]55.255.255.0
SETUP X.X TCP PORT 3000

EDIT

ENTR EXIT

EXIT
The PORT number must remain at 3000.
Do not change this setting unless instructed to by
Teledyne Instruments Customer Service personnel.

SETUP X.X

INITIALIZING INET 0%
…
INITIALIZING INET 100%

INITIALIZATI0N SUCCEEDED

SETUP X.X
ID

Figure 6-4:
150

DEL [?]

INET

SETUP X.X

INITIALIZATION FAILED

Contact your IT
Network Administrator

COMMUNICATIONS MENU
COM1

COM2

EXIT

COMM – LAN / Internet Manual Configuration
06864B DCN6314

Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer

Communications Setup and Operation

6.5.2. CONFIGURING ETHERNET COMMUNICATION USING DYNAMIC
HOST CONFIGURATION PROTOCOL (DHCP)
The default Ethernet setting is DHCP.
1. See your network administrator to affirm that your network server is running DHCP.
2. Access the Communications Menu (SETUP>MORE>COMM) and follow the setup
sequence as shown in Figure 6-5.

Figure 6-5 :

06864B DCN6314

COMM – LAN / Internet Automatic Configuration (DHCP)
151

Communications Setup and Operation

Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer

6.5.3. CHANGING THE ANALYZER’S HOSTNAME
The HOSTNAME is the name by which the analyzer appears on your network. The
default name for all Teledyne API’s T300 analyzers is T300. To change this name
(particularly if you have more than one T300/T300M Analyzer on your network), press:

BUTTON

FUNCTION

Moves the cursor one character to the right.

INS

Inserts a character before the cursor location.

DEL

Deletes a character at the cursor location.

[?]

Press this key to cycle through the range of
numerals and characters available for
insertion. 0-9, A-Z, space ’ ~ !  # $ % ^ & * (
) - _ = +[ ] { } < >\ | ; : , . / ?

ENTR

Accepts the new setting and returns to the
previous menu.

EXIT

Ignores the new setting and returns to the
previous menu.

Some keys only appear as needed.

152

06864B DCN6314

Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer

Communications Setup and Operation

6.6. USB PORT (OPTION) FOR REMOTE ACCESS
The analyzer can be operated through a personal computer by downloading the TAPI
USB driver and directly connecting their respective USB ports.
1. Install the Teledyne T-Series USB driver on your computer, downloadable from the
Teledyne API website under Help Center>Software Downloads (www.teledyneapi.com/software).
2. Run the installer file: “TAPIVCPInstaller.exe”

3. Connect the USB cable between the USB ports on your personal computer and your
analyzer. The USB cable should be a Type A – Type B cable, commonly used as a
USB printer cable.
4. Determine the Windows XP Com Port number that was automatically assigned to
the USB connection. (Start → Control Panel → System → Hardware → Device
Manager). This is the com port that should be set in the communications software,
such as APIcom or Hyperterminal.

Refer to the Quick Start (Direct Cable Connection) section of the Teledyne APIcom
Manual, PN 07463.

06864B DCN6314

153

Communications Setup and Operation

Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer

5. In the instrument’s SETUP>MORE>COMM>COM2 menu, make the following settings:
Baud Rate: 115200
COM2 Mode Settings:
Quiet Mode
ON
Computer Mode
ON
MODBUS RTU
OFF
MODBUS ASCII
OFF
E,8,1 MODE
OFF
E,7,1 MODE
OFF
RS-485 MODE
OFF
SECURITY MODE
OFF
MULTIDROP MODE
OFF
ENABLE MODEM
OFF
ERROR CHECKING
ON
XON/XOFF HANDSHAKE OFF
HARDWARE HANDSHAKE OFF
HARDWARE FIFO
ON
COMMAND PROMPT
OFF
6. Next, configure your communications software, such as APIcom. Use the COM port
determined in Step 4 and the baud rate set in Step 5. The figures below show how
these parameters would be configured in the Instrument Properties window in
APIcom when configuring a new instrument. See the APIcom manual (PN 07463)
for more details.

Note

154



USB configuration requires that the baud rates of the instrument and
the PC match; check the PC baud rate and change if needed.



Using the USB port disallows use of the rear panel COM2 port except
for multidrop communication.

06864B DCN6314

Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer

Communications Setup and Operation

6.7. COMMUNICATIONS PROTOCOLS
Two communications protocols available with the analyzer are MODBUS and Hessen.
MODBUS setup instructions are provided here (Section 6.7.1) and registers are provided
in Appendix A. Hessen setup and operation instructions are provided in Section 6.7.2.

6.7.1. MODBUS
The following set of instructions assumes that the user is familiar with MODBUS
communications, and provides minimal information to get started. For additional
instruction, please refer to the Teledyne API MODBUS manual, PN 06276. Also refer to
www.modbus.org for MODBUS communication protocols.
Minimum Requirements






Instrument firmware with MODBUS capabilities installed.
MODBUS-compatible software (TAPI uses MODBUS Poll for testing; see
www.modbustools.com)
Personal computer
Communications cable (Ethernet or USB or RS232)
Possibly a null modem adapter or cable

MODBUS Setup:
Set Com Mode parameters
Comm Ethernet:

Using the front panel menu, go to SETUP – MORE – COMM – INET; scroll through the INET
submenu until you reach TCP PORT 2 (the standard setting is 502), then continue to TCP
PORT 2 MODBUS TCP/IP; press EDIT and toggle the menu button to change the setting
to ON, then press ENTR. (Change Machine ID if needed: see “Slave ID”).
USB/RS232: Using the front panel menu, go to SETUP – MORE – COMM – COM2 – EDIT; scroll through
the COM2 EDIT submenu until the display shows COM2 MODBUS RTU: OFF (press
OFF to change the setting to ON. Scroll NEXT to COM2 MODBUS ASCII and ensure it is
set to OFF. Press ENTR to keep the new settings. (If RTU is not available with your
communications equipment, set the COM2 MODBUS ASCII setting to ON and ensure that
COM2 MODBUS RTU is set to OFF. Press ENTR to keep the new settings).

Slave ID

A MODBUS slave ID must be set for each instrument. Valid slave ID’s are in the range of 1 to 247. If
your analyzer is connected to a serial network (i.e., RS-485), a unique Slave ID must be assigned to each
instrument. To set the slave ID for the instrument, go to SETUP – MORE – COMM – ID. The default
MACHINE ID is the same as the model number. Toggle the menu buttons to change the ID.

Reboot analyzer

For the settings to take effect, power down the analyzer, wait 5 seconds, and power up the analyzer.

Make appropriate cable
connections



Connect your analyzer either:
via its Ethernet or USB port to a PC (this may require a USB-to-RS232 adapter for your PC; if so, also
install the software driver from the CD supplied with the adapter, and reboot the computer if required), or
 via its COM2 port to a null modem (this may require a null modem adapter or cable).

Specify MODBUS software
settings
(examples used here are for
MODBUS Poll software)

Click Setup / [Read / Write Definition] /.
a. In the Read/Write Definition window (see example that follows) select a Function (what you wish
to read from the analyzer).
b. Input Quantity (based on your firmware’s register map).
c. In the View section of the Read/Write Definition window select a Display (typically Float Inverse).
d. Click OK.
2. Next, click Connection/Connect.
a. In the Connection Setup window (see example that follows), select the options based on your
computer.
b. Press OK.
Use the Register Map to find the test parameter names for the values displayed (see example that
follows). If desired, assign an alias for each.
1.

Read the Modbus Poll Register

Example Read/Write Definition window:

06864B DCN6314

155

Communications Setup and Operation

Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer

Example Connection Setup window:

Example MODBUS Poll window:

6.7.2. HESSEN
The Hessen protocol is a multidrop protocol, in which several remote instruments are
connected via a common communications channel to a host computer. The remote
156

06864B DCN6314

Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer

Communications Setup and Operation

instruments are regarded as slaves of the host computer. The remote instruments are
unaware that they are connected to a multidrop bus and never initiate Hessen protocol
messages. They only respond to commands from the host computer and only when they
receive a command containing their own unique ID number.
The Hessen protocol is designed to accomplish two things: to obtain the status of remote
instruments, including the concentrations of all the gases measured; and to place remote
instruments into zero or span calibration or measure mode. API’s implementation
supports both of these principal features.
The Hessen protocol is not well defined, therefore while API’s application is completely
compatible with the protocol itself, it may be different from implementations by other
companies.
Note

The following sections describe the basics for setting up your instrument
to operate over a Hessen Protocol network.
For more detailed information as well as a list of host computer
commands and examples of command and response message syntax,
download the Manual Addendum for Hessen Protocol from the Teledyne
API web site: http://www.teledyne-api.com/manuals/.

6.7.2.1. HESSEN COMM PORT CONFIGURATION
Hessen protocol requires the communication parameters of the T300/T300M Analyzer’s
COMM ports to be set differently than the standard configuration as shown in Table 6-4.
Table 6-4:

RS-232 Communication Parameters for Hessen Protocol

PARAMETER

STANDARD

HESSEN

Baud Rate

300 – 19200

1200

Data Bits

Stop Bits

Parity

None

Even

Duplex

Full

Half

To change the baud rate of the T300/T300M’s COMM ports, see Section 6.2.2.
To change the rest of the COMM port parameters listed in Table 6-4, see Section 6.2 and
Table 6-1.

IMPORTANT

IMPACT ON READINGS OR DATA
Ensure that the communication parameters of the host computer are also
properly set.

Note

The instrument software has a 200 ms latency before it responds to
commands issued by the host computer. This latency should present no

06864B DCN6314

157

Communications Setup and Operation

Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer

problems, but you should be aware of it and not issue commands to the
instrument too quickly.

158

06864B DCN6314

Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer

Communications Setup and Operation

6.7.2.2. ACTIVATING HESSEN PROTOCOL
Once the COMM port has been properly configured, the next step in configuring the
T300/T300M to operate over a Hessen protocol network is to activate the Hessen mode
for COMM ports and configure the communication parameters for the port(s)
appropriately.
To activate the Hessen Protocol, press:

06864B DCN6314

159

Communications Setup and Operation

Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer

6.7.2.3. SELECTING A HESSEN PROTOCOL TYPE
Currently there are two versions of Hessen Protocol in use.
The original
implementation, referred to as TYPE 1, and a more recently released version, TYPE 2
that has more flexibility when operating with instruments that can measure more than
one type of gas.
For more specific information about the difference between TYPE 1 and TYPE 2
download the Manual Addendum for Hessen Protocol from the Teledyne API web site:
http://www.teledyne-api.com/manuals/.
To select a Hessen Protocol Type press:

Note

160

While Hessen Protocol Mode can be activated independently for RS-232
and COM2, the TYPE selection affects both Ports.

06864B DCN6314

Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer

Communications Setup and Operation

6.7.2.4. SETTING THE HESSEN PROTOCOL RESPONSE MODE
The Teledyne API’s implementation of Hessen Protocol allows the user to choose one of
several different modes of response for the analyzer.
Table 6-5:

Teledyne API’s Hessen Protocol Response Modes

MODE ID

MODE DESCRIPTION

CMD

This is the Default Setting. Reponses from the instrument are encoded as the traditional
command format. Style and format of responses depend on exact coding of the initiating
command.

BCC

Responses from the instrument are always delimited with (at the beginning of the
response, (at the end of the response followed by a 2 digit Block Check Code
(checksum), regardless of the command encoding.

TEXT

Responses from the instrument are always delimited with at the beginning and the
end of the string, regardless of the command encoding.

To select a Hessen response mode, press:

06864B DCN6314

161

Communications Setup and Operation

Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer

6.7.3. HESSEN PROTOCOL GAS LIST ENTRIES
6.7.3.1. HESSEN PROTOCOL GAS ID
The T300/T300M Analyzer keeps a list of available gas types. Each entry in this list
takes the following format:

[GAS TYPE],[RANGE],[GAS ID],[REPORTED]
WHERE:
GAS TYPE = The type of gas to be reported (e.g. CO, CO2, O2, etc.).
RANGE

= The concentration range for this entry in the gas list. This
feature permits the user to select which concentration range
will be used for this gas list entry. The T300/T300M Analyzer
has two ranges: RANGE1 or LOW & RANGE2 or HIGH (See
Section 5.4.1).
0 - The HESSEN protocol to use whatever range is currently
active.
1 - The HESSEN protocol will always use RANGE1 for this
gas list entry.
2 - The HESSEN protocol will always use RANGE2 for this
gas list entry.
3 - Not applicable to the T300/T300M Analyzer.

GAS ID

= An identification number assigned to a specific gas. In the
case of the T300/T300M Analyzer in its base configuration,
there is only one gas CO, and its default GAS ID is 310. This
ID number should not be modified.

REPORT

= States whether this list entry is to be reported or not reported
when ever this gas type or instrument is polled by the
HESSEN network. If the list entry is not to be reported this
field will be blank.

While the T300/T300M Analyzer is a single gas instrument that measures CO, it can
have additional, optional sensors for CO2 or O2 installed. The default gas list entries for
these three gases are:

CO, 0, 310, REPORTED
CO2, 0, 311, REPORTED
O2, 0, 312, REPORTED
These default settings cause the instrument to report the concentration value of the
currently active range. If you wish to have just concentration value stored for a specific
range, this list entry should be edited or additional entries should be added to the list.
EXAMPLE: Changing the above CO gas list entry to read:

CO, 2, 310, REPORTED
would cause only the last CO reading while RANGE2 (HIGH) range was active to be
recorded.

162

06864B DCN6314

Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer

Communications Setup and Operation

6.7.3.2. EDITING OR ADDING HESSEN GAS LIST ENTRIES
To add or edit an entry to the Hessen Gas List, press:

06864B DCN6314

163

Communications Setup and Operation

Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer

6.7.3.3. DELETING HESSEN GAS LIST ENTRIES
To delete an entry from the Hessen Gas list, press:

164

06864B DCN6314

Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer

Communications Setup and Operation

6.7.3.4. SETTING HESSEN PROTOCOL STATUS FLAGS
Teledyne API’s implementation of Hessen protocols includes a set of status bits that the
instrument includes in responses to inform the host computer of its condition. Each bit
can be assigned to one operational and warning message flag. The default settings for
these bit/flags are:
Table 6-6:

Default Hessen Status Flag Assignments
STATUS FLAG NAME

DEFAULT BIT ASSIGNMENT

WARNING FLAGS
SAMPLE FLOW WARNING

0001

BENCH TEMP WARNING

0002

SOURCE WARNING

0004

BOX TEMP WARNING

0008

WHEEL TEMP WARNING

0010

SAMPLE TEMP WARN

0020

SAMPLE PRESS WARN

0040

INVALID CONC
(The Instrument’s Front Panel Display Will Show The
Concentration As “Warnings”)

0080

OPERATIONAL FLAGS1
Instrument OFF

0100

In MANUAL Calibration Mode
In ZERO Calibration Mode

0200

0400

In O2 Calibration Mode (if O2 sensor installed )

2,4

In CO2 Calibration Mode (if CO2 sensor installed )

0400
2,4

0400

In SPAN Calibration Mode

0800

UNITS OF MEASURE FLAGS
UGM

0000

MGM

2000

PPB

4000

PPM

6000

SPARE/UNUSED BITS

1000, 8000

UNASSIGNED FLAGS (0000)
2

DCPS WARNING

AZERO WARN

CANNOT DYN SPAN

REAR BOARD NOT DET

SYNC WARNING

CANNOT DYN ZERO
CONC ALARM 1

CONC ALARM 2

2
3
3

SYSTEM RESET

These status flags are standard for all instruments and should probably not be modified.
Only applicable if the optional internal span gas generator is installed.
Only applicable if the analyzer is equipped with an alarm options.
It is possible to assign more than one flag to the same Hessen status bit. This allows the grouping of
similar flags, such as all temperature warnings, under the same status bit.
Be careful not to assign conflicting flags to the same bit as each status bit will be triggered if any of the
assigned flags is active.

06864B DCN6314

165

Communications Setup and Operation

Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer

To assign or reset the status flag bit assignments, press:

6.7.3.5. INSTRUMENT ID
Each instrument on a Hessen Protocol network must have a unique identifier (ID
number). If more than one T300/T300M analyzer is on the Hessen network, refer to
Section 5.7.1 for information and to customize the ID of each.

166

06864B DCN6314

7. DATA ACQUISITION SYSTEM (DAS) AND APICOM
The T300/T300M Analyzer contains a flexible and powerful, Internal Data Acquisition
System (DAS) that enables the analyzer to store concentration and calibration data as
well as a host of diagnostic parameters. The DAS of the T300/T300M can store up to
about one million data points, which can, depending on individual configurations, cover
days, weeks or months of valuable measurements. The data is stored in non-volatile
memory and is retained even when the instrument is powered off. Data is stored in plain
text format for easy retrieval and use in common data analysis programs (such as
spreadsheet-type programs).
The DAS is designed to be flexible, users have full control over the type, length and
reporting time of the data. The DAS permits users to access stored data through the
instrument’s front panel or its communication ports.
The principal use of the DAS is logging data for trend analysis and predictive
diagnostics, which can assist in identifying possible problems before they affect the
functionality of the analyzer. The secondary use is for data analysis, documentation and
archival in electronic format.
To support the DAS functionality, Teledyne API offers APICOM, a program that
provides a visual interface for remote or local setup, configuration and data retrieval of
the DAS. The APICOM manual, which is included with the program, contains a more
detailed description of the DAS structure and configuration, which is briefly described
in this manual.
The T300/T300M is configured with a basic DAS configuration, which is enabled by
default. New data channels are also enabled by default at their creation, but all channels
may be turned off for later or occasional use.
The green SAMPLE LED on the instrument front panel, which indicates the analyzer
status, also indicates certain aspects of the DAS status:
Table 7-1: Front Panel LED Status Indicators for DAS
LED STATE

DAS STATUS

Off

System is in calibration mode. Data logging can be enabled or disabled for this mode. Calibration
data are typically stored at the end of calibration periods, concentration data are typically not
sampled, diagnostic data should be collected.

Blinking

Instrument is in hold-off mode, a short period after the system exits calibrations. DAS channels can
be enabled or disabled for this period. Concentration data are typically disabled whereas
diagnostic should be collected.

06864B DCN6314

Sampling normally.

167

Data Acquisition System (DAS) and APICOM

Note

Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer

DAS operation is suspended whenever its configuration is edited using
the analyzer’s front panel and therefore data may be lost. To prevent
such data loss, it is recommended to use the APICOM graphical user
interface for DAS changes (Sections .
Please be aware that all stored data will be erased if the analyzer’s diskon-module or CPU board is replaced or if the configuration data stored
there is reset.

Note

The DAS can be disabled only by disabling or deleting its individual data
channels.

7.1. DAS STRUCTURE
The DAS is designed around the feature of a “record”. A record is a single data point.
The type of data recorded in a record is defined by two properties:
PARAMETER type that defines the kind of data to be stored (e.g. the average of gas
concentrations measured with three digits of precision). See Section 7.1.6.
A TRIGGER event that defines when the record is made (e.g. timer; every time a
calibration is performed, etc.). See Section 7.1.5.
The specific PARAMETERS and TRIGGER events that describe an individual record
are defined in a construct called a DATA CHANNEL (see Section 7.1.1). Each data
channel is related one or more parameters with a specific trigger event and various other
operational characteristics related to the records being made (e.g. the channels name,
number or records to be made, time period between records, whether or not the record is
exported via the analyzer’s RS-232 port, etc.).

168

06864B DCN6314

Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer

Data Acquisition System (DAS) and APICOM

7.1.1. DAS DATA CHANNELS
The key to the flexibility of the DAS is its ability to store a large number of
combinations of triggering events and data parameters in the form of data channels.
Users may create up to 50 data channels and each channel can contain one or more
parameters. For each channel, the following are selected:

Table 7-2:



One triggering event is selected.



Up to 50 data parameters, which can be the shared between channels.



Several other properties that define the structure of the channel and allow the user
to make operational decisions regarding the channel.

DAS Data Channel Properties

PROPERTY

SETTING RANGE

Up to 6 letters or digits 1.
Any available event
(see Appendix A-5).

“NONE”

TRIGGERING
EVENT

The event that triggers the data channel to measure
and store the datum.

ATIMER

NUMBER AND
LIST OF
PARAMETERS

A User-configurable list of data types to be
recorded in any given channel.

1
(COMEAS)

Any available parameter
(see Appendix A-5).

The amount of time between each channel data
point.

000:01:00
(1 hour)

000:00:01 to
366:23:59
(Days:Hours:Minutes)

100

1 to 1 million, limited by
available storage space.

OFF

OFF or ON

OFF

OFF or ON

REPORT PERIOD
NUMBER OF
RECORDS
RS-232 REPORT
CHANNEL
ENABLED
CAL HOLD OFF
2

DEFAULT
SETTING

The name of the data channel.

NAME

DESCRIPTION

The number of reports that will be stored in the data
file. Once the limit is exceeded, the oldest data is
over-written.
Enables the analyzer to automatically report
channel values to the RS-232 ports.
Enables or disables the channel. Allows a channel
to be temporarily turned off without deleting it.
Disables sampling of data parameters while
2
instrument is in calibration mode .

More with APICOM, but only the first six are displayed on the front panel.
When enabled records are not recorded until the DAS HOLD OFF period is passed after calibration mode. DAS HOLD OFF SET in
the VARS menu (see Section 7.1.11).

7.1.2. DEFAULT DAS CHANNELS
A set of default Data Channels has been included in the analyzer’s software for logging
CO concentration and certain predictive diagnostic data. These default channels include
but are not limited to:


CONC: Samples CO concentration at one minute intervals and stores an average
every hour with a time and date stamp. Readings during calibration and calibration
hold off are not included in the data.




PNUMTC: Collects sample flow and sample pressure data at five-minute intervals
and stores an average once a day with a time and date stamp. This data is useful
for monitoring the condition of the pump and critical flow orifice (sample flow) and
the sample filter (clogging indicated by a drop in sample pressure) over time to
predict when maintenance will be required.


06864B DCN6314

By default, the last 800 hourly averages are stored.

The last 360 daily averages (about 1 year) are stored.

169

Data Acquisition System (DAS) and APICOM


Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer

CALDAT: Logs new slope and offset of CO measurements every time a zero or
span calibration is performed and the result changes the value of the slope
(triggering event: SLPCHG). The CO stability data to evaluate if the calibration
value was stable are also stored.


This data channel will store data from the last 200 calibrations and can be used
to document analyzer calibration and is useful in the detection of the in slope
and offset (instrument response) when performing predictive diagnostics as part
of a regular maintenance schedule.



The CALDAT channel collects data based on events (e.g. a calibration
operation) rather than a timed interval and therefore does not represent any
specific length of time. As with all data channels, a date and time stamp is
recorded for every logged data point.

These default Data Channels can be used as they are, or they can be customized from the
front panel to fit a specific application. They can also be deleted to make room for
custom user-programmed Data Channels.
Appendix A-5 lists the firmware-specific DAS configuration in plain-text format. This
text file can either be loaded into APICOM and then modified and uploaded to the
instrument or can be copied and pasted into a terminal program to be sent to the
analyzer.

IMPORTANT

170

IMPACT ON READINGS OR DATA
Sending a DAS configuration to the analyzer through its COM ports will
replace the existing configuration and will delete all stored data. Back up
any existing data and the DAS configuration before uploading new
settings.

06864B DCN6314

Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer

Data Acquisition System (DAS) and APICOM

Triggering Events and Data Parameters/Functions for these default channels are:
List of Channels

List of Parameters

Name: CONC
Event: ATIMER

Parameters: 1

PARAMETER

MODE

PRECISION

STORE NUM
SAMPLES

CONC1

AVG

OFF

SLOPE1
OFFSET1
ZSCNC1

INST
I NST
INST

3
1
1

OFF
OFF
OFF

SMPLFLW
SMPLPRS

AVG
AVG

1
1

OFF
OFF

STABIL
DETMES
RATIO

INST
INST
INST

2
1
3

OFF
OFF
OFF

DETMES
RATIO

INST
INST

1
3

OFF
OFF

BNTEMP
BOXTEMP
PHTDRV

AVG
AVG
AVG

1
1
1

OFF
OFF
OFF

Report Period: 000:01:00
No. of Records: 800
RS-232 Report: OFF
Channel Enabled: ON
Cal Hold OFF: ON
Name: CALDAT
Event: SLPCHG

Parameters: 3
Report Period: N/A
No. of Records: 200
RS-232 Report: OFF
Channel Enabled: ON
Cal Hold OFF: OFF
Name: PNUMTC
Event: ATIMER

Parameters: 2
Report Period: 000:01:00
No. of Records: 360
RS-232 Report: OFF
Channel Enabled: ON
Cal Hold OFF: OFF
Name: STBZERO
Event: EXITZR

Parameters: 3
Report Period: N/A
No. of Records: 200
RS-232 Report: OFF
Channel Enabled: ON
Cal Hold OFF: OFF
Name: STBSPN
Event: EXITSP

Parameters: 2
Report Period: N/A
No. of Records: 200
RS-232 Report: OFF
Channel Enabled: ON
Cal Hold OFF: OFF
Name: TEMP
Event: EXITSP

Parameters: 3
Report Period: 000:06:00
No. of Records: 400
RS-232 Report: OFF
Channel Enabled: ON
Cal Hold OFF: OFF

Figure 7-1:

06864B DCN6314

Default DAS Channel Setup

171

Data Acquisition System (DAS) and APICOM

Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer

7.1.3. VIEWING DAS CHANNELS AND INDIVIDUAL RECORDS
DAS data and settings can be viewed on the front panel through the following
buttonstroke sequence.
SAMPLE
CAL

SETUP X.X

Button

PRIMARY SETUP MENU

CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE

SETUP X.X

DAS VIEW – Control Button Functions

SETUP

EXIT

DATA ACQUISITION

VIEW EDIT

EXIT

FUNCTION

PV10

Moves the VIEW backward 10 record

Moves the VIEW backward 1 records or channel

Moves the VIEW forward 1 record or channel

NX10

Moves the VIEW forward 10 records

Selects the next parameter on the list

Buttons only appear when applicable
SETUP X.X

CONC: DATA AVAILABLE

NEXT VIEW

EXIT

SETUP X.X
SETUP X.X

PNUMTC: DATA AVAILABLE

PREV NEXT VIEW

101:21:00 CONC1=39.0 PPM

PV10 PREV

EXIT

EXIT
SETUP X.X

101:21:00 CONC1=39.0 PPM

PV10 PREV NEXT NX10
SETUP X.X

EXIT

CALDAT: DATA AVAILABLE

PREV NEXT VIEW

SETUP X.X

EXIT

101:22:00 CONC1=39.1 PPM

PV10 PREV
SETUP X.X

101:19:45 SLOPE1=0.997

PV10 PREV

SETUP X.X

EXIT

PRM>

102:04:55 SLOPE1=1.002

PV10 PREV NX10 NEXT

EXIT

SETUP X.X
EXIT

PV10 PREV

101:19:45 OFFSET=1.3

EXIT

Continue pressing NEXT to view remaining
DAS channels

172

06864B DCN6314

Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer

Data Acquisition System (DAS) and APICOM

7.1.4. EDITING DAS CHANNELS
DAS configuration is most conveniently done through the APICOM remote control
program. The following list of button strokes shows how to edit the DAS using the front
panel.

When editing the data channels, the top line of the display indicates some of the
configuration parameters.
For example, the display line:
0) CONC: ATIMER, 1, 800

Translates to the following configuration:
Channel No.: 0
NAME: CONC
TRIGGER EVENT: ATIMER
PARAMETERS: One parameter is included in this channel
EVENT: This channel is set up to store 800 records.

06864B DCN6314

173

Data Acquisition System (DAS) and APICOM

Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer

7.1.4.1. EDITING DAS DATA CHANNEL NAMES
To edit the name of a DAS data channel, follow the instruction shown in Section 7.1.4.1,
then press:

174

06864B DCN6314

Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer

Data Acquisition System (DAS) and APICOM

7.1.5. EDITING DAS TRIGGERING EVENTS
Triggering events define when and how the DAS records a measurement of any given
data channel. Triggering events are firmware-specific and are listed in Appendix A-5.
The most commonly used triggering events are:


ATIMER: Sampling at regular intervals specified by an automatic timer. Most
trending information is usually stored at such regular intervals, which can be
instantaneous or averaged.



EXITZR, EXITSP, and SLPCHG (exit zero, exit span, slope change): Sampling at
the end of (irregularly occurring) calibrations or when the response slope changes.
These triggering events create instantaneous data points, e.g., for the new slope
and offset (concentration response) values at the end of a calibration. Zero and
slope values are valuable to monitor response drift and to document when the
instrument was calibrated.



WARNINGS: Some data may be useful when stored if one of several warning
messages appears such as WTEMPW (GFC Wheel temperature warning). This is
helpful for troubleshooting by monitoring when a particular warning occurrs.

To edit the list of data parameters associated with a specific data channel, follow the
instruction shown in Section 7.1.4 then press:

06864B DCN6314

175

Data Acquisition System (DAS) and APICOM

Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer

7.1.6. EDITING DAS PARAMETERS
Data parameters are types of data that may be measured and stored by the DAS. For
each analyzer model, the list of available data parameters is different, fully defined and
not customizable. Appendix A-5 lists firmware specific data parameters for the
T300/T300M. DAS parameters include things like CO concentration measurements,
temperatures of the various heaters placed around the analyzer, pressures and flows of
the pneumatic subsystem and other diagnostic measurements as well as calibration data
such as stability, slope and offset.
Most data parameters have associated measurement units, such as mV, ppb, cm³/min,
etc., although some parameters have no units (e.g. SLOPE). With the exception of
concentration readings, none of these units of measure can be changed. To change the
units of measure for concentration readings, see Section 5.4.4.
DAS does not keep track of the unit (e.g., PPM, PPB, etc.) of each
concentration value and DAS data files may contain concentrations in
more than one type of unit if the unit was changed during data
acquisition.

Note

Each data parameter has user-configurable functions that define how the data are
recorded (refer to Table 7-3).
Table 7-3:

DAS Data Parameter Functions

FUNCTION

EFFECT

PARAMETER

Instrument-specific parameter name.

SAMPLE MODE

INST: Records instantaneous reading.
AVG: Records average reading during reporting interval.
SDEV: Records the standard deviation of the data points recorded during the reporting interval.
MIN: Records minimum (instantaneous) reading during reporting interval.
MAX: Records maximum (instantaneous) reading during reporting interval.

PRECISION

0 to 4: Sets the number of digits to the right decimal point for each record.
Example: Setting 4; “399.9865 PPB”
Setting 0; “400 PPB”

STORE NUM SAMPLES

OFF: Stores only the average (default).
ON: Stores the average and the number of samples in used to compute the value of the
parameter. This property is only useful when the AVG sample mode is used. Note that the
number of samples is the same for all parameters in one channel and needs to be specified only
for one of the parameters in that channel.

Users can specify up to 50 parameters per data channel (the T300/T300M provides
about 40 parameters). However, the number of parameters and channels is ultimately
limited by available memory.
Data channels can be edited individually from the front panel without affecting other
data channels. However, when editing a data channel, such as during adding, deleting or
editing parameters, all data for that particular channel will be lost, because the DAS can
store only data of one format (number of parameter columns, etc.) for any given
channel. In addition, a DAS configuration can only be uploaded remotely as an entire
set of channels. Hence, remote update of the DAS will always delete all current
channels and stored data.

176

06864B DCN6314

Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer

Data Acquisition System (DAS) and APICOM

To modify, add or delete a parameter, follow the instruction shown in Section 7.1.4 then
press:

Note

06864B DCN6314

When the STORE NUM SAMPLES feature is turned on, the instrument will
store how many measurements were used to compute the AVG, SDEV,
MIN or MAX value but not the actual measurements themselves.

177

Data Acquisition System (DAS) and APICOM

Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer

7.1.7. SAMPLE PERIOD AND REPORT PERIOD
The DAS defines two principal time periods by which sample readings are taken and
permanently recorded: Sample and Report periods.


SAMPLE PERIOD: Determines how often DAS temporarily records a sample
reading of the parameter in volatile memory. SAMPLE PERIOD is only used when
the DAS parameter’s sample mode is set for AVG, SDEV, MIN or MAX.
The SAMPLE PERIOD is set to one minute by default and generally cannot be
accessed from the standard DAS front panel menu, but is available via the
instrument’s communication ports by using APICOM or the analyzer’s standard
serial data protocol.



178

REPORT PERIOD: Sets how often the sample readings stored in volatile memory
are processed, (e.g. average, minimum or maximum are calculated) and the results
stored permanently in the instrument’s Disk-on-Module as well as transmitted via the
analyzer’s communication ports. The Report Period may be set from the front
panel. If the INST sample mode is selected the instrument stores and reports an
instantaneous reading of the selected parameter at the end of the chosen report
period.

06864B DCN6314

Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer

Data Acquisition System (DAS) and APICOM

To define the REPORT PERIOD, follow the instruction shown in Section 7.1.4 then
press:

The SAMPLE PERIOD and REPORT PERIOD intervals are synchronized to the
beginning and end of the appropriate interval of the instruments internal clock.


If SAMPLE PERIOD were set for one minute the first reading would occur at the
beginning of the next full minute according to the instrument’s internal clock.



If the REPORT PERIOD were set for of one hour, the first report activity would occur
at the beginning of the next full hour according to the instrument’s internal clock.

EXAMPLE:
Given the above settings, if the DAS were activated at 7:57:35 the first sample would
occur at 7:58 and the first report would be calculated at 8:00 consisting of data points for
7:58, 7:59 and 8:00.
During the next hour (from 8:01 to 9:00), the instrument will take a sample reading
every minute and include 60 sample readings.

06864B DCN6314

179

Data Acquisition System (DAS) and APICOM

Note

Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer

In AVG, SDEV, MIN or MAX sample modes (see Section 6.1.5.3), the
settings for the Sample Period and the Report Period determine the
number of data points used each time the parameter is calculated, stored
and reported to the COMM ports.
The actual sample readings are not stored past the end of the chosen
report period.
When the STORE NUM SAMPLES feature is turned on, the instrument will
store the number of measurements used to compute the AVG, SDEV, MIN
or MAX Value, but not the actual measurements themselves.

REPORT PERIODS IN PROGRESS WHEN INSTRUMENT IS POWERED OFF
If the instrument is powered off in the middle of a REPORT PERIOD, the samples
accumulated so far during that period are lost. Once the instrument is turned back on,
the DAS restarts taking samples and temporarily stores them in volatile memory as part
of the REPORT PERIOD currently active at the time of restart. At the end of this
REPORT PERIOD PERIOD, only the sample readings taken since the instrument was
turned back on will be included in any AVG, SDEV, MIN or MAX calculation.
Also, the STORE NUM SAMPLES feature will report the number of sample readings
taken since the instrument was restarted.

180

06864B DCN6314

Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer

Data Acquisition System (DAS) and APICOM

7.1.8. NUMBER OF RECORDS
The number of data records in the DAS is limited to about a cumulative one million data
points in all channels (one megabyte of space on the Disk-on-Module). However, the
actual number of records is also limited by the total number of parameters and channels
and other settings in the DAS configuration. Every additional data channel, parameter,
number of samples setting, etc., will reduce the maximum amount of data points. In
general, however, the maximum data capacity is divided amongst all channels (max: 20)
and parameters (max: 50 per channel).
The DAS will check the amount of available data space and prevent the user from
specifying too many records at any given point. If, for example, the DAS memory space
can accommodate 375 more data records, the ENTR button will disappear when trying
to specify more than that number of records. This check for memory space may also
cause the upload of a DAS configuration with APICOM or a terminal program to fail, if
the combined number of records would be exceeded. In this case, it is suggested to
either try to determine what the maximum number of records available is using the front
panel interface or use trial-and-error in designing the DAS script or calculate the number
of records using the DAS or APICOM manuals.
To set the NUMBER OF RECORDS, follow the instruction shown in Section 7.1.4
then press:
.

06864B DCN6314

181

Data Acquisition System (DAS) and APICOM

182

Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer

06864B DCN6314

Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer

Data Acquisition System (DAS) and APICOM

7.1.9. RS-232 REPORT FUNCTION
The DAS can automatically report data to the communications ports, where they can be
captured with a terminal emulation program or simply viewed by the user using the
APICOM software.
To enable automatic COMM port reporting, follow the instruction shown in Section
7.1.4 then press:

7.1.9.1. THE COMPACT REPORT FEATURE
When enabled, this option avoids unnecessary line breaks on all RS-232 reports. Instead
of reporting each parameter in one channel on a separate line, up to five parameters are
reported in one line.
The COMPACT DATA REPORT generally cannot be accessed from the standard
DAS front panel menu, but is available via the instrument’s communication ports by
using APICOM or the analyzer’s standard serial data protocol.

06864B DCN6314

183

Data Acquisition System (DAS) and APICOM

Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer

7.1.9.2. THE STARTING DATE FEATURE
This option allows the user to specify a starting date for any given channel in case the
user wants to start data acquisition only after a certain time and date. If the STARTING
DATE is in the past (the default condition), the DAS ignores this setting and begins
recording data as defined by the REPORT PERIOD setting.
The STARTING DATE generally cannot be accessed from the standard DAS front
panel menu, but is available via the instrument’s communication ports by using
APICOM or the analyzer’s standard serial data protocol.

7.1.10. DISABLING/ENABLING DATA CHANNELS
Data channels can be temporarily disabled, which can reduce the read/write wear on the
Disk-on-Module.
To disable a data channel, follow the instruction shown in Section 7.1.4 then press:

184

06864B DCN6314

Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer

Data Acquisition System (DAS) and APICOM

7.1.11. HOLDOFF FEATURE
The DAS HOLDOFF feature prevents data collection during calibration operations and
at certain times when the quality of the analyzer’s CO measurements may not be certain
(e.g. while the instrument is warming up). In this case, the length of time that the
HOLDOFF feature is active is determined by the value of the internal variable (VARS),
DAS_HOLDOFF.
To set the length of the DAS_HOLDOFF period, go to the SETUP>MORE>VARS
menu (Section 5.8) and EDIT the “0) DAS_HOLD_OFF…” parameter.
To enable or disable the HOLDOFF feature for an individual channel, follow the
instruction shown in Section 7.1.4 then press:

06864B DCN6314

185

Data Acquisition System (DAS) and APICOM

Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer

7.2. REMOTE DAS CONFIGURATION
The DAS can be configured and operated remotely via either the APICOM interface or a
terminal emulation program. Once a DAS configuration is edited (which can be done
offline and without interrupting DAS data collection), it is conveniently uploaded to the
instrument and can be stored on a computer for later review, alteration or documentation
and archival.

7.2.1. DAS CONFIGURATION VIA APICOM
Figure 7-2 shows examples of APICOM’s main interface, which emulates the look and
functionality of the instrument’s actual front panel. Figure 7-3 shows an example of
APICOM being used to remotely configure the DAS feature.
The APICOM user manual (Teledyne API’s P/N 039450000) is included in the
APICOM installation file, which can be downloaded at http://www.teledyneapi.com/software/apicom/.

Figure 7-2:

186

APICOM Remote Control Program Interface

06864B DCN6314

Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer

Figure 7-3:

Data Acquisition System (DAS) and APICOM

APICOM User Interface for Configuring the DAS

Once a DAS configuration is edited (which can be done offline and without interrupting
DAS data collection), it is conveniently uploaded to the instrument and can be stored on
a computer for later review, alteration or documentation and archival. Refer to the
APICOM manual for details on these procedures. The APICOM user manual (Teledyne
API’s P/N 039450000) is included in the APICOM installation file, which can be
downloaded at http://www.teledyne-api.com/manuals/.

06864B DCN6314

187

Data Acquisition System (DAS) and APICOM

Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer

7.2.2. DAS CONFIGURATION USING TERMINAL EMULATION PROGRAMS
Although Teledyne API recommends the use of APICOM, the DAS can also be
accessed and configured through a terminal emulation program such as HyperTerminal
(see example in Figure 7-4).
To do this:


All configuration commands must be created and edited off line (e.g. cut & pasted in
from a text file or word processor) following a strict syntax (see below for example).



The script is then uploaded via the instrument’s RS-232 port(s).

Figure 7-4:

DAS Configuration Through a Terminal Emulation Program

Both of the above steps are best started by:
1. Downloading the default DAS configuration.
2. Getting familiar with its command structure and syntax conventions.
3. Altering a copy of the original file offline.
4. Uploading the new configuration into the analyzer.

IMPORTANT

IMPACT ON READINGS OR DATA
Whereas the editing, adding and deleting of DAS channels and
parameters of one channel through the front-panel control buttons can
be done without affecting the other channels, uploading a DAS
configuration script to the analyzer through its communication ports will
erase all data, parameters and channels by replacing them with the new
DAS configuration. Backup of data and the original DAS configuration is
advised before attempting any DAS changes.
Refer to Section 8.2.1 for details on remote access to and from the T300/T300M
Analyzer via the instrument’s COMM ports.

188

06864B DCN6314

8. REMOTE OPERATION
This section provides information needed when using external digital and serial I/O for
remote operation. It assumes that the electrical connections have been made as described
in Section3.3.1.
The T300 can be remotely configured, calibrated or queried for stored data through the
rear panel serial ports, via either Computer mode (using a personal computer) or
Interactive mode (using a terminal emulation program).

8.1. COMPUTER MODE
Computer mode is used when the analyzer is connected to a computer with a dedicated
interface program such as APICOM.

8.1.1. REMOTE CONTROL VIA APICOM
APICOM is an easy-to-use, yet powerful interface program that allows a user to access
and control any of Teledyne API’s main line of ambient and stack-gas instruments from
a remote connection through direct cable, modem or Ethernet. Running APICOM, a user
can:


Establish a link from a remote location to the T300 through direct cable
connection via RS-232 modem or Ethernet.



View the instrument’s front panel and remotely access all functions that could be
accessed manually on the instrument.



Remotely edit system parameters and set points.



Download, view, graph and save data for predictive diagnostics or data analysis.



Retrieve, view, edit, save and upload DAS configurations (Section 7.2.1).



Check on system parameters for trouble-shooting and quality control.

APICOM is very helpful for initial setup, data analysis, maintenance and
troubleshooting. Refer to the APICOM manual available for download from
http://www.teledyne-api.com/software/apicom/.

06864B DCN6314

189

Remote Operation

Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer

8.2. INTERACTIVE MODE
Interactive mode is used with a terminal emulation programs or a “dumb” computer
terminal.

8.2.1. REMOTE CONTROL VIA A TERMINAL EMULATION PROGRAM
Start a terminal emulation program such as HyperTerminal. All configuration
commands must be created following a strict syntax or be pasted in from an existing text
file, which was edited offline and then uploaded through a specific transfer procedure.
The commands that are used to operate the analyzer in this mode are listed in Table 8-1
and in Appendix A.
8.2.1.1. HELP COMMANDS IN INTERACTIVE MODE
Table 8-1:

Interactive Mode Software Commands

COMMAND

Function

Control-T

Switches the analyzer to terminal mode (echo, edit). If mode flags 1 & 2 are OFF, the
interface can be used in interactive mode with a terminal emulation program.

Control-C

Switches the analyzer to computer mode (no echo, no edit).
A carriage return is required after each command line is typed into the terminal/computer.
The command will not be sent to the analyzer to be executed until this is done. On
personal computers, this is achieved by pressing the ENTER button.

CR(carriage return)
BS (backspace)

Erases one character to the left of the cursor location.

ESC(escape)

Erases the entire command line.
This command prints a complete list of available commands along with the definitions of
their functionality to the display device of the terminal or computer being used. The ID
number of the analyzer is only necessary if multiple analyzers are on the same
communications line, such as the multi-drop setup.

?[ID] CR

8.2.1.2. COMMAND SYNTAX
Commands are not case-sensitive and all arguments within one command (i.e. ID
numbers, key words, data values, etc.) must be separated with a space character.
All Commands follow the syntax:
X [ID] COMMAND

Where
X

is the command type (one letter) that defines the type of command.
Allowed designators are listed in Appendix A-6.

[ID]

is the machine identification number (Section 5.7.1). Example: the
Command “? 700” followed by a carriage return would print the list of
available commands for the revision of software currently installed in the
instrument assigned ID Number 700.

COMMAND is the command designator: This string is the name of the command being
issued (LIST, ABORT, NAME, EXIT, etc.). Some commands may have
additional arguments that define how the command is to be executed.
Press ? or refer to Appendix A-6 for a list of available command
designators.

190

is a carriage return. All commands must be terminated by a carriage
return (usually achieved by pressing the ENTER button on a computer).

06864B DCN6314

Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer
Table 8-2:

Remote Operation

Teledyne API’s Serial I/O Command Types

COMMAND

COMMAND TYPE

Calibration

Diagnostic

Logon

Test measurement

Variable

Warning

8.2.1.3. DATA TYPES
Data types consist of integers, hexadecimal integers, floating-point numbers, Boolean
expressions and text strings.
Integer data: Used to indicate integral quantities such as a number of records, a filter
length, etc.


They consist of an optional plus or minus sign, followed by one or more digits.



For example, +1, -12, 123 are all valid integers.

Hexadecimal integer data: Used for the same purposes as integers.


They consist of the two characters “0x,” followed by one or more hexadecimal digits
(0-9, A-F, a-f), which is the ‘C’ programming language convention.



No plus or minus sign is permitted.



For example, 0x1, 0x12, 0x1234abcd are all valid hexadecimal integers.

Floating-point number: Used to specify continuously variable values such as
temperature set points, time intervals, warning limits, voltages, etc.


They consist of an optional plus or minus sign, followed by zero or more digits, an
optional decimal point and zero or more digits.



At least one digit must appear before or after the decimal point.



Scientific notation is not permitted.



For example, +1.0, 1234.5678, -0.1, 1 are all valid floating-point numbers.

Boolean expressions: Used to specify the value of variables or I/O signals that may
assume only two values.


They are denoted by the key words ON and OFF.

Text strings: Used to represent data that cannot be easily represented by other data
types, such as data channel names, which may contain letters and numbers.


They consist of a quotation mark, followed by one or more printable characters,
including spaces, letters, numbers, and symbols, and a final quotation mark.



For example, “a”, “1”, “123abc”, and “()[]<>” are all valid text strings.



It is not possible to include a quotation mark character within a text string.

Some commands allow you to access variables, messages, and other items. When using
these commands,

06864B DCN6314



you must type the entire name of the item



you cannot abbreviate any names.

191

Remote Operation

Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer

8.2.1.4. STATUS REPORTING
Reporting of status messages as an audit trail is one of the three principal uses for the
RS-232 interface (the other two being the command line interface for controlling the
instrument and the download of data in electronic format). You can effectively disable
the reporting feature by setting the interface to quiet mode (see Section 6.2.1, Table 6-1).
Status reports include warning messages, calibration and diagnostic status messages.
Refer to Appendix A-3 for a list of the possible messages, and this for information on
controlling the instrument through the RS-232 interface.
8.2.1.5. GENERAL MESSAGE FORMAT
All messages from the instrument (including those in response to a command line
request) are in the format:
X DDD:HH:MM [Id] MESSAGE

Where:
X

is a command type designator, a single character indicating the
message type, as shown in the Table 8-2.

DDD:HH:MM

is the time stamp, the date and time when the message was issued. It
consists of the Day-of-year (DDD) as a number from 1 to 366, the hour
of the day (HH) as a number from 00 to 23, and the minute (MM) as a
number from 00 to 59.

[ID]

is the analyzer ID, a number with 1 to 4 digits.

MESSAGE

is the message content that may contain warning messages, test
measurements, variable values, etc.

is a carriage return / line feed pair, which terminates the message.

The uniform nature of the output messages makes it easy for a host computer to parse
them into an easy structure. Keep in mind that the front panel display does not give any
information on the time a message was issued, hence it is useful to log such messages
for trouble-shooting and reference purposes. Terminal emulation programs such as
HyperTerminal can capture these messages to text files for later review.

8.3. REMOTE ACCESS BY MODEM
The T300/T300M can be connected to a modem for remote access. This requires a cable
between the analyzer’s COMM port and the modem, typically a DB-9F to DB-25M
cable (available from Teledyne API with P/N WR0000024).
Once the cable has been connected, check to make sure:

192



The DTE-DCE is in the DCE position.



The T300/T300M COMM port is set for a baud rate that is compatible with the
modem,



The modem is designed to operate with an 8-bit word length with one stop bit.



The MODEM ENABLE communication mode is turned on (Mode 64, see Table 6-1).

06864B DCN6314

Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer

Remote Operation

Once this is completed, the appropriate setup command line for your modem can be
entered into the analyzer. The default setting for this feature is:
AT Y0 &D0 &H0 &I0 S0=2 &B0 &N6 &M0 E0 Q1 &W0

This string can be altered to match your modem’s initialization and can be up to 100
characters long.
To change this setting press:

06864B DCN6314

193

Remote Operation

Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer

To initialize the modem press:

194

06864B DCN6314

Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer

Remote Operation

8.4. PASSWORD SECURITY FOR SERIAL REMOTE
COMMUNICATIONS
In order to provide security for remote access of the T300/T300M, a LOGON feature
can be enabled to require a password before the instrument will accept commands. This
is done by turning on the SECURITY MODE (Mode 4, Table 6-1). Once the
SECURITY MODE is enabled, the following items apply.


A password is required before the port will respond or pass on commands.



If the port is inactive for one hour, it will automatically logoff, which can also be
achieved with the LOGOFF command.



Three unsuccessful attempts to log on with an incorrect password will cause
subsequent logins to be disabled for 1 hour, even if the correct password is used.



If not logged on, the only active command is the '?' request for the help screen.



The following messages will be returned at logon:



LOGON SUCCESSFUL - Correct password given



LOGON FAILED - Password not given or incorrect



LOGOFF SUCCESSFUL - Connection terminated successfully

To log on to the T300/T300M Analyzer with SECURITY MODE feature enabled,
type:
LOGON 940331

940331 is the default password. To change the default password, use the variable RS232_PASS issued as follows:
V RS-232_PASS=NNNNNN

Where N is any numeral between 0 and 9.

06864B DCN6314

195

Remote Operation

Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer

This page intentionally left blank.

196

06864B DCN6314

9. CALIBRATION PROCEDURES
This section describes the calibration procedures for the T300/T300M. All of the
methods described in this section can be initiated and controlled through the COM ports.

IMPORTANT

Note

IMPACT ON READINGS OR DATA
If you are using the T300/T300M for US-EPA controlled monitoring, refer
to Section 10 for information on the EPA calibration protocol.

Throughout this section are various diagrams showing pneumatic
connections between the T300/T300M and various other pieces of
equipment such as calibrators and zero air sources.
These diagrams are only intended to be schematic representations of
these connections and do not reflect actual physical locations of
equipment and fitting location or orientation.
Contact your regional EPA or other appropriate governing agency for
more detailed recommendations.

9.1. CALIBRATION PREPARATIONS
The calibration procedures in this section assume that the range mode, analog range and
units of measure have already been selected for the analyzer. If this has not been done,
please do so before continuing (see Section 5.7 for instructions).

9.1.1. REQUIRED EQUIPMENT, SUPPLIES, AND EXPENDABLES
Calibration of the T300/T300M Analyzer requires specific equipment and supplies.
These include, but are not limited to, the following:

06864B DCN6314



Zero-air source



Span gas source



Gas lines - All Gas lines should be PTFE (Teflon), FEP, glass, stainless steel or
brass



A recording device such as a strip-chart recorder and/or data logger (optional) (For
electronic documentation, the internal data acquisition system DAS can be used).



Traceability Standards

197

Calibration Procedures

Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer

9.1.1.1. ZERO AIR
Zero air or zero calibration gas is defined as a gas that is similar in chemical
composition to the measured medium but without the gas to be measured by the
analyzer.
For the T300/T300M zero air should contain less than 25 ppb of CO and other major
interfering gases such as CO and Water Vapor. It should have a dew point of -5C or
less.
If your application is not a measurement in ambient air, the zero calibration gas should
be matched to the composition of the gas being measured.



Pure nitrogen (N2) can be used as a zero gas for applications where CO is
measured in nitrogen.
If your analyzer is equipped with an external zero air scrubber option, it is capable of
creating zero air from ambient air.

For analyzers without the zero air scrubber, a zero air generator such as the Teledyne
API’s T701 can be used. Please visit the company website for more information.
9.1.1.2. SPAN GAS
Span Gas is a gas specifically mixed to match the chemical composition of the type of
gas being measured at near full scale of the desired measurement range. It is
recommended that the span gas used have a concentration equal to 80-90% of the full
measurement range.
If Span Gas is sourced directly from a calibrated, pressurized tank, the gas mixture
should be CO mixed with Zero Air or N2 at the required ratio.
For oxygen measurements using the optional O2 sensor, we recommend a reference gas
of 21% O2 in N2.


For quick checks, ambient air can be used at an assumed concentration of 20.8%.



Generally, O2 concentration in dry, ambient air varies by less than 1%.

9.1.1.3. CALIBRATION GAS STANDARDS AND TRACEABILITY
All equipment used to produce calibration gases should be verified against standards of
the National Institute for Standards and Technology (NIST). To ensure NIST
traceability, we recommend to acquire cylinders of working gas that are certified to be
traceable to NIST Standard Reference Materials (SRM). These are available from a
variety of commercial sources.
Table 9-1:
NIST-SRM
680b
1681b
2613a
2614a
2659a1
2626a
27452
1

Note

198

NIST-SRMs Available for Traceability of CO Calibration Gases
Type
Nominal Concentration
CO in N2
500 ppm
CO in N2
1000 ppm
CO in Zero Air
20 ppm
CO in Zero Air
45 ppm
O2 in N2
21% by weight
CO2 in N2
4% by weight
CO2 in N2
16% by weight
2

Used to calibrate optional O2 sensor. Used to calibrate optional CO2 sensor.

It is generally a good idea to use 80% of the reporting range for that channel for
the span point calibration.
For instance, if the reporting range of the instrument is set for 50.0 PPM, the
proper span gas would be 40.0 PPM.

06864B DCN6314

Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer

Calibration Procedures

9.1.2. DATA RECORDING DEVICES
A strip chart recorder, data acquisition system or digital data acquisition system should
be used to record data from the serial or analog outputs of the T300/T300M.


If analog readings are used, the response of the recording system should be
checked against a NIST traceable voltage source or meter.



Data recording devices should be capable of bi-polar operation so that negative
readings can be recorded.



For electronic data recording, the T300/T300M provides an internal data acquisition
system (DAS), which is described in detail in Section 7.

APICOM, a remote control program, is also provided as a convenient and powerful tool
for data handling, download, storage, quick check and plotting (see Section 7.2.1).

9.2. MANUAL CALIBRATION
IMPORTANT

IMPACT ON READINGS OR DATA
ZERO/SPAN CALIBRATION CHECKS VS. ZERO/SPAN CALIBRATION
Pressing the ENTR button during the following procedure resets the stored
values for OFFSET and SLOPE and alters the instrument’s Calibration.
This should ONLY BE DONE during an actual calibration of the T300/T300M.
NEVER press the ENTR button if you are only checking calibration. If you wish to
perform a calibration CHECK, do not press ENTR and refer to Section 9.2.2.

06864B DCN6314

199

Calibration Procedures

Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer

9.2.1. SETUP FOR BASIC CALIBRATION CHECKS AND CALIBRATION
STEP ONE: Connect the Sources of Zero Air and Span Gas as shown below.

Figure 9-1:

Figure 9-2:

200

Pneumatic Connections – Basic Configuration – Using Bottled Span Gas

Pneumatic Connections – Basic Configuration – Using Gas Dilution Calibrator

06864B DCN6314

Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer

Calibration Procedures

9.2.2. PERFORMING A BASIC MANUAL CALIBRATION CHECK

06864B DCN6314

201

Calibration Procedures

Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer

9.2.3. PERFORMING A BASIC MANUAL CALIBRATION
The following section describes the basic method for manually calibrating the
T300/T300M.
If the analyzer’s reporting range is set for the AUTO range mode, a step will appear for
selecting which range is to be calibrated (LOW or HIGH). Each of these two ranges
MUST be calibrated separately.

IMPORTANT

IMPACT ON READINGS OR DATA
If the ZERO or SPAN buttons are not displayed during zero or span
calibration, the measured concentration value during this time is out of
the range allowed for a reliable calibration. Refer to Section 11 for
troubleshooting tips.

9.2.3.1. SETTING THE EXPECTED SPAN GAS CONCENTRATION
Note

When setting expected concentration values, consider impurities in your
span gas.
The expected CO span gas concentration should be 80% of the reporting range of the
instrument (see Section 5.4.1).
The default factory setting is 40 ppm. To set the span gas concentration, press:

202

06864B DCN6314

Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer

IMPORTANT

Calibration Procedures

IMPACT ON READINGS OR DATA
For this Initial Calibration it is important to independently verify the
PRECISE CO Concentration Value of the SPAN gas.
If the source of the Span Gas is from a Calibrated Bottle, use the exact
concentration value printed on the bottle.

06864B DCN6314

203

Calibration Procedures

Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer

9.2.3.2. ZERO/SPAN POINT CALIBRATION PROCEDURE

204

06864B DCN6314

Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer

Calibration Procedures

9.3. MANUAL CALIBRATION WITH ZERO/SPAN VALVES
There are a variety of valve options available on the T300/T300M for handling
calibration gases (see Table 1-1 for descriptions of each).
Generally performing calibration checks and zero/span point calibrations on analyzers
with these options installed is similar to the methods discussed in the previous sections
of this section. The primary differences are:


On instruments with Z/S valve options, zero air and span gas is supplied to the
analyzer through other gas inlets besides the sample gas inlet.



The zero and span calibration operations are initiated directly and independently
with dedicated buttons (CALZ & CALS).

9.3.1. SETUP FOR CALIBRATION USING VALVE OPTIONS
Each of the various calibration valve options requires a different pneumatic setup that is
dependent on the exact nature and number of valves present.
VENT here if input

Source of

is pressurized

SAMPLE GAS
Removed during
calibration

Calibrated
CO Gas

Model 700 gas
Dilution
Calibrator

at span gas
concentration

SAMPLE
VENT

Instrument
Chassis

EXHAUST
VENT SPAN
PRESSURE SPAN
ZERO AIR

MODEL 701
Zero Gas
Generator

Figure 9-3:

06864B DCN6314

VENT

Pneumatic Connections – Option 50A: Ambient Zero/Ambient Span Calibration Valves

205

Calibration Procedures

Figure 9-4:

Pneumatic Connections – Option 50B: Ambient Zero/Pressurized Span Calibration Valves

Figure 9-5:

206

Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer

Pneumatic Connections – Option 50H: Zero/Span Calibration Valves

06864B DCN6314

Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer

Figure 9-6:

06864B DCN6314

Calibration Procedures

Pneumatic Connections – Option 50E: Zero/Span Calibration Valves

207

Calibration Procedures

Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer

9.3.2. MANUAL CALIBRATION CHECKS WITH VALVE OPTIONS
INSTALLED

208

06864B DCN6314

Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer

Calibration Procedures

9.3.3. MANUAL CALIBRATION USING VALVE OPTIONS
The following section describes the basic method for manually calibrating the
T300/T300M Analyzer.
If the analyzer’s reporting range is set for the DUAL or AUTO range modes, a step will
appear for selecting which range is to be calibrated (LOW or HIGH).

IMPORTANT

IMPACT ON READINGS OR DATA
Each of these two ranges MUST be calibrated separately.

9.3.3.1. SETTING THE EXPECTED SPAN GAS CONCENTRATION
Note

When setting expected concentration values, consider impurities in your
span gas.
The expected CO span gas concentration should be 80% of the reporting range of the
instrument (see Section 5.4.1). The default factory setting is 40 ppm.
To set the span gas concentration, press:

06864B DCN6314

209

Calibration Procedures

IMPORTANT

Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer

9.3.3.2. ZERO/SPAN POINT CALIBRATION PROCEDURE
The zero and cal operations are initiated directly and independently with dedicated
buttons (CALZ & CALS).

210

06864B DCN6314

Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer

06864B DCN6314

Calibration Procedures

211

Calibration Procedures

Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer

9.3.3.3. USE OF ZERO/SPAN VALVE WITH REMOTE CONTACT CLOSURE
Contact closures for controlling calibration and calibration checks are located on the rear
panel CONTROL IN connector. Instructions for setup and use of these contacts can be
found in Section 3.3.1.6.
When the appropriate contacts are closed for at least 5 seconds, the instrument switches
into zero, or span calibration mode and any internal zero/span valves installed will be
automatically switched to the appropriate configuration.


The remote calibration contact closures may be activated in any order.



It is recommended that contact closures remain closed for at least 10 minutes to
establish a reliable reading.



The instrument will stay in the selected mode for as long as the contacts remain
closed.

If contact closures are being used in conjunction with the analyzer’s AutoCal (see
Section 9.4) feature and the AutoCal attribute “CALIBRATE” is enabled, the
T300/T300M will not recalibrate the analyzer until the contact is opened. At this point,
the new calibration values will be recorded before the instrument returns to Sample
Mode.
If the AutoCal attribute “CALIBRATE” is disabled, the instrument will return to
Sample Mode, leaving the instrument’s internal calibration variables unchanged.

9.4. AUTOMATIC ZERO/SPAN CAL/CHECK (AUTOCAL)
The AutoCal system allows unattended periodic operation of the ZERO/SPAN valve
options by using the T300/T300M Analyzer’s internal time of day clock. AutoCal
operates by executing SEQUENCES programmed by the user to initiate the various
calibration modes of the analyzer and open and close valves appropriately. It is possible
to program and run up to three separate sequences (SEQ1, SEQ2 and SEQ3). Each
sequence can operate in one of three modes, or be disabled.
Table 9-2:

AUTOCAL Modes

MODE NAME
DISABLED
ZERO

212

ACTION
Disables the Sequence.
Causes the Sequence to perform a Zero calibration/check.

ZERO-SPAN

Causes the Sequence to perform a Zero point calibration/check followed by a
Span point calibration/check.

SPAN

Causes the Sequence to perform a Span concentration calibration/check only.

06864B DCN6314

Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer

Calibration Procedures

For each mode, there are seven parameters that control operational details of the
SEQUENCE (see Table 9-3).
Table 9-3: AutoCal Attribute Setup Parameters
ATTRIBUTE

ACTION

TIMER ENABLED

Turns on the Sequence timer.

STARTING DATE

Sequence will operate after Starting Date.

STARTING TIME

Time of day sequence will run.

DELTA DAYS

Number of days to skip between each Sequence execution.
 If set to 7, for example, the AutoCal feature will be enabled once every week on the
same day.

DELTA TIME

Number of hours later each “Delta Days” Seq is to be run.
 If set to 0, the sequence will start at the same time each day. Delta Time is added to
Delta Days for the total time between cycles.
 This parameter prevents the analyzer from being calibrated at the same daytime of
each calibration day and prevents a lack of data for one particular daytime on the days
of calibration.

DURATION

Number of minutes the sequence operates.
 This parameter needs to be set such that there is enough time for the concentration
signal to stabilize.
 The STB parameter shows if the analyzer response is stable at the end of the
calibration.
 This parameter is logged with calibration values in the DAS.

CALIBRATE

Enable to do a calibration – Disable to do a cal check only.
 This setting must be OFF for analyzers used in US EPA applications and with internal
span gas generators installed and functioning.

RANGE TO CAL

LOW calibrates the low range, HIGH calibrates the high range. Applies only to auto and
remote range modes; this property is not available in single and independent range
modes.

Note

The CALIBRATE attribute (formerly called “dynamic calibration”) must
always be set to OFF for analyzers used in US EPA controlled
applications that have internal span gas generators option installed.
Calibration of instruments used in US EPA related applications should
only be performed using external sources of zero air and span gas with an
accuracy traceable to EPA or NIST standards and supplied through the
analyzer’s sample port..

06864B DCN6314

213

Calibration Procedures

Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer

The following example sets sequence #2 to do a zero-span calibration every other day
starting at 2:15 PM on September 4, 2008, lasting 15 minutes, without calibration. This
will start ½ hour later each iteration.
Table 9-4:

IMPORTANT

Example AutoCal Sequence

MODE AND
ATTRIBUTE

VALUE

COMMENT

SEQUENCE

Define Sequence #2

MODE

ZERO-SPAN

Select Zero and
Span Mode

TIMER ENABLE

Enable the timer

STARTING DATE

Sept. 4, 2008

Start after
Sept 4, 2008

STARTING TIME

14:15

First Span starts at
2:15 PM

DELTA DAYS

Do Sequence #2
every other day

DELTA TIME

00:30

Do Sequence #2 ½
hr later each day

DURATION

30.0

Operate Span valve
for 15 min

CALIBRATE

Calibrate at end of
Sequence

IMPACT ON READINGS OR DATA
The programmed STARTING_TIME must be a minimum of 5 minutes later
than the real time clock for setting real time clock (See Section 5.6.4).
Avoid setting two or more sequences at the same time of the day. Any
new sequence that is initiated whether from a timer, the COM ports or the
contact closure inputs will override any sequence that is in progress.

IMPORTANT

IMPACT ON READINGS OR DATA
With CALIBRATE turned ON, the state of the internal setup variables
DYN_SPAN and DYN_ZERO is set to ON and the instrument will reset the
slope and offset values for the CO response each time the AutoCal
program runs.
This continuous readjustment of calibration parameters can often mask
subtle fault conditions in the analyzer. It is recommended that, if
CALIBRATE is enabled, the analyzer’s test functions, slope and offset
values be checked frequently to assure high quality and accurate data
from the instrument.

214

06864B DCN6314

Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer

Calibration Procedures

9.4.1. SETUP  ACAL: PROGRAMMING AND AUTO CAL SEQUENCE
Note

If at any time an illegal entry is selected, (for example: Delta Days > 366)
the ENTR label will disappear from the control button.
To program the example sequence shown in Table 9-4, press:
SAMPLE

RANGE = 50.0 PPM

CO=XX.XX

< TST TST > CAL CALZ CZLS

SETUP

SETUP X.X
CFG ACAL DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE EXIT

SETUP X.X

SEQ 1) DISABLED

NEXT MODE

SETUP X.X

EXIT

SEQ 2) DISABLED

PREV NEXT MODE

SETUP X.X

EXIT

MODE: DISABLED

SETUP X.X

ENTR EXIT

MODE: ZERO

PREV NEXT

SETUP X.X

ENTR EXIT

MODE: ZERO–SPAN

PREV NEXT

SETUP X.X

ENTR EXIT

SEQ 2) ZERO–SPAN, 1:00:00

PREV NEXT MODE SET

SETUP X.X

EXIT

TIMER ENABLE: ON

SET> EDIT

SETUP X.X

EXIT

STARTING DATE: 01–JAN–07

EDIT

SETUP X.X
0

EXIT

STARTING DATE: 01–JAN–02
SEP

ENTR

EXIT

Toggle buttons to set
Day, Month & Year:
Format : DD-MON-YY

06864B DCN6314

CONTINUE NEXT PAGE
With STARTING TIME

215

Calibration Procedures

Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer

CONTINUED FROM PREVIOUS PAGE STARTING DATE

SETUP X.X

STARTING DATE: 04–SEP–08

EDIT

SETUP X.X

EXIT

STARTING TIME:00:00

EDIT
Toggle buttons to set
time:
Format : HH:MM
This is a 24 hr clock . PM
hours are 13 – 24.
Example 2:15 PM = 14:15

SETUP X.X
1

EXIT

STARTING TIME:00:00

SETUP X.X

ENTR

STARTING TIME:14:15

EDIT

SETUP X.X

EXIT

DELTA DAYS: 1

EDIT

Toggle buttons to set
number of days between
procedures (1-365).

SETUP X.X
0

EXIT

DELTA DAYS: 1
2

SETUP X.X

ENTR

SETUP X.X

EXIT

DELTA TIME00:00

EDIT

SETUP X.X
0

EXIT

DELTA TIME: 00:00
:3

SETUP X.X

EXIT

DELTA DAYS:2

EDIT

Toggle buttons to set
delay time for each
iteration of the sequence:
HH:MM
(0 – 24:00)

EXIT

ENTR

EXIT

DELTA TIME:00:30

EDIT

EXIT

CONTINUE NEXT PAGE
With DURATION TIME

216

06864B DCN6314

Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer

Calibration Procedures

CONTINUED FROM PREVIOUS PAGE
DELTA TIME

SETUP X.X

DURATION:15.0 MINUTES

EDIT

Toggle buttons to set
duration for each iteration
of the sequence:
Set in Decimal minutes
from 0.1 – 60.0.

SETUP X.X
3

SETUP X.X

EXIT

DURATION 15.0MINUTES
.0

ENTR

DURATION:30.0 MINUTES

EDIT

SETUP X.X

EXIT

CALIBRATE: OFF

EDIT

SETUP X.X

Toggle button between
Off and ON.

EXIT

CALIBRATE: OFF

SETUP X.X

ENTR

EXIT

CALIBRATE: ON

EDIT

Display show:

EXIT

SEQ 2) ZERO–SPAN, 2:00:30
Sequence
MODE

SETUP X.X

Delta Time
Delta Days

SEQ 2) ZERO–SPAN, 2:00:30

PREV NEXT MODE SET

EXIT

EXIT returns
to the SETUP
Menu.

9.4.1.1. AUTOCAL WITH AUTO OR DUAL REPORTING RANGES MODES SELECTED
If the T300/T300M Analyzer is set for either the Dual or Auto reporting range modes,
the following three steps will appear at the beginning of the AutoCal setup routine:
SETUP X.X
CAL

SETUP X.X

SETUP

PRIMARY SETUP MENU

CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE

SETUP X.X

EXIT

SECONDARY SETUP MENU

COMM VARS DIAG

SETUP X.X
8

DIAG

EXIT

ENTER PASSWORD

ENTR

EXIT

ENTR

EXIT

SIGNAL I/O

PREV NEXT

Continue pressing NEXT until ...

DIAG OPTIC

DARK CALIBRATION

PREV NEXT

DIAG DARK
VIEW

ENTR

EXIT

CO DARK CALIBRATION

CAL

EXIT
Calibration runs automatically

Offset for CO REF signal

DIAG DARK

REF DARK OFFSET: 0.0mV

DIAG DARK
EXIT

DARK CAL 1% COMPLETE
EXIT

Offset for CO MEAS signal

DIAG DARK

MEAS DARK OFFSET: 0.0mV
EXIT

DARK CALIBRATION ABORTED
EXIT

9.6.2. PRESSURE CALIBRATION
A sensor at the sample chamber outlet continuously measures the pressure of the sample
gas. These data are used to compensate the final CO concentration calculation for
changes in atmospheric pressure and is stored in the CPU’s memory as the test function
PRES (also viewable via the front panel). See also Section 5.9.6.

IMPORTANT

220

IMPACT ON READINGS OR DATA
This calibration must be performed when the pressure of the sample gas
is equal to ambient atmospheric pressure. Before performing the
following pressure calibration procedure, disconnect the sample gas
pump and sample gas-line vent from the rear panel sample gas inlet.

06864B DCN6314

Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer

Calibration Procedures

To cause the analyzer to measure and record a value for PRES, press.

06864B DCN6314

221

Calibration Procedures

Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer

9.6.3. FLOW CALIBRATION
The flow calibration allows the user to adjust the values of the sample flow rates as they
are displayed on the front panel and reported through COMM ports to match the actual
flow rate measured at the sample inlet. This does not change the hardware measurement
of the flow sensors, only the software-calculated values.
To carry out this adjustment, connect an external, sufficiently accurate flow meter to the
sample inlet (see Section 11.3.4 for more details). Once the flow meter is attached and
is measuring actual gas flow, press:

See also Section 5.9.7.

222

06864B DCN6314

Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer

Calibration Procedures

9.7. CALIBRATION OF OPTIONAL SENSORS
This section provides the calibration setup and procedures for the O2 Sensor and the CO2
Sensor options.

9.7.1. O2 SENSOR CALIBRATION
Presented here are first the setup and then the calibration steps for the O2 Sensor.
9.7.1.1. O2 PNEUMATICS CONNECTIONS
The pneumatic connections for calibrating are as follows:

VENT here if input

Source of

SAMPLE GAS

is pressurized

Removed during
calibration

3-way
Valve

SAMPLE

Instrument
Chassis

EXHAUST

Manual
Control Valve
PUMP

Figure 9-7:

O2 Sensor Calibration Set Up

O2 SENSOR ZERO GAS: Teledyne API recommends using pure N2 when calibration
the zero point of your O2 sensor option.
O2 SENSOR SPAN GAS: Teledyne API recommends using 20.8% O2 in N2 when
calibration the span point of your O2 sensor option (See Table 3-12).

06864B DCN6314

223

Calibration Procedures

Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer

9.7.1.2. SET O2 SPAN GAS CONCENTRATION
Set the expected O2 span gas concentration.
This should be equal to the percent concentration of the O2 span gas of the selected
reporting range (default factory setting = 20.8%; the approximate O2 content of ambient
air).

224

06864B DCN6314

Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer

Calibration Procedures

9.7.1.3. ACTIVATE O2 SENSOR STABILITY FUNCTION
To change the stability test function from CO concentration to the O2 sensor output,
press:

Note

06864B DCN6314

Use the same procedure to reset the STB test function to CO when the O2
calibration procedure is complete.

225

Calibration Procedures

Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer

9.7.1.4. O2 ZERO/SPAN CALIBRATION
To perform the zero/span calibration procedure:

226

06864B DCN6314

Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer

Calibration Procedures

9.7.2. CO2 SENSOR CALIBRATION PROCEDURE
Presented here are first the setup and then the calibration steps for the CO2 Sensor.
9.7.2.1. CO2 PNEUMATICS CONNECTIONS
The pneumatic connections for calibrating are as follows

Figure 9-8:

CO2 Sensor Calibration Set Up

CO2 SENSOR ZERO GAS: Teledyne API recommends using pure N2 when calibration
the zero point of your CO2 sensor option.
CO2 SENSOR SPAN GAS: Teledyne API recommends using 16% CO2 in N2 when
calibration the span point of your CO2 sensor option (Table 3-12) is 20%.

06864B DCN6314

227

Calibration Procedures

Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer

9.7.2.2. SET CO2 SPAN GAS CONCENTRATION:
Set the expected CO2 span gas concentration.
This should be equal to the percent concentration of the CO2 span gas of the selected
reporting range (default factory setting = 12%).

228

06864B DCN6314

Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer

Calibration Procedures

9.7.2.3. ACTIVATE CO2 SENSOR STABILITY FUNCTION
To change the stability test function from CO concentration to the CO2 sensor output,
press:

Note

06864B DCN6314

Use the same procedure to reset the STB test function to CO when the
CO2 calibration procedure is complete.

229

Calibration Procedures

Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer

9.7.2.4. CO2 ZERO/SPAN CALIBRATION
To perform the zero/span calibration procedure:

230

06864B DCN6314

10. EPA CALIBRATION PROTOCOL
10.1. CALIBRATION REQUIREMENTS
If the T300 is to be used for EPA SLAMS monitoring, it must be calibrated in
accordance with the instructions in this section.
The USEPA strongly recommends that you obtain a copy of the publication Quality
Assurance Handbook for Air Pollution Measurement Systems Volume 2: Part 1, Ambient
(abbreviated, Q.A. Handbook Volume II). This manual can be purchased from:


USEPA Order Number: EPA454R98004; or NTIS Order Number: PB99 129876.



National Technical Information Service (phone 800-553-6847) or Center for
Environmental Research Information or the U.S. Government Printing Office at
http://www.gpo.gov. The Handbook can also be located on line by searching for the
title at http://www.epa.gov.



Special attention should be paid to Section 2.6 of that which covers CO analyzers of
this type. Specific regulations regarding the use and operation of ambient CO
analyzers can be found in Reference 1 at the end of this Section.

A bibliography and references relating to CO monitoring are listed in Section 10.6.

10.1.1. CALIBRATION OF EQUIPMENT - GENERAL GUIDELINES
In general, calibration is the process of adjusting the gain and offset of the T300 against
some recognized standard. In this section the term dynamic calibration is used to
express a multipoint check against known standards and involves introducing gas
samples of known concentration into the instrument in order to adjust the instrument to a
predetermined sensitivity and to produce a calibration relationship.
This relationship is derived from the instrumental response to successive samples of
different known concentrations. As a minimum, three reference points and a zero point
are recommended to define this relationship.
All monitoring instrument systems are subject to some drift and variation in internal
parameters and cannot be expected to maintain accurate calibration over long periods of
time. Therefore, it is necessary to dynamically check the calibration relationship on a
predetermined schedule. Zero and span checks must be used to document that the data
remains within control limits. These checks are also used in data reduction and
validation.
Calibration can be done by either diluting high concentration CO standards with zero air
or using individual tanks of known concentration. Details of documentation, forms and
procedures should be maintained with each analyzer and also in a central backup file as
described in Section 2.6.2 of the Quality Assurance Handbook.

06864B DCN6314

231

EPA Calibration Protocol

Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer

The reliability and usefulness of all data derived from any analyzer depends primarily
upon its state of calibration. To ensure accurate measurements of the CO levels:
1. The analyzer must be calibrated at the time of installation and recalibrated as
necessary.
2. In order to insure that high quality, accurate measurement information is obtained at
all times, the analyzer must be calibrated prior to use.
3. Calibrations should be carried out at the field-monitoring site.
4. The analyzer should be in operation for at least several hours (preferably overnight)
before calibration so that it is fully warmed up and its operation has stabilized.
5. If the instrument will be used on more than one range, it should be calibrated
separately on each applicable range.
6. Calibration documentation should be maintained with each analyzer and also in a
central backup file.
7. The true values of the calibration gases used must be traceable to NIST-SRMs See
Table 3-12.

10.1.2. CALIBRATION EQUIPMENT, SUPPLIES, AND EXPENDABLES
The measurement of CO in ambient air requires a certain amount of basic sampling
equipment and supplemental supplies. The Quality Assurance Handbook Section 2.6
contains information about setting up the appropriate systems.
10.1.2.1. DATA RECORDING DEVICE
Either a strip chart recorder, data acquisition system, digital data acquisition system
should be used to record the data from the Mode; T300 RS-232 port or analog outputs.
If analog readings are being used, the response of that system should be checked against
a NIST referenced voltage source or meter. Data recording device should be capable of
bi-polar operation so that negative readings can be recorded.
10.1.2.2. SPARE PARTS AND EXPENDABLE SUPPLIES
In addition to the basic equipment described in the Q.A. Handbook, it is necessary to
maintain an inventory of spare parts and expendable supplies. Section 11 describes the
parts that require periodic replacement and the frequency of replacement. Appendix B
of this Technical Manual contains a list of spare parts and kits of expendables supplies.

232

06864B DCN6314

Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer

EPA Calibration Protocol

Table 10-1: Matrix for Calibration Equipment & Supplies
EQUIPMENT &
SUPPLIES

SPECIFICATION

Recorder

Compatible with output
signal of analyzer; min.
chart width of 150 mm (6 in)
is recommended

Sample line and
manifold

Constructed of PTFE or
glass

Calibration equipment

REFERENCE

ACTION IF
REQUIREMENTS ARE NOT
MET
Return equipment to supplier

Check upon receipt

Q.A. Handbook1 Vol II Part 1 , App 15,
Sec. 4.4 & 5.4

Return equipment to supplier
Return equipment/ supplies
to supplier or take corrective
action
Instruments designated as
reference or equivalent have
been determined to meet
these acceptance criteria.

Detection limit

Noise = 0.5 ppm
Lower detectable
limit=1.0 ppm

Working standard CO
cylinder gas

Traceable to NIST-SRM

Analyzed against NIST-SRM;
40 CFR, Pt 50, App C; para.
3.13

Obtain new working
standard and check for
traceability

Zero air

Clean dry ambient air, free
of contaminants that cause
detectable response with
the CO analyzer.

40 CFR, Pt 50, App C; para.
3.23

Obtain air from another
source or regenerate.

40 CFR, Pt 53.20 & 232

Q.A. Handbook1 Vol II Part 1 , App 15,
Table A-5 & A-6

Record form

Must not be the same as
used for calibration

Audit equipment

Q.A. Handbook1 Vol II Part 1 ,
App 15,
Sec. 4.4 & 5.4

Revise forms as appropriate
Locate problem and correct
or return to supplier

10.1.3. RECOMMENDED STANDARDS FOR ESTABLISHING TRACEABILITY
To assure data of desired quality, two considerations are essential:


The measurement process must be in statistical control at the time of the
measurement.



The systematic errors, when combined with the random variation in the
measurement process, must result in a suitably small uncertainty.

Evidence of good quality data includes documentation of the quality control checks and
the independent audits of the measurement process by recording data on specific forms
or on a quality control chart and by using materials, instruments, and measurement
procedures that can be traced to appropriate standards of reference.
To establish traceability, data must be obtained routinely by repeat measurements of
standard reference samples (primary, secondary and/or working standards). More
specifically, working calibration standards must be traceable to standards of higher
accuracy, such as those listed in Table 3-12.
Cylinders of working gas traceable to NIST-SRMs (called EPA Protocol Calibration
Gas) are also commercially available (from sources such as Scott Specialty Gases, etc.).
See Table 3-12 for a list of appropriate SRMs.

06864B DCN6314

233

EPA Calibration Protocol

Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer

10.1.4. CALIBRATION FREQUENCY
To ensure accurate measurements of the CO concentrations, calibrate the analyzer at the
time of installation, and recalibrate it:


No later than three months after the most recent calibration or performance audit
which indicate the analyzer’s calibration to be acceptable.



When there is an interruption of more than a few days in analyzer operation.



When any repairs have taken place which might affect its calibration.



After a physical relocation of the analyzer.



When any other indication (including excessive zero or span drift) of possible
significant inaccuracy of the analyzer exists.

Following any of the activities listed above, the zero and span should be checked to
determine if a calibration is necessary.
Table 10-2: Activity Matrix for Quality Assurance Checks
Characteristic

Acceptance limits

Frequency and method of
measurement

Action if requirements are not met

Shelter temperature

Mean temperature between
Check thermograph chart
22oC and 28oC (72o and 82oF),
weekly for variations greater
daily fluctuations not greater
than ±2oC (4oF)
o
than ±2 C

Mark strip chart for the affected time
period
Repair or adjust temperature control

Sample introduction
system

No moisture, foreign material,
leaks, obstructions; sample line Weekly visual inspection
connected to manifold

Clean, repair, or replace as needed

Recorder

Adequate ink & paper
Legible ink traces
Correct chart speed and range
Correct time

Weekly visual inspection

Replenish ink and paper supply
Adjust time to agree with clock; note on
chart

Analyzer operational
settings

TEST measurements at
nominal values
2. T300 in Sample Mode

Weekly visual inspection

Adjust or repair as needed

Analyzer operational
check

Zero and span within tolerance
limits as described in
Subsection 9.1.3 of Sec. 2.0.9
4
(Q.A. Handbook Vol II )

Level 1 zero/span every 2
Find source of error and repair
weeks; Level 2 between Level
1 checks at frequency desired After corrective action, re-calibrate
analyzer
analyzer by user

Precision check

Assess precision as described
in Sec. 2.0.8 and Subsection
3.4.3 (Ibid.)

Every 2 weeks, Subsection
3.4.3 (Ibid.)

Calc, report precision, Sec. 2.0.8 (Ibid.)

10.1.5. LEVEL 1 CALIBRATIONS VERSUS LEVEL 2 CHECKS
Essential to quality assurance are scheduled checks for verifying the operational status
of the monitoring system. The operator should visit the site at least once each week. It
is recommended Level 1 zero and span check conducted on the analyzer every two
weeks. Level 2 zero and span checks should be conducted at a frequency desired by the
user. Definitions of these terms are given in Table 10-3.
To provide for documentation and accountability of activities, a checklist should be
compiled and then filled out by the field operator as each activity is completed.

234

06864B DCN6314

Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer

Table 10-3:

EPA Calibration Protocol

Definition of Level 1 and Level 2 Zero and Span Checks
(Q.A. Handbook1 Vol II, Part1, Section 12.3 & 12.4)

LEVEL 1 ZERO AND SPAN CALIBRATION

LEVEL 2 ZERO AND SPAN CHECK

A Level 1 zero and span calibration is a simplified, twopoint analyzer calibration used when analyzer linearity
does not need to be checked or verified. (Sometimes
when no adjustments are made to the analyzer, the
Level 1 calibration may be called a zero/span check, in
which case it must not be confused with a Level 2
zero/span check.) Since most analyzers have a reliably
linear or near-linear output response with concentration,
they can be adequately calibrated with only two
concentration standards (two-point concentration).
Furthermore, one of the standards may be zero
concentration, which is relatively easily obtained and
need not be certified. Hence, only one certified
concentration standard is needed for the two-point (Level
1) zero and span calibration. Although lacking the
advantages of the multipoint calibration, the two-point
zero and span calibration--because of its simplicity--can
be (and should be) carried out much more frequently.
Also, two-point calibrations are easily automated.
Frequency checks or updating of the calibration
relationship with a two-point zero and span calibration
improves the quality of the monitoring data by helping to
keep the calibration relationship more closely matched to
any changes (drifts) in the analyzer response.

A Level 2 zero and span check is an "unofficial" check of
an analyzer's response. It may include dynamic checks
made with uncertified test concentrations, artificial
stimulation of the analyzer's detector, electronic or other
types of checks of a portion of the analyzer, etc.
Level 2 zero and span checks are not to be used as a
basis for analyzer zero or span adjustments, calibration
updates, or adjustment of ambient data. They are
intended as quick, convenient checks to be used
between zero and span calibrations to check for possible
analyzer malfunction or calibration drift. Whenever a
Level 2 zero or span check indicates a possible
calibration problem, a Level 1 zero and span (or
multipoint) calibration should be carried out before any
corrective action is taken.
If a Level 2 zero and span check is to be used in the
quality control program, a "reference response" for the
check should be obtained immediately following a zero
and span (or multipoint) calibration while the analyzer's
calibration is accurately known. Subsequent Level 2
check responses should then be compared to the most
recent reference response to determine if a change in
response has occurred. For automatic Level 2 zero and
span checks, the first scheduled check following the
calibration should be used for the reference response. It
should be kept in mind that any Level 2 check that
involves only part of the analyzer's system cannot
provide information about the portions of the system not
checked and therefore cannot be used as a verification
of the overall analyzer calibration.

10.2. ZERO AND SPAN CHECKS
A system of Level 1 and Level 2 zero span checks is recommended. These checks must
be conducted in accordance with the specific guidance given in Section 12 of the QA
Handbook Vol II Part 11. It is recommended that Level 1 zero and span checks be
conducted every two weeks. Level 2 checks should be conducted in between the Level
1 checks at a frequency desired by the user. Span concentrations for both levels should
be between 70 and 90% of the measurement range.
Zero and span data are to be used to:
1. Provide data to allow analyzer adjustment for zero and span drift;
2. Provide a decision point on when to calibrate the analyzer;
3. Provide a decision point on invalidation of monitoring data.

Items 1 and 2 are described in detail in Subsection 9.1.3 of Section 2.0.9 (Q.A.
Handbook Vol II4). Item 3 is described in Subsection 9.1.4 of the same section.
Refer to the Troubleshooting and Repair (see Section 13) of this manual if the
instrument is not within the allowed variations.

06864B DCN6314

235

EPA Calibration Protocol

Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer

10.2.1. ZERO/SPAN CHECK PROCEDURES
The Zero and Span calibration can be checked in a variety of different ways. They
include:


Manual Zero/Span Check - Zero and Span can be checked from the front panel
touchscreen. The procedure is in Section 9.3 of this manual.



Automatic Zero/Span Checks - After the appropriate setup, Z/S checks can be
performed automatically every night. See Section 9.3 of this manual for setup and
operation procedures.
If using the AutoCal feature to perform a calibration check, set the CALIBRATE
parameter to NO.



Zero/Span checks via remote contact closure = Zero/Span checks can be initiated
via remote contact closures on the rear panel. See Section 9.3.3.3 of this manual.



Zero/Span via RS-232 port - Z/S checks can be controlled via the RS-232 port. See
Section 9.3.3.3 and Appendix A-6 of this manual for more details.

10.2.2. PRECISION CHECK
A periodic check is used to assess the data for precision. A one-point precision check
must be carried out at least once every 2 weeks on each analyzer at a CO concentration
between 8.0 ppm and 10.0 ppm.
The analyzer must be operated in its normal sampling mode, and the precision test gas
must pass through all filters, scrubbers, conditioners, and other components used during
normal ambient sampling.
The standards from which precision check test concentrations are obtained must be
traceable to NIST-SRM. Those standards used for calibration or auditing may be used.
To perform a precision check during the instrument set up, the sources of zero air and
sample gas and procedures should conform to those described in Section 9.2 for
analyzers with no valve options or with an IZS valve option installed and Section 9.3.1
for analyzers with Z/S options installed with the following exception:


Connect the analyzer to a precision gas that has a CO concentration between 8.0
ppm and 10.0 ppm. If a precision check is made in conjunction with a zero/span
check, it must be made prior to any zero or span adjustments.



Record this value.

Information from the check procedure is used to assess the precision of the monitoring
data; see CFR 40 CFR 585 for procedures for calculating and reporting precision.

236

06864B DCN6314

Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer

EPA Calibration Protocol

10.3. PRECISIONS CALIBRATION
Calibration must be performed with a calibrator that meets all conditions specified in
QA Handbook1 Vol II Part 1, App 15, Sec. 4.4 & 5.4. The user should be sure that all
flow meters are calibrated under the conditions of use against a reliable standard. All
volumetric flow rates should be corrected to 25oC (77oF) and 760 mm-Hg (29.92in–Hg).
Make sure the calibration system can supply the range of the concentration at a
sufficient flow over the whole range of concentration that will be encountered during
calibration.
All operational adjustments to the T300 should be completed prior to the calibration.
The following software features must be set into the desired state before calibration.


If the instrument will be used for more than one range, it should be calibrated
separately on each applicable range.



Automatic temperature/pressure compensation should be enabled. See Section
5.7.



Alternate units, make sure ppm units are selected for EPA monitoring. See Section
5.4.4.

The analyzer should be calibrated on the same range used for monitoring.

10.3.1. PRECISION CALIBRATION PROCEDURES
To perform a precision calibration during the instrument set up, the input sources of zero
air and sample gas and procedures should conform to those described in Section 9.2 for
analyzers with no valve options or with an IZS valve option installed and Section 9.3 for
analyzers with Z/S options installed.

10.4. AUDITING PROCEDURE
An audit is an independent assessment of the accuracy of data. Independence is
achieved by having the audit made by an operator other than the one conducting the
routine field measurements and by using audit standards and equipment different from
those routinely used in monitoring. The audit should be a true assessment of the
measurement process under normal operations without any special preparation or
adjustment of the system. Routine quality control checks conducted by the operator are
necessary for obtaining and reporting good quality data, but they are not considered part
of the auditing procedure. Audits are recommended once per quarter, but frequency
may be determined by applicable regulations and end use of the data.
Refer to The Q.A. Handbook1 Volume II, Part 1 Section 16 (for a more detailed
description).

10.4.1. CALIBRATION AUDIT
A calibration audit consists of challenging the T300/T300M with known concentrations
of CO. The difference between the known concentration and the analyzer response is
obtained, and an estimate of the analyzer's accuracy is determined.
The recommended audit schedule depends on the purpose for which the monitoring data
are being collected. For example, Appendix A, 40 CFR 585 requires that each analyzer
in State and Local Air Monitoring Network Plan (SLAMS) be audited at least once a

06864B DCN6314

237

EPA Calibration Protocol

Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer

year. Each agency must audit 25% of the reference or equivalent analyzers each quarter.
If an agency operates less than four reference or equivalent analyzers, it must randomly
select analyzers for reauditing so that one analyzer will be audited each calendar quarter
and each analyzer will be audited at least once a year.
Appendix B, 40 CFR 585 requires that each Prevention of Significant Deterioration
(PSD) reference or equivalent analyzer be audited at least once a sampling quarter.
Results of these audits are used to estimate the accuracy of ambient air data.

10.4.2. DATA REDUCTION AUDIT
A data reduction audit involves transcribing analyzer data and determining if the
collected data is within the control limits, generally 2 ppm between the analyzer
response and the audit value. The resulting values are recorded on the SAROAD form.
If data exceeds 2 ppm, check all of the remaining data in the 2-week period.

10.4.3. SYSTEM AUDIT/VALIDATION
A system audit is an on-site inspection and review of the quality assurance activities
used for the total measurement system (sample collection, sample analysis, data
processing, etc.); it is an appraisal of system quality.
Conduct a system audit at the startup of a new monitoring system and periodically (as
appropriate) as significant changes in system operations occur.

10.5. DYNAMIC MULTIPOINT CALIBRATION PROCEDURE
10.5.1. LINEARITY TEST
In order to record the instrument’s performance at a predetermined sensitivity and to
derive a calibration relationship, a minimum of three reference points and one zero point
uniformly spaced covering 0 to 90 percent of the operating range are recommended to
define this relationship.
The analyzer's recorded response is compared with the known concentration to derive
the calibration relationship.
To perform a precision check during the instrument set up, the sources of zero air and
sample gas should conform to those described in Section 9.1.1.3.
Follow the procedures described in Section 9.3 for calibrating the zero points.

238

06864B DCN6314

Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer

EPA Calibration Protocol

For each mid point:
SAMPLE

A1:CONC1=50 PPM

< TST TST > CAL

SAMPLE

CO STB=XXXX PPB

< TST TST > CAL

CO = XXXX
SETUP

Set the Display to show the
COSTB test function.
This function calculates the
stability of the CO
measurement.

CO=XXXX
SETUP

ACTION:
Allow calibration gas diluted to proper concentration for
Midpoint N to enter the sample port

SAMPLE
Wait until
STABIL falls
below 0.2 PPM
(for M300E).
This may take
several minutes.

COSTB=XXXX PPB

< TST TST > CAL CALZ CALS

SPAN CAL M

A1:CONC1=50 PPM

< TST TST > ZERO SPAN CONC

CO=XXXX
SETUP

CO = XXXX
EXIT

Record the CO
reading as
displayed on the
instrument’s front
panel.

Press EXIT to
Return to the
Main SAMPLE
Display.
ACTION:
Allow Calibration Gas diluted to
proper concentration for
Midpoint N+1 to enter the sample
port.

Plot the analyzer responses versus the corresponding calculated concentrations to obtain
a calibration relationship. Determine the best-fit straight line (y = mx + b) determined
by the method of least squares.
After the best-fit line has been drawn, determine whether the analyzer response is linear.
To be considered linear, no calibration point should differ from the best-fit line by more
than 2% of full scale.
If carried out carefully, the checks described in this section will provide reasonable
confidence that the T300 is operating properly. Checks should be carried out at least
every 3 months as the possibility of malfunction is always present.

06864B DCN6314

239

EPA Calibration Protocol

Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer

If the linearity error is excessive and cannot be attributed to outside causes, check the
T300 system for:


Sample pressure higher than ambient – pressurized sample gas



Leaks



Correct flow



Miscalibrated span gas tanks or bad zero gas



Miscalibrated sample pressure transducer



Failed IR detector, GFC Wheel or Sync/Demod Board



Contaminated optical bench or sample lines

10.6. REFERENCES

240

Quality Assurance Handbook for Air Pollution Measurement Systems Volume II: Part
1 - Ambient Air Quality Monitoring Program Quality System Development - EPA454/R-98-004 - August 1998. United States Environmental Protection Agency Office of Air Quality Planning and Standards

CFR Title 40: Protection of Environment - PART 53—AMBIENT AIR MONITORING
REFERENCE AND EQUIVALENT METHODS:
- 53.20 General provisions.
- 53.23 Test procedures.

CFR Title 40: Protection of Environment - PART 50—NATIONAL PRIMARY AND
SECONDARY AMBIENT AIR QUALITY STANDARDS: Appendix C to Part 50—
Measurement Principle and Calibration Procedure for the Measurement of Carbon
Monoxide in the Atmosphere (Non-Dispersive Infrared Photometry)

Quality Assurance Handbook for Air Pollution Measurement Systems - Volume II,
Ambient Air Specific Methods, EPA-600/4-77-027a, 1977.

CFR Title 40: Protection of Environment - AMBIENT AIR QUALITY SURVEILLANCE

06864B DCN6314

PART III
TECHNICAL INFORMATION

06864B DCN6314

241

06864B DCN6314

243

06864B DCN6314

11. MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE & PROCEDURES
Predictive diagnostic functions, including data acquisition records, failure warnings and
test functions built into the analyzer, allow the user to determine when repairs are
necessary without performing painstaking preventative maintenance procedures. There
are, however, a minimal number of simple procedures that when performed regularly will
ensure that the analyzer continues to operate accurately and reliably over its lifetime.
Repairs and troubleshooting are covered in Section 12 of this manual.

11.1. MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE
Table 11-1 shows a typical maintenance schedule for the analyzer. Please note that in
certain environments (i.e. dusty, very high ambient pollutant levels) some maintenance
procedures may need to be performed more often than shown.
Note

A Span and Zero Calibration Check (see CAL CHECK REQ’D Column of
Table 10 1) must be performed following certain of the maintenance
procedure listed below.
See Sections 8.3 and 8.4 for instructions on performing checks.

CAUTION
GENERAL SAFETY HAZARD
Risk of electrical shock. Disconnect power before performing any of the following
operations that require entry into the interior of the analyzer.

CAUTION
QUALIFIED PERSONNEL
The operations outlined in this section are to be performed by qualified maintenance
personnel only.

06864B DCN6314

245

Maintenance Schedule & Procedures

Teledyne API – Technical Manual - Model T300 Family CO Analyzers

This page intentionally left blank.

246

06864B DCN6314

Table 11-1: T300/T300M Maintenance Schedule

ITEM

ACTION

FREQ

CAL
CHECK
REQ’D

Particulate
Filter

Replace

Weekly or As
Needed

Verify Test
Functions

Record and
Analyze

Weekly or after
any
Maintenance or
Repair

Pump
Diaphragm

Replace

Annually

Yes

Perform Flow
Check

Check Flow

Annually

Perform
Leak Check

Verify Leak
Tight

Annually or
after any
Maintenance or
Repair

Pneumatic
lines

Examine and
Clean

As Needed

Yes if
cleaned

Cleaning

Clean

As Needed

Only if
cover
removed

06864B DCN6314

MANUAL

DATE PERFORMED

247

Maintenance Schedule & Procedures

Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer

Table 11-2: T300/T300M Test Function Record
FUNCTION

OPERATING
MODE*

STABILITY

ZERO CAL

CO MEAS

ZERO CAL

DATE RECORDED

ZERO CAL

MR RATIO
SPAN CAL

PRES

SAMPLE

PHT DRIVE

AFTER WARMUP

SLOPE

SPAN CAL

OFFSET

ZERO CAL

248

SAMPLE

06864B DCN6314

11.2. PREDICTING FAILURES USING THE TEST FUNCTIONS
The Test Functions can be used to predict failures by looking at how their values change
over time. Initially it may be useful to compare the state of these Test Functions to the
values recorded on the printed record of the final calibration performed on your
instrument at the factory, P/N 04307. Table 11-3 can be used as a basis for taking action
as these values change with time. The internal data acquisition system (DAS) is a
convenient way to record and track these changes. Use APICOM to download and
review this data from a remote location.

Table 11-3: Predictive uses for Test Functions
FUNCTION

CONDITION

BEHAVIOR

STABILITY

Zero Cal

Increasing

CO MEAS

Zero Cal

Decreasing

Increasing
Zero Cal
Decreasing
MR RATIO

Increasing
Span Cal
Decreasing
Increasing > 1”
PRES

Sample
Decreasing > 1”

PHT DRIVE

OFFSET

SLOPE

06864B DCN6314

Any, but with
Bench Temp at
48°C
Zero Cal

Span Cal

Increasing

INTERPRETATION
























Pneumatic Leaks – instrument & sample system
Detector deteriorating
Source Aging
Detector deteriorating
Optics getting dirty or contaminated
Source Aging
Detector deteriorating
Contaminated zero gas (H2O)
Source Aging
Detector deteriorating
GFC Wheel Leaking
Pneumatic Leaks
Contaminated zero gas (CO)
Source Aging
Pneumatic Leaks – instrument & sample system
Calibration system deteriorating
GFC Wheel Leaking
Source Aging
Calibration system deteriorating
Pneumatic Leak between sample inlet and Sample Cell
Change in sampling manifold
Dirty particulate filter
Pneumatic obstruction between sample inlet and
Sample Cell
 Obstruction in sampling manifold
 Mechanical Connection between IR-Detector and
Sample Cell deteriorating
 IR-Photodetector deteriorating

Increasing

 See MR Ratio - Zero Cal Decreasing above

Decreasing

 See MR Ratio - Zero Cal Increasing above

Increasing

 See MR Ratio - Span Cal Decreasing above

Decreasing

 See MR Ratio – Span Cal Increasing above

249

Maintenance Schedule & Procedures

Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer

11.3. MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES
The following procedures are to be performed periodically as part of the standard
maintenance of the T300.

11.3.1. REPLACING THE SAMPLE PARTICULATE FILTER
The particulate filter should be inspected often for signs of plugging or contamination.
We recommend that the filter and the wetted surfaces of the filter housing are handled as
little as possible when you change the filter. Do not touch any part of the housing, filter
element, PTFE retaining ring, glass cover and the o-ring.
To change the filter:
1. Turn OFF the analyzer to prevent drawing debris into the instrument.
2. Open the T300 Analyzer’s hinged front panel and unscrew the knurled retaining ring
on the filter assembly.

Figure 11-1:

Sample Particulate Filter Assembly

3. Carefully remove the retaining ring, PTFE o-ring, glass filter cover and filter element.
4. Replace the filter, being careful that the element is fully seated and centered in the
bottom of the holder.
5. Re-install the PTFE o-ring (with the notches up), the glass cover, then screw on the
retaining ring and hand tighten. Inspect the seal between the edge of filter and the
o-ring to assure a proper seal.
6. Re-start the Analyzer.

250

06864B DCN6314

Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer

Maintenance Schedule & Procedures

11.3.2. REBUILDING THE SAMPLE PUMP
The diaphragm in the sample pump periodically wears out and must be replaced. A
sample rebuild kit is available – see label on the pump itself for the part number of the
pump rebuild kit. Instructions and diagrams are included with the kit.
Always perform a Flow and Leak Check after rebuilding the Sample Pump.

11.3.3. PERFORMING LEAK CHECKS
Leaks are the most common cause of analyzer malfunction; Section 11.3.3.1 presents a
simple leak check procedure. Section 11.3.3.2 details a more thorough procedure.
11.3.3.1. VACUUM LEAK CHECK AND PUMP CHECK
This method is easy and fast. It detects, but does not locate most leaks. It also verifies
that the sample pump is in good condition.
1. Turn the analyzer ON, and allow enough time for flows to stabilize.
2. Cap the sample inlet port.
3. After several minutes, when the pressure has stabilized, scroll through
TEST menu, note the SAMPLE PRESSURE reading.

the

4. If the reading is < 10 in-Hg, the pump is in good condition and there are no large
leaks.
5. Check the sample gas flow. If the flow is <10 cm3/min and stable, there are no large
leaks in the instrument’s pneumatics.

11.3.3.2. PRESSURE LEAK CHECK
If you can’t locate the leak by the above procedure, use the following procedure. Obtain
a leak checker similar to the Teledyne API P/N 01960, which contains a small pump,
shut-off valve and pressure gauge. Alternatively, a convenient source of low-pressure
gas is a tank of span gas, with the two-stage regulator adjusted to less than 15 psi with a
shutoff valve and pressure gauge.

CAUTION
GENERAL SAFETY HAZARD
Do not use bubble solution with vacuum applied to the analyzer. The solution may
contaminate the instrument. Do not exceed 15 PSIG pressure.

1. Turn OFF power to the instrument.
2. Install a leak checker or tank of gas as described above on the sample inlet at the
rear panel.
3. Remove the instrument cover and locate the inlet side of the sample pump.
Remove the flow assembly from the pump and plug it with the appropriate gas-tight
fitting.
4. Pressurize the instrument with the leak checker, allowing enough time to fully
pressurize the instrument through the critical flow orifice. Check each fitting with
soap bubble solution, looking for bubbles. Once the fittings have been wetted with
soap solution, do not re-apply vacuum, as it will suck soap solution into the
instrument and contaminate it. Do not exceed 15 psi pressure.

06864B DCN6314

251

Maintenance Schedule & Procedures

Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer

5. If the instrument has one of the zero and span valve options, the normally closed
ports on each valve should also be separately checked. Connect the leak checker
to the normally closed ports and check with soap bubble solution.
6. Once the leak has been located and repaired, the leak-down rate should be < 1 inHg (0.4 psi) in 5 minutes after the pressure is shut off.

11.3.4. PERFORMING A SAMPLE FLOW CHECK
CAUTION
GENERAL SAFETY HAZARD
Always use a separate calibrated flow meter capable of measuring flows in the 0 – 1000
cm3/min range to measure the gas flow rate though the analyzer.
DO NOT use the built in flow measurement viewable from the Front Panel of the
instrument. This measurement is only for detecting major flow interruptions such as
clogged or plugged gas lines.
See Figure 3-4 for SAMPLE port location.
1. Attach the Flow Meter to the sample inlet port on the rear panel. Ensure that the
inlet to the Flow Meter is at atmospheric pressure.
2. Sample flow should be 800 cm3/min  10%.
3. Once an accurate measurement has been recorded by the method described
above, adjust the analyzer’s internal flow sensors (See Section 9.6.3).

Low flows indicate blockage somewhere in the pneumatic pathway, typically a plugged
sintered filter or critical flow orifice in one of the analyzer’s flow control assemblies.
High flows indicate leaks downstream of the Flow Control Assembly.

11.3.5. CLEANING THE OPTICAL BENCH
The T300/T300M sensor assembly and optical bench are complex and delicate.
Disassembly and cleaning is not recommended. Please check with the factory before
disassembling the optical bench.

11.3.6. CLEANING EXTERIOR SURFACES OF THE T300/T300M
If necessary, the exterior surfaces of the T300/T300M can be cleaned with a clean damp
cloth. Do NOT submerge any part of the instrument and do NOT use any cleaning
solution.

252

06864B DCN6314

12. TROUBLESHOOTING AND SERVICE
This contains a variety of methods for identifying the source of performance problems
with the analyzer. Also included in this are procedures that are used in repairing the
instrument.

NOTE
QUALIFIED PERSONNEL
The operations outlined in this section must be performed by qualified maintenance
personnel only.

CAUTION
GENERAL SAFETY HAZARD
Risk of electrical shock. Some operations need to be carried out with the
instrument open and running.
Exercise caution to avoid electrical shocks and electrostatic or mechanical
damage to the analyzer.
Do not drop tools into the analyzer or leave those after your procedures.
Do not shorten or touch electric connections with metallic tools while operating
inside the analyzer.
Use common sense when operating inside a running analyzer.

12.1. GENERAL TROUBLESHOOTING
The T300/T300M Carbon Monoxide Analyzer has been designed so that problems can
be rapidly detected, evaluated and repaired. During operation, it continuously performs
diagnostic tests and provides the ability to evaluate its key operating parameters without
disturbing monitoring operations.
A systematic approach to troubleshooting will generally consist of the following five
steps:
1. Note any WARNING MESSAGES and take corrective action as necessary.
2. Examine the values of all TEST functions and compare them to factory values. Note
any major deviations from the factory values and take corrective action.
3. Use the internal electronic status LEDs to determine whether the electronic
communication channels are operating properly.

06864B DCN6314



Verify that the DC power supplies are operating properly by checking the
voltage test points on the relay PCA.



Note that the analyzer’s DC power wiring is color-coded and these colors match
the color of the corresponding test points on the relay PCA.

253

Troubleshooting and Service

Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer

4. SUSPECT A LEAK FIRST!


Customer service data indicate that the majority of all problems are eventually
traced to leaks in the internal pneumatics of the analyzer or the diluent gas and
source gases delivery systems.



Check for gas flow problems such as clogged or blocked internal/external gas
lines, damaged seals, punctured gas lines, a damaged / malfunctioning pumps,
etc.

5. Follow the procedures defined in Section 12.5 to confirm that the analyzer’s vital
functions are working (power supplies, CPU, relay PCA, touchscreen, PMT cooler,
etc.).


See Figure 3-6 for the general layout of components and sub-assemblies in the
analyzer.



See the wiring interconnect diagram and interconnect list in Appendix D.

12.1.1. FAULT DIAGNOSIS WITH WARNING MESSAGES
The most common and/or serious instrument failures will result in a warning message
being displayed on the front panel. Table 12-1 lists warning messages, along with their
meaning and recommended corrective action.
It should be noted that if more than two or three warning messages occur at the same
time, it is often an indication that some fundamental analyzer sub-system (power supply,
relay board, motherboard) has failed rather than an indication of the specific failures
referenced by the warnings. In this case, a combined-error analysis needs to be
performed.
The analyzer will alert the user that a Warning message is active by flashing the FAULT
LED, displaying the the Warning message in the Param field along with the CLR button
(press to clear Warning message). The MSG button displays if there is more than one
warning in queue or if you are in the TEST menu and have not yet cleared the message.
The following display/touchscreen examples provide an illustration of each:

254

06864B DCN6314

Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer

Troubleshooting and Service

The analyzer will also alert the user via the Serial I/O COM port(s).
To view or clear the various warning messages press:

06864B DCN6314

255

Troubleshooting and Service

Figure 12-1:

256

Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer

Viewing and Clearing Warning Messages

06864B DCN6314

Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer

Troubleshooting and Service

Table 12-1: Warning Messages - Indicated Failures
WARNING
MESSAGE

FAULT CONDITION

BENCH TEMP
WARNING

The optical bench temp is
controlled at 48  2 °C.

BOX TEMP
WARNING

Box Temp is
< 5 °C or > 48 °C.

CANNOT DYN
SPAN

Dynamic Span operation failed

Measured concentration value is too high or low.
Concentration slope value to high or too low

CANNOT DYN
ZERO

Dynamic Zero operation failed

Measured concentration value is too high.
Concentration offset value to high.

CONFIG
INITIALIZED

Configuration and Calibration data
reset to original Factory state.

Failed disk on module
User erased data

DATA INITIALIZED

Data Storage in DAS was erased

Failed disk on module
User cleared data

PHOTO TEMP
WARNING

PHT DRIVE is
>4800 mVDC

REAR BOARD NOT
DET

Motherboard not detected on power
up.

POSSIBLE CAUSES
Bad bench heater
Bad bench temperature sensor
Bad relay controlling the bench heater
Entire relay board is malfunctioning
2
I C bus malfunction
o
NOTE: Box temperature typically runs ~7 C warmer than ambient
temperature.
Poor/blocked ventilation to the analyzer.
Stopped exhaust-fan
Ambient temperature outside of specified range

Failed IR photo-detector
Failed sync/demod board
IR photo-detector improperly attached to the sample chamber
Bench temp too high.
Warning only appears on serial I/O com port(s)
Front panel display will be frozen, blank or will not respond.
Massive failure of motherboard
2

RELAY BOARD
WARN

The CPU cannot communicate with
the Relay Board.

SAMPLE FLOW
WARN

3
Sample flow rate is < 500 cm /min
3
or > 1000 cm /min.

SAMPLE PRES
WARN

Sample Pressure is <10 in-Hg or
> 35 in-Hg
Normally 29.92 in-Hg at sea level
decreasing at 1 in-Hg per 1000 ft of
altitude (with no flow – pump
disconnected).

06864B DCN6314

I C bus failure
Failed relay board
Loose connectors/wiring
Failed sample pump
Blocked sample inlet/gas line
Dirty particulate filter
Leak downstream of critical flow orifice
Failed flow sensor/circuitry
If sample pressure is < 10 in-hg:
Blocked particulate filter
Blocked sample inlet/gas line
Failed pressure sensor/circuitry
If sample pressure is > 35 in-hg:
Pressurized sample gas. Install vent
Blocked vent line on pressurized sample/zero/span gas supply
Bad pressure sensor/circuitry

257

Troubleshooting and Service

Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer

Table 13-1: Warning Messages – Indicated Failures (cont.)
WARNING
MESSAGE

SAMPLE TEMP
WARN

FAULT CONDITION

Sample temperature is < 10oC or >
100oC.

Occurs when CO Ref is <1250
mVDC or >4950 mVDC.
SOURCE WARNING
Either of these conditions will result
in an invalid M/R ratio.

SYSTEM RESET

WHEEL TEMP
WARNING

The computer has rebooted.

The filter wheel temperature is
controlled at 68  2 °C

POSSIBLE CAUSES
Ambient temperature outside of specified range
Failed bench heater
Failed bench temperature sensor
Relay controlling the bench heater
Failed relay board
2
I C bus
GFC Wheel stopped
Failed sync/demod board
If status LEDs on the sync/demod board ARE flashing the cause is
most likely a failed:
IR source
Relay board
2
I C bus
IR photo-detector
This message occurs at power on. If you have not cycled the power
on your instrument:
Failed +5 VDC power,
Fatal error caused software to restart
Loose connector/wiring
Blocked cooling vents below GFC Assembly. Make sure that
adequate clear space beneath the analyzer.
Analyzer’s top cover removed
Wheel heater
Wheel temperature sensor
Relay controlling the wheel heater
Entire relay board
2
I C bus

12.1.2. FAULT DIAGNOSIS WITH TEST FUNCTIONS
Besides being useful as predictive diagnostic tools, the test functions viewable from the
front panel can be used to isolate and identify many operational problems when
combined with a thorough understanding of the analyzer’s Theory of Operation (see
Section 13).
The acceptable ranges for these test functions are listed in the “Nominal Range” column
of the analyzer Final Test and Validation Data Sheet (T300, P/N 04307 and T300M,
P/N 04311) shipped with the instrument. Values outside these acceptable ranges
indicate a failure of one or more of the analyzer’s subsystems. Functions whose values
are still within the acceptable range but have significantly changed from the
measurement recorded on the factory data sheet may also indicate a failure.
Note

258

A worksheet has been provided in Appendix C to assist in recording the
value of these test functions. This worksheet also includes expected
values for the various test functions.

06864B DCN6314

Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer

Troubleshooting and Service

The following table contains some of the more common causes for these values to be out
of range.
Table 12-2: Test Functions - Indicated Failures
TEST
FUNCTIONS
(As Displayed)

TIME

INDICATED FAILURE(S)
Time of day clock is too fast or slow.
To adjust, see Section 5.6.
Battery in clock chip on CPU board may be dead.

RANGE

Incorrectly configured measurement range(s) could cause response problems with a Data logger or chart
recorder attached to one of the analog output.
If the Range selected is too small, the recording device will over range.
If the Range is too big, the device will show minimal or no apparent change in readings.

STABIL

Indicates noise level of instrument or CO concentration of sample gas (see Section 12.4.2 for causes).

CO MEAS
&
CO REF

If the value displayed is too high the IR Source has become brighter. Adjust the variable gain potentiometer on
the sync/demod board (see Section 12.5.7.1).
If the value displayed is too low or constantly changing and the CO REF is OK:
 Failed multiplexer on the motherboard
 Failed sync/demod board
 Loose connector or wiring on sync/demod board
 If the value displayed is too low or constantly changing and the CO REF is bad:
 GFC Wheel stopped or rotation is too slow
 Failed sync/demod board IR source
 Failed IR source
 Failed relay board
2
 Failed I C bus
 Failed IR photo-detector

MR Ratio

When the analyzer is sampling zero air and the ratio is too low:
 The reference cell of the GFC Wheel is contaminated or leaking.
 The alignment between the GFC Wheel and the segment sensor, the M/R sensor or both is incorrect.
 Failed sync/demod board
When the analyzer is sampling zero air and the ratio is too high:
 Zero air is contaminated
 Failed IR photo-detector

PRES

See Table 12-1 for SAMPLE PRES WARN.

SAMPLE FL

Check for gas flow problems (see Section 12.2).

SAMP TEMP

SAMPLE TEMP should be close to BENCH TEMP. Temperatures outside of the specified range or oscillating
temperatures are cause for concern.

BENCH
TEMP

Bench temp control improves instrument noise, stability and drift. Temperatures outside of the specified range
or oscillating temperatures are cause for concern. Table 12-1 for BENCH TEMP WARNING.

WHEEL
TEMP

Wheel temp control improves instrument noise, stability and drift. Outside of set point or oscillating
temperatures are causes for concern. See Table 12-1 for WHEEL TEMP WARNING.

BOX TEMP

If the box temperature is out of range, check fan in the power supply module. Areas to the side and rear of
instrument should allow adequate ventilation. See Table 12-1 for BOX TEMP WARNING.

PHT DRIVE

If this drive voltage is out of range it may indicate one of several problems:
 A poor mechanical connection between the photodetector, its associated mounting hardware and the
absorption cell housing;
 An electronic failure of the IR Photo-Detector’s built-in cooling circuitry, or;
 A temperature problem inside the analyzer chassis. In this case other temperature warnings would also be
active such as BENCH TEMP WARNING or BOX TEMP WARNING.

06864B DCN6314

259

Troubleshooting and Service

TEST
FUNCTIONS
(As Displayed)

SLOPE

OFFSET

260

Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer

INDICATED FAILURE(S)
Values outside range indicate
Contamination of the zero air or span gas supply
Instrument is Miscalibrated
Blocked gas flow
Contaminated or leaking GFC Wheel (either chamber)
Faulty IR photo-detector
Faulty sample faulty IR photo-detector pressure sensor (P1) or circuitry
Invalid M/R ratio (see above)
Bad/incorrect span gas concentration due.
Values outside range indicate
Contamination of the zero air supply
Contaminated or leaking GFC Wheel (either chamber)
Faulty IR photo-detector

06864B DCN6314

Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer

Troubleshooting and Service

12.1.3. THE DIAGNOSTIC SIGNAL I/O FUNCTION
The signal I/O diagnostic mode allows access to the digital and analog I/O in the
analyzer. Some of the digital signals can be controlled through the touchscreen. These
signals, combined with a thorough understanding of the instruments Theory of
Operation (found in Section 13), are useful for troubleshooting in three ways:


The technician can view the raw, unprocessed signal level of the analyzer’s critical
inputs and outputs.



Many of the components and functions that are normally under algorithmic control of
the CPU can be manually exercised.



The technician can directly control the signal level Analog and Digital Output signals.

This allows the technician to observe systematically the effect of directly controlling
these signals on the operation of the analyzer. The following flowchart shows an
example of how to use the Signal I/O menu to view the raw voltage of an input signal or
to control the state of an output voltage or control signal. (See also Sections 5.9.1 and
12.5.8.1).

06864B DCN6314

261

Troubleshooting and Service

Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer

Figure 12-2:

Note

262

Example of Signal I/O Function

Any I/O signals changed while in the signal I/O menu will remain in effect
ONLY until signal I/O menu is exited. The Analyzer regains control of
these signals upon exit. See Appendix A-4 for a complete list of the
parameters available for review under this menu.

06864B DCN6314

Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer

12.1.4.

Troubleshooting and Service

STATUS LEDS
Several color-coded light-emitting diodes (LEDs) are located inside the instrument to
assist in determining if the analyzer’s CPU, I2C bus and relay board, GFC Wheel and the
sync/demodulator board are functioning properly.

12.1.4.1. MOTHERBOARD STATUS INDICATOR (WATCHDOG)
DS5, a red LED, that is located on upper portion of the motherboard, just to the right of
the CPU board, flashes when the CPU is running the main program loop. After powerup, approximately 30 to 60 seconds, DS5 should flash on and off. If characters are
written to the front panel display but DS5 does not flash then the program files have
become corrupted. If after 30 – 60 seconds neither the DS5 is flashing or no characters
have been written to the front panel display then the CPU is bad and must be replaced.

Motherboard

CPU Status LED

Figure 12-3:

06864B DCN6314

CPU Status Indicator

263

Troubleshooting and Service

Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer

12.1.4.2. SYNC DEMODULATOR STATUS LEDS
Two LEDs located on the Sync/Demod Board and are there to make it obvious that the
GFC Wheel is spinning and the synchronization signals are present:
Table 12-3: Sync/Demod Board Status Failure Indications
LED

FUNCTION

FAULT STATUS

M/R Sensor Status
D1
(Flashes slowly)

Segment Sensor
Status

INDICATED FAILURE(S)

LED is stuck
ON or OFF

GFC Wheel is not turning
M/R Sensor on Opto-Pickup Board failed
Sync/Demod Board failed
JP 4 Connector/Wiring faulty
Failed/Faulty +5 VDC Power Supply (PS1)

LED is stuck
ON or OFF

GFC Wheel is not turning
Segment Sensor on Opto-Pickup Board failed
Sync/Demod Board failed
JP 4 Connector/Wiring faulty
Failed/Faulty +5 VDC Power Supply (PS1)

(Flashes quickly)

JP4 Connector to Opto-Pickup
Board

D1 – M/R Sensor Status
D2 – Segment Sensor Status

Figure 12-4:

264

Sync/Demod Board Status LED Locations

06864B DCN6314

Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer

Troubleshooting and Service

12.1.4.3. RELAY BOARD STATUS LEDS
There are eight LEDs located on the Relay Board. The most important of which is D1,
which indicates the health of the I2C bus. If D1 is blinking the other faults following
LEDs can be used in conjunction with DIAG menu signal I/O to identify hardware
failures of the relays and switches on the relay (see Section 12.1.3 and Appendix D).
Table 12-4: I2C Status LED Failure Indications
LED

FUNCTION

FAULT STATUS

D1
(Red)

I2C bus Health
(Watch Dog
Circuit)

Continuously ON
or
Continuously OFF

INDICATED FAILURE(S)
Failed/Halted CPU
Faulty Motherboard, Touchscreen or Relay Board
Faulty Connectors/Wiring between Motherboard,
Touchscreen or Relay Board
Failed/Faulty +5 VDC Power Supply (PS1)

DC VOLTAGE TEST
POINTS

STATUS LED’s

RELAY PCA
PN 04135

Figure 12-5:

06864B DCN6314

Relay Board Status LEDs

265

Troubleshooting and Service

Table 12-5:
LED

D2
Yellow

Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer

Relay Board Status LED Failure Indications
FUNCTION

Wheel Heater

SIGNAL I/O PARAMETER
ACTIVATED BY

WHEEL_HEATER

D3
Yellow

Bench Heater

BENCH_HEATER

D4
Yellow

Spare

N/A

D5
Green

D6
Green

D7
Green

D8
Green

266

Sample/Cal Gas
Valve Option

Zero/Span Gas
Valve Option

Shutoff Valve
Option

IR SOURCE

CAL_VALVE

SPAN_VALVE

SHUTOFF_VALVE

IR_SOURCE

DIAGNOSTIC TECHNIQUE

VIEW RESULT

WHEEL_TEMP

Voltage displayed should change. If not:
Failed Heater
Faulty Temperature Sensor
Failed AC Relay
Faulty Connectors/Wiring

BENCH_TEMP

Voltage displayed should change. If not:
Failed Heater
Faulty Temperature Sensor
Failed AC Relay
Faulty Connectors/Wiring

N/A

Sample/Cal Valve should audibly change states. If
not:
Failed Valve
Failed Relay Drive IC on Relay Board
Failed Relay Board
Faulty +12 VDC Supply (PS2)
Faulty Connectors/Wiring

N/A

Zero/Span Valve should audibly change states. If
not:
Failed Valve
Failed Relay Drive IC on Relay Board
Failed Relay Board
Faulty +12 VDC Supply (PS2)
Faulty Connectors/Wiring

N/A

Shutoff Valve should audibly change states. If not:
Failed Valve
Failed Relay Drive IC on Relay Board
Failed Relay Board
Faulty +12 VDC Supply (PS2)
Faulty Connectors/Wiring

CO_MEASURE

Voltage displayed should change. If not:
Failed IR Source
Faulty +12 VDC Supply (PS2)
Failed Relay Board
Failed IR Photo-Detector
Failed Sync/Demod Board
Faulty Connectors/Wiring

06864B DCN6314

Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer

Troubleshooting and Service

12.2. GAS FLOW PROBLEMS
When troubleshooting flow problems, it is a good idea to first confirm that the actual
flow and not the analyzer’s flow sensor and software are in error, or the flow meter is in
error. Use an independent flow meter to perform a flow check as described in Section
11.3.4. If this test shows the flow to be correct, check the pressure sensors as described
in Section 12.5.7.6.
The T300/T300M has one main gas flow path. With the IZS or zero/span valve option
installed, there are several subsidiary paths but none of those are displayed on the front
panel or stored by the DAS.
With the O2 sensor option installed, third gas flow controlled with a critical flow orifice
is added, but this flow is not measured or reported.
In general, flow problems can be divided into three categories:
1. Flow is too high
2. Flow is greater than zero, but is too low, and/or unstable
3. Flow is zero (no flow)

When troubleshooting flow problems, it is crucial to confirm the actual flow rate without
relying on the analyzer’s flow display. The use of an independent, external flow meter
to perform a flow check as described in Section 11.3.4 is essential.
The flow diagrams found in a variety of locations within this manual depicting the
T300/T300M in its standard configuration and with options installed can help in troubleshooting flow problems. For your convenience they are collected here.

06864B DCN6314

267

Troubleshooting and Service

Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer

12.2.1. T300/T300M INTERNAL GAS FLOW DIAGRAMS

Figure 12-6:

Figure 12-7:

268

T300/T300M – Basic Internal Gas Flow

Internal Pneumatic Flow OPT 50A – Zero/Span Valves (OPT 50A & 50B)

06864B DCN6314

Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer

Figure 12-8:

Figure 12-9:

06864B DCN6314

Troubleshooting and Service

Internal Pneumatic Flow OPT 50B – Zero/Span/Shutoff Valves

Internal Pneumatic Flow OPT 50H – Zero/Span Valves with Internal Zero Air Scrubber

269

Troubleshooting and Service

Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer

Figure 12-10: Internal Pneumatic Flow OPT 50E – Zero/Span/Shutoff w/ Internal Zero Air Scrubber

Figure 12-11: T300/T300M – Internal Pneumatics with O2 Sensor Option 65A

270

06864B DCN6314

Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer

Troubleshooting and Service

Figure 12-12: T300/T300M – Internal Pneumatics with CO2 Sensor Option 67A

12.2.2. TYPICAL SAMPLE GAS FLOW PROBLEMS
12.2.2.1. FLOW IS ZERO
The unit displays a SAMPLE FLOW warning message on the front panel display or the
SAMPLE FLOW test function reports a zero or very low flow rate.
Confirm that the sample pump is operating (turning). If not, use an AC voltmeter to
make sure that power is being supplied to the pump if no power is present at the
electrical leads of the pump.
1. If AC power is being supplied to the pump, but it is not turning, replace the pump.
2. If the pump is operating but the unit reports no gas flow, perform a flow check as
described in Section 11.3.4.
3. If no independent flow meter is available:

06864B DCN6314



Disconnect the gas lines from both the sample inlet and the exhaust outlet on
the rear panel of the instrument.



Make sure that the unit is in basic SAMPLE Mode.



Place a finger over an Exhaust outlet on the rear panel of the instrument.



If gas is flowing through the analyzer, you will feel pulses of air being expelled
from the Exhaust outlet.

271

Troubleshooting and Service

Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer

4. If gas flows through the instrument when it is disconnected from its sources of zero
air, span gas or sample gas, the flow problem is most likely not internal to the
analyzer. Check to make sure that:


All calibrators/generators are turned on and working correctly.



Gas bottles are not empty or low.



Valves, regulators and gas lines are not clogged or dirty.

12.2.2.2. LOW FLOW
1. Check if the pump diaphragm is in good condition. If not, rebuild the pump (see
Section 11.3.2). Check the Spare Parts List for information on pump rebuild kits.
2. Check for leaks as described in Section 11.3.3. Repair the leaking fitting, line or
valve and re-check.
3. Check for the sample filter and the orifice filter for dirt. Replace filters (see 11.3.1).
4. Check for partially plugged pneumatic lines, or valves. Clean or replace them.
5. Check for plugged or dirty critical flow orifices. Replace them.
6. If an IZS option is installed in the instrument, press CALZ and CALS. If the flow
increases then suspect a bad sample/cal valve.

12.2.2.3. HIGH FLOW
The most common cause of high flow is a leak in the sample flow control assembly or
between there and the pump. If no leaks or loose connections are found in the fittings or
the gas line between the orifice and the pump, replace the critical flow orifice(s) inside
the sample flow control assembly.

272

06864B DCN6314

Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer

Troubleshooting and Service

12.2.2.4. DISPLAYED FLOW = “WARNINGS”
This warning means that there is inadequate gas flow. There are four conditions that
might cause this:
1. A leak upstream or downstream of the flow sensor
2. A flow obstruction upstream or downstream of the flow sensor
3. Bad Flow Sensor Board
4. Bad pump

To determine which case is causing the flow problem, view the sample pressure and
sample flow functions on the front panel. If the sample pressure is reading abnormally
low, then the cause is likely a flow obstruction upstream of the flow sensor. First, check
the sample filter and make sure it is not plugged and then systematically check all the
other components upstream of the orifice to ensure that they are not obstructed.
If the sample pressure is reading normal but the sample flow is reading low then it is
likely that the pump diaphragm is worn or there is an obstruction downstream of the
flow sensor.
12.2.2.5. ACTUAL FLOW DOES NOT MATCH DISPLAYED FLOW
If the actual flow measured does not match the displayed flow, but is within the limits of
720-880 cm3/min, adjust the calibration of the flow measurement as described in Section
11.3.4.
12.2.2.6. SAMPLE PUMP
The sample pump should start immediately after the front panel power switch is turned
ON. With the Sample Inlet plugged, the test function PRES should read about 10 in-Hg
for a pump that is in good condition. The pump needs rebuilding if the reading is above
10 in-Hg. If the test function SAMP FL is greater than 10 cm3/min there is a leak in the
pneumatic lines.

12.3. CALIBRATION PROBLEMS
12.3.1. MISCALIBRATED
There are several symptoms that can be caused by the analyzer being miscalibrated.
This condition is indicated by out of range Slopes and Offsets as displayed through the
test functions and is frequently caused by the following:
1. Bad span gas. This can cause a large error in the slope and a small error in the
offset. Delivered from the factory, the T300 Analyzer’s slope is within ±15% of
nominal. Bad span gas will cause the analyzer to be calibrated to the wrong value.
If in doubt have the span gas checked by an independent lab.
2. Contaminated zero gas. Excess H2O can cause a positive or negative offset and
will indirectly affect the slope.
3. Dilution calibrator not set up correctly or is malfunctioning. This will also cause the
slope, but not the zero, to be incorrect. Again the analyzer is being calibrated to the
wrong value.

06864B DCN6314

273

Troubleshooting and Service

Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer

4. Too many analyzers on the manifold. This can cause either a slope or offset error
because ambient gas with its pollutants will dilute the zero or span gas.

12.3.2. NON-REPEATABLE ZERO AND SPAN
As stated earlier, leaks both in the T300/T300M and in the external system are a
common source of unstable and non-repeatable readings.
1. Check for leaks in the pneumatic systems as described in Section 11.3.3. Don’t
forget to consider pneumatic components in the gas delivery system outside the
T300/T300M such as:
 A change in zero air source such as ambient air leaking into zero air line, or;
 A change in the span gas concentration due to zero air or ambient air leaking
into the span gas line.
2. Once the instrument passes a leak check, perform a flow check (see Section 11.3.4)
to make sure adequate sample is being delivered to the sensor assembly.
3. A failing IR photo-detector may be at fault. Check the CO MEAS and CO REF test
functions via the front panel display to make sure the signal levels are in the normal
range (See Appendix A) and are quiet.
4. Confirm the sample pressure, wheel temperature, bench temperature, and sample
flow readings are correct and have steady readings.
5. Disconnect the exhaust line from the optical bench near the rear of the instrument
and plug this line into the SAMPLE inlet creating a pneumatic loop. The CO
concentration (either zero or span) now must be constant. If readings become quiet,
the problem is in the external pneumatics supplies for sample gas, span gas or zero
air.
6. If pressurized span gas is being used with a zero/span valve option, make sure that
the venting is adequate.

12.3.3. INABILITY TO SPAN – NO SPAN BUTTON (CALS)
1. Confirm that the carbon monoxide span gas source is accurate; this can be done by
switching between two span-gas tanks. If the CO concentration is different, there is
a problem with one of the tanks.
2. Check for leaks in the pneumatic systems as described in Section 11.3.3.
3. Make sure that the expected span gas concentration entered into the instrument
during calibration is the correct span gas concentration and not too different from
expected span value. This can be viewed via the CONC submenu of the Sample
Displays.
4. Check to make sure that there is no ambient air or zero air leaking into span gas
line.

12.3.4. INABILITY TO ZERO – NO ZERO BUTTON (CALZ)
1. Confirm that there is a good source of zero air. Dilute a tank of span gas with the
same amount of zero air from two different sources. If the CO Concentration of the
two measurements is different, there is a problem with one of the sources of zero
air.
2. Check for leaks in the pneumatic systems as described in 11.3.3.
3. If the analyzer has had zero/span valve options, the CO scrubber may need
maintenance.
4. Check to make sure that there is no ambient air leaking into zero air line.
274

06864B DCN6314

Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer

Troubleshooting and Service

12.4. OTHER PERFORMANCE PROBLEMS
Dynamic problems (i.e. problems which only manifest themselves when the analyzer is
monitoring sample gas) can be the most difficult and time consuming to isolate and
resolve. The following provides an itemized list of the most common dynamic problems
with recommended troubleshooting checks and corrective actions.

12.4.1. TEMPERATURE PROBLEMS
Individual control loops are used to maintain the set point of the absorption bench, filter
wheel and IR photo-detector temperatures. If any of these temperatures are out of range
or are poorly controlled, the T300/T300M will perform poorly.
12.4.1.1. BOX OR SAMPLE TEMPERATURE
BOX TEMPERATURE
The box temperature sensor is mounted to the motherboard and cannot be disconnected
to check its resistance. Rather check the BOX TEMP signal using the SIGNAL I/O
function under the DIAG Menu (See Section 5.9.1). This parameter will vary with
ambient temperature, but at ~30oC (6-7° above room temperature) the signal should be
~1450 mV.
SAMPLE TEMPERATURE
The Sample Temperature should closely track the bench temperature. If it does not,
locate the sensor, which is located at the midpoint of the optical bench in a brass fitting.
Unplug the connector labeled “Sample”, and measure the resistance of the thermistor; at
room temperature (25°C) it should be ~30K Ohms, at operating temperature, 48°C, it
should be ~ 12K Ohms
12.4.1.2. BENCH TEMPERATURE
There are three possible failures that could cause the Bench temperature to be incorrect.
1. The heater mounted to the bottom of the Absorption bench is electrically shorted or
open.
 Check the resistance of the two heater elements by measuring between pin 2 and
4 (~76 Ohms), and pin 3 and 4 (~330 Ohms), of the white five-pin connector just
below the sample temperature sensor on the Bench (pin 1 is the pointed end).
2. Assuming that the I2C bus is working and that there is no other failure with the relay
board, the solid-state relay (K2) on the relay board may have failed.


Using the BENCH_HEATER parameter under the signal I/O function, as
described above, turn on and off K2 (D3 on the relay board should illuminate as
the heater is turned on).



Check the AC voltage present between pin 2 and 4, for a 100 or 115 VAC
model, and pins 3 and 4, for a 220-240 VAC model.

WARNING - ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARD
Hazardous Voltages are present during this test.

06864B DCN6314

275

Troubleshooting and Service

Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer

3. If the relay has failed there should be no change in the voltage across pins 2 and 4
or 3 and 4. Note: K2 is in a socket for easy replacement.
4. If K2 checks out OK, the thermistor temperature sensor located on the optical bench
near the front of the instrument could be at fault.


Unplug the connector labeled “Bench”, and measure the resistance of the
thermistor.



At room temperature it should have approximately 30K Ohms resistance; near
the 48oC set point it should have ~12K ohms.

12.4.1.3. GFC WHEEL TEMPERATURE
Like the bench heater above there are three possible causes for the GFC Wheel
temperature to have failed.
1. The wheel heater has failed.


Check the resistance between pins 1 and 4 on the white five-pin connector just
below the sample temperature sensor on the bench (pin 1 is the pointed end).



It should be approximately 275 ohms.

2. Assuming that the I2C bus is working and that there is no other failure with the relay
board; the solid-state relay (K1) on the relay board may have failed.


Using the WHEEL_HEATER parameter under the signal I/O function, as
described above, turn on and off K1 (D2 on the relay board should illuminate as
the heater is turned on).



Check the AC voltage present between pin 1 and 4.

WARNING - ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARD
Hazardous Voltages are present during this test.
3. If the relay has failed there should be no change in the voltage across pins 1 and 4.


K1 is socketed for easy replacement.

4. If K1 checks out OK, the thermistor temperature sensor located at the front of the
filter wheel assembly may have failed.
5. Unplug the connector labeled “Wheel”, and measure the resistance of the
thermistor. The resistance near the 68°C set point is ~5.7k ohms.

276

06864B DCN6314

Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer

Troubleshooting and Service

12.4.1.4. IR PHOTO-DETECTOR TEC TEMPERATURE
If the PHT DRIVE test parameter described in Table 11-3 is out of range there are four
possible causes of failure.
1. The screws retaining the IR photo detector to the absorption bench have become
loose.


Carefully tighten the screws, hand-tight and note whether, after the analyzer has
come up to operating temperature, whether the PHT DRIVE voltage has
returned to an acceptable level.

2. The two large transistor-type devices mounted to the side of the Absorption Bench
have come loose from the bench.


Tighten the retaining screws and note whether there is an improvement in the
PHT DRIVE voltage.

3. The photo-detector has failed. Contact the factory for instructions.
4. The sync demodulator circuit board has failed. Contact the factor for instructions.

12.4.2. EXCESSIVE NOISE
Noise is continuously monitored in the TEST functions as the STABIL reading and
only becomes meaningful after sampling a constant gas concentration for at least 10
minutes. Compare the current STABIL reading with that recorded at the time of
manufacture (included in the T300/T300M Final Test and Validation Data Sheet,P/N
04271 shipped with the unit from Teledyne API).
1. The most common cause of excessive noise is leaks. Leak check and flow check
the instrument described in Section 11.3.3 and 11.3.4.
2. Detector failure – caused by failure of the hermetic seal or over-temperature due to
poor heat sinking of the detector can to the optical bench.


In addition to increased noise due to poor signal-to-noise ratio, another indicator
of detector failure is a drop in the signal levels of the CO MEASURE signal and
CO REFERENCE signal.

3. Sync/Demod Board failure. There are many delicate, high impedance parts on this
board. Check the CO MEAS and CO REF Test Functions via the Front Panel
Display.
4. The detector cooler control circuit can fail for reasons similar to the detector itself
failing. Symptoms would be a change in MR RATIO Test Function when zero air is
being sampled.
5. Also check the SIGNAL I/O parameter PHT DRIVE.


After warm-up, and at 25oC ambient, if PHT DRIVE < 4800 mV, the cooler is
working properly.



If PHT DRIVE is > 4800 mV there is a malfunction.

6. The +5 and 15 VDC voltages in the T300/T300M are provided by switching power
supplies.

06864B DCN6314

277

Troubleshooting and Service

Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer



Switch mode supplies create DC outputs by switching the input AC waveform at
high frequencies.



As the components in the switcher age and degrade, the main problem
observed is increased noise on the DC outputs.



If a noisy switcher power supply is suspected, attach an oscilloscope to the DC
output test points located on the top right hand edge of the Relay board.



Look for short period spikes > 100 mV p-p on the DC output

12.5. SUBSYSTEM CHECKOUT
The preceding subsections discussed a variety of methods for identifying possible
sources of failures or performance problems within the analyzer. In most cases this
included a list of possible causes. If the problem is not resolved at this point, the next
step is to check the subsystems. This subsection describes how to determine whether an
individual component or subsystem is the cause of the problem being investigated.

12.5.1. AC MAINS CONFIGURATION
The analyzer is correctly configured for the AC mains voltage in use if:

Note



The Sample Pump is running.



The GFC Wheel motor is spinning. LEDs D1 & D2 (located on the sync/demod
PCA) should be flashing.



If incorrect power is suspected, check that the correct voltage and frequency is
present at the line input on the rear panel.

• If the unit is set for 230 VAC and is plugged into 115VAC, or 100VAC the
sample pump will not start, and the heaters will not come up to
temperature.
• If the unit is set for 115 or 100 VAC and is plugged into a 230 VAC circuit,
the circuit breaker built into the ON/OFF Switch on the Front Panel will
trip to the OFF position immediately after power is switched on.

278

06864B DCN6314

Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer

Troubleshooting and Service

12.5.2. DC POWER SUPPLY
If you have determined that the analyzer’s AC mains power is working, but the unit is
still not operating properly, there may be a problem with one of the instrument’s
switching power supplies. The supplies can have two faults, namely no DC output, and
noisy output.
To assist tracing DC Power Supply problems, the wiring used to connect the various
printed circuit assemblies and DC Powered components and the associated test points on
the relay board follow a standard color-coding scheme as defined in the following table.

Table 12-6:
NAME

DC Power Test Point and Wiring Color Codes
TEST POINT#

TP AND WIRE COLOR

Dgnd

Black

+5V

Red

Agnd

Green

+15V

Blue

-15V

Yellow

+12R

Purple

+12V

Orange

A voltmeter should be used to verify that the DC voltages are correct per the values in
the table below, and an oscilloscope, in AC mode, with band limiting turned on, can be
used to evaluate if the supplies are producing excessive noise (> 100 mV p-p).
Table 12-7:
POWER
SUPPLY
ASSY

DC Power Supply Acceptable Levels
CHECK RELAY BOARD TEST POINTS
VOLTAGE

FROM TEST POINT
NAME

TO TEST POINT
NAME

MIN V

MAX V

PS1

Dgnd

4.8

5.25

PS1

+15

Agnd

+15

13.5

16V

PS1

-15

Agnd

-15V

-14V

-16V

PS1

Agnd

Dgnd

-0.05

0.05

PS1

Chassis

Dgnd

Chassis

N/A

-0.05

0.05

PS2

+12

+12V Ret

+12V

11.75

12.5

PS2

Dgnd

+12V Ret

Dgnd

-0.05

0.05

12.5.3. I2C BUS
Operation of the I2C bus can be verified by observing the behavior of D1 on the relay
PCA. Assuming that the DC power supplies are operating properly, the I2C bus is
operating properly if D1 on the relay PCA is flashing.

06864B DCN6314

279

Troubleshooting and Service

Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer

12.5.4. TOUCHSCREEN INTERFACE
Verify the functioning of the touchscreen by observing the display when pressing a
touchscreen control button. Assuming that there are no wiring problems and that the DC
power supplies are operating properly, if pressing a control button on the display does
not change the display, any of the following may be the problem:


The touchscreen controller may be malfunctioning.



The internal USB bus may be malfunctioning.

You can verify this failure by logging on to the instrument using APICOM or a terminal
program to any of the communications ports. If the analyzer responds to remote
commands and the display changes accordingly, the touchscreen interface may be faulty.

12.5.5. LCD DISPLAY MODULE
Verify the functioning of the front panel display by observing it when power is applied
to the instrument. Assuming that there are no wiring problems and that the DC power
supplies are operating properly, the display screen should light and show the splash
screen with logo and other indications of its state as the CPU goes through its
initialization process.

12.5.6. RELAY BOARD
The relay board PCA (P/N 04135) can be most easily checked by observing the
condition of the its status LEDs on the relay board, as described in Section 12.1.4.3, and
the associated output when toggled on and off through signal I/O function in the
diagnostic menu, see Section 12.1.3.
1. If the front panel display responds to button presses and D1 on the relay board is
NOT flashing then either the wiring between the touchscreen and the relay board is
bad, or the relay board is bad.
2. If D1 on the relay board is flashing and the status indicator for the output in question
(heater power, valve drive, etc.) toggles properly using the signal I/O function, then
the associated control device on the relay board is bad.


Several of the control devices are in sockets and can be easily replaced.



The table below lists the control device associated with a particular function:
Table 12-8:
FUNCTION

Relay Board Control Devices
CONTROL
DEVICE

IN SOCKET

Wheel Heater

Yes

Bench Heater

Yes

Spare AC Control

Yes

IZS Valves

Yes

IR Source Drive

The IR source drive output can be verified by measuring the voltage at J16 with the IR
source disconnected. It should be 11.5± 0.5 VDC.

280

06864B DCN6314

Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer

Troubleshooting and Service

12.5.7. SENSOR ASSEMBLY
12.5.7.1. SYNC/DEMODULATOR ASSEMBLY
To verify that the Sync/Demodulator Assembly is working, follow the procedure below:
1. Verify that D1 and D2 are flashing.
 If not, check the opto pickup assembly, Section 12.5.7.3 and the GFC Wheel
drive, Section 12.5.7.4.
 If the wheel drive and opto pickup are working properly then verify that there is
2.4 ±0.1 VAC and 2.5 ±0.15 VDC between digital ground and TP 5 on the
sync/demod board. If not then check the wiring between the sync/demod and
opto pickup assembly (see interconnect drawing, P/N 04216). If good then the
sync/demod board is bad.
2. Verify that the IR source is operating, Section 12.5.7.5.
3. With the analyzer connected to zero air, measure between TP11 (measure) and
analog ground, and TP12 (reference) and analog ground.
 If they are similar to values recorded on the factory data sheet then there is likely
a problem with the wiring or the A/D converter.
 If they are not then either the sync demodulator board or the IR-photodetector are
bad. See Section 12.4.1.4 for problems with the IR-photodetector TEC drive.

12.5.7.2. ELECTRICAL TEST
The electric test function substitutes simulated signals for CO MEAS and CO REF,
generated by circuitry on the sync/demod board, for the output of the IR photo-detector.
While in this mode the user can also view the same test functions viewable from the
main SAMPLE display. When the test is running, the concentration reported on the
front panel display should be 40.0 ppm. Also see Section 5.9.4.

06864B DCN6314

281

Troubleshooting and Service

Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer

12.5.7.3. OPTO PICKUP ASSEMBLY
Operation of the opto pickup PCA (P/N 04088) can be verified with a voltmeter.
Measure the AC and DC voltage between digital ground on the relay board, or
touchscreen and TP2 and TP4 on the sync pickup PCA. For a working board, with the
GFC motor spinning, they should read 2.4 ±0.1 VAC and 2.5 ±0.15 VDC.
Further confirmation that the pickups and motor are operating properly can be obtained
by measuring the frequency at TP2 and TP4 using a frequency counter, a digital
voltmeter with a frequency counter, or an oscilloscope, per Table 12-9.
Table 12-9:

Opto Pickup Board Nominal Output Frequencies
Nominal Measured Frequency

AC Mains Freq.
50 Hz
60 Hz

TP2
25
30

TP4
300
360

12.5.7.4. GFC WHEEL DRIVE
If the D1 and D2 on the sync demodulator board are not flashing then:
1. Check for power to the motor by measuring between pins 1 and 3 on the connector
feeding the motor.


For instruments configured for 120 or 220-240VAC there should be
approximately 88 VAC for instruments configured for 100VAC, it should be the
voltage of the AC mains, approximately 100VAC.

2. Verify that the frequency select jumper, JP4, is properly set on the relay board.



For 50 Hz operation it should be installed.
For 60 Hz operation may either be missing or installed in a vertical orientation.

3. If there is power to the motor and the frequency select jumper is properly set then
the motor is likely bad.


See Section 12.6.2 for instructions on removing and replacing the GFC
assembly that the motor is bolted to.

12.5.7.5. IR SOURCE
The IR source can be checked using the following procedure:
1. Disconnect the source and check its resistance when cold.



When new, the source should have a cold resistance of more than 1.5 Ohms
but less than 3.5 Ohms.
If not, then the source is bad.

2. With the source disconnected, energize the analyzer and wait for it to start
operating.



Measure the drive Voltage between pins 1 and 2 on the jack that the source is
normally connected to; it should be 11.5 ± 0.25 VDC.
If not, then the problem is with the wiring, the relay board, or the +12V power
supply.

3. If the drive voltage is correct in step 2, then remove the source from the heat sink
assembly (2 screws on top) and connect to its mating connector.




282

Observe the light being emitted from the source.
It should be centered at the bottom of the U-shaped element.
If there is either no emission or a badly centered emission, then the source is
bad.

06864B DCN6314

Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer

Troubleshooting and Service

12.5.7.6. PRESSURE/FLOW SENSOR ASSEMBLY
The pressure/flow sensor PCA, located on the top of the absorption bench, can be
checked with a voltmeter using the following procedure which, assumes that the wiring
is intact, and that the motherboard and the power supplies are operating properly:
1. For Pressure related problems:


Measure the voltage across C1 - it should be 5 ± 0.25 VDC.

If not, then the board is bad.


Measure the voltage across TP4 and TP1.



With the sample pump disabled it should be 4500 mV ±250 mV.



With the pump energized it should be approximately 200 mV less.

If the voltage is incorrect, then S1, the pressure transducer is bad, the board is bad, or
there is a pneumatic failure preventing the pressure transducer from sensing the
absorption cell pressure properly.
2. For flow related problems:


Measure the voltage across TP2 and TP1 - it should be 10 ±0.25 VDC.

If not, then the board is bad.


Measure the voltage across TP3 and TP1:



With proper flow (800 sccm at the sample inlet) this should be approximately
4.5V (this voltage will vary with altitude).



With flow stopped (sample inlet blocked) the voltage should be approximately
1V.

If the voltage is incorrect, the flow sensor is bad, the board is bad, or there is a leak
upstream of the sensor.

06864B DCN6314

283

Troubleshooting and Service

Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer

12.5.8. MOTHERBOARD
12.5.8.1. A/D FUNCTIONS
The simplest method to check the operation of the A-to-D converter on the motherboard
is to use the Signal I/O function under the DIAG menu to check the two A/D reference
voltages and input signals that can be easily measured with a voltmeter.
1. Use the Signal I/O function (see Section 12.1.3 and Appendix A) to view the value of
REF_4096_MV and REF_GND.


If both are within 3 mV of nominal (4096 and 0), and are stable, ±0.5 mV then
the basic A/D is functioning properly. If not then the motherboard is bad.

2. Choose a parameter in the Signal I/O function such as SAMPLE_PRESSURE,
SAMPLE_FLOW, CO_MEASURE or CO_REFERENCE.


Compare these voltages at their origin (see interconnect drawing, P/N 04215
and interconnect list, P/N 04216) with the voltage displayed through the signal
I/O function.



If the wiring is intact but there is a large difference between the measured and
displayed voltage (±10 mV) then the motherboard is bad.

See also Sections 5.9.1 and 12.1.3.
12.5.8.2. TEST CHANNEL / ANALOG OUTPUTS VOLTAGE
The ANALOG OUTPUT submenu, located under the SETUP  MORE  DIAG
menu is used to verify that the T300/T300M Analyzer’s analog outputs are working
properly. The test generates a signal on functioning outputs simultaneously as shown in
the following table. (See also Section 5.9.2).
Table 12-10:

Analog Output Test Function - Nominal Values Voltage Outputs
FULL SCALE OUTPUT OF VOLTAGE RANGE
(see Section 5.9.3.1)

100MV

10V

STEP

NOMINAL OUTPUT VOLTAGE
0

20 mV

0.2

40 mV

0.4

60 mV

0.6

80 mV

0.8

100

100 mV

1.0

For each of the steps the output should be within 1% of the nominal value listed in the
table below except for the 0% step, which should be within 0mV ±2 mV. Make sure
you take into account any offset that may have been programmed into channel (see
Section 5.9.3.9).
If one or more of the steps fails to be within these ranges, it is likely that there has been
a failure of either or both of the DACs and their associated circuitry on the motherboard.
To perform the test connect a voltmeter to the output in question and perform an analog
output step test as follows:
284

06864B DCN6314

Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer

Troubleshooting and Service

12.5.8.3. ANALOG OUTPUTS: CURRENT LOOP
To verify that the analog outputs with the optional current mode output are working
properly, connect a 250 ohm resistor across the outputs and use a voltmeter to measure
the output as described in Section 5.9.3.6 and then perform an analog output step test as
described in Section 12.5.8.2.
For each step the output should be within 1% of the nominal value listed in the table
below.
Table 12-11:

Analog Output Test Function - Nominal Values Voltage Outputs
OUTPUT RANGE
2 -20

4 -20
NOMINAL OUTPUT VALUES

06864B DCN6314

STEP

CURRENT

V(250 OHMS)

CURRENT

V(250 OHMS)

2 mA

0.5V

5.6

1.4

7.2

1.8

9.2

2.3

10.4

2.6

12.8

3.2

13.6

3.4

16.4

4.1

16.8

4.2

100

285

Troubleshooting and Service

Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer

12.5.8.4. STATUS OUTPUTS
The procedure below can be used to test the Status outputs:
1. Connect a jumper between the “D“ pin and the “” pin on the status output
connector.
2. Connect a 1000 ohm resistor between the “+” pin and the pin for the status output
that is being tested.
3. Connect a voltmeter between the “” pin and the pin of the output being tested (see
table below).

Under the DIAG SIGNAL I/O menu (see Section 12.1.3), scroll through the inputs
and outputs until you get to the output in question. Alternately turn on and off the
output noting the voltage on the voltmeter, it should vary between 0 volts for ON and 5
volts for OFF.
Table 12-12:

Status Outputs Check

PIN (LEFT TO RIGHT)

STATUS

SYSTEM OK

CONC VALID

HIGH RANGE

ZERO CAL

SPAN CAL

DIAG MODE

SPARE

12.5.8.5. CONTROL INPUTS – REMOTE ZERO, SPAN
The control input bits can be tested by the following procedure:
1. Jumper the +5 pin on the Status connector to the U on the Control In connector.
_

2. Connect a second jumper from the pin on the Status connector to the A pin on the
Control In connector. The instrument should switch from Sample Mode to ZERO
CAL R mode.
_

3. Connect a second jumper from the pin on the Status connector to the B pin on the
Control In connector. The instrument should switch from Sample Mode to SPAN
CAL R mode.
4. In each case, the T300/T300M should return to Sample Mode when the jumper is
removed.

286

06864B DCN6314

Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer

Troubleshooting and Service

12.5.9. CPU
There are two major types of CPU board failures, a complete failure and a failure
associated with the Disk On Module (DOM). If either of these failures occurs, contact
the factory.
For complete failures, assuming that the power supplies are operating properly and the
wiring is intact, the CPU is faulty if on power-on, the watchdog LED on the
motherboard is not flashing.
In some rare circumstances, this failure may be caused by a bad IC on the motherboard,
specifically U57, the large, 44 pin device on the lower right hand side of the board. If
this is true, removing U57 from its socket will allow the instrument to start up but the
measurements will be invalid.
If the analyzer stops during initialization (the front panel display shows a fault or
warning message), it is likely that the DOM, the firmware or the configuration and data
files have been corrupted.

12.5.10. RS-232 COMMUNICATIONS
12.5.10.1. GENERAL RS-232 TROUBLESHOOTING
Teledyne API analyzers use the RS-232 communications protocol to allow the
instrument to be connected to a variety of computer-based equipment. RS-232 has been
used for many years and as equipment has become more advanced, connections between
various types of hardware have become increasingly difficult. Generally, every
manufacturer observes the signal and timing requirements of the protocol very carefully.
Problems with RS-232 connections usually center around the following general areas:
1. Incorrect cabling and connectors. See Section 3.3 for connector and pin-out
information.
2. The BAUD rate and protocol are incorrectly configured. See Section 6.2.2.
3. If a modem is being used, additional configuration and wiring rules must be
observed. See Section 8.3
4. Incorrect setting of the DTE-DCE Switch. Ensure that switch is set correctly. See
Section 6.1.
5. Verify that cable (P/N 03596) that connects the serial COM ports of the CPU to J12
of the motherboard is properly seated.

06864B DCN6314

287

Troubleshooting and Service

Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer

12.5.10.2. TROUBLESHOOTING ANALYZER/MODEM OR TERMINAL OPERATION
These are the general steps for troubleshooting problems with a modem connected to a
Teledyne API analyzer.
1. Check cables for proper connection to the modem, terminal or computer.
2. Check to make sure the DTE-DCE is in the correct position as described in Section
6.1.
3. Check to make sure the set up command is correct. See Section 8.3.
4. Verify that the Ready to Send (RTS) signal is at logic high. The T300/T300M sets
pin 7 (RTS) to greater than 3 volts to enable modem transmission.
5. Make sure the BAUD rate, word length, and stop bit settings between modem and
analyzer match. See Section 8.3.
6. Use the RS-232 test function to send “w” characters to the modem, terminal or
computer. See Section 8.3.
7. Get your terminal, modem or computer to transmit data to the analyzer (holding
down the space bar is one way); the green LED should flicker as the instrument is
receiving data.
8. Make sure that the communications software or terminal emulation software is
functioning properly.

Further help with serial communications is available in a separate manual “RS-232
Programming Notes” Teledyne API P/N 013500000.

12.5.11. THE OPTIONAL CO2 SENSOR
There are Two LEDs located on the CO2 sensor PCA.

Figure 12-13: Location of Diagnostic LEDs onCO2 Sensor PCA


Normal Operation: V8 is not lit – V9 is Blinking



Error State: Both LEDs are blinking.

Check to make sure that the cable to the CO2 probe is properly connected.

288

06864B DCN6314

Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer

Troubleshooting and Service

12.6. REPAIR PROCEDURES
This contains procedures that might need to be performed on rare occasions when a
major component of the analyzer requires repair or replacement.

12.6.1. REPAIRING SAMPLE FLOW CONTROL ASSEMBLY
The critical flow orifice is housed in the flow control assembly (Teledyne API P/N
001760400) located on the top of the optical bench. A sintered filter protects the jewel
orifice so it is unusual for the orifice to need replacing, but if it does, or the filter needs
replacement please use the following procedure (see the Spare Parts list in Appendix B
for part numbers and kits):
1. Turn off power to the analyzer.
2. Locate the assembly attached to the sample pump. See Figure 3-6.
3. Disconnect the pneumatic connection from the flow assembly and the assembly
from the pump.
4. Remove the fitting and the components as shown in the exploded view below.
5. Replace the o-rings (P/N OR0000001) and the sintered filter (P/N FL0000001).
6. If replacing the critical flow orifice itself (P/N 000941000), make sure that the side
with the colored window (usually red) is facing upstream to the flow gas flow.
7. Apply new Teflon® tape to the male connector threads.
8. Re-assemble in reverse order.
9. After reconnecting the power and pneumatic lines, flow check the instrument as
described in Section 11.3.4.

Pneumatic Connector, Male 1/8”
(P/N FT_70

Spring
(P/N HW_20)
Sintered Filter
(P/N FL_01)

Critical Flow Orifice
(P/N 00094100)
Make sure it is placed with the
jewel down)
O-Ring
(P/N OR_01)

Purge Housing
(P/N 000850000)

Figure 12-14: Critical Flow Restrictor Assembly/Disassembly

06864B DCN6314

289

Troubleshooting and Service

Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer

12.6.2. REMOVING/REPLACING THE GFC WHEEL
When removing or replacing the GFC Wheel it is important to perform the disassembly
in the following order to avoid damaging the components:
1. Turn off the analyzer.
2. Remove the top cover.
3. Open the instrument’s hinged front panel.
4. Locate the GFC Wheel/motor assembly. See Figure 3-6.
5. Unplug the following electronic components:


The GFC Wheel housing temperature sensor



GFC Wheel heater



GFC Wheel motor power supply

SOURCE ASSEMBLY

SYNCHRONOUS MOTOR

THERMISTOR

HEATER

SAFETY SHIELD

Figure 12-15: Opening the GFC Wheel Housing

6. Remove the two (2) screws holding the opto-pickup printed circuit assembly to the
GFC Wheel housing.

290

06864B DCN6314

Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer

Troubleshooting and Service

7. Carefully remove the opto-pickup printed circuit assembly.

Opto-Pickup

Figure 12-16: Removing the Opto-Pickup Assembly

8. Remove the three (3) screws holding the GFC Wheel motor/heat sink assembly to
the GFC Wheel housing.
9. Carefully remove the GFC Wheel motor/heat sink assembly from the GFC Wheel
housing.

GFC WHEEL HOUSING

Figure 12-17: Removing the GFC Wheel Housing

06864B DCN6314

291

Troubleshooting and Service

Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer

10. Remove the one (1) screw fastening the GFC Wheel/mask assembly to the GFC
motor hub.

Figure 12-18: Removing the GFC Wheel

11. Remove the GFC Wheel/mask assembly.
12. Follow the previous steps in reverse order to put the GFC Wheel/motor assembly
back together.

12.6.3. CHECKING AND ADJUSTING THE SYNC/DEMODULATOR, CIRCUIT
GAIN (CO MEAS)
12.6.3.1. CHECKING THE SYNC/DEMODULATOR CIRCUIT GAIN
The T300/T300M Analyzers will operate accurately as long as the sync/demodulator
circuit gain is properly adjusted. To determine if this gain factor is correct:
1. Make sure that the analyzer is turned on and warmed up.
2. Set the analyzer display to show the STABIL or CO STB test function.
3. Apply Zero Air to Sample Inlet of the analyzer.
4. Wait until the stability reading falls below 1.0 ppm.
5. Change the analyzer display to show the CO MEAS

292



The value of CO MEAS must be > 2800 mV and < 4800 mV for the instrument
to operate correctly.



Optimal value for CO MEAS is 4500 mV ± 300 mV. If it is not, adjust the value.

06864B DCN6314

Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer

Troubleshooting and Service

12.6.3.2. ADJUSTING THE SYNC/DEMODULATOR, CIRCUIT GAIN
To adjust the sync/demodulator circuit gain:
1. Make sure that the analyzer is turned on and warmed up.
2. Set the analyzer display to show the STABIL or CO STB test function.
3. Apply Zero Air to Sample Inlet of the analyzer.
4. Wait until the stability reading falls below 1.0 ppm.
5. Change the analyzer display to show the CO MEAS.
6. Remove the Sync/Demod Housing


Remove the two mounting screws.



Carefully lift the housing to reveal the sync/demod PCA.

Housing Mounting
Screws

Sync/Demod
PCA Housing
Optical Bench

Figure 12-19: Location of Sync/Demod Housing Mounting Screws

7. Adjust potentiometer VR1 until CO MEAS reads 4500 mV ± 300 mV

VR1
Adjustment Made Here

Figure 12-20: Location of Sync/Demod Gain Potentiometer

06864B DCN6314

293

Troubleshooting and Service

Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer

12.6.4. DISK-ON-MODULE REPLACEMENT
ATTENTION

COULD DAMAGE INSTRUMENT AND VOID WARRANTY
Servicing of circuit components requires electrostatic discharge
protection, i.e. ESD grounding straps, mats and containers. Failure to use
ESD protection when working with electronic assemblies will void the
instrument warranty. Refer to Section 13 for more information on
preventing ESD damage.
Replacing the Disk-on-Module (DOM) will cause loss of all DAS data; it may also
cause loss of some instrument configuration parameters unless the replacement DOM
carries the exact same firmware version. Whenever changing the version of installed
software, the memory must be reset. Failure to ensure that memory is reset can cause the
analyzer to malfunction, and invalidate measurements. After the memory is reset, the
A/D converter must be re-calibrated, and all information collected in Step 1 below must
be re-entered before the instrument will function correctly. Also, zero and span
calibration should be performed.
1. Document all analyzer parameters that may have been changed, such as range,
auto-cal, analog output, serial port and other settings before replacing the DOM
2. Turn off power to the instrument, fold down the rear panel by loosening the
mounting screws.
3. When looking at the electronic circuits from the back of the analyzer, locate the
Disk-on-Module in the right-most socket of the CPU board.
4. The DOM should carry a label with firmware revision, date and initials of the
programmer.
5. Remove the nylon standoff clip that mounts the DOM over the CPU board, and lift
the DOM off the CPU. Do not bend the connector pins.
6. Install the new Disk-on-Module, making sure the notch at the end of the chip
matches the notch in the socket.
7. It may be necessary to straighten the pins somewhat to fit them into the socket.
Press the chip all the way in.
8. Close the rear panel and turn on power to the machine.
9. If the replacement DOM carries a firmware revision, re-enter all of the setup
information.

294

06864B DCN6314

Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer

Troubleshooting and Service

12.7. FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS
The following is a list from the Teledyne API’s Customer Service Department of the
most commonly asked questions relating to the T300/T300M CO Analyzer.
QUESTION
Why does the ENTR button
sometimes disappear on the Front
Panel Display?

ANSWER
During certain types of adjustments or configuration operations, the
ENTR button will disappear if you select a setting that is out of the
allowable range for that parameter (such as trying to set the 24-hour
clock to 25:00:00, or selecting a DAS hold off period of more than 20
minutes).
Once you adjust the setting in question to an allowable value, the ENTR
button will re-appear.

Why is the ZERO or SPAN button
not displayed during calibration?

The T300/T300M disables these buttons when the expected span or
zero value entered by the users is too different from the gas
concentration actually measured value at the time. This is to prevent
the accidental recalibration of the analyzer to an out-of-range response
curve.
EXAMPLE: The span set point is 40 ppm but gas concentration being
measured is only 5 ppm.
For more information, see Sections 12.3.3 and 12.3.4.

How do I enter or change the value
of my Span Gas?

Press the CONC button found under the CAL or CALS buttons of the
main SAMPLE display menus to enter the expected CO span
concentration.
See Section 0 for more information.

Why does the analyzer not
respond to span gas?

There could be something wrong with a span gas tank, or a span gas
concentration was entered incorrectly, or there could be a pneumatic
leak. Section 12.3.3 addresses these issues.

Is there an optional midpoint
calibration?

There is an optional mid-point linearity adjustment; however, midpoint
adjustment is applicable only to applications where CO measurements
are expected above 100 ppm.
Call Teledyne API’s Customer Service Department for more information
on this topic.

What do I do if the concentration
on the instrument's front panel
display does not match the value
recorded or displayed on my data
logger even if both instruments are
properly calibrated?

This most commonly occurs for one of the following reasons:
 a difference in circuit ground between the analyzer and the data

logger or a wiring problem
 a scale problem with the input to the data logger

(The analog outputs of the T300/T300M can be manually adjusted
to compensate for either or both of these effects, see Section
5.9.3.9).
 the analog outputs are not calibrated, which can happen after a

firmware upgrade
(Both the electronic scale and offset of the analog outputs can be
adjusted; see Section 5.9.3.2. Alternately, use the data logger itself
as the metering device during calibration procedures.

06864B DCN6314

295

Troubleshooting and Service

Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer

QUESTION

ANSWER

How do I perform a leak check?

Section 11.3.3 provides leak check instructions.

How do I measure the sample
flow?

Sample flow is measured by attaching a calibrated rotameter, wet test
meter, or other flow-measuring device to the sample inlet port when the
instrument is operating. The sample flow should be 800 cm3/min 10%.
See Section 11.3.4.

How long does the IR source last?

Typical lifetime is about 2-3 years.

Can I automate the calibration of
my analyzer?

Any analyzer with zero/span valve or IZS option can be automatically
calibrated using the instrument’s AutoCal feature. The setup of this
option is located in Section 9.4.

Can I use the IZS option to
calibrate the analyzer?

Yes. However, whereas this may be acceptable for basic calibration
checks, the IZS option is not permitted as a calibration source in
applications following US EPA protocols.
To achieve highest accuracy, it is recommended to use cylinders of
calibrated span gases in combination with a zero air source.

Q: What is the averaging time for
an T300/T300M?

A: The default averaging time, optimized for ambient pollution
monitoring, is 150 seconds for stable concentrations and 10 seconds for
rapidly changing concentrations (see Section 13.5.1 for more
information).
However, it is adjustable over a range of 0.5 second to 200 seconds
(please contact Customer Service for more information).

12.8. TECHNICAL ASSISTANCE
If this manual and its troubleshooting / repair sections do not solve your problems,
technical assistance may be obtained from:
Teledyne API, Customer Service,
9480 Carroll Park Drive
San Diego, California 92121-5201USA
Toll-free Phone:

800-324-5190

Phone:

858-657-9800

Fax:

858-657-9816

Email:
Website:

api-customerservice@teledyne.com
http://www.teledyne-api.com/

Before you contact Teledyne API Customer service, fill out the problem report form in
Appendix C, which is also available online for electronic submission at
http://www.teledyne-api.com/forms/.

296

06864B DCN6314

13. THEORY OF OPERATION
The T300/T300M Gas Filter Correlation Carbon monoxide Analyzer is a
microprocessor-controlled analyzer that determines the concentration of carbon
monoxide (CO) in a sample gas drawn through the instrument. It requires that the
sample and calibration gases be supplied at ambient atmospheric pressure in order to
establish a stable gas flow through the sample chamber where the gases ability to absorb
infrared radiation is measured.
Calibration of the instrument is performed in software and does not require physical
adjustments to the instrument. During calibration, the microprocessor measures the
current state of the IR Sensor output and various other physical parameters of the
instrument and stores them in memory.
The microprocessor uses these calibration values, the IR absorption measurements made
on the sample gas along with data regarding the current temperature and pressure of the
gas to calculate a final CO concentration.
This concentration value and the original information from which it was calculated are
stored in one of the unit’s internal data acquisition system (DAS - See Sections 7) as
well as reported to the user via front panel display display or a variety of digital and
analog signal outputs.

13.1. MEASUREMENT METHOD
This section presents measurement principles and fundamentals for this instrument.

13.1.1. BEER’S LAW
The basic principle by which the analyzer works is called the Beer-Lambert Law or
Beer’s Law. It defines how light of a specific wavelength is absorbed by a particular gas
molecule over a certain distance. The mathematical relationship between these three
parameters is:

I = Io e-αLc
Equation 13-1

Where:

Io is the intensity of the light if there was no absorption.
06864B DCN6314

297

Theory of Operation

Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer

I is the intensity with absorption.
L is the absorption path, or the distance the light travels as it is being absorbed.
C is the concentration of the absorbing gas; in the case of the T300/T300M, Carbon
Monoxide (CO).

α is the absorption coefficient that tells how well CO absorbs light at the specific
wavelength of interest.

13.2. MEASUREMENT FUNDAMENTALS
In the most basic terms, the T300/T300M uses a high-energy heated element to generate
a beam of broad-band IR light with a known intensity (measured during instrument
calibration). This beam is directed through multi-pass cell filled with sample gas. The
sample cell uses mirrors at each end to reflect the IR beam back and forth through the
sample gas a number of times (see Figure 13-1).
The total length that the reflected light travels is directly related to the intended
sensitivity of the instrument. The lower the concentrations the instrument is designed to
detect, the longer the light path must be in order to create detectable levels of
attenuation.
Lengthening the absorption path is accomplished partly by making the physical
dimension of the reaction cell longer, but primarily by adding extra passes back and
forth along the length of the chamber.
Table 13-1: Absorption Path Lengths for T300 and T300M

298

MODEL

TOTAL NUMBER OF
REFLECTIVE PASSES

DISTANCE BETWEEN MIRRORS

TOTAL
ABSORPTION LIGHT
PATH

T300

437.5 mm

14 Meters

T300M

312.5 mm

2.5 Meters

06864B DCN6314

Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer

Theory of Operation

Band-Pass Filter
Sample Chamber

IR
Source

Photo-Detector

IR Beam

Figure 13-1:

Measurement Fundamentals

Upon exiting the sample cell, the beam shines through a band-pass filter that allows only
light at a wavelength of 4.7 µm to pass. Finally, the beam strikes a solid-state photodetector that converts the light signal into a modulated voltage signal representing the
attenuated intensity of the beam.

13.2.1. GAS FILTER CORRELATION
Unfortunately, water vapor absorbs light at 4.7 µm too. To overcome the interfering
effects of water vapor the T300/T300M adds another component to the IR light path
called a Gas Filter Correlation (GFC) Wheel.

Measurement Cell
(Pure N2)

Reference Cell
(N2 with CO)

Figure 13-2:

GFC Wheel

13.2.1.1. THE GFC WHEEL
A GFC Wheel is a metallic wheel into which two chambers are carved. The chambers
are sealed on both sides with material transparent to 4.7 µm IR radiation creating two
airtight cavities. Each cavity is mainly filled with composed gases. One cell is filled
with pure N2 (the measurement cell). The other is filled with a combination of N2 and a
high concentration of CO (the reference cell).

06864B DCN6314

299

Theory of Operation

Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer

IR unaffected by N2 in Measurement Cell
ΔH

IR is affected by CO in Reference Cell

IR
Source

Photo-Detector

GFC Wheel

Figure 13-3:

Measurement Fundamentals with GFC Wheel

As the GFC Wheel spins, the IR light alternately passes through the two cavities. When
the beam is exposed to the reference cell, the CO in the gas filter wheel strips the beam
of most of the IR at 4.7μm. When the light beam is exposed to the measurement cell,
the N2 in the filter wheel does not absorb IR light. This causes a fluctuation in the
intensity of the IR light striking the photo-detector which results in the output of the
detector resembling a square wave.
13.2.1.2. THE MEASURE REFERENCE RATIO
The T300/T300M determines the amount of CO in the sample chamber by computing
the ratio between the peak of the measurement pulse (CO MEAS) and the peak of the
reference pulse (CO REF).
If no gases exist in the sample chamber that absorb light at 4.7μm, the high
concentration of CO in the gas mixture of the reference cell will attenuate the intensity
of the IR beam by 60% giving a M/R ratio of approximately 2.4:1.
Adding CO to the sample chamber causes the peaks corresponding to both cells to be
attenuated by a further percentage. Since the intensity of the light passing through the
measurement cell is greater, the effect of this additional attenuation is greater. This
causes CO MEAS to be more sensitive to the presence of CO in the sample chamber
than CO REF and the ratio between them (M/R) to move closer to 1:1 as the
concentration of CO in the sample chamber increases.

300

06864B DCN6314

Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer

Theory of Operation

IR unaffected by N2 in Measurement Cell of
the GDC Wheel and no additional CO in the
Sample Chamber

CO MEAS

CO REF

IR affected by CO in Reference Cell
with no interfering gas in the
Sample Chamber

IR shinning through Measurement Cell of
the GDC Wheel is reduced by additional CO
in the Sample Chamber

M/R
is reduced

IR shining through Reference Cell is
also reduced by additional CO in the
Sample Chamber, but to a lesser extent

Figure 13-4:

Affect of CO in the Sample on CO MEAS & CO REF

Once the T300/T300M has computed this ratio, a look-up table is used, with
interpolation, to linearize the response of the instrument. This linearized concentration
value is combined with calibration SLOPE and OFFSET values to produce the CO
concentration which is then normalized for changes in sample pressure.

06864B DCN6314

301

Theory of Operation

Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer

INTERFERENCE AND SIGNAL TO NOISE REJECTION
If an interfering gas, such as H2O vapor is introduced into the sample chamber, the
spectrum of the IR beam is changed in a way that is identical for both the reference and
the measurement cells, but without changing the ratio between the peak heights of CO
MEAS and CO REF. In effect, the difference between the peak heights remains the
same.

M/R
is Shifted

IR shining through both cells is
affected equally by interfering
gas in the Sample Chamber

Figure 13-5:

Effects of Interfering Gas on CO MEAS & CO REF

Thus, the difference in the peak heights and the resulting M/R ratio is only due to CO
and not to interfering gases. In this case, GFC rejects the effects of interfering gases and
so that the analyzer responds only to the presence of CO.
To improve the signal-to-noise performance of the IR photo-detector, the GFC Wheel
also incorporates an optical mask that chops the IR beam into alternating pulses of light
and dark at six times the frequency of the measure/reference signal. This limits the
detection bandwidth helping to reject interfering signals from outside this bandwidth
improving the signal to noise ratio.
The IR Signal as the PhotoDetector sees it after being
chopped by the GFC Wheel
S

CO MEAS

CO REF

Figure 13-6:

302

Chopped IR Signal

06864B DCN6314

Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer

Theory of Operation

13.2.1.3. SUMMARY INTERFERENCE REJECTION
The basic design of the T300/T300M rejects most of this interference at a 300:1 ratio.
The two primary methods used to accomplish this are:


The 4.7μm band pass filter just before the IR sensor which allows the instrument to
only react to IR absorption in the wavelength affected by CO.



Comparison of the measure and reference signals and extraction of the ratio
between them.



Pneumatic Operation

CAUTION – GENERAL SAFETY HAZARD
It is important that the sample airflow system is both leak tight and not pressurized
over ambient pressure.
Regular leak checks should be performed on the analyzer as described in the
maintenance schedule, Table 11-1.
Procedures for correctly performing leak checks can be found in Section 11.3.3.

An internal pump evacuates the sample chamber creating a small vacuum that draws
sample gas into the analyzer. Normally the analyzer is operated with its inlet near
ambient pressure either because the sample is directly drawn at the inlet or a small vent
is installed at the inlet. There are several advantages to this “pull through”
configuration.

06864B DCN6314

303

Theory of Operation

Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer



By placing the pump down stream from the sample chamber several problems are
avoided.



First the pumping process heats and compresses the sample air complicating the
measurement process.



Additionally, certain physical parts of the pump itself are made of materials that
might chemically react with the sample gas.



Finally, in certain applications where the concentration of the target gas might be
high enough to be hazardous, maintaining a negative gas pressure relative to
ambient means that should a minor leak occur, no sample gas will be pumped into
the atmosphere surrounding analyzer.

Figure 13-7:

Internal Pneumatic Flow – Basic Configuration

13.3. FLOW RATE CONTROL
To maintain a constant flow rate of the sample gas through the instrument, the
T300/T300M uses a special flow control assembly located in the exhaust gas line just
before the pump. In instruments with the O2 sensor installed, a second flow control
assembly is located between the O2 sensor assembly and the pump. These assemblies
consist of:

304



A critical flow orifice.



Two o-rings: Located just before and after the critical flow orifice, the o-rings seal the
gap between the walls of assembly housing and the critical flow orifice.



A spring: Applies mechanical force needed to form the seal between the o-rings, the
critical flow orifice and the assembly housing.

06864B DCN6314

Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer

Theory of Operation

13.3.1.1. CRITICAL FLOW ORIFICE
The most important component of this flow control assembly is the critical flow orifice.
Critical flow orifices are a remarkably simple way to regulate stable gas flow rates.
They operate without moving parts by taking advantage of the laws of fluid dynamics.
By restricting the flow of gas though the orifice, a pressure differential is created. This
pressure differential combined with the action of the analyzer’s pump draws the gas
through the orifice.
As the pressure on the downstream side of the orifice (the pump side) continues to drop,
the speed that the gas flows through the orifice continues to rise. Once the ratio of
upstream pressure to downstream pressure is greater than 2:1, the velocity of the gas
through the orifice reaches the speed of sound. As long as that ratio stays at least 2:1,
the gas flow rate is unaffected by any fluctuations, surges, or changes in downstream
pressure because such variations only travel at the speed of sound themselves and are
therefore cancelled out by the sonic shockwave at the downstream exit of the critical
flow orifice.

CRITICAL
FLOW
ORIFICE
AREA OF
LOW
PRESSURE

AREA OF
HIGH
PRESSURE

Sonic
Shockwave

SPRING

Figure 13-8:

O-RINGS
FILTER

Flow Control Assembly & Critical Flow Orifice

The actual flow rate of gas through the orifice (volume of gas per unit of time), depends
on the size and shape of the aperture in the orifice. The larger the hole, the more the gas
molecules move at the speed of sound and pass through the orifice. Because the flow
rate of gas through the orifice is only related to the minimum 2:1 pressure differential
and not absolute pressure, the flow rate of the gas is also unaffected by degradations in
pump efficiency due to age.
The critical flow orifice used in the T300/T300M is designed to provide a flow rate of
800 cc/min.

06864B DCN6314

305

Theory of Operation

Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer

13.3.2. PARTICULATE FILTER
The T300/T300M Analyzer comes equipped with a 47 mm diameter, Teflon, particulate
filter with a 5 micron pore size. The filter is accessible through the front panel, which
folds down to allow access, and should be changed according to the suggested
maintenance schedule described in Table 11-1.

13.3.3. PNEUMATIC SENSORS
There are two pneumatic sensors: one each to measure sample pressure and flow.
13.3.3.1. SAMPLE PRESSURE SENSOR
An absolute value pressure transducer plumbed to the outlet of the sample chamber is
used to measure sample pressure. The output of the sensor is used to compensate the
concentration measurement for changes in air pressure. This sensor is mounted to a
printed circuit board with the Sample Flow Sensor on the sample chamber (see Section
13.3.3.2 and Figure 3-4).
13.3.3.2. SAMPLE FLOW SENSOR
A thermal-mass flow sensor is used to measure the sample flow through the analyzer.
The sensor is calibrated at the factory with ambient air or N2, but can be calibrated to
operate with samples consisting of other gases such as CO. This sensor is mounted to a
printed circuit board with the Sample Pressure Sensor on the sample chamber (see
Section 13.3.3.1 and Figure 3-4).

13.4. ELECTRONIC OPERATION
Figure 13-9 shows a block diagram of the major electronic components of the analyzer.
The core of the analyzer is a microcomputer/central processing unit (CPU) that controls
various internal processes, interprets data, makes calculations, and reports results using
specialized firmware developed by Teledyne API. It communicates with the user as
well as receives data from and issues commands to a variety of peripheral devices via a
separate printed circuit assembly called the motherboard.
The motherboard is directly mounted to the inside rear panel and collects data, performs
signal conditioning duties and routes incoming and outgoing signals between the CPU
and the analyzer’s other major components.
Data are generated by a gas-filter-correlation optical bench which outputs an analog
signal corresponding to the concentration of CO in the sample gas. This analog signal is
transformed into two, pre-amplified, DC voltages (CO MEAS and CO REF) by a
synchronous demodulator printed circuit assembly. CO MEAS and CO REF are
converted into digital data by a unipolar, analog-to-digital converter, located on the
motherboard.
A variety of sensors report the physical and operational status of the analyzer’s major
components, again through the signal processing capabilities of the motherboard. These
status reports are used as data for the CO concentration calculation and as trigger events
for certain control commands issued by the CPU. This information is stored in memory
by the CPU and in most cases can be viewed but the user via the front panel display.

306

06864B DCN6314

Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer

Theory of Operation

The CPU issues commands via a series of relays and switches (also over the I2C bus)
located on a separate printed circuit assembly to control the function of key
electromechanical devices such as heaters, motors and valves.
The CPU communicates with the user and the outside world in several ways:

06864B DCN6314



Through the analyzer’s front panel LCD touch-screen interface



RS-232 and RS-485 serial I/O channels



Various analog voltage and current outputs



Several digital I/O channels



Ethernet

307

Theory of Operation

Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer

ANALOG
IN

RS232
Male

USB COM
port

COM2
Female

Ethernet

Analog Outputs

A1
A2

Optional
4- 20 mA

Touchscreen

Control Inputs:
1– 8

Display

Status Outputs:
1– 6

LVDS

(I2C Bus)

Analog
Outputs
(D/A)

transmitter board

External
Digital I/O)

PC 104
CPU Card

A/D
Converter(
V/F)

Power- Up
Circuit

Disk On
Module

MOTHER
BOARD

Flash Chip

Box
Temp

PC 104 Bus

Thermistor
Interface

SAMPLE
TEMP

I C
Bus

Sensor Inputs

O O

BENCH
TEMP

Zero/Span
Valve
Options

Internal
Digital I/O

M R
E E
A F
S

Optional
O2 Sensor

RELAY
BOARD

Sample Flow
& Pressure
Sensors

CPU Status
LED

Optional
CO2
Sensor
TEC Control

WHEEL
TEMP

PUMP

SYNC
DEMOD

PHT

IR
Source
Photo detector

Drive
Detector
Output

O2 SENSOR
TEMP

(optional)

Schmidt
Trigger

GFC
Wheel

Optical
Bench
Segment Sensor
M / R Sensor

Figure 13-9:

308

GFC
Motor

Wheel
Heater
Bench Heater

Electronic Block Diagram

06864B DCN6314

Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer

Theory of Operation

13.4.1. CPU
The unit’s CPU card is installed on the motherboard located inside the rear panel. It is a
low power (5 VDC, 720mA max), high performance, Vortex 86SX-based
microcomputer running Windows CE. Its operation and assembly conform to the
PC/104 specification.

Figure 13-10.

CPU Board

The CPU includes two types of non-volatile data storage: a Disk-On-Module (DOM)
and an embedded flash chip.
13.4.1.1. DISK-ON-MODULE (DOM)
The DOM is a 44-pin IDE flash drive with a storage capacity up to 128 MB. It is used to
store the computer’s operating system, the Teledyne API firmware, and most of the
operational data generated by the analyzer’s internal data acquisition system (DAS).
13.4.1.2. FLASH CHIP
This non-volatile, embedded flash chip includes 2MB of storage for calibration data as
well as a backup of the analyzer configuration. Storing these key data on a less heavily
accessed chip significantly decreases the chance of data corruption.

06864B DCN6314

309

Theory of Operation

Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer

In the unlikely event that the flash chip should fail, the analyzer will continue to operate
with just the DOM. However, all configuration information will be lost, requiring that
the unit be recalibrated.

13.4.2. OPTICAL BENCH & GFC WHEEL
Electronically, in the case of the optical bench for the T300 Analyzer, GFC Wheel and
associated components do more than simply measure the amount of CO present in the
sample chamber. A variety of other critical functions are performed here as well.
13.4.2.1. TEMPERATURE CONTROL
Because the temperature of a gas affects its density resulting in the amount of light
absorbed by that gas, it is important to reduce the effect of fluctuations in ambient
temperature on the T300’s measurement of CO for the T300 Analyzer. To accomplish
this both the temperature of the sample chamber and the GFC Wheel are maintained at
constant temperatures above their normal operating ranges.
BENCH TEMPERATURE
To minimize the effects of ambient temperature variations on the sample measurement,
the sample chamber is heated to 48C (8 degrees above the maximum suggested ambient
operating temperature for the analyzer). A strip heater attached to the underside of the
chamber housing is the heat source. The temperature of the sample chamber is sensed
by a thermistor, also attached to the sample chamber housing.
WHEEL TEMPERATURE
To minimize the effects of temperature variations caused by the near proximity of the IR
Source to the GFC Wheel on the gases contained in the wheel, it is also raised to a high
temperature level. Because the IR Source itself is very hot, the set point for this heat
circuit is 68C. A cartridge heater implanted into the heat sync on the motor is the heat
source. The temperature of the wheel/motor assembly is sensed by a thermistor also
inserted into the heat sync.
Both heaters operate off of the AC line voltage supplied to the instrument.
13.4.2.2. IR SOURCE
The light used to detect CO in the sample chamber is generated by an element heated to
approximately 1100oC producing infrared radiation across a broad band. This radiation
is optically filtered after it has passed through the GFC Wheel and the sample chamber
and just before it reaches the photo-detector to eliminate all black body radiation and
other extraneous IR emitted by the various components of those components.
13.4.2.3. GFC WHEEL
A synchronous AC motor turns the GFC Wheel motor. For analyzers operating on 60Hz
line power this motor turns at 1800 rpm. For those operating on 50Hz line power the
spin rate is 1500 rpm. The actual spin rate is unimportant within a large range since a
phase lock loop circuit is used to generate timing pulses for signal processing.
In order to accurately interpret the fluctuations of the IR beam after it has passed
through the sample gas, the GFC Wheel several other timing signals are produced by
310

06864B DCN6314

Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer

Theory of Operation

other photo emitters/detectors. These devices consist of a combination LED and
detector mounted so that the light emitted by the LED shines through the same mask on
the GFC Wheel that chops the IR beam.
KEY:
Detection Beam shining
through MEASUREMENT
side of GFC Wheel
Detection Beam shining
through REFERENCE side
of GFC Wheel

IR Detection Ring

Segment Sensor Ring
M/R Sensor Ring

Figure 13-11: GFC Light Mask

M/R SENSOR
This emitter/detector assembly produces a signal that shines through a portion of the
mask that allows light to pass for half of a full revolution of the wheel. The resulting
light signal tells the analyzer whether the IR beam is shining through the measurement
or the reference side of the GFC Wheel.
SEGMENT SENSOR
Light from this emitter/detector pair shines through a portion of the mask that is divided
into the same number of segments as the IR detector ring. It is used by the
synchronous/demodulation circuitry of the analyzer to latch onto the most stable part of
each measurement and reference IR pulse.

06864B DCN6314

311

Theory of Operation

Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer

Reference
Pulses

Measurement
Pulses

IR Beam
Pulses
Segment Sensor
Pulses

MR Sensor
Pulses

Figure 13-12: Segment Sensor and M/R Sensor Output

SCHMIDT TRIGGERS
To ensure that the waveforms produced by the Segment Sensor and the M/R Sensor are
properly shaped and clean, these signals are passed through a set of Schmidt Triggers
circuits.
13.4.2.4. IR PHOTO-DETECTOR
The IR beam is converted into an electrical signal by a cooled solid-state
photo-conductive detector. The detector is composed of a narrow-band optical filter, a
piece of lead-salt crystal whose electrical resistance changes with temperature, and a
two-stage thermo-electric cooler.
When the analyzer is on, a constant electrical current is directed through the detector.
The IR beam is focused onto the detector surface, raising its temperature and lowering
its electrical resistance that results in a change in the voltage drop across the detector.
During those times that the IR beam is bright, the temperature of the detector is high; the
resistance of the detector is correspondingly low and its output voltage output is low.
During those times when the IR beam intensity is low or completely blocked by the
GFC Wheel mask, the temperature of the detector is lowered by the two-stage thermoelectric cooler, increasing the detector’s resistance and raising the output voltage.

13.4.3. SYNCHRONOUS DEMODULATOR (SYNC/DEMOD) ASSEMBLY
While the photo-detector converts fluctuations of the IR beam into electronic signals, the
Sync/Demod Board amplifies these signals and converts them into usable information.
Initially the output by the photo-detector is a complex and continuously changing
waveform made up of Measure and Reference pulses. The sync/demod board
demodulates this waveform and outputs two analog DC voltage signals, corresponding
to the peak values of these pulses. CO MEAS and CO REF are converted into digital
signals by circuitry on the motherboard then used by the CPU to calculate the CO
concentration of the sample gas.
Additionally the synch/demod board contains circuitry that controls the photo-detector’s
thermoelectric cooler as well as circuitry for performing certain diagnostic tests on the
analyzer.

312

06864B DCN6314

Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer

Theory of Operation

56V
Bias

CO MEAS
Dark
Switch

Pre Amp

Photodetector

Sample &
Hold
Circuits

Variable
Gain Amp

Signal
Conditioner

TEC Control
PHT DRIVE

E-Test
Generator

CO Reference
Signal
Amplifiers
Conditioner

(x4)
Thermo-Electric
Cooler
Control Circuit
E Test A Gate
E Test B Gate
Dark Test Gate

Compact
Programmable
Logic Device

Measure Gate
Measure Dark Gate
Reference Gate
Reference Dark Gate

Phase Lock Warning

M/R Sensor
Segment
Sensor

From GFC
Wheel

Segment Clock
X1 Reference

E Test Control
Dark Switch
Control

From CPU
via Mother
Board

x10
10

X10 Clock

Phase
Lock
Loop

Phase Lock

M/R
Status LED

Segment
Status LED

Figure 13-13: T300/T300M Sync/Demod Block Diagram

13.4.3.1. SIGNAL SYNCHRONIZATION AND DEMODULATION
The signal emitted by the IR photo-detector goes through several stages of amplification
before it can be accurately demodulated. The first is a pre-amplification stage that raises
the signal to levels readable by the rest of the sync/demod board circuitry. The second is
a variable amplification stage that is adjusted at the factory to compensate for
performance variations of mirrors, detectors, and other components of the optical bench
from instrument to instrument.
The workhorses of the sync/demod board are the four sample-and-hold circuits that
capture various voltage levels found in the amplified detector signal needed to determine
the value of CO MEAS and CO REF. They are activated by logic signals under the
control of a compact Programmable Logic Device (PLD), which in turn responds to the
output of the Segment Sensor and M/R Sensor as shown in Figure 13-9.

06864B DCN6314

313

Theory of Operation

Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer

The four sample and hold circuits are designated as follows:
Table 13-2:

Sync DEMOD Sample and Hold Circuits

Designation

Active When:
IR BEAM PASSING THROUGH

Segment Sensor Pulse is:

Measure Gate

MEASUREMENT cell of GFC Wheel

HIGH

Measure Dark Gate

MEASUREMENT Cell of GFC Wheel

LOW

Reference Gate

REFERENCE cell of GFC Wheel

HIGH

Reference Dark Gate

REFERENCE cell of GFC Wheel

LOW

Timing for activating the Sample and Hold Circuits is provided by a Phase Lock Loop
(PLL) circuit. Using the segment sensor output as a reference signal the PLL generates
clock signal at ten times that frequency. This faster clock signal is used by the PLD to
make the Sample and Hold Circuits capture the signal during the center portions of the
detected waveform, ignore the rising and falling edges of the detector signal.

Sample & Hold
Active

Detector
Output

Sample & Hold
Inactive

Figure 13-14: Sample & Hold Timing

13.4.3.2. SYNC/DEMOD STATUS LEDS
The following two status LEDs located on the sync/demod board provide additional
diagnostic tools for checking the GFC Wheel rotation.
Table 13-3:

Sync/Demod Status LED Activity

LED

Function

Status OK

Fault Status

M/R Sensor Status

LED flashes approximately
2/second

LED is stuck
ON or OFF

Segment Sensor Status

LED flashes approximately
6/second

LED is stuck
ON or OFF

See Section 12.1.4.2 for more information.

314

06864B DCN6314

Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer

Theory of Operation

13.4.3.3. PHOTO-DETECTOR TEMPERATURE CONTROL
The sync/demod board also contains circuitry that controls the IR photo-detector’s
Thermal Electric Coolers (TEC). A drive voltage, PHT DRIVE, is supplied to the
coolers by the sync/demod board which is adjusted by the sync/demod board based on a
return signal called TEC control which alerts the sync/demod board of the detector’s
temperature. The warmer the detector, the harder the coolers are driven.
PHT DRIVE is one of the Test Functions viewable by the user via the form panel.
Press until it appears on the display.
13.4.3.4. DARK CALIBRATION SWITCH
This switch initiates the Dark Calibration procedure. When initiated by the user (See
Section 9.6.1 for more details), the dark calibration process opens this switch,
interrupting the signal from the IR photo-detector. This allows the analyzer to measure
any offset caused by the sync/demod board circuitry.
13.4.3.5. ELECTRIC TEST SWITCH
When active, this circuit generates a specific waveform intended to simulate the function
of the IR photo-detector but with a known set of value which is substituted for the
detector’s actual signal via the dark switch. It may also be initiated by the user (See
Section 5.4 for more details).

13.4.4. RELAY BOARD
By actuating various switches and relays located on this board, the CPU controls the
status of other key components. The relay board receives instructions in the form of
digital signals over the I2C bus, interprets these digital instructions and activates its
various switches and relays appropriately.
13.4.4.1. HEATER CONTROL
The two heaters attached to the sample chamber housing and the GFC Wheel motor are
controlled by solid state relays located on the relay board.
The GFC Wheel heater is simply turned on or off, however control of the bench heater
also includes circuitry that selects which one of its two separate heating elements is
activated depending on whether the instrument is running on 100 VAC, 115 VAC or 230
VAC line power.
13.4.4.2. GFC WHEEL MOTOR CONTROL
The GFC Wheel operates from a AC voltage supplied by a multi-input transformer
located on the relay board. The step-down ratio of this transformer is controlled by
factory-installed jumpers to adjust for 100 VAC, 115 VAC or 230 VAC line power.
Other circuitry slightly alters the phase of the AC power supplied to the motor during
start up based on whether line power is 50Hz or 60 Hz.
Normally, the GFC Wheel Motor is always turning while the analyzer is on. A physical
switch located on the relay board can be used to turn the motor off for certain diagnostic
procedures.

06864B DCN6314

315

Theory of Operation

Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer

13.4.4.3. ZERO/SPAN VALVE OPTIONS
Any zero/span/shutoff valve options installed in the analyzer are controlled by a set of
electronic switches located on the relay board. These switches, under CPU control,
supply the +12VDC needed to activate each valve’s solenoid.
13.4.4.4. IR SOURCE
The relay board supplies a constant 11.5VDC to the IR Source. Under normal operation
the IR source is always on.

316

06864B DCN6314

Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer

Theory of Operation

13.4.4.5. STATUS LEDS
Eight LEDs are located on the analyzer’s relay board to show the current status on the
various control functions performed by the relay board. They are listed on Table 13-4.
Table 13-4: Relay Board Status LEDs
LED

COLOR

FUNCTION

STATUS WHEN LIT

STATUS WHEN UNLIT

RED

Watch Dog Circuit

YELLOW

Wheel Heater

HEATING

NOT HEATING

YELLOW

Bench Heater

HEATING

NOT HEATING

YELLOW

Spare

N/A

GREEN

Sample/Cal Gas Valve
Option

Valve Open to CAL GAS FLOW

Valve Open to SAMPLE Gas Flow

GREEN

Zero/Span Gas Valve Option

Valve Open to SPAN GAS FLOW

Valve Open to ZERO GAS FLOW

GREEN

Shutoff Valve Option

Valve Open to CAL GAS FLOW

Valve CLOSED to CAL GAS
FLOW

GREEN

IR SOURCE

Source ON

Source OFF

Cycles On/Off every 3 seconds under direct control of the analyzer’s
CPU.

DC VOLTAGE TEST
POINTS

STATUS LED’s

RELAY PCA
PN 04135

Figure 13-15: Location of relay board Status LEDs

13.4.4.6. I2C WATCH DOG CIRCUITRY
Special circuitry on the relay board monitors the activity on the I2C bus and drives LED
D1. Should this LED ever stay ON or OFF for 30 seconds, the watch dog circuit will
automatically shut off all valves as well as turn off the IR Source and all heaters. The
GFC Wheel motor will still be running as will the Sample Pump, which is not controlled
by the relay board.

06864B DCN6314

317

Theory of Operation

Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer

13.4.5. MOTHERBOARD
This printed circuit assembly provides a multitude of functions including, A/D
conversion, digital input/output, PC-104 to I2C translation, temperature sensor signal
processing and is a pass through for the RS-232 and RS-485 signals.
13.4.5.1. A TO D CONVERSION
Analog signals, such as the voltages received from the analyzer’s various sensors, are
converted into digital signals that the CPU can understand and manipulate by the analog
to digital converter (A/D). Under the control of the CPU, this functional block selects a
particular signal input (e.g. BOX TEMP, CO MEAS, CO REF, etc.) and then coverts
the selected voltage into a digital word.
The A/D consists of a Voltage-to-Frequency (V-F) converter, a Programmable Logic
Device (PLD), three multiplexers, several amplifiers and some other associated devices.
The V-F converter produces a frequency proportional to its input voltage. The PLD
counts the output of the V-F during a specified time period, and sends the result of that
count, in the form of a binary number, to the CPU.
The A/D can be configured for several different input modes and ranges but in the
T300/T300M is used in uni-polar mode with a +5 V full scale. The converter includes a
1% over and under-range. This allows signals from –0.05 V to +5.05 V to be fully
converted.
For calibration purposes, two reference voltages are supplied to the A/D converter:
Reference Ground and +4.096 VDC. During calibration, the device measures these two
voltages, outputs their digital equivalent to the CPU. The CPU uses these values to
compute the converter’s offset and slope and uses these factors for subsequent
conversions.
See Section 5.9.3.2 for instructions on performing this calibration.
13.4.5.2. SENSOR INPUTS
The key analog sensor signals are coupled to the A/D through the master multiplexer
from two connectors on the motherboard. 100K terminating resistors on each of the
inputs prevent cross talk from appearing on the sensor signals.
CO MEASURE AND REFERENCE
These are the primary signals that are used in the computation of the CO
concentration.
They are the demodulated IR-sensor signals from the sync
demodulator board.
SAMPLE PRESSURE AND FLOW
These are analog signals from two sensors that measure the pressure and flow rate of the
gas stream at the outlet of the sample chamber. This information is used in two ways.
First, the sample pressure is used by the CPU to calculate CO concentration. Second,
the pressure and flow rate are monitored as a test function to assist the user in predicting
and troubleshooting failures.

318

06864B DCN6314

Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer

Theory of Operation

13.4.5.3. THERMISTOR INTERFACE
This circuit provides excitation, termination and signal selection for several negativecoefficient, thermistor temperature sensors located inside the analyzer. They are as
follows:
SAMPLE TEMPERATURE SENSOR
The source of this signal is a thermistor located inside the sample chamber of the Optical
Bench. It measures the temperature of the sample gas in the chamber. This data is used
to during the calculation of the CO concentration value.
BENCH TEMPERATURE SENSOR
This thermistor is attached to the sample chamber housing. It reports the current
temperature of the chamber housing to the CPU as part of the bench heater control loop.
WHEEL TEMPERATURE SENSOR
This thermistor is attached to the heatsink on the GFC Wheel motor assembly. It reports
the current temperature of the wheel/motor assembly to the CPU as part of the Wheel
Heater control loop.
BOX TEMPERATURE SENSOR
A thermistor is attached to the motherboard. It measures the analyzer’s internal
temperature. This information is stored by the CPU and can be viewed by the user for
troubleshooting purposes via the front panel display (see Section 12.1.2).
13.4.5.4. ANALOG OUTPUTS
The analyzer comes equipped with four analog outputs: A1, A2, A3 and A4. The type
of data and electronic performance of these outputs are configurable by the user (see
Section 5.4).
OUTPUT LOOP-BACK
All four analog outputs are connected back to the A/D converter through a loop-back
circuit. This permits the voltage outputs to be calibrated by the CPU without need for
any additional tools or fixtures.
13.4.5.5. INTERNAL DIGITAL I/O
This channel is used to communicate digital status and control signals about the
operation of key components of the Optical Bench. The CPU sends signals to the
sync/demod board that initiate the ELECTRICAL TEST and DARK CALIBRATION
procedures.
13.4.5.6. EXTERNAL DIGITAL I/O
This External Digital I/O performs two functions: status outputs and control inputs.
STATUS OUTPUTS
Logic-Level voltages are output through an optically isolated 8-pin connector located on
the rear panel of the analyzer. These outputs convey good/bad and on/off information
06864B DCN6314

319

Theory of Operation

Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer

about certain analyzer conditions. They can be used to interface with certain types of
programmable devices (See Section 3.3.1.4).
CONTROL INPUTS
By applying +5VDC power supplied from an external source such as a PLC or Data
logger (See Section 3.3.1.6), Zero and Span calibrations can be initiated by contact
closures on the rear panel.
POWER UP CIRCUIT
This circuit monitors the +5V power supply during start-up and sets the analog outputs,
external digital I/O ports, and I2C circuitry to specific values until the CPU boots and the
instrument software can establish control.

13.4.6. I2C DATA BUS
I2C is a two-wire, clocked, bi-directional, digital serial I/O bus that is used widely in
commercial and consumer electronic systems. A transceiver on the motherboard
converts data and control signals from the PC-104 bus to I2C. The data is then fed to the
relay board, optional analog input board and valve driver board circuitry.

13.4.7. POWER SUPPLY/ CIRCUIT BREAKER
The analyzer operates on 100 VAC, 115 VAC or 230 VAC power at either 50Hz or
60Hz. Individual units are set up at the factory to accept any combination of these five
attributes. As illustrated in Figure 13-14, power enters the analyzer through a standard
IEC 320 power receptacle located on the rear panel of the instrument. From there it is
routed through the ON/OFF Switch located in the lower right corner of the Front Panel.
A 6.75 Amp circuit breaker is built into the ON/OFF Switch.
AC power is distributed directly to the sample gas pump. The bench and GFC Wheel
heaters as well as the GFC Wheel receive AC power via the relay board.
AC Line power is converted stepped down and converted to DC power by two DC
power supplies. One supplies +12 VDC, for valves and the IR source, while a second
supply provides +5 VDC and ±15 VDC for logic and analog circuitry. All DC voltages
are distributed via the relay board.

CAUTION
GENERAL SAFETY HAZARD
Should the AC power circuit breaker trip, investigate and correct the condition causing
this situation before turning the analyzer back on.

320

06864B DCN6314

Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer

Theory of Operation

Figure 13-16: Power Distribution Block Diagram

06864B DCN6314

321

Theory of Operation

Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer

13.4.8. FRONT PANEL TOUCHSCREEN/DISPLAY INTERFACE
Users can input data and receive information directly through the front panel
touchscreen display. The LCD display is controlled directly by the CPU board. The
touchscreen is interfaced to the CPU by means of a touchscreen controller that connects
to the CPU via the internal USB bus and emulates a computer mouse.

Figure 13-17: Front Panel and Display Interface Block Diagram

13.4.8.1. LVDS TRANSMITTER BOARD
The LVDS (low voltage differential signaling) transmitter board converts the parallel
display bus to a serialized, low voltage, differential signal bus in order to transmit the
video signal to the LCD interface PCA.
13.4.8.2. FRONT PANEL TOUCHSCREEN/DISPLAY INTERFACE PCA
The front panel touchscreen/display interface PCA controls the various functions of the
display and touchscreen. For driving the display it provides connection between the
CPU video controller and the LCD display module. This PCA also contains:

322



power supply circuitry for the LCD display module



a USB hub that is used for communications with the touchscreen controller and
the two front panel USB device ports



the circuitry for powering the display backlight
06864B DCN6314

Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer

Theory of Operation

13.5. SOFTWARE OPERATION
The T300/T300M Gas Filter Correlation Carbon Monoxide Analyzer has a high
performance, VortexX86-based microcomputer running Windows CE. Inside Windows
CE, special software developed by Teledyne API interprets user commands via the
various interfaces, performs procedures and tasks, stores data in the CPU’s various
memory devices and calculates the concentration of the sample gas.
Windows CE
API FIRMWARE
Memory Handling
DAS Records
Calibration Data
System Status Data

Analyzer Operations
Calibration Procedures
Configuration Procedures
Autonomic Systems
Diagnostic Routines

PC/104 BUS

ANALYZER
HARDWARE
Interface Handling
Measurement
Algorithm

Sensor input Data
Touchscreen/Display
Analog Output Data
RS232 & RS485
External Digital I/O

PC/104 BUS

Linearization Table

Figure 13-18:

Basic Software Operation

13.5.1. ADAPTIVE FILTER
The T300/T300M software processes the CO MEAS and CO REF signals, after they
are digitized by the motherboard, through an adaptive filter built into the software.
Unlike other analyzers that average the output signal over a fixed time period, the
T300/T300M averages over a set number of samples, where each sample is 0.2 seconds.
This technique is known as boxcar averaging. During operation, the software
automatically switches between two different length filters based on the conditions at
hand. Once triggered, the short filter remains engaged for a fixed time period to prevent
chattering.
During conditions of constant or nearly constant concentration the software, by default,
computes an average of the last 750 samples, or approximately 150 seconds. This
provides the calculation portion of the software with smooth stable readings. If a rapid
change in concentration is detected the filter includes, by default, the last 48 samples,
approximately 10 seconds of data, to allow the analyzer to more quickly respond. If
necessary, these boxcar lengths can be changed between 1 and 1000 samples but with
corresponding tradeoffs in rise time and signal-to-noise ratio (contact customer service
for more information).
Two conditions must be simultaneously met to switch to the short filter. First the
instantaneous concentration must exceed the average in the long filter by a fixed
amount. Second the instantaneous concentration must exceed the average in the long
filter by a portion, or percentage, of the average in the long filter.
06864B DCN6314

323

Theory of Operation

Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer

13.5.2. CALIBRATION - SLOPE AND OFFSET
Calibration of the analyzer is performed exclusively in software.
During instrument calibration (see Section 9) the user enters expected values for zero
and span via the front panel control buttonand commands the instrument to make
readings of calibrated sample gases for both levels. The readings taken are adjusted,
linearized, and compared to the expected values. With this information the software
computes values for instrument slope and offset and stores these values in memory for
use in calculating the CO concentration of the sample gas.
The instrument slope and offset values recorded during the last calibration are available
for viewing from the from the front panel (see Section 3.4.3).

13.5.3. MEASUREMENT ALGORITHM
Once the IR photo-detector signal is demodulated into CO MEAS and CO REF by the
sync/demod board and converted to digital data by the motherboard, the T300/T300M
analytical software calculates the ratio between CO MEAS and CO REF. This value is
compared to a look-up table that is used, with interpolation, to linearize the response of
the instrument. The linearized concentration value is combined with calibration slope
and offset values, then normalized for changes in sample gas pressure to produce the
final CO concentration. This is the value that is displayed on the instrument front panel
display and is stored in memory by the analyzer’s DAS system.

13.5.4. TEMPERATURE AND PRESSURE COMPENSATION
Changes in pressure can have a noticeable, effect on the CO concentration calculation.
To account for this, the T300/T300M software includes a feature which allows the
instrument to compensate for the CO calculations based on changes in ambient pressure.
The TPC feature multiplies the analyzer’s CO concentration by a factor which is based
on the difference between the ambient pressure of the sample gas normalized to standard
atmospheric pressure.
As ambient pressure increases, the compensated CO
concentration is decreased.

13.5.5. INTERNAL DATA ACQUISITION SYSTEM (DAS)
The DAS is designed to implement predictive diagnostics that stores trending data for
users to anticipate when an instrument will require service. Large amounts of data can
be stored in non-volatile memory and retrieved in plain text format for further
processing with common data analysis programs. The DAS has a consistent user
interface in all Teledyne API analyzers. New data parameters and triggering events can
be added to the instrument as needed.
Depending on the sampling frequency and the number of data parameters the DAS can
store several months of data, which are retained even when the instrument is powered
off or a new firmware is installed. The DAS permits users to access the data through the
instrument’s front panel or the remote interface. The latter can automatically download
stored data for further processing. For information on using the DAS, refer to Section 7.

324

06864B DCN6314

14. A PRIMER ON ELECTRO-STATIC DISCHARGE
Teledyne API considers the prevention of damage caused by the discharge of static
electricity to be extremely important part of making sure that your analyzer continues to
provide reliable service for a long time. This section describes how static electricity
occurs, why it is so dangerous to electronic components and assemblies as well as how
to prevent that damage from occurring.

14.1. HOW STATIC CHARGES ARE CREATED
Modern electronic devices such as the types used in the various electronic assemblies of
your analyzer, are very small, require very little power and operate very quickly.
Unfortunately, the same characteristics that allow them to do these things also make
them very susceptible to damage from the discharge of static electricity. Controlling
electrostatic discharge begins with understanding how electro-static charges occur in the
first place.
Static electricity is the result of something called triboelectric charging which happens
whenever the atoms of the surface layers of two materials rub against each other. As the
atoms of the two surfaces move together and separate, some electrons from one surface
are retained by the other.
Materials
Makes
Contact

Materials
Separate

PROTONS = 3
ELECTRONS = 3

NET CHARGE = 0

Figure 14-1:

PROTONS = 3
ELECTRONS = 2

PROTONS = 3
ELECTRONS = 4

NET CHARGE = -1

NET CHARGE = +1

Triboelectric Charging

If one of the surfaces is a poor conductor or even a good conductor that is not grounded,
the resulting positive or negative charge cannot bleed off and becomes trapped in place,

06864B DCN6314

325

A Primer on Electro-Static Discharge

Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer

or static. The most common example of triboelectric charging happens when someone
wearing leather or rubber soled shoes walks across a nylon carpet or linoleum tiled floor.
With each step, electrons change places and the resulting electro-static charge builds up,
quickly reaching significant levels. Pushing an epoxy printed circuit board across a
workbench, using a plastic handled screwdriver or even the constant jostling of
StyrofoamTM pellets during shipment can also build hefty static charges.
Table 14-1: Static Generation Voltages for Typical Activities
MEANS OF GENERATION
Walking across nylon carpet

65-90% RH

10-25% RH

1,500V

35,000V

Walking across vinyl tile

250V

12,000V

Worker at bench

100V

6,000V

Poly bag picked up from bench

1,200V

20,000V

Moving around in a chair padded
with urethane foam

1,500V

18,000V

14.2. HOW ELECTRO-STATIC CHARGES CAUSE DAMAGE
Damage to components occurs when these static charges come into contact with an
electronic device. Current flows as the charge moves along the conductive circuitry of
the device and the typically very high voltage levels of the charge overheat the delicate
traces of the integrated circuits, melting them or even vaporizing parts of them. When
examined by microscope the damage caused by electro-static discharge looks a lot like
tiny bomb craters littered across the landscape of the component’s circuitry.
A quick comparison of the values in Table 14-1 with the those shown in the Table 14-2,
listing device susceptibility levels, shows why Semiconductor Reliability News estimates
that approximately 60% of device failures are the result of damage due to electro-static
discharge.
Table 14-2:

Sensitivity of Electronic Devices to Damage by ESD
DAMAGE SUSCEPTIBILITY VOLTAGE
RANGE

DEVICE

326

DAMAGE BEGINS
OCCURRING AT

CATASTROPHIC
DAMAGE AT

MOSFET

100
1800

VMOS

NMOS

100

GaAsFET

2000

EPROM

100

JFET

140

7000

SAW

150

500

Op-AMP

190

2500

CMOS

200

3000

Schottky Diodes

300

2500

Film Resistors

300

3000

This Film Resistors

300

7000

ECL

500

SCR

500

1000

Schottky TTL

500

2500

06864B DCN6314

Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer

A Primer on Electro-Static Discharge

Potentially damaging electro-static discharges can occur:


Any time a charged surface (including the human body) discharges to a device.
Even simple contact of a finger to the leads of a sensitive device or assembly can
allow enough discharge to cause damage. A similar discharge can occur from a
charged conductive object, such as a metallic tool or fixture.



When static charges accumulated on a sensitive device discharges from the device
to another surface such as packaging materials, work surfaces, machine surfaces or
other device. In some cases, charged device discharges can be the most
destructive.



A typical example of this is the simple act of installing an electronic assembly into
the connector or wiring harness of the equipment in which it is to function. If the
assembly is carrying a static charge, as it is connected to ground a discharge will
occur.



Whenever a sensitive device is moved into the field of an existing electro-static field,
a charge may be induced on the device in effect discharging the field onto the
device. If the device is then momentarily grounded while within the electrostatic field
or removed from the region of the electrostatic field and grounded somewhere else,
a second discharge will occur as the charge is transferred from the device to
ground.

14.3. COMMON MYTHS ABOUT ESD DAMAGE

06864B DCN6314



I didn’t feel a shock so there was no electro-static discharge: The human
nervous system isn’t able to feel a static discharge of less than 3500 volts. Most
devices are damaged by discharge levels much lower than that.



I didn’t touch it so there was no electro-static discharge: Electro Static charges
are fields whose lines of force can extend several inches or sometimes even feet
away from the surface bearing the charge.



It still works so there was no damage: Sometimes the damaged caused by
electro-static discharge can completely sever a circuit trace causing the device to
fail immediately. More likely, the trace will be only partially occluded by the damage
causing degraded performance of the device or worse, weakening the trace. This
weakened circuit may seem to function fine for a short time, but even the very low
voltage and current levels of the device’s normal operating levels will eat away at
the defect over time causing the device to fail well before its designed lifetime is
reached.



These latent failures are often the most costly since the failure of the equipment in
which the damaged device is installed causes down time, lost data, lost productivity,
as well as possible failure and damage to other pieces of equipment or property.



Static Charges can’t build up on a conductive surface: There are two errors in this
statement.



Conductive devices can build static charges if they are not grounded. The charge
will be equalized across the entire device, but without access to earth ground, they
are still trapped and can still build to high enough levels to cause damage when they
are discharged.



A charge can be induced onto the conductive surface and/or discharge triggered in
the presence of a charged field such as a large static charge clinging to the surface
of a nylon jacket of someone walking up to a workbench.



As long as my analyzer is properly installed, it is safe from damage caused by
static discharges: It is true that when properly installed the chassis ground of your
analyzer is tied to earth ground and its electronic components are prevented from
building static electric charges themselves. This does not prevent discharges from
327

A Primer on Electro-Static Discharge

Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer

static fields built up on other things, like you and your clothing, from discharging
through the instrument and damaging it.

14.4. BASIC PRINCIPLES OF STATIC CONTROL
It is impossible to stop the creation of instantaneous static electric charges. It is not,
however difficult to prevent those charges from building to dangerous levels or prevent
damage due to electro-static discharge from occurring.

14.4.1. GENERAL RULES
Only handle or work on all electronic assemblies at a properly set up ESD station.
Setting up an ESD safe workstation need not be complicated. A protective mat properly
tied to ground and a wrist strap are all that is needed to create a basic anti-ESD
workstation.
Protective Mat

Wrist Stra

Ground Point

Figure 14-2:

Basic anti-ESD Workbench

For technicians that work in the field, special lightweight and portable anti-ESD kits are
available from most suppliers of ESD protection gear. These include everything needed
to create a temporary anti-ESD work area anywhere.


Always wear an Anti-ESD wrist strap when working on the electronic
assemblies of your analyzer. An anti-ESD wrist strap keeps the person wearing it
at or near the same potential as other grounded objects in the work area and allows
static charges to dissipate before they can build to dangerous levels. Anti-ESD wrist
straps terminated with alligator clips are available for use in work areas where there
is no available grounded plug.
Also, anti-ESD wrist straps include a current limiting resistor (usually around one
meg-ohm) that protects you should you accidentally short yourself to the
instrument’s power supply.

328

06864B DCN6314

Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer

A Primer on Electro-Static Discharge



Simply touching a grounded piece of metal is insufficient. While this may
temporarily bleed off static charges present at the time, once you stop touching the
grounded metal new static charges will immediately begin to re-build. In some
conditions, a charge large enough to damage a component can rebuild in just a few
seconds.



Always store sensitive components and assemblies in anti-ESD storage bags
or bins: Even when you are not working on them, store all devices and assemblies
in a closed anti-Static bag or bin. This will prevent induced charges from building up
on the device or assembly and nearby static fields from discharging through it.



Use metallic anti-ESD bags for storing and shipping ESD sensitive
components and assemblies rather than pink-poly bags. The famous, pink-poly
bags are made of a plastic that is impregnated with a liquid (similar to liquid laundry
detergent) which very slowly sweats onto the surface of the plastic creating a slightly
conductive layer over the surface of the bag.
While this layer may equalizes any charges that occur across the whole bag, it does
not prevent the build up of static charges. If laying on a conductive, grounded
surface, these bags will allow charges to bleed away but the very charges that build
up on the surface of the bag itself can be transferred through the bag by induction
onto the circuits of your ESD sensitive device. Also, the liquid impregnating the
plastic is eventually used up after which the bag is as useless for preventing
damage from ESD as any ordinary plastic bag.
Anti-Static bags made of plastic impregnated with metal (usually silvery in color)
provide all of the charge equalizing abilities of the pink-poly bags but also, when
properly sealed, create a Faraday cage that completely isolates the contents from
discharges and the inductive transfer of static charges.
Storage bins made of plastic impregnated with carbon (usually black in color) are
also excellent at dissipating static charges and isolating their contents from field
effects and discharges.



Never use ordinary plastic adhesive tape near an ESD sensitive device or to
close an anti-ESD bag. The act of pulling a piece of standard plastic adhesive
®
tape, such as Scotch tape, from its roll will generate a static charge of several
thousand or even tens of thousands of volts on the tape itself and an associated
field effect that can discharge through or be induced upon items up to a foot away.

14.4.2. BASIC ANTI-ESD PROCEDURES FOR ANALYZER REPAIR AND
MAINTENANCE
14.4.2.1. WORKING AT THE INSTRUMENT RACK
When working on the analyzer while it is in the instrument rack and plugged into a
properly grounded power supply:
1. Attach you anti-ESD wrist strap to ground before doing anything else.



Use a wrist strap terminated with an alligator clip and attach it to a bare metal
portion of the instrument chassis.



This will safely connect you to the same ground level to which the instrument
and all of its components are connected.

2. Pause for a second or two to allow any static charges to bleed away.
3. Open the casing of the analyzer and begin work. Up to this point, the closed metal
casing of your analyzer has isolated the components and assemblies inside from
any conducted or induced static charges.

06864B DCN6314

329

A Primer on Electro-Static Discharge

Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer

4. If you must remove a component from the instrument, do not lay it down on a nonESD preventative surface where static charges may lie in wait.
5. Only disconnect your wrist strap after you have finished work and closed the case of
the analyzer.

14.4.2.2. WORKING AT AN ANTI-ESD WORK BENCH
When working on an instrument of an electronic assembly while it is resting on a antiESD workbench:
1. Plug you anti-ESD wrist strap into the grounded receptacle of the work station
before touching any items on the work station and while standing at least a foot or
so away. This will allow any charges you are carrying to bleed away through the
ground connection of the workstation and prevent discharges due to field effects and
induction from occurring.
2. Pause for a second or two to allow any static charges to bleed away.
3. Only open any anti-ESD storage bins or bags containing sensitive devices or
assemblies after you have plugged your wrist strap into the workstation.



Lay the bag or bin on the workbench surface.



Before opening the container, wait several seconds for any static charges on the
outside surface of the container to be bled away by the workstation’s grounded
protective mat.

4. Do not pick up tools that may be carrying static charges while also touching or
holding an ESD sensitive device.



Only lay tools or ESD-sensitive devices and assemblies on the conductive
surface of your workstation. Never lay them down on any non-ESD
preventative surface.

5. Place any static sensitive devices or assemblies in anti-static storage bags or bins
and close the bag or bin before unplugging your wrist strap.
6. Disconnecting your wrist strap is always the last action taken before leaving the
workbench.

14.4.2.3. TRANSFERRING COMPONENTS FROM RACK TO BENCH AND BACK
When transferring a sensitive device from an installed Teledyne API analyzer to an antiESD workbench or back:
1. Follow the instructions listed above for working at the instrument rack and
workstation.
2. Never carry the component or assembly without placing it in an anti-ESD bag or bin.
3. Before using the bag or container allow any surface charges on it to dissipate:



If you are at the instrument rack, hold the bag in one hand while your wrist strap
is connected to a ground point.



If you are at an anti-ESD workbench, lay the container down on the conductive
work surface.



In either case wait several seconds.

4. Place the item in the container.
5. Seal the container. If using a bag, fold the end over and fastening it with anti-ESD
tape.

330

06864B DCN6314

Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer

A Primer on Electro-Static Discharge



Folding the open end over isolates the component(s) inside from the effects of
static fields.



Leaving the bag open or simply stapling it shut without folding it closed
prevents the bag from forming a complete protective envelope around the
device.

6. Once you have arrived at your destination, allow any surface charges that may have
built up on the bag or bin during travel to dissipate:



Connect your wrist strap to ground.



If you are at the instrument rack, hold the bag in one hand while your wrist strap
is connected to a ground point.



If you are at a anti-ESD workbench, lay the container down on the conductive
work surface



In either case wait several seconds

7. Open the container.

14.4.2.4. OPENING SHIPMENTS FROM TELEDYNE API’ CUSTOMER SERVICE
Packing materials such as bubble pack and Styrofoam pellets are extremely efficient
generators of static electric charges. To prevent damage from ESD, Teledyne API ships
all electronic components and assemblies in properly sealed anti-ESD containers.
Static charges will build up on the outer surface of the anti-ESD container during
shipping as the packing materials vibrate and rub against each other. To prevent these
static charges from damaging the components or assemblies being shipped make sure
that you:
Always unpack shipments from Teledyne API Customer Service by:
1. Opening the outer shipping box away from the anti-ESD work area.
2. Carry the still sealed anti-ESD bag, tube or bin to the anti-ESD work area.
3. Follow steps 6 and 7 of Section 14.4.2.3 above when opening the anti-ESD
container at the work station.
4. Reserve the anti-ESD container or bag to use when packing electronic components
or assemblies to be returned to Teledyne API.

14.4.2.5. PACKING COMPONENTS FOR RETURN TO TELEDYNE API’S CUSTOMER SERVICE
Always pack electronic components and assemblies to be sent to Teledyne API’s
Customer Service in anti-ESD bins, tubes or bags.

CAUTION
ESD Hazard
 DO NOT use pink-poly bags.
 NEVER allow any standard plastic packaging materials to touch the
electronic component/assembly directly.
 This includes, but is not limited to, plastic bubble-pack, Styrofoam
peanuts, open cell foam, closed cell foam, and adhesive tape.
 DO NOT use standard adhesive tape as a sealer. Use ONLY anti-ESD tape.

06864B DCN6314

331

A Primer on Electro-Static Discharge

Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer

Never carry the component or assembly without placing it in an anti-ESD bag or bin.
1. Before using the bag or container allow any surface charges on it to dissipate:



If you are at the instrument rack, hold the bag in one hand while your wrist strap
is connected to a ground point.



If you are at an anti-ESD workbench, lay the container down on the conductive
work surface.



In either case wait several seconds.

2. Place the item in the container.
3. Seal the container. If using a bag, fold the end over and fastening it with anti-ESD
tape.

Note



Folding the open end over isolates the component(s) inside from the effects of
static fields.



Leaving the bag open or simply stapling it shut without folding it closed
prevents the bag from forming a complete protective envelope around the
device.

If you do not already have an adequate supply of anti-ESD bags or
containers available, Teledyne API’s Customer Service department will
supply them (see Section 11.8 for contact information).
Follow the instructions listed above for working at the instrument rack
and workstation.

332

06864B DCN6314

Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer

A Primer on Electro-Static Discharge

GLOSSARY
Note: Some terms in this glossary may not occur elsewhere in this manual.
Term

Description/Definition

10Base-T

an Ethernet standard that uses twisted (“T”) pairs of copper wires to transmit at
10 megabits per second (Mbps)

100Base-T

same as 10BaseT except ten times faster (100 Mbps)

APICOM

name of a remote control program offered by Teledyne-API to its customers

ASSY

Assembly

CAS

Code-Activated Switch

Corona Discharge, a frequently luminous discharge, at the surface of a conductor
or between two conductors of the same transmission line, accompanied by
ionization of the surrounding atmosphere and often by a power loss

Converter Efficiency, the percentage of light energy that is actually converted into
electricity

CEM

Continuous Emission Monitoring

Chemical formulas that may be included in this document:
CO2
carbon dioxide
C3H8
propane
CH4
methane
H2O
water vapor
HC
general abbreviation for hydrocarbon
HNO3
nitric acid
H2S
hydrogen sulfide
NO
nitric oxide
NO2
nitrogen dioxide
NOX
nitrogen oxides, here defined as the sum of NO and NO2
NOy
nitrogen oxides, often called odd nitrogen: the sum of NOX plus other compounds
such as HNO3 (definitions vary widely and may include nitrate (NO3), PAN, N2O
and other compounds as well)
NH3
ammonia
O2
molecular oxygen
O3
ozone
SO2
sulfur dioxide
cm3

metric abbreviation for cubic centimeter (replaces the obsolete abbreviation “cc”)

CPU

Central Processing Unit

DAC

Digital-to-Analog Converter

06864B DCN6314

333

A Primer on Electro-Static Discharge

Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer

DAS

Data Acquisition System

DCE

Data Communication Equipment

DFU

Dry Filter Unit

DHCP

Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol. A protocol used by LAN or Internet
servers to automatically set up the interface protocols between themselves and
any other addressable device connected to the network

DIAG

Diagnostics, the diagnostic settings of the analyzer.

DOM

Disk On Module, a 44-pin IDE flash drive with up to 128MB storage capacity for
instrument’s firmware, configuration settings and data

DOS

Disk Operating System

DRAM

Dynamic Random Access Memory

DR-DOS

Digital Research DOS

DTE

Data Terminal Equipment

EEPROM

Electrically Erasable Programmable Read-Only Memory also referred to as a
FLASH chip or drive

ESD

Electro-Static Discharge

ETEST

Electrical Test

Ethernet

a standardized (IEEE 802.3) computer networking technology for local area
networks (LANs), facilitating communication and sharing resources

FEP

Fluorinated Ethylene Propylene polymer, one of the polymers that Du Pont
markets as Teflon®

Flash

non-volatile, solid-state memory

FPI

Fabry-Perot Interface: a special light filter typically made of a transparent plate
with two reflecting surfaces or two parallel, highly reflective mirrors

GFC

Gas Filter Correlation

I2C bus

a clocked, bi-directional, serial bus for communication between individual
analyzer components

Integrated Circuit, a modern, semi-conductor circuit that can contain many basic
components such as resistors, transistors, capacitors etc in a miniaturized
package used in electronic assemblies

Internet Protocol

IZS

Internal Zero Span

LAN

Local Area Network

334

06864B DCN6314

Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer

A Primer on Electro-Static Discharge

LCD

Liquid Crystal Display

LED

Light Emitting Diode

LPM

Liters Per Minute

MFC

Mass Flow Controller

M/R

Measure/Reference

MOLAR MASS

the mass, expressed in grams, of 1 mole of a specific substance. Conversely,
one mole is the amount of the substance needed for the molar mass to be the
same number in grams as the atomic mass of that substance.
EXAMPLE: The atomic weight of Carbon is 12 therefore the molar mass of
Carbon is 12 grams. Conversely, one mole of carbon equals the amount of
carbon atoms that weighs 12 grams.
Atomic weights can be found on any Periodic Table of Elements.

NDIR

Non-Dispersive Infrared

NIST-SRM

National Institute of Standards and Technology - Standard Reference Material

Personal Computer

PCA

Printed Circuit Assembly, the PCB with electronic components, ready to use

PC/AT

Personal Computer / Advanced Technology

PCB

Printed Circuit Board, the bare board without electronic component

PFA

Perfluoroalkoxy, an inert polymer; one of the polymers that Du Pont markets as
Teflon®

PLC

Programmable Logic Controller, a device that is used to control instruments
based on a logic level signal coming from the analyzer

PLD

Programmable Logic Device

PLL

Phase Lock Loop

PMT

Photo Multiplier Tube, a vacuum tube of electrodes that multiply electrons
collected and charged to create a detectable current signal

P/N (or PN)

Part Number

PSD

Prevention of Significant Deterioration

PTFE

Polytetrafluoroethylene, a very inert polymer material used to handle gases that
may react on other surfaces; one of the polymers that Du Pont markets as
Teflon®

PVC

Poly Vinyl Chloride, a polymer used for downstream tubing

Rdg

Reading

RS-232

specification and standard describing a serial communication method between
DTE (Data Terminal Equipment) and DCE (Data Circuit-terminating Equipment)
devices, using a maximum cable-length of 50 feet

06864B DCN6314

335

A Primer on Electro-Static Discharge

Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer

RS-485

specification and standard describing a binary serial communication method
among multiple devices at a data rate faster than RS-232 with a much longer
distance between the host and the furthest device

SAROAD

Storage and Retrieval of Aerometric Data

SLAMS

State and Local Air Monitoring Network Plan

SLPM

Standard Liters Per Minute of a gas at standard temperature and pressure

STP

Standard Temperature and Pressure

TCP/IP

Transfer Control Protocol / Internet Protocol, the standard communications
protocol for Ethernet devices

TEC

Thermal Electric Cooler

TPC

Temperature/Pressure Compensation

USB

Universal Serial Bus: a standard connection method to establish communication
between peripheral devices and a host controller, such as a mouse and/or
keyboard and a personal computer or laptop

VARS

Variables, the variable settings of the instrument

V-F

Voltage-to-Frequency

Z/S

Zero / Span

336

06864B DCN6314

INDEX
6

60 Hz, 37

Baud Rate, 168
Beer-Lambert law, 23
BENCH TEMP, 84, 262
BENCH TEMP WARNING, 47, 85, 175, 260
Bench Temperature

A
Absorption Path Lengths, 224
AC Power 60 Hz, 37
AIN, 142
ALRM, 87, 143
ANALOG CAL WARNING, 47, 85
Analog Inputs, 142
Analog Outputs, 37, 60, 61, 87, 93, 94, 123,
125–42, 286, 287
AIN CALIBRATION, 142
CONC1, 49
CONC2, 49
Configuration & Calibration, 87, 126, 128, 129, 130,
131, 133, 135, 137, 139, 142
Automatic, 28, 87, 131
Manual-Current Loop, 134, 136
Manual-Voltage, 132
Electrical Connections, 37
Electronic Range Selection, 96, 127
Output Loop Back, 242
Over-Range Feature, 137
Pin Assignments, 38
Recorder Offset, 139
Reporting Range, 49, 87
Test Channel, 140
BENCH TEMP, 140
CHASSIS TEMP, 140
CO MEASURE, 140
CO REFERFENCE, 140
NONE, 140
O2 CELL TEMP, 140
PHT DRIVE, 140
SAMPLE FLOW, 140
SAMPLE PRESS, 140
SAMPLE TEMP, 140
WHEEL TEMP, 140

AOUT Calibration Feature, 129
APICOM, 23, 56, 103, 105, 115, 119, 149, 177,
182, 253
and DAS System, 104, 108, 113, 115, 116, 118, 119
and Ethernet, 162
Interface Example, 177
Software Download, 119, 177

ATIMER, 104, 108, 110
AutoCal, 56, 62, 84, 87, 129, 179, 192, 193,
194, 216
AZERO, 175

06864B DCN6314

Control, 234

BENCH_HEATER, 268
BOX TEMP, 47, 84, 175, 262, 276
BOX TEMP WARNING, 47, 85, 175, 260
brass, 43, 180, 276

C
CAL Button, 55, 86
CALDAT, 105
Calibration
AIN, 142
Analog Ouputs, 28, 87, 131
Analog Outputs
Current Loop, 134, 136
Voltage, 132
Initial Calibration
Basic Configuration, 49

Calibration Checks, 182, 189
Calibration Gases, 180
Span Gas, 23, 44, 55, 64, 66, 68, 70, 185, 190
Dilution Feature, 101
Standard Reference Materials (SRM’s)
CO Span Gas, 42
Zero Air, 23, 31, 44, 62, 64, 66, 68, 70, 180

CALS Button, 55, 86, 187
CALZ Button, 86, 187
CANNOT DYN SPAN, 47, 85, 175, 260
CANNOT DYN ZERO, 47, 85, 175, 260
Carbon Monoxide, 23, 62, 220
Carrying Strap/Handle, 60
CLOCK_ADJ, 92, 121
CO Concentration Alarms, 143
CO MEAS, 84, 200, 226, 227, 231, 236, 237,
241, 246, 247, 252, 253, 262, 275, 278, 282,
294, 295
CO REF, 82, 84, 200, 226, 227, 231, 236, 237,
241, 246, 247, 262, 275, 278, 282
CO2, 39, 41, 42, 49, 54, 56, 73, 74, 75, 76, 81,
84, 99, 121, 125, 172, 175, 179, 181, 199,
207, 208, 209, 216, 290
CO2 OFFSET, 84
CO2 Sensor, 39, 41, 42, 54, 73, 74, 75, 84,
175, 181, 207, 208
337

INDEX
Calibration
Procedure, 209
Setup, 207
Span Gas Concentration, 207
Troubleshoting, 290

CO2 Sensor Option

Pneumatic Set Up for Calibration, 207

CO2 SLOPE, 84
COMM Ports, 40, 146, 149, 156, 168
and DAS System, 116
Baud Rate, 148
COM1, 145, 159, 170
COM2, 145, 149, 159, 162, 170
Communication Modes, 149
DCE & DTE, 145
Machine ID, 152
Parity, 149, 168
RS-485, 150
testing, 151

COMM PORTS
Default Settings, 146, 147

CONC, 105, 108
CONC ALRM1 WARNING, 85, 175
CONC ALRM2 WARNING, 85, 175
CONC Button, 55, 121
CONC VALID, 39, 288
CONC_PRECISION, 121
CONC1, 49
CONC2, 49
Concentration Field, 28, 46
CONFIG INITIALIZED, 47, 85, 260
Contact, 304
Continuous Emission Monitoring (CEM), 101
Control Buttons Definition Field, 28
Control Inputs, 39, 242, 289
Pin Assignments, 40
Electrical Connections, 39

CPU, 47, 73, 75, 85, 88, 92, 93, 103, 125, 142,
147, 159, 162, 200, 201, 231, 233, 236, 239,
240, 241, 242, 257, 260, 262, 264, 265, 267,
289
Analog to Digital Converter, 47, 85, 125

Critical Flow Orifice, 72, 105, 229, 230, 255,
256, 260, 269, 273, 291
Current Loop Outputs, 60, 61, 134, 136
Manual Calibration, 134

D
Dark Calibration, 179, 200, 238, 242
DAS Parameters
editing, 111

DAS System, 28, 46, 47, 49, 57, 84, 85, 87, 93,
100, 120, 121, 181, 193, 199, 223, 247, 253,
260, 269
and APICOM, 119, 120
and RS-232, 120
and Terminal Emulation Programs, 120

338

Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer
Channel Names, 109
Channels, 104, 106, 120
CALDAT, 105
CONC, 105
PNUNTC, 105
Compact Data Report, 118
HOLD OFF, 46, 104, 117, 121
Holdoff Period, 55
Number of Records, 104, 115
Parameters, 104, 120
CONC, 108
NXCNC1, 108
PMTDET, 104
Precision, 111
Report Period, 104, 114, 118
Sample Mode
AVG, 111, 112, 113, 114
INST, 111, 112, 113, 114
MAX, 111
MIN, 111, 112, 113, 114
SDEV, 111, 112, 113, 114
Sample Period, 114
Starting Date, 118
Store Number of Samples, 111, 112, 114
Triggering Events, 104, 110
ATIMER, 104, 108, 110
EXITZR, 110
SLPCHG, 105, 110
WTEMPW, 110

DAS_HOLD_OFF, 121
data acquisition. See DAS System
DATA INITIALIZED, 47, 85, 260
DB-25M, 71, 157
DB-9F, 71, 157
DC Power, 40
DCPS, 175
Default Settings
COMM Ports, 146, 147
DAS System, 104
Ethernet, 163
Hessen Protocol, 171, 175
VARS, 121

DHCP, 48, 163
DIAG AIO, 123
DIAG AOUT, 123
DIAG ELEC, 123
DIAG FCAL, 123
DIAG I/O, 123
DIAG OPTIC, 123
DIAG TEST CHAN, 123
Diagnostic Menu (DIAG), 87, 89, 90, 286
Ain Calibrated, 125, 142
Analog I/O
Aout Calibration Configuration, 125
AOUT Calibration Configuration, 130
AOUTCalibrated Configuration, 129
Conc_Out_1, 125
Conc_Out_2, 125
Conc_Out_3, 125
Analog I/O Configuration, 123, 126, 128, 129, 130, 131,
133, 135, 137, 139, 142

06864B DCN6314

Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer
ANALOG OUTPUT (Step Test), 286
Analog Output Step Test, 123
Dark Calikbration, 123
Electrical Test, 123
Flow Calibration, 123
Pressure Calibration, 123
SIGNAL I/O, 123, 264
Test Chan Ouptut, 123
Test Output, 125

Dilution Ratio, 77, 101
Set Up, 51

Display Precision, 121
DUAL, 95, 97, 98, 179
DYN_SPAN, 121
DYN_ZERO, 121
Dynamic Span, 121
Dynamic Zero, 121

E
Electric Test, 282
Electric Test Switch, 239
Electrical Connections, 36–41
AC Power, 36, 59
Analog Outputs, 37, 94
Current Loop, 134
Voltage Ranges, 132
Control InputS, 39
Ethernet, 41, 48, 162
Ethernet, 23
Modem, 157
Multidrop, 41
Serial/COMM Ports, 40, 146, 147
Status Outputs, 38

Electrical Test, 123
Electro-Static Discharge, 303
ENTR Button, 87, 90, 115, 182
Environmental Protection Agency(EPA), 42, 56
Calibration, 86

Ethernet, 23, 62, 152, 162, 163
Configuration, 162–67
Property Defaults, 163
using DHCP, 163
DHCP, 48, 163
Gateway IP Address, 166
HOSTNAME, 167
Instrument IP Address, 166
Subnet Mask, 166

Exhaust Gas, 31, 229
Exhaust Gas Outlet, 31, 45, 64, 66, 68, 70
EXIT Button, 87
EXITZR, 110
External Pump, 59

INDEX

Flash Chip, 233
Front Panel, 27
Concentration Field, 28, 46
Display, 46, 123, 140
Message Field, 28
Mode Field, 28, 46
Status LEDs, 28, 46
Touch screen Definition Field, 28

G
Gas Filter Correlation, 23, 26, 57, 59, 223, 224,
225, 234, 239, 243, 246, 261, 293, 294
GFC Wheel, 45, 225, 234, 235, 237, 238, 239, 253,
261, 262, 263, 265, 266, 282, 283, 284, 292, 293,
294
Heater, 239, 243
Light Mask, 227, 235, 236
Motor, 239, 240, 242, 279, 283, 292, 293
Temperature, 47, 84, 85, 140, 277
GFC Wheel Troubleshooting, 292
Schmidt Triggers, 235
Temperature Control, 234

Gas Inlets
Sample, 31
Span, 31
ZERO AIR, 31

Gas Outlets
Exhaust, 31, 45, 64, 66, 68, 70

Gateway IP Address, 166
GFC Wheel, 23

H
H2O, 56
Hessen Flags
Internal Span Gas Generator, 175

Hessen Protocol, 149, 168, 170, 171, 175
Activation, 169
and Reporting Ranges, 172
Default Settings, 171
Download Manual, 168
Gas List, 173, 174
GAS LIST, 172
ID Code, 176
Latency Period, 168
response Mode, 171
Setup Parameters, 168
Status Flag
Default Settings, 175
Modes, 175
Unassigned Flags, 175
Unused Bits, 175
Warnings, 175
Status Flags, 175
types, 170

HIGH RANGE

FEP, 43, 58, 180
Final Test and Validation Data Sheet, 48, 199,
278

HNO3, 56
Hold Off Period, 55
Hostname, 167

06864B DCN6314

REMOTE, 40

339

INDEX

I
I2C bus, 57, 231, 239, 240, 260, 261, 262, 265,
267, 276, 277, 280
Power Up Circuit, 242

Infrared Radiation (IR), 23, 47, 49, 56, 74, 84,
85, 140, 200, 219, 223, 224, 225, 226, 227,
234, 235, 236, 237, 238, 239, 240, 241, 243,
247, 253, 260, 261, 262, 263, 268, 275, 277,
281, 282, 284
Instrument IP Address, 166
Interferents, 49
Internal Pneumatics
Basic 269
Basic with CO2 Sensor Option, 75
Basic Configuration, 34
OPTIONAL CO2 SENSOR, 272
OPTIONAL O2 SENSOR, 272
Zero/Span Valves, 63, 270
Zero/Span Valves with Internal Scrubber, 67, 271
Zero/Span/Shutoff and Internal Scrubber Option, 271
Zero/Span/Shutoff Valves, 65, 270
Zero/Span/Shutoff valves and Internal Scrubber Option,
69

Internal Pump, 43, 105, 201, 228, 229, 230,
243, 254, 255, 260, 273, 274, 279, 285, 291
Internal Span Gas Generator
AutoCal, 193
Warning Messages, 47

Internal Zero Air (IZS), 31, 41, 63, 65, 67, 69,
216, 217, 273, 281
Gas Flow Problems, 269

L
Local Area Network (LAN), 41, 48, 152, 163

M
Machine ID, 152
Maintenance Schedule, 105
Measure Reference Ratio, 226
Menu Buttons
CAL, 55, 86
CALS, 55, 86, 187
CALZ, 86, 187
CONC, 55, 121
ENTR, 87, 90, 115, 182
EXIT, 87

MENUS
AUTO, 95, 99, 179
DUAL, 95, 97, 98, 179
SNGL, 49, 95, 96

Message Field, 28
Mode Field, 28, 46
Modem, 71, 157
Troubleshooting, 290

340

Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer

Motherboard, 47, 125, 134
MR Ratio, 84, 252, 253, 262, 278
Multidrop, 41, 149, 152, 159, 160, 168

N
National Institute of Standards and Technology
(NIST)
Standard Reference Materials (SRM), 42
CO, 42

NH3, 56
nitric acid, 56
NXCNC1, 108

O
O2, 25, 38, 39, 42, 54, 56, 71, 72, 73, 81, 84,
85, 94, 121, 125, 140, 172, 175, 179, 181,
199, 203, 204, 205, 229, 269
O2 CELL TEMP, 84
O2 CELL TEMP WARNING, 85
O2 OFFSET, 84
O2 sensor, 38, 39, 42, 54, 72, 84, 85, 94, 140,
175, 181, 203, 205, 229, 269
O2 SENSOR, 205
CALIBRATION
Procedure, 206
SETUP, 203
Span Gas Concentration, 204

O2 Sensor Option

Pneumatic Set Up for Calibration, 203

O2 SLOPE, 84
OFFSET, 84, 134, 139, 182, 252, 253, 263
Operating Modes, 123
Calibration Mode, 175
Diagnostic Mode (DIAG), 123
Sample Mode, 28, 121, 192
Secondaru Setup, 87

Optic Test, 123
Optical Bench, 234, 242, 256
Layout, 34

Optional Sensors
CO2
INTERNAL PNEUMATICS, 272
O2
INTERNAL PNEUMATICS, 272

P
Particulate Filter, 75, 230, 253, 254, 260
PHOTO TEMP WARNING, 47, 85, 260
PHT DRIVE, 84, 252, 253, 263
Pneumatic Set Up, 41
Basic Model
Bottled Gas, 43, 182
Gas Dilution Calibrator, 44, 183
Calibration
CO2 Sensor, 207

06864B DCN6314

Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer
O2 Sensor, 203
Calibration Gasses, 41
Zero/Span Valves, 64, 187
Zero/Span Valves with Internal Scrubber, 68, 188
Zero/Span/Shutoff and Internal Scrubber Option, 70,
188
Zero/Span/Shutoff Valves, 66, 187

PNUMTC, 105
Predictive Diagnostics, 177
Using DAS System, 105

PRES, 84, 252, 253, 255, 262
PRESSURE SPAN inlet, 63
PTEF, 45, 64, 66, 68, 70
PTFE, 43, 58, 180, 213, 254
Pump
Sample, 59

R
Rack Mount, 59
RANGE, 84, 125, 172, 262
RANGE1, 84, 172
AUTO, 99

RANGE2, 84, 172
AUTO, 99

REAR BOARD NOT DET, 47, 85, 175, 260
Recorder Offset, 139
Relay Board
Status LEDs, 267
Troubleshooting, 281

RELAY BOARD WARN, 47, 85, 260
relay PCA, 47
Reporting Range, 49, 86, 87, 93, 96, 97, 99
Configuration, 87, 93
Dilution Feature, 101
Modes, 101
AUTO, 99
DUAL, 97
SNGL, 96
Upper Span Limit, 96, 98, 101

RJ45, 71
RS-232, 23, 25, 41, 58, 62, 71, 82, 104, 116,
118, 120, 145, 146, 147, 149, 152, 155, 156,
159, 160, 161, 168, 177, 212, 216, 231, 241,
289, 290
Activity Indicators, 147
DCE & DTE, 145

RS-485, 23, 25, 58, 62, 145, 149, 150, 152,
161, 231, 241

S
Safety Messages
Electric Shock, 35, 36, 276, 277
General, 35, 37, 41, 43, 60, 134, 257
Qualiified Personnel, 257

SAMPLE FL, 84, 262
Sample Flow Sensor, 230

06864B DCN6314

INDEX

SAMPLE FLOW WARN, 47, 85, 175, 260
Sample Gas Line, 44, 64, 66, 68, 70
Sample Inlet, 31
Sample Mode, 28, 81, 121, 192, 214, 289
SAMPLE PRESS WARN, 47, 85, 175, 260
Sample Pressure Sensor, 230
SAMPLE TEMP, 84, 85, 175, 262, 276
SAMPLE TEMP WARN, 47, 85, 175
Schmidt Triggers, 235
Scubber
Zero Air, 180

Sensor Inputs, 241, 285
Bench Temperature, 242
Box Temperature, 242
CO Measure And Reference, 241
Sample Pressure And Flow, 241
Sample Temperature, 242
Thermistor Interface, 241
Wheel Temperature, 242

SERIAL I/O
BENCH_HEATER, 276
CO_MEASURE, 278
CO_REFERENCE, 278
PHT_DRIVE, 277, 278
WHEEL_HEATER, 277

Serial I/O Ports
Modem, 157
Multidrop, 41, 149, 152, 159, 160
RS-232, 41, 87, 104, 116, 118, 159, 177
RS-485, 149

Shutoff Valve
Span Gas, 65

SLOPE, 84, 182, 252, 253, 263
SLPCHG, 105, 110
SNGL, 49, 95, 96
SO2, 57
SOURCE WARNING, 47, 85, 175
SPAN CAL, 39, 63, 65, 67, 69, 179, 252, 288,
289
Remote, 40

Span Gas, 23, 31, 42, 44, 48, 55, 62, 64, 65,
66, 67, 68, 70, 86, 101, 143, 175, 179, 181,
185, 187, 190, 193, 204, 207, 219, 255, 260,
263, 273, 274, 275
Dilution Feature, 101
Standard Reference Materials (SRM’s) )
CO Span Gas, 42

Span Inlet, 31
Specifications, 25
STABIL, 84, 252, 253, 262, 278, 294, 295
STABIL_GAS, 121
stainless steel, 43, 180
Standard Temperature and Pressure, 100
Status LEDs, 240
CO2 Sensor, 290
CPU, 265
Relay Board, 267
Sync/Demod Board, 266, 279

341

INDEX

Status Outputs, 99, 242
Electrical Connections, 38
Pin Assignments, 39

Subnet Mask, 166
SYNC, 175
Sync/Demod Board, 200, 236, 237, 238, 242,
247, 260, 261, 262, 282
Photo-Detector Temperature Control, 238
Status LEDs, 266, 279
Troubleshooting, 282, 294, 295

System
Default Settings, 104

SYSTEM OK, 39, 288
SYSTEM RESET, 47, 85, 175

Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer
AUTO, 99
SAMPLE FL, 84, 262
SAMPLE TEMP, 84, 85, 175, 262, 276
SLOPE, 84, 182, 252, 253, 263
STABIL, 84, 252, 253, 262, 278, 294, 295
TIME, 84, 194, 262
WHEEL TEMP, 84, 262

TIME, 84, 194, 262
Touch screen Interface Electronics
Troubleshooting, 280

U
Units of Measurement, 49, 100, 101
Volumetric Units vs Mass Units, 100

USB, 62

T
Teledyne Contact Information
Email Address, 59, 296
Fax, 59, 296
Phone, 59, 296
Technical Assistance, 296
Website, 59, 296
Hessen Protocol Manual, 168
Software Downloads, 119

Terminal Mode, 153
Command Syntax, 154
Computer mode, 149, 153
INTERACTIVE MODE, 153

Test Channel, 123, 125, 140
BENCH TEMP, 140
CHASSIS TEMP, 140
CO MEASURE, 140
CO REFERENCE, 140
NONE, 140
O2 CELL TEMP, 140
PHT DRIVE, 140
SAMPLE FLOW, 140
SAMPLE PRESS, 140
SAMPLE TEMP, 140
WHEEL TEMP, 140

Test Function
RANGE, 125, 172

Test Functions, 83, 125, 140, 286, 287
BENCH TEMP, 84, 262
BOX TEMP, 47, 84, 175, 262, 276
CO MEAS, 84, 252, 253, 294, 295
CO REF, 84
CO2 OFFSET, 84
CO2 SLOPE, 84
Defined, 84
MR Ratio, 84, 252, 253, 262, 278
O2 CELL TEMP, 84
O2 OFFSET, 84
O2 SLOPE, 84
OFFSET, 84, 182, 252, 253, 263
PHT DRIVE, 84, 252, 253, 263
PRES, 84, 252, 253, 255, 262
RANGE, 84, 172, 262
RANGE1, 84, 172
AUTO, 99
RANGE2, 84, 172

342

V
Valve Options, 31, 189, 239
Calibration Using, 187, 190
Internal Span Gas Generator
AutoCal, 193
Hessen Flags, 175
Warning Messages, 47
Shutoff Valve
Span Gas, 65
Zero/Span, 275
Zero/Span Valve w/ Internal Scrubber, 275
Zero/Span Valves
Internal Pneumatics, 63, 270
Pneumatic Set Up, 64, 187
Zero/Span Valves with Internal Scrubber
Internal Pneumatics, 67, 271
Pneumatic Set Up, 68, 188
Zero/Span with Remote Contact Closure, 192
Zero/Span/Shutoff Valves
Internal Pneumatics, 65, 270
Pneumatic Set Up, 66, 187
Zero/Span/Shutoff Valves with Internal Scrubber
Internal Pneumatics, 69, 271
Pneumatic Set Up, 70, 188

VARS Menu, 87, 89, 90, 92, 104, 117, 121
Variable Default Values, 121
Variable Names
CLOCK_ADJ, 121
CONC_PRECISION, 121
DAS_HOLD_OFF, 121
DYN_SPAN, 121
DYN_ZERO, 121
STABIL_GAS, 121

Ventilation Clearance, 36
Venting, 44, 64, 66, 68, 70
Exhaust Line, 45, 65, 66, 68, 70
Sample Gas, 44, 64, 66, 68, 70
Span Gas, 44, 64, 66, 68
Zero Air, 44, 64, 66, 68

W
Warm-up Period, 46
Warnings, 46
06864B DCN6314

Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer
ANALOG CAL WARNING, 47, 85
AZERO, 175
BENCH TEMP WARNING, 175
BENCH TEMP WARNING, 47, 85, 260
BOX TEMP WARNING, 47, 85, 175, 260
CANNOT DYN SPAN, 47, 85, 175, 260
CANNOT DYN ZERO, 47, 85, 175, 260
CONC ALRM1 WARNING, 85, 175
CONC ALRM2 WARNING, 85, 175
CONFIG INITIALIZED, 47, 85, 260
DATA INITIALIZED, 47, 85, 260
DCPS, 175
O2 CELL TEMP WARNING, 85
PHOTO TEMP WARNING, 47, 85, 260
REAR BOARD NOT DET, 47, 85, 175, 260
RELAY BOARD WARN, 47, 85, 260
SAMPLE FLOW WARN, 47, 85, 175, 260
SAMPLE PRESS WARN, 47, 85, 175, 260
SAMPLE TEMP WARN, 47, 85, 175
SOURCE WARNING, 47, 85, 175
SYNC, 175
SYSTEM RESET, 47, 85, 175
Wheel temp WARNING, 47
WHEEL TEMP WARNING, 85, 175

Watch Dog Circuit, 240
WHEEL TEMP, 84, 262
WHEEL TEMP WARNING, 47, 85, 175
WTEMPW, 110

06864B DCN6314

INDEX

Z
Zero Air, 23, 31, 41, 42, 44, 48, 56, 62, 64, 65,
66, 67, 68, 69, 70, 86, 179, 180, 187, 193,
211, 216, 217, 218, 219, 253, 262, 263, 273,
274, 275, 278, 282
ZERO AIR Inlet, 31
ZERO CAL, 39, 40, 63, 65, 67, 69, 252, 288,
289
Remote, 40

Zero/Span Valves, 192
Internal Pneumatics, 63, 270
Pneumatic Set Up, 64, 187

Zero/Span Valves with Internal Scrubber
Internal Pneumatics, 67, 271
Pneumatic Set Up, 68, 188

Zero/Span/Shutoff Valves
Internal Pneumatics, 65, 270
Pneumatic Set Up, 66, 187

Zero/Span/Shutoff Valves with Internal
Scrubber
Internal Pneumatics, 69, 271
Pneumatic Set Up, 70, 188

343

INDEX

Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer

This page intentionally left blank.

344

06864B DCN6314

Teledyne API - T300/T300M and M300E/EM PN 04906H (DCN5840)

APPENDIX A - Version Specific Software Documentation

APPENDIX A - Version Specific Software Documentation
APPENDIX A-1: SOFTWARE MENU TREES, REVISION L.8 ................................................................................. 2
APPENDIX A-2: SETUP VARIABLES FOR SERIAL I/O .......................................................................................... 8
APPENDIX A-3: WARNINGS AND TEST FUNCTIONS ......................................................................................... 21
APPENDIX A-4: SIGNAL I/O DEFINITIONS.......................................................................................................... 26
APPENDIX A-5: DAS TRIGGERS AND PARAMETERS ........................................................................................ 31
APPENDIX A-6: TERMINAL COMMAND DESIGNATORS .................................................................................... 34
APPENDIX A-7: MODBUS REGISTER MAP.......................................................................................................... 35

06864B DCN6314

A-1

APPENDIX A-1: Software Menu Trees, Revision L.8

Teledyne API - T300/T300M and M300E/EM PN 04906H (DCN5840)

APPENDIX A-1: Software Menu Trees, Revision L.8

SAMPLE

TEST1

LOW
A1: User Selectable Range2
A2: User Selectable Range2
A3: User Selectable Range2
A4: User Selectable Range2
STABIL
CO MEAS
CO REF
MR RATIO
PRES
SAMPLE FL
SAMP TEMP
BENCH TEMP
WHEEL TEMP
BOX TEMP
O2 CELL TEMP2
PHT DRIVE
CO SLOPE
CO OFFSET
CO SLOPE
CO OFFSET
C2O SLOPE3
CO2 OFFSET3
O2 SLOPE3
O2 OFFSET3
TIME

ZERO

O23 CO23

HIGH

SPAN

LOW

O23

CALS4

HIGH

O23

CO23

CONC

LOW

SPAN

CO2

CFG

ACAL4

DAS

MSG1
CO23

HIGH

CLR

SETUP

Press to
cycle
through the
active
warning
messages.
Press to
clear an
active
warning
messages.

CONC

PRIMARY SETUP
MENU

RANGE

Only appears when warning messages are active.
2
Range displays vary depending on user selections (see Section 6.13.5)
3
Only appears if analyzer is equipped with O2 or CO2 sensor option.
4
Only appears if analyzer is equipped with Zero/Span or IZS valve options. COMM

PASS

CLK

SECONDARY
SETUP MENU

VARS

DIAG

ALAR5

Only appears on T300 and M300EM units with alarm option enabled.

Figure A-1:

A-2

CALZ4

CAL

Basic Sample Display Menu

06864B DCN6314

Teledyne API - T300/T300M and M300E/EM PN 04906H (DCN5840)

APPENDIX A-1: Software Menu Trees, Revision L.8

SAMPLE

ACAL1

CFG

DAS

PASS

RNGE

Go to iDAS
Menu Tree

MODE

ACAL menu and its submenus only appear
if analyzer is equipped with
Zero/Span or IZS valve options.
2
Only appears if Dilution option is active
3
Only appears if Hessen protocol is active.
4
CO2 and O2 modes only appear if analyzer
is equipped with the related sensor option.
5
DOES NOT appear if one of the three CO2
O2 modes is selected

OFF
TIME

UNIT

DISABLED
ZERO
ZERO-SPAN
SPAN
CO2 ZERO4
CO2 ZR-SP4
CO2 SPAN4
O2 ZERO4
O2 ZERO-SP4
O2 SPAN4

PPM

DIL3

DATE

Go to
SECONDARY SETUP
Menu Tree

MGM

SET

ON
TIMER ENABLE
DURATION
CALIBRATE

OFF
5

RANGE TO CAL

LOW5
Figure A-2:

06864B DCN6314

SEQ 1)
MODEL TYPE AND NUMBERSEQ 2)
SEQ 3)
PART NUMBER
SERIAL NUMBER
SOFTWARE REVISION
LIBRARY REVISION
iCHIP SOFTWARE REVISION
HESSEN PROTOCOL
PREV
REVISION2
CPU TYPE & OS REVISION
DATE FACTORY
CONFIGURATION SAVED

CLK

STARTING DATE
STARTING TIME
DELTA DAYS
DELTA TIME

HIGH5

Primary Setup Menu (Except DAS)

A-3

APPENDIX A-1: Software Menu Trees, Revision L.8

Teledyne API - T300/T300M and M300E/EM PN 04906H (DCN5840)
SETUP

SAMPLE

ACAL1

CFG

DAS

PASS

RNGE

VIEW
PREV

EDIT

ENTER PASSWORD: 818

CONC
CALDAT
PNUMTC
STBZRO
STBSPN
TEMP

NX10

Selects the data point to be viewed

Cycles through
parameters assigned
to this iDAS channel

CONC
CALDAT
PNUMTC
STBZRO
STBSPN
TEMP

VIEW
PV10

SET>

NAME
EVENT
PARAMETERS
REPORT PERIOD
NUMBER OF RECORDS
RS-232 REPORT
CHANNEL ENABLE
CAL MODE

NX10

Create/edit the name of the channel

Sets the time lapse between each
report

ON
PREV

INS

DEL

Cycles through list of
currently active
parameters for this
channel

YES

EDIT

SAMPLE MODE

PRNT

PRECISION
2

Figure A-3:

INST

AVG

NO
Sets the maximum number of
records recorded by this channel

A-4

PRNT

YES2

Cycles through list of available &
currently active parameters for this
channel

CLK

MIN

MAX

ACAL menu only appear if analyzer is equipped with
Zero/Span or IZS valve options.

Editing an existing DAS channel will erase any
data stored on the channel options.
Changing the event for an existing DAS channel
DOES NOT erase the data stored on the
channel.

Primary Setup Menu  DAS Submenu
06864B DCN6314

Teledyne API - T300/T300M and M300E/EM PN 04906H (DCN5840)

Figure A-4:

06864B DCN6314

APPENDIX A-1: Software Menu Trees, Revision L.8

Secondary Setup Menu  COMM and VARS Submenus

A-5

APPENDIX A-1: Software Menu Trees, Revision L.8

Teledyne API - T300/T300M and M300E/EM PN 04906H (DCN5840)

SAMPLE
CFG

ACAL

DAS

RNGE PASS

SETUP
MORE

CLK

COMM
HESN2

INET1

COM1

COM2

ENTER PASSWORD: 818

RESPONSE MODE

BCC

TEXT

CO, 310, REPORTED

EDIT

Go to COMM / VARS Menu
Tree

GAS LIST

INS

O2, 312 REPORTED

STATUS FLAGS

DEL
YES

CO2, 311, REPORTED

EDIT

PRNT

GAS TYPE
GAS ID
REPORTED

ON
OFF
2

E-series: Only appears if Ethernet Option is installed.
Only appears if HESSEN PROTOCOL mode is ON.

Figure A-5:
A-6

Go to DIAG Menu Tree

CMD

DIAG

VARS

Set/create unique gas ID number

CO
CO2
O2

Secondary Setup Menu  Hessen Protocol Submenu
06864B DCN6314

Teledyne API - T300/T300M and M300E/EM PN 04906H (DCN5840)

APPENDIX A-1: Software Menu Trees, Revision L.8
SETUP

SAMPLE
CFG

ACAL

DAS

RNGE PASS

CLK

DIAG
COMM

VARS

ENTER PASSWORD: 818

SIGNAL I/
O

DARK
ELECTRICAL
CALIBRATION
TEST

ANALOG
CONFIGURATION

ANALOG
OUTPUT
Press ENTR
to start test

EXT ZERO CAL
EXT SPAN CAL
REMOTE RANGE HI
SYNC OK
MAINT MODE
LANG2 SELECT
SAMPLE LED
CAL LED
FAULT LED
AUDIBLE BEEPER
ELEC TEST
DARK CAL
ST SYSTEM OK
ST CONC VALID
ST HIGH RANGE
ST ZERO CAL
ST SPAN CAL
ST DIAG MODE
ST CONC ALARM 15
ST CONC ALARM 25
SET AUTO REF5
SET CO2 CAL4
SET O2 CAL4
ST SYSTEM OK2
RELAY WATCHDOG
WHEEL HTR
SENCH HTR
O2 CELL HEATER4
CAL VALVE
SPAN VALVE
ZERO SCRUB VALVE
IR SOURCE ON

Press ENTR
to start test

Correspond to analog Output A1 – A4 on back of
analyzer

Only appears if one of the voltage ranges is selected.

Manual adjustment menu only appears if either the
Auto Cal feature is OFF or the range is set for
CURRent.

Only appears if the related sensor option is installed.

Only appears in T300M and M300EM

Press ENTR
to start test

AOUTS CALIBRATED

INS

DEL
YES

Cycles through list of
already programmed
display sequences

DATA OUT 11
DATA OUT 21
DATA OUT 31
DATA OUT 41

EDIT

PRNT

NEXT
CO
CO24
O24

DISPLAY DATA

AIN CALIBRATED

OFF

DISPLAY
SEQUENCE
CONFIGURATION

EDIT

CAL

RANGE

OVER
RANGE
RANGE OFFSET2
ON
OFF

Sets the
degree of
offset

AUTO2 CALIBRATED
CAL

0.1V

10V

OUTPUT
ON

OFF

Auto Cal

CURR

U100

UP10

Manual Cal3

DATA

SCALE

UPDATE
ENTR

CAL2

Figure A-6:
06864B DCN6314

FLOW
CALIBRATION

PRESSURE
CALIBRATION

30 INTERNAL ANALOG
to VOLTAGE SIGNALS
55 (see Appendix A)

DOWN

DISPLAY DURATION
Sets the scale
width of the
reporting range.

Cycles through
the list of iDAS
data types.

DN10

Sets time lapse
between data updates
on selected output

D100

DIAG Menu
A-7

APPENDIX A-2: Setup Variables For Serial I/O

Teledyne API - T300/T300M and M300E/EM PN 04906H (DCN5840)

APPENDIX A-2: Setup Variables For Serial I/O
Table A-1: T300/T300M and M300E/EM Setup Variables, Revision L.8

Setup Variable

Numeric
Units

Default
Value

Value
Range

Description

Low Access Level Setup Variables (818 password)
DAS_HOLD_OFF

Minutes

0.5–20

Duration of DAS hold off period.

CONC_PRECISION

—

AUTO,

Number of digits to display to the
right of the decimal point for
concentrations on the display.

0,
1,
2,
3,
4
REM_CAL_DURATION
STABIL_GAS

Minutes

1–120

Duration of automatic calibration
initiated from TAI protocol.

—

CO 0

CO,

Selects gas for stability
measurement.

CO2
O2

DYN_ZERO

—

OFF

ON, OFF

ON enables remote dynamic
zero calibration; OFF disables it.

DYN_SPAN

—

OFF

ON, OFF

ON enables remote dynamic
span calibration; OFF disables it.

CLOCK_ADJ

Sec./Day

-60–60

Time-of-day clock speed
adjustment.

Medium Access Level Setup Variables (929 password)
LANGUAGE_SELECT

—

ENGL 0

ENGL,
SECD,

Selects the language to use for
the user interface.

EXTN
MAINT_TIMEOUT

Hours

0.1–100

Time until automatically
switching out of softwarecontrolled maintenance mode.

CONV_TIME

—

33 MS 0

33 MS,

Conversion time for
measure/reference detector
channel.

66 MS,
133 MS,
266 MS,
533 MS,
1 SEC,
2 SEC
CO_DWELL

Seconds

0.2

0.1–30

Dwell time before taking
measure or reference sample.

CO_SAMPLE

Samples

1–30

Number of samples to take in
measure or reference mode.

PRE_FILT_SIZE 5, 19

Samples

1–50

Moving average pre-filter size.

FILT_SIZE

Samples

750,

1–1000

Moving average filter size.

720 9, 12
200 3, 8
1000 19, 23

A-8

06864B DCN6314

Teledyne API - T300/T300M and M300E/EM PN 04906H (DCN5840)

Setup Variable
FILT_ASIZE

Numeric
Units
Samples

Default
Value
48,

APPENDIX A-2: Setup Variables For Serial I/O

Value
Range

Description

1–1000

Moving average filter size in
adaptive mode.

1–1000

Absolute change to trigger
adaptive filter.

1–100

Percent change to trigger
adaptive filter.

0–180

Delay before leaving adaptive
filter mode.

20 3, 8,
40 20, 22
FILT_DELTA

PPM

4,
0.7

15 3, 8
0.15 9, 12
0.4 19, 23
0.2 20, 22
FILT_PCT

10
5

FILT_DELAY

Seconds

20, 22, 23

90,
72 20, 22

FILT_ADAPT

—

ON, OFF

ON enables adaptive filter; OFF
disables it.

CO2_DWELL 10

Seconds

0.1

0.1–30

Dwell time before taking each
sample.

CO2_FILT_ADAPT 10

—

ON, OFF

ON enables CO2 adaptive filter;
OFF disables it.

CO2_FILT_SIZE 10

Samples

1–300

CO2 moving average filter size.

Samples

1–300

CO2 moving average filter size in
adaptive mode.

CO2_FILT_DELTA 10

0.01–10

Absolute CO2 conc. change to
trigger adaptive filter.

CO2_FILT_PCT 10

0.1–100

Percent CO2 conc. change to
trigger adaptive filter.

CO2_FILT_DELAY 10

Seconds

0–300

Delay before leaving CO2
adaptive filter mode.

CO2_DIL_FACTOR 10

—

0.1–1000

Dilution factor for CO2. Used only
if is dilution enabled with
FACTORY_OPT variable.

O2_DWELL 14

Seconds

0.1–30

Dwell time before taking each
sample.

O2_FILT_ADAPT 14

—

ON, OFF

ON enables O2 adaptive filter;
OFF disables it.

O2_FILT_SIZE 14

Samples

1–500

O2 moving average filter size in
normal mode.

O2_FILT_ASIZE 14

Samples

1–500

O2 moving average filter size in
adaptive mode.

O2_FILT_DELTA 14

0.1–100

Absolute change in O2
concentration to shorten filter.

O2_FILT_PCT 14

0.1–100

Relative change in O2
concentration to shorten filter.

O2_FILT_DELAY 14

Seconds

0–300

Delay before leaving O2 adaptive
filter mode.

O2_DIL_FACTOR 14

—

0.1–1000

Dilution factor for O2. Used only if
is dilution enabled with
FACTORY_OPT variable.

CO2_FILT_ASIZE

06864B DCN6314

A-9

APPENDIX A-2: Setup Variables For Serial I/O

Setup Variable
USER_UNITS

Teledyne API - T300/T300M and M300E/EM PN 04906H (DCN5840)

Numeric
Units
—

Default
Value
PPM 0

Value
Range
PPB,
PPM,

Description
Concentration units for user
interface.

UGM,
MGM
% 4, 5, 9, 18
PPM

3, 8

MGM 3, 8
NEG_CONC_SUPPRESS

—

OFF,
ON

DIL_FACTOR

—

DARK_CAL_DURATION

Seconds

180,
60

OFF, ON

ON pegs negative concentrations
at zero; OFF permits negative
concentrations

0.1–1000

Dilution factor. Used only if is
dilution enabled with
FACTORY_OPT variable.

10–600

Duration of dark cal. First twothirds is stabilization period; final
third is measure period.

DARK_MEAS_MV

-1000–1000

Dark offset for measure reading.

DARK_REF_MV

-1000–1000

Dark offset for reference reading.

CO2_COMP_ENABLE

—

OFF

ON, OFF

ON enables CO2 compensation;
OFF disables it.

CO2_COMP_CONC

0–20

CO2 concentration to
compensate for.

SOURCE_DRIFT_ENAB 21

—

OFF

ON, OFF

ON enables source drift
compensation; OFF disables it.

SOURCE_DRIFT 21

PPB/Day

-500–500

Source drift compensation rate of
change.

CO_CONST1

—

8000,

100–50000

CO calculation constant.

0–10

CO calculation constant.

15,20,22,23

500

78.8

9,12

3020 18
500 4,9,12
39600 8
40000 3
CO_CONST2

—

0.2110
0.356

20,22,23

0.367 15
1.458

9,12

1.4625 18
1.448 4
0.192 8
0.187 3
0.1196 24
ET_MEAS_GAIN

—

0.0001–9.9999

Electrical test gain factor for
measure reading.

ET_REF_GAIN

—

0.0001–9.9999

Electrical test gain factor for
reference reading.

A-10

06864B DCN6314

Teledyne API - T300/T300M and M300E/EM PN 04906H (DCN5840)

Setup Variable

Numeric
Units

APPENDIX A-2: Setup Variables For Serial I/O

Default
Value

Value
Range

Description

ET_TARGET_DET

4375

0–5000

Target detector reading during
electrical test.

ET_TARGET_CONC

PPM

40,

1–9999.99

Target concentration during
electrical test.

0.1–50000

D/A concentration range during
electrical test.

1–500

Standard temperature for
temperature compensation.

1–50

Standard pressure for pressure
compensation.

0–100

Optical bench temperature set
point and warning limits.

0–100

Wheel temperature set point and
warning limits.

30–70

O2 sensor cell temperature set
point and warning limits.

400
ET_CONC_RANGE

Conc.

3, 8

50,
5000

STD_TEMP

ºK

321

STD_PRESS

"Hg

28.5,

3, 8

28.7 ,
28.8 12, 18,
28.1 4
BENCH_SET

ºC

48
Warnings:
43–53

WHEEL_SET

ºC

68,
62 19,23
Warnings:
63–73,
57–67 19,23

O2_CELL_SET 14

ºC

50
Warnings:
45–55

STD_O2_CELL_TEMP 14

ºK

323

1–500

Standard O2 cell temperature for
temperature compensation.

ZERO_APPLY_IN_CAL 5

—

OFF, ON

ON applies auto-reference offset
and dilution factor during
zero/span calibration;
OFF disables both.
(Only applicable if
ZERO_ENABLE is ON.)

ZERO_DWELL 3, 5, 8

ZERO_SAMPLES 3, 5, 8

Seconds,

1–60,

Minutes 5

1–30 5

Samples

15,

Dwell time after closing or
opening zero scrubber valve.

1–1000

Number of zero samples to
average.

1–100

Auto-zero offset moving average
filter size.

0–5

Minimum auto-zero ratio allowed;
must be greater than this value
to be valid.

0.5–5

Calibrated auto-zero ratio.

750 ,
1000 19
ZERO_FILT_SIZE

3, 5, 8

Samples

5,
1

ZERO_LIMIT

3, 5, 8

Ratio

1.2,
1.15

3, 8

15
ZERO_CAL 3, 5, 8

06864B DCN6314

Ratio

1.18

A-11

APPENDIX A-2: Setup Variables For Serial I/O

Setup Variable

Teledyne API - T300/T300M and M300E/EM PN 04906H (DCN5840)

Numeric
Units

Default
Value

Value
Range

Description

CO_TARG_ZERO1

Conc.

-100.00–
999.99

Target CO concentration during
zero offset calibration of range 1.

CO_TARG_MID1_1

Conc.

50 5,

0.01–9999.99

Target CO concentration during
mid-point #1 calibration of range
1.

0.01–9999.99

Target CO concentration during
mid-point #2 calibration of range
1.

0.01–9999.99

Target CO concentration during
internal span calibration of range
1.

0.001–999.999

CO slope for range 1.

300
CO_TARG_MID2_1

Conc.

50 5,
300

CO_SPAN1

Conc.

40,
400 3, 8

CO_SLOPE1

—

CO_OFFSET1

—

-10–10

CO offset for range 1.

CAL_BOX_TEMP1

ºC

0–100

Calibrated box temperature for
range 1.

CO_TARG_ZERO2

Conc.

-100.00–
999.99

Target CO concentration during
zero offset calibration of range 2.

CO_TARG_MID1_2

Conc.

50 5,

0.01–9999.99

Target CO concentration during
mid-point #1 calibration of range
2.

0.01–9999.99

Target CO concentration during
mid-point #2 calibration of range
2.

0.01–9999.99

Target CO concentration during
internal span calibration of range
2.

0.001–999.999

CO slope for range 2.

300
CO_TARG_MID2_2

Conc.

50 5,
300

CO_SPAN2

Conc.

40,
400

CO_SLOPE2

—

3, 8

CO_OFFSET2

—

-10–10

CO offset for range 2.

CAL_BOX_TEMP2

ºC

0–100

Calibrated box temperature for
range 2.

CO2_TARG_MID1_CONC

Target CO2 concentration during
mid-point #1 calibration.

CO2_TARG_MID2_CONC

0.1–1000,
0.1–2000 16

0.1–1000,

800

CO2_TARG_SPAN_CON
C 10
CO2_SLOPE

6,
800 16

CO2_OFFSET

—

0.1–2000

Target CO2 concentration during
mid-point #2 calibration.

0.1–2000 16

Target CO2 concentration during
span calibration.

0.5–5

CO2 slope.

0.1–1000,

CO2 offset.

-10–10,
-100–100

O2_TARG_SPAN_CONC 14

Target O2 concentration during
span calibration.

20.95

0.1–100

O2_SLOPE 14

—

0.5–2

O2 slope.

O2_OFFSET 14

-10–10

O2 offset.

A-12

06864B DCN6314

Teledyne API - T300/T300M and M300E/EM PN 04906H (DCN5840)

Setup Variable
RANGE_MODE

Numeric
Units
—

APPENDIX A-2: Setup Variables For Serial I/O

Default
Value
SNGL 0

Value
Range
SNGL,

Description
Range control mode.

DUAL,
AUTO
CONC_RANGE1

Conc.

50,

0.1–50000

D/A concentration range 1.

0.1–50000

D/A concentration range 2.

0.1–500,

CO2 concentration range.

200 ,
500 3, 8
CONC_RANGE2

Conc.

50,
6

200 ,
500 3, 8
CO2_RANGE

0.1–2000
O2_RANGE

RS232_MODE

100

0.1–500

O2 concentration range.

BitFlag

0–65535

RS-232 COM1 mode flags. Add
values to combine flags.
1 = quiet mode
2 = computer mode
4 = enable security
8 = enable hardware
handshaking
16 = enable Hessen protocol 11
32 = enable multi-drop
64 = enable modem
128 = ignore RS-232 line errors
256 = disable XON / XOFF
support
512 = disable hardware FIFOs
1024 = enable RS-485 mode
2048 = even parity, 7 data bits, 1
stop bit
4096 = enable command prompt
8192 = even parity, 8 data bits, 1
stop bit
16384 = enable dedicated
MODBUS ASCII protocol
32678 = enable dedicated
MODBUS RTU or TCP protocol
16384 = enable TAI protocol 17

BAUD_RATE

—

115200

300,

RS-232 COM1 baud rate.

1200,
2400,
4800,
9600,
19200,
38400,
57600,
115200

06864B DCN6314

A-13

APPENDIX A-2: Setup Variables For Serial I/O

Setup Variable

Teledyne API - T300/T300M and M300E/EM PN 04906H (DCN5840)

Numeric
Units

Default
Value

Value
Range

Description

MODEM_INIT

—

“AT Y0 &D0
&H0 &I0 S0=2
&B0 &N6 &M0
E0 Q1 &W0” 0

Any character
in the allowed
character set.
Up to 100
characters
long.

RS-232 COM1 modem
initialization string. Sent verbatim
plus carriage return to modem on
power up or manually.

RS232_MODE2

BitFlag

0–65535

RS-232 COM2 mode flags.
(Same settings as
RS232_MODE.)

BAUD_RATE2

—

19200 0

300,

RS-232 COM2 baud rate.

1200,
2400,
4800,
9600,
19200,
38400,
57600,
115200
MODEM_INIT2

—

“AT Y0 &D0
&H0 &I0 S0=2
&B0 &N6 &M0
E0 Q1 &W0” 0

Any character
in the allowed
character set.
Up to 100
characters
long.

RS-232 COM2 modem
initialization string. Sent verbatim
plus carriage return to modem on
power up or manually.

RS232_PASS

Password

940331

0–999999

RS-232 log on password.

MACHINE_ID

300,

0–9999

Unique ID number for instrument.

Any character
in the allowed
character set.
Up to 100
characters
long.

RS-232 interface command
prompt. Displayed only if enabled
with RS232_MODE variable.

320
COMMAND_PROMPT

A-14

—

“Cmd> ” 0

06864B DCN6314

Teledyne API - T300/T300M and M300E/EM PN 04906H (DCN5840)

Setup Variable
TEST_CHAN_ID

Numeric
Units
—

Default
Value
NONE 0

APPENDIX A-2: Setup Variables For Serial I/O

Value
Range
NONE,

Description
Diagnostic analog output ID.

CO
MEASURE,
CO
REFERENC
E,
VACUUM
PRESSURE,
SAMPLE
PRESSURE,
SAMPLE
FLOW,
SAMPLE
TEMP,
BENCH
TEMP,
WHEEL
TEMP,
O2 CELL
14
TEMP ,
CHASSIS
TEMP,
PHT DRIVE,
TEMP4 5
REMOTE_CAL_MODE

—

LOW 0

LOW,
HIGH,
CO2 10,

CO range or other gas to
calibrate during contact closure
or Hessen calibration.

O2 14
PASS_ENABLE

—

OFF

ON, OFF

ON enables passwords; OFF
disables them.

STABIL_FREQ

Seconds

1–300

Stability measurement sampling
frequency.

120 19, 23
STABIL_SAMPLES

Samples

2–40

Number of samples in
concentration stability reading.

PHOTO_TEMP_SET

2500

0–5000

Photometer temperature warning
limits. Set point is not used.

0–100

Sample pressure warning limits.
Set point is not used.

Warnings:
250–4750
SAMP_PRESS_SET

In-Hg

29.92
Warnings:
15–32

06864B DCN6314

A-15

APPENDIX A-2: Setup Variables For Serial I/O

Setup Variable
SAMP_FLOW_SET

Teledyne API - T300/T300M and M300E/EM PN 04906H (DCN5840)

Numeric
Units
cc/m

Default
Value
800,

Value
Range

Description

0–5000

Sample flow warning limits. Set
point is not used.

0.001–100

Slope term to correct sample
flow rate.

0.1–2

Maximum vacuum pressure /
sample pressure ratio for valid
sample flow calculation.

0–100

Purge pressure warning limits.
Set point is not used.

0–100

Sample temperature warning
limits. Set point is not used.

0–100

Internal box temperature warning
limits. Set point is not used.

0–100

Internal box temperature #2 /
oven set point and warning limits.

0.5–30

Internal box temperature #2/oven
control cycle period.

0–100

Internal box temperature #2/oven
PID proportional coefficient.
Proportional band is the
reciprocal of this setting.

0–100

Internal box temperature #2/oven
PID integral coefficient.

2000 13
1800 5,19
Warnings:
640–960,

1400–2200
5,19

1500–2500 13
SAMP_FLOW_SLOPE

—

1
4.5

VAC_SAMP_RATIO

—

5,19

0.53,
0.61

PURGE_PRESS_SET

PSIG

7.5
Warnings:
2.5–12.5

SAMP_TEMP_SET

ºC

30
Warnings:
10.1–100

BOX_SET

ºC

30
Warnings:
5–48

BOX2_SET ,

ºC

OVEN_SET 19,23

30
46 19,23
Warnings:
25–35
41–51

BOX2_CYCLE 5,
OVEN_CYCLE

1
0.5

—

19,23

BOX2_DERIV 5,
OVEN_DERIV

1/ºC

19,23

BOX2_INTEG 5,
OVEN_INTEG

19,23

BOX2_PROP 5,
OVEN_PROP

Seconds

19,23

0.1
0.02

19,23

—

0–100

Internal box temperature #2/oven
PID derivative coefficient.

Seconds

0.5–30

Optical bench temperature
control cycle period.

0–100

100V optical bench temperature
PID proportional coefficient.
Proportional band is the
reciprocal of this setting.

0–100

100V optical bench temperature
PID integral coefficient.

19,23

BENCH_CYCLE

15 19,23
BENCH_PROP

1/ºC

5
1.5

BENCH_INTEG

—

19,23

0.5
1.5 19,23

A-16

06864B DCN6314

Teledyne API - T300/T300M and M300E/EM PN 04906H (DCN5840)

Setup Variable
BENCH_DERIV

Numeric
Units
—

Default
Value
2

APPENDIX A-2: Setup Variables For Serial I/O

Value
Range
0–100

100V optical bench temperature
PID derivative coefficient.

0–100

200V optical bench temperature
PID proportional coefficient.
Proportional band is the
reciprocal of this setting.

0–100

200V optical bench temperature
PID integral coefficient.

0–100

200V optical bench temperature
PID derivative coefficient.

0.5–30

Wheel temperature control cycle
period.

0–100

100V wheel temperature PID
proportional coefficient.
Proportional band is the
reciprocal of this setting.

0–100

100V wheel temperature PID
integral coefficient.

0–100

100V wheel temperature PID
derivative coefficient.

0–100

200V wheel temperature PID
proportional coefficient.
Proportional band is the
reciprocal of this setting.

0–100

200V wheel temperature PID
integral coefficient.

0–100

200V wheel temperature PID
derivative coefficient.

0 19,23
BENCH_PROP2

1/ºC

5
0.75 19,23

BENCH_INTEG2

—

0.5
0.75

BENCH_DERIV2

—

19,23

2
0 19,23

WHEEL_CYCLE

Seconds

4
2

Description

4,9,12,18

8 19,23
WHEEL_PROP

1/ºC

1
0.3

WHEEL_INTEG

—

19,23

0.135
0.035 4,9,12,18
0.06 19,23

WHEEL_DERIV

—

2
0 19,23

WHEEL_PROP2

1/ºC

1
0.1

WHEEL_INTEG2

—

19,23

0.135
0.035

4,9,12,18

0.01 19,23
WHEEL_DERIV2

—

2
0

19,23

Seconds

0.5–30

O2 cell temperature control cycle
period.

O2_CELL_PROP 14

—

0–10

O2 cell PID temperature control
proportional coefficient.

O2_CELL_INTEG 14

—

0.1

0–10

O2 cell PID temperature control
integral coefficient.

O2_CELL_DERIV 14

—

0 (disabled)

0–10

O2 cell PID temperature control
derivative coefficient.

BOX_TEMP_GAIN

PPB/DegC

0–100

Gain factor for box temperature
compensation of concentration.

O2_CELL_CYCLE

TPC_ENABLE

—

OFF, ON

ON enables temperature/
pressure compensation; OFF
disables it.

CONC_LIN_ENABLE

—

OFF, ON

ON enables concentration
linearization; OFF disables it.

STAT_REP_PERIOD 17

Seconds

0.5–120

TAI protocol status message
report period.

06864B DCN6314

A-17

APPENDIX A-2: Setup Variables For Serial I/O

Setup Variable
SERIAL_NUMBER

Teledyne API - T300/T300M and M300E/EM PN 04906H (DCN5840)

Numeric
Units
—

Default
Value

—

Description

“00000000 ”

Any character
in the allowed
character set.
Up to 100
characters
long.

Unique serial number for
instrument.

HIGH 0

HIGH,

Front panel display intensity.

DISP_INTENSITY

Value
Range

MED,
LOW,
DIM
I2C_RESET_ENABLE

—

OFF, ON

ON enables automatic reset of
the I2C bus in the event of
communication failures; OFF
disables automatic reset.

CLOCK_FORMAT

—

“TIME=%H:%
M:%S”

Any character
in the allowed
character set.
Up to 100
characters
long.

Time-of-day clock format flags.
Enclose value in double quotes
(") when setting from the RS-232
interface.
“%a” = Abbreviated weekday
name.
“%b” = Abbreviated month name.
“%d” = Day of month as decimal
number (01 – 31).
“%H” = Hour in 24-hour format
(00 – 23).
“%I” = Hour in 12-hour format (01
– 12).
“%j” = Day of year as decimal
number (001 – 366).
“%m” = Month as decimal
number (01 – 12).
“%M” = Minute as decimal
number (00 – 59).
“%p” = A.M./P.M. indicator for
12-hour clock.
“%S” = Second as decimal
number (00 – 59).
“%w” = Weekday as decimal
number (0 – 6; Sunday is 0).
“%y” = Year without century, as
decimal number (00 – 99).
“%Y” = Year with century, as
decimal number.
“%%” = Percent sign.

ALARM_TRIGGER
REF_SDEV_LIMIT

A-18

3,4

Cycles

1–100

Concentration alarm trigger
sensitivity adjustment.

0.1–500

Reference detector standard
deviation must be below this limit
to switch out of startup mode.

06864B DCN6314

Teledyne API - T300/T300M and M300E/EM PN 04906H (DCN5840)

Setup Variable
REF_SOURCE_LIMIT

Numeric
Units
mV

Default
Value
3000 (not
used)

APPENDIX A-2: Setup Variables For Serial I/O

Value
Range

Description

1–5000

Reference source warning limits.
Set point is not used.

0–65535

Factory option flags. Add values
to combine flags.

Warnings:
1100–4800,
25–4800 3, 4, 15
FACTORY_OPT

BitFlag

512,
768 5

1 = enable dilution factor
2 = zero/span valves installed
4 = enable conc. alarms
8 = enable linearity adjustment
factor
16 = display units in
concentration field
32 = enable software-controlled
maintenance mode
64 3, 5 = span valve installed
128 = enable switch-controlled
maintenance mode
256 = compute only offset during
zero calibration
512 = 220 V A/C power
1024 = non-zero offset
calibration (linearity adjustment
must also be enabled)
2048 = enable Internet option

4096 = use “old” style numeric
data entry menus when editing
conc. table
8192 = locate high range and
zero cal. status outputs on relays

06864B DCN6314

A-19

APPENDIX A-2: Setup Variables For Serial I/O

Setup Variable

Numeric
Units

Teledyne API - T300/T300M and M300E/EM PN 04906H (DCN5840)

Default
Value

Value
Range

Enclose value in double quotes (") when setting from the RS-232 interface

Multi-range modes

Hessen protocol

T300H, M300EH

T360, M360E

T300U, M300EU

Fixed range special

iChip option (E-Series)

T300M, M300EM

GFC7000E

CO2 option

Must power-cycle instrument for these options to take effect

T360U, M360EU

Riken Keiki special

O2 option

T320, M320E

CO2 PPM sensor

TAI protocol

T360M, M360EM

T300U2, M300EU2

T320U, M320EU

Source drift compensation option

GFC7002EU

T320U2, M320EU2

N2O compensation option

A-20

Description

06864B DCN6314

Teledyne API - T300/T300M and M300E/EM PN 04906H (DCN5840)

APPENDIX A-3: Warnings and Test Functions

APPENDIX A-3: Warnings and Test Functions
Table A-2: T300/T300M and M300E/EM Warning Messages, Revision L.8

Name 1

Message Text

Description

Warnings
WSYSRES

SYSTEM RESET

Instrument was power-cycled or the CPU
was reset.

WDATAINIT

DATA INITIALIZED

Data storage was erased.

WCONFIGINIT

CONFIG INITIALIZED

Configuration storage was reset to factory
configuration or erased.

WCONCALARM1

CONC ALARM 1 WARN

Concentration limit 1 exceeded.

WCONCALARM2

CONC ALARM 2 WARN

Concentration limit 2 exceeded.

WSOURCE

SOURCE WARNING

Reference reading minus dark offset
outside of warning limits specified by
REF_SOURCE_LIMIT variable.

4, 5

AZERO WARN 1.001

Auto-reference ratio below limit specified
by ZERO_LIMIT variable.

WBENCHTEMP

BENCH TEMP WARNING

Bench temperature outside of warning
limits specified by BENCH_SET variable.

WWHEELTEMP

WHEEL TEMP WARNING

Wheel temperature outside of warning
limits specified by WHEEL_SET variable.

WO2CELLTEMP 10

O2 CELL TEMP WARN

O2 sensor cell temperature outside of
warning limits specified by O2_CELL_SET
variable.

WSAMPFLOW 6

SAMPLE FLOW WARN

Sample flow outside of warning limits
specified by SAMP_FLOW_SET variable.

WSAMPPRESS

SAMPLE PRESS WARN

Sample pressure outside of warning limits
specified by SAMP_PRESS_SET
variable.

WSAMPTEMP

SAMPLE TEMP WARN

Sample temperature outside of warning
limits specified by SAMP_TEMP_SET
variable.

WPURGEPRESS 9

PURGE PRESS WARN

Purge pressure outside of warning limits
specified by PURGE_PRESS_SET
variable.

WBOXTEMP

BOX TEMP WARNING

Internal box temperature outside of
warning limits specified by BOX_SET
variable.

WBOXTEMP2 4

BOX TEMP2 WARNING

Internal box temperature #2 outside of
warning limits specified by BOX2_SET
variable.

WOVENTEMP 11

OVEN TEMP WARNING

Oven temperature outside of warning
limits specified by OVEN_SET variable.

WPHOTOTEMP

PHOTO TEMP WARNING

Photometer temperature outside of
warning limits specified by
PHOTO_TEMP_SET variable.

WDYNZERO

CANNOT DYN ZERO

Contact closure zero calibration failed
while DYN_ZERO was set to ON.

WDYNSPAN

CANNOT DYN SPAN

Contact closure span calibration failed
while DYN_SPAN was set to ON.

WREARBOARD

REAR BOARD NOT DET

Rear board was not detected during
power up.

WAUTOZERO

06864B DCN6314

A-21

APPENDIX A-3: Warnings and Test Functions

Name 1

Teledyne API - T300/T300M and M300E/EM PN 04906H (DCN5840)

Message Text

Description

WRELAYBOARD

RELAY BOARD WARN

Firmware is unable to communicate with
the relay board.

WFRONTPANEL12

FRONT PANEL WARN

Firmware is unable to communicate with
the front panel.

WANALOGCAL

ANALOG CAL WARNING

The A/D or at least one D/A channel has
not been calibrated.

The name is used to request a message via the RS-232 interface, as in “T BOXTEMP”

Engineering software

Current instrument units

T300U, M300EU

T300H, M300EH

Except T360U, M360EU (APR version)

T360, M360E

Sample pressure or differential pressure flow measurement option

GFC7000E

O2 option

T300U2, T320U2, M300EU2, M320EU2

Applies to E-Series only

A-22

06864B DCN6314

Teledyne API - T300/T300M and M300E/EM PN 04906H (DCN5840)

Table A-3:
TEST FUNCTION NAME
RANGE

APPENDIX A-3: Warnings and Test Functions

T300/T300M and M300E/EM Test Functions, Revision L.8
MESSAGE TEXT
RANGE=50.0 PPM

DESCRIPTION
D/A range in single or auto-range modes.

CO RANGE=50.0 PPM 3, 7
RANGE1=50.0 PPM 3

RANGE1

CO RANGE1=50.0 PPM

D/A #1 range in dual range mode.
3, 7

RANGE2=50.0 PPM 3

RANGE2

CO RANGE2=50.0 PPM

D/A #2 range in dual range mode.
3, 7

CO2RANGE

CO2 RANGE=20 % 7

CO2 range.

O2RANGE

O2 RANGE=100 % 10

O2 range.

STABILITY

STABIL=0.0 PPM 3

Concentration stability (standard deviation
based on setting of STABIL_FREQ and
STABIL_SAMPLES).

CO STB=0.0 PPM

3, 7, 10

CO2 STB=0.0 % 7
O2 STB=0.0 % 10
RESPONSE 2

RSP=0.20(0.00) SEC

Instrument response. Length of each
signal processing loop. Time in
parenthesis is standard deviation.

COMEAS

CO MEAS=4125.0 MV

Detector measure reading.

COREF

CO REF=3750.0 MV

Detector reference reading.

MRRATIO

MR RATIO=1.100

Measure/reference ratio.

AZERO RATIO=1.234

Measure/reference ratio during autoreference.

PRES=29.9 IN-HG-A

Sample pressure.

PURGE=7.5 PSIG

Purge pressure

VAC=6.8 IN-HG-A

Vacuum pressure.

SAMP FL=751 CC/M

Sample flow rate.

SAMPTEMP

SAMPLE TEMP=26.8 C

Sample temperature.

BENCHTEMP

BENCH TEMP=48.1 C

Bench temperature.

WHEEL TEMP=68.1 C

Wheel temperature.

O2 CELL TEMP=50.2 C

O2 sensor cell temperature.

BOXTEMP

BOX TEMP=26.8 C

Internal box temperature.

BOXTEMP2 4

BOX TEMP2=29.6 C

Internal box temperature #2.

OVEN TEMP=30.1 C

Oven temperature

PHT DRIVE=2500.0 MV

Photometer temperature.

SLOPE=1.000

CO slope for current range, computed
during zero/span calibration.

AUTOZERO

4, 5

SAMPPRESS
PURGEPRESS
VACUUM

8
6

SAMPFLOW

WHEELTEMP
O2CELLTEMP

OVENTEMP

PHOTOTEMP
COSLOPE

CO SLOPE=1.000 7
COSLOPE1

CO SLOPE1=1.000
COSLOPE2

CO slope for range #2 in dual range
mode, computed during zero/span
calibration.

OFFSET1=0.000
CO OFFSET1=0.000

06864B DCN6314

CO offset for current range, computed
during zero/span calibration.

OFFSET=0.000
CO OFFSET=0.000

COOFFSET1

CO slope for range #1 in dual range
mode, computed during zero/span
calibration.

SLOPE2=1.000
CO SLOPE2=1.000

COOFFSET

SLOPE1=1.000

CO offset for range #1 in dual range
mode, computed during zero/span
calibration.

A-23

APPENDIX A-3: Warnings and Test Functions
TEST FUNCTION NAME
COOFFSET2

Teledyne API - T300/T300M and M300E/EM PN 04906H (DCN5840)
MESSAGE TEXT

OFFSET2=0.000
CO OFFSET2=0.000 7

DESCRIPTION
CO offset for range #2 in dual range
mode, computed during zero/span
calibration.

CO2SLOPE 7

CO2 SLOPE=1.000

CO2 slope, computed during zero/span
calibration.

CO2OFFSET 7

CO2 OFFSET=0.000

CO2 offset, computed during zero/span
calibration.

O2SLOPE 10

O2 SLOPE=0.980

O2 slope, computed during zero/span
calibration.

O2OFFSET 10

O2 OFFSET=1.79 %

O2 offset, computed during zero/span
calibration.

CO=17.7 PPM 3

CO concentration for current range.

CO2=15.0 %

CO2 concentration.

CO2
O2

O2=0.00 %

O2 concentration.

TESTCHAN

TEST=1751.4 MV

Value output to TEST_OUTPUT analog
output, selected with TEST_CHAN_ID
variable.

CLOCKTIME
RANGE(s)
CO2RANGE
O2RANGE
STABILITY

TIME=09:52:20
User Configurable
CO2 RANGE=20 % 1
O2 RANGE=100 % 2
STABIL=0.0 PPM
CO STB=0.0 PPM 1, 2
1
CO2 STB=0.0 %
2
O2 STB=0.0 %
CO MEAS=4125.0 MV
CO REF=3750.0 MV
MR RATIO=1.100
PRES=29.9 IN-HG-A
SAMP FL=751 CC/M
SAMPLE TEMP=26.8 C
BENCH TEMP=48.1 C
WHEEL TEMP=68.1 C
O2 CELL TEMP=50.2 C
BOX TEMP=26.8 C
PHT DRIVE=2500.0 MV
SLOPE=1.000
1
CO SLOPE=1.000
SLOPE1=1.000
CO SLOPE1=1.000 1

Current instrument time of day clock.

COMEAS
COREF
MRRATIO
SAMPPRESS
SAMPFLOW
SAMPTEMP
BENCHTEMP
WHEELTEMP
O2CELLTEMP 2
BOXTEMP
PHOTOTEMP
COSLOPE
COSLOPE1
COSLOPE2

SLOPE2=1.000
CO SLOPE2=1.000 1

COOFFSET

OFFSET=0.000
1
CO OFFSET=0.000
OFFSET1=0.000
CO OFFSET1=0.000 1

COOFFSET1
COOFFSET2

OFFSET2=0.000
CO OFFSET2=0.000 1

CO2SLOPE 1

CO2 SLOPE=1.000

CO2OFFSET 1

CO2 OFFSET=0.000

A-24

CO2 range.
O2 range.
Concentration stability (standard deviation
based on setting of STABIL_FREQ and
STABIL_SAMPLES).
Detector measure reading.
Detector reference reading.
Measure/reference ratio.
Sample pressure.
Sample flow rate.
Sample temperature.
Bench temperature.
Wheel temperature.
O2 sensor cell temperature.
Internal chassis temperature.
Photometer temperature.
CO slope for current range, computed
during zero/span calibration.
CO slope for range #1 in dual range
mode, computed during zero/span
calibration.
CO slope for range #2 in dual range
mode, computed during zero/span
calibration.
CO offset for current range, computed
during zero/span calibration.
CO offset for range #1 in dual range
mode, computed during zero/span
calibration.
CO offset for range #2 in dual range
mode, computed during zero/span
calibration.
CO2 slope, computed during zero/span
calibration.
CO2 offset, computed during zero/span
calibration.

06864B DCN6314

Teledyne API - T300/T300M and M300E/EM PN 04906H (DCN5840)
TEST FUNCTION NAME
O2SLOPE 2

MESSAGE TEXT

APPENDIX A-3: Warnings and Test Functions
DESCRIPTION

O2 slope, computed during zero/span
calibration.
O2OFFSET 2
O2 OFFSET=1.79 %
O2 offset, computed during zero/span
calibration.
CO
CO=17.7 PPM
CO concentration for current range.
CO2 1
CO2=15.0 %
CO2 concentration.
O2 2
O2=0.00 WT%
O2 concentration.
TESTCHAN
TEST=1751.4 MV
Value output to TEST_OUTPUT analog
output, selected with TEST_CHAN_ID
variable.
CLOCKTIME
TIME=09:52:20
Current instrument time of day clock.
1
The name is used to request a message via the RS-232 interface, as in “T BOXTEMP”
2

O2 SLOPE=0.980

Engineering software

Current instrument units

T300U, M300EU

T300H, M300EH

Except T360U, M360EU (APR version)

T360, M360E

Sample pressure or differential pressure flow measurement option

GFC7000E

O2 option

T300U2, T320U2, M300EU2, M320EU2

06864B DCN6314

A-25

APPENDIX A-4: Signal I/O Definitions

Teledyne API - T300/T300M and M300E/EM PN 04906H (DCN5840)

APPENDIX A-4: Signal I/O Definitions

Table A-4:

Signal I/O Definitions for T300/T300M and M300E/EM Series Analyzers, Revision L.8

Signal Name

Bit or Channel
Number

Description

Internal inputs, U7, J108, pins 9–16 = bits 0–7, default I/O address 322 hex
SYNC_OK

1 = sync. OK
0 = sync. error

1–7

Spare

Internal outputs, U8, J108, pins 1–8 = bits 0–7, default I/O address 322 hex
ELEC_TEST

1 = electrical test on
0 = off

DARK_CAL

1 = dark calibration on
0 = off

2–5
I2C_RESET

Spare
1 = reset I2C peripherals
0 = normal

I2C_DRV_RST

0 = hardware reset 8584 chip
1 = normal

Control inputs, U11, J1004, pins 1–6 = bits 0–5, default I/O address 321 hex
EXT_ZERO_CAL

0 = go into zero calibration
1 = exit zero calibration

EXT_SPAN_CAL

0 = go into span calibration
1 = exit span calibration

REMOTE_RANGE_HI

0 = select high range during contact closure calibration
1 = select low range

3–5

Spare

6–7

Always 1

Control inputs, U14, J1006, pins 1–6 = bits 0–5, default I/O address 325 hex
0–5

Spare

6–7

Always 1

Control outputs, U17, J1008, pins 1–8 = bits 0–7, default I/O address 321 hex
0–7

Spare

Control outputs, U21, J1008, pins 9–12 = bits 0–3, default I/O address 325 hex
0–3

A-26

Spare

06864B DCN6314

Teledyne API - T300/T300M and M300E/EM PN 04906H (DCN5840)

Signal Name

APPENDIX A-4: Signal I/O Definitions

Bit or Channel
Number

Description

Alarm outputs, U21, J1009, pins 1–12 = bits 4–7, default I/O address 325 hex
ST_SYSTEM_OK2

1 = system OK
0 = any alarm condition or in diagnostics mode

ST_CONC_ALARM_1

1 = conc. limit 1 exceeded
0 = conc. OK

ST_HIGH_RANGE 10 + 13

ST_CONC_ALARM_2 8

1 = high auto-range in use
0 = low auto-range
1 = conc. limit 2 exceeded
0 = conc. OK

ST_ZERO_CAL

10 + 13

1 = in zero calibration
0 = not in zero

ST_HIGH_RANGE2 16

1 = high auto-range in use (mirrors ST_HIGH_RANGE
status output)
0 = low auto-range

A status outputs, U24, J1017, pins 1–8 = bits 0–7, default I/O address 323 hex
ST_SYSTEM_OK

0 = system OK
1 = any alarm condition

ST_CONC_VALID

0 = conc. valid
1 = hold off or other conditions

ST_HIGH_RANGE

0 = high auto-range in use
1 = low auto-range

ST_ZERO_CAL

ST_SPAN_CAL

0 = in zero calibration
1 = not in zero
0 = in span calibration
1 = not in span

ST_DIAG_MODE

0 = in diagnostic mode
1 = not in diagnostic mode

0 = in auto-reference mode
1 = not in auto-reference mode

Spare

ST_AUTO_REF

B status outputs, U27, J1018, pins 1–8 = bits 0–7, default I/O address 324 hex
ST_AUTO_REF

ST_CO2_CAL

0 = in auto-reference mode
1 = not in auto-reference mode

1–5

Spare

0 = in CO2 calibration
1 = not in CO2 calibration

ST_O2_CAL 5

0 = in O2 calibration
1 = not in O2 calibration

06864B DCN6314

A-27

APPENDIX A-4: Signal I/O Definitions

Teledyne API - T300/T300M and M300E/EM PN 04906H (DCN5840)

Signal Name

Bit or Channel
Number

Description

Front panel I2C keyboard, default I2C address 4E hex
MAINT_MODE

5 (input)

0 = maintenance mode
1 = normal mode

LANG2_SELECT

6 (input)

0 = select second language
1 = select first language (English)

SAMPLE_LED

8 (output)

0 = sample LED on

CAL_LED

9 (output)

0 = cal. LED on

1 = off
1 = off
FAULT_LED

10 (output)

0 = fault LED on
1 = off

AUDIBLE_BEEPER

14 (output)

0 = beeper on (for diagnostic testing only)
1 = off

Relay board digital output (PCF8574), default I2C address 44 hex
RELAY_WATCHDOG

Alternate between 0 and 1 at least every 5 seconds to keep
relay board active

WHEEL_HTR

0 = wheel heater on
1 = off

BENCH_HTR

O2_CELL_HEATER 5

0 = optical bench heater on
1 = off
0 = O2 sensor cell heater on
1 = off

BOX2_HEATER ,

0 = internal box temperature #2/oven heater on

OVEN_HEATER 15

1 = off

CAL_VALVE

SPAN_VALVE

0 = let cal. gas in
1 = let sample gas in
0 = let span gas in
1 = let zero gas in

ZERO_SCRUB_VALVE

2,3

0 = open zero scrubber valve
1 = close

SHUTOFF_VALVE

6
7

IR_SOURCE_ON

0 = energize shutoff valve
3,15

7
n/a 3,15

A-28

1 = de-energize
0 = IR source on
1 = off

06864B DCN6314

Teledyne API - T300/T300M and M300E/EM PN 04906H (DCN5840)

Signal Name

APPENDIX A-4: Signal I/O Definitions

Bit or Channel
Number

Description

Rear board primary MUX analog inputs
SAMPLE_PRESSURE

Sample pressure

Vacuum pressure

Purge pressure

CO_MEASURE

Detector measure reading

CO_REFERENCE

Detector reference reading

Temperature MUX

SAMPLE_FLOW

Sample flow

PHOTO_TEMP

Photometer detector temperature

TEST_INPUT_7

Diagnostic test input

TEST_INPUT_8

Diagnostic test input

REF_4096_MV

4.096V reference from MAX6241

O2 concentration sensor

VACUUM_PRESSURE
PURGE_PRESSURE

O2_SENSOR

CO2_SENSOR 7

REF_GND

9, 10

Spare

CO2 concentration sensor

Spare

DAC loopback MUX

Ground reference

Rear board temperature MUX analog inputs
BOX_TEMP

Internal box temperature

SAMPLE_TEMP

Sample temperature

BENCH_TEMP

Optical bench temperature

WHEEL_TEMP

Wheel temperature

TEMP_INPUT_4

Diagnostic temperature input

O2 sensor cell temperature

Internal box temperature #2 / oven temperature

Spare

TEMP_INPUT_5
O2_CELL_TEMP
BOX2_TEMP
OVEN_TEMP

3
19,23

Rear board DAC MUX analog inputs
DAC_CHAN_1

DAC channel 0 loopback

DAC_CHAN_2

DAC channel 1 loopback

DAC_CHAN_3

DAC channel 2 loopback

DAC_CHAN_4

DAC channel 3 loopback

06864B DCN6314

A-29

APPENDIX A-4: Signal I/O Definitions

Teledyne API - T300/T300M and M300E/EM PN 04906H (DCN5840)

Signal Name

Bit or Channel
Number

Description

Rear board analog outputs
CONC_OUT_1,

DATA_OUT_1
CONC_OUT_2,

Data output #1
1

DATA_OUT_2
CONC_OUT_3, 7, 5

DATA_OUT_4
1

Hessen protocol

T300H, M300EH

T300U, M300EU

T320, M320E

O2 option

Concentration output #2 (CO, range #2),
Data output #2

Concentration output #3 (CO2 or O2),
Data output #3

DATA_OUT_3
TEST_OUTPUT,

Concentration output #1 (CO, range #1),

Test measurement output,
Data output #4

Sample pressure or differential pressure flow measurement option

CO2 option

Concentration alarms option

T360, M360E

GFC7000E

T300M, M300EM

Air Products special #1

Air Products special #2

T300U2, M300EU2

High auto range relay option

A-30

06864B DCN6314

Teledyne API - T300/T300M and M300E/EM PN 04906H (DCN5840)

APPENDIX A-5: DAS Triggers and Parameters

APPENDIX A-5: DAS Triggers and Parameters
Table A-5: T300/T300M and M300E/EM DAS Trigger Events, Revision L.8

Name

Description

ATIMER

Automatic timer expired

EXITZR

Exit zero calibration mode

EXITSP

Exit span calibration mode

EXITMP

Exit multi-point calibration mode

EXITC2 5

Exit CO2 calibration mode

SLPCHG

Slope and offset recalculated

CO2SLC

O2SLPC

CO2 slope and offset recalculated
O2 slope and offset recalculated

EXITDG

Exit diagnostic mode

SOURCW

Source warning

AZEROW

1, 2

Auto-zero warning

CONCW1

1, 3, 4

Concentration limit 1 exceeded

CONCW2

1, 3, 4

Concentration limit 2 exceeded

SYNCW

Sync warning

BNTMPW

Bench temperature warning

WTEMPW

Wheel temperature warning
7

O2TMPW
STEMPW

O2 sensor cell temperature warning
Sample temperature warning

SFLOWW

SPRESW

Sample flow warning
Sample pressure warning

PPRESW
BTEMPW

Purge pressure warning
Internal box temperature warning

BTMP2W ,
OVTMPW

Internal box temperature #2/oven warning

PTEMPW

Photometer detector temperature warning

T300H, M300EH

T300U, M300EU

T320, M320E

GFC7000E

T360, M360E

Except M360EU (APR version)

O2 option

T300U2, T320U2, M300EU2, M320EU2

06864B DCN6314

A-31

APPENDIX A-5: DAS Triggers and Parameters

Table A-6:

Teledyne API - T300/T300M and M300E/EM PN 04906H (DCN5840)

T300/T300M and M300E/EM DAS Parameters, Revision L.8

Name

Description

Units

DETMES

Detector measure reading

DETREF

Detector reference reading

RATIO

M/R ratio.

none

SLOPE1

Slope for range #1

none

SLOPE2

Slope for range #2

none

OFSET1

Offset for range #1

none

OFSET2

Offset for range #2

none

CO2SLP 5

CO2 slope

none

CO2OFS

CO2 offset

O2SLPE

O2 slope

none

O2OFST

O2 offset

AZERO 1,2

Auto-zero reading

M/R

ZSCNC1

Concentration for range #1 during zero/span calibration, just before
computing new slope and offset

PPM

ZSCNC2

Concentration for range #2 during zero/span calibration, just before
computing new slope and offset

PPM

CO2ZSC 5

CO2 concentration during zero/span calibration, just before
computing new slope and offset

O2ZSCN 8

O2 concentration during zero/span calibration, just before computing
new slope and offset

CONC1

Concentration for range #1

PPM

CONC2

Concentration for range #2

PPM

CO2CNC

CO2 concentration

O2CONC

O2 concentration

STABIL

Concentration stability

PPM

BNTEMP

Bench temperature

C

BNCDTY

Bench temperature control duty cycle

Fraction
(0.0 = off,
1.0 = on full)

WTEMP

Wheel temperature

C

WHLDTY

Wheel temperature control duty cycle

Fraction
(0.0 = off,
1.0 = on full)

O2TEMP 8

O2 sensor cell temperature

C

SMPTMP

Sample temperature

C

Sample flow

cc/m

SMPFLW

SMPPRS

Sample pressure

"Hg

VACUUM

1, 3, 6

Vacuum pressure

"Hg

PRGPRS

Purge pressure

PSIG

BOXTMP

Internal box temperature

C

BX2TMP 2,

Internal box temperature #2/oven

C

OVNTMP 9

A-32

06864B DCN6314

Teledyne API - T300/T300M and M300E/EM PN 04906H (DCN5840)

Name
BX2DTY 2,

APPENDIX A-5: DAS Triggers and Parameters

Description
Internal box temperature #2/oven control duty cycle

OVNDTY 9

Units
Fraction
(0.0 = off,
1.0 = on full)

PHTDRV

Photometer detector temperature drive

TEST7

Diagnostic test input (TEST_INPUT_7)

TEST8

Diagnostic test input (TEST_INPUT_8)

TEMP4

Diagnostic temperature input (TEMP_INPUT_4)

C

TEMP5

Diagnostic temperature input (TEMP_INPUT_5)

C

REFGND

Ground reference (REF_GND)

RF4096

4096 mV reference (REF_4096_MV)

XIN1

Channel 1 Analog In
4

Channel 1 Analog In Slope

XIN1OFST 4

Channel 1 Analog In Offset

XIN1SLPE
XIN2

Channel 2 Analog In

XIN2SLPE

Channel 2 Analog In Slope

XIN2OFST

Channel 2 Analog In Offset

XIN3 4

Channel 3 Analog In

XIN3SLPE

Channel 3 Analog In Slope

XIN3OFST

Channel 3 Analog In Offset

XIN4

Channel 4 Analog In
4

Channel 4 Analog In Slope

XIN4OFST 4

Channel 4 Analog In Offset

XIN4SLPE
XIN5

Channel 5 Analog In

XIN5SLPE

Channel 5 Analog In Slope

XIN5OFST

Channel 5 Analog In Offset

XIN6 4

Channel 6 Analog In

XIN6SLPE

Channel 6 Analog In Slope

XIN6OFST

Channel 6 Analog In Offset

XIN7

Channel 7 Analog In
4

Channel 7 Analog In Slope

XIN7OFST 4

Channel 7 Analog In Offset

XIN7SLPE
XIN8

Channel 8 Analog In

XIN8SLPE

Channel 8 Analog In Slope

XIN8OFST

Channel 8 Analog In Offset

T300H, M300EH

T300U, M300EU

T320, M320E

GFC7000E

T360, M360E

Except T360U, M360EU (APR version)

The units, including the concentration units, are always fixed, regardless of the current instrument units

O2 option

T300U2, T320U2, M300EU2, M320EU2

06864B DCN6314

A-33

APPENDIX A-6: Terminal Command Designators

Teledyne API - T300/T300M and M300E/EM PN 04906H (DCN5840)

APPENDIX A-6: Terminal Command Designators
Table A-7: Terminal Command Designators
COMMAND

ADDITIONAL COMMAND SYNTAX

? [ID]
LOGON [ID]

Display help screen and commands list
password

LOGOFF [ID]

T [ID]

W [ID]

C [ID]

D [ID]

V [ID]

DESCRIPTION
Establish connection to instrument
Terminate connection to instrument

SET ALL|name|hexmask

Display test(s)

LIST [ALL|name|hexmask] [NAMES|HEX]

Print test(s) to screen

name

Print single test

CLEAR ALL|name|hexmask

Disable test(s)

SET ALL|name|hexmask

Display warning(s)

LIST [ALL|name|hexmask] [NAMES|HEX]

Print warning(s)

name

Clear single warning

CLEAR ALL|name|hexmask

Clear warning(s)

ZERO|LOWSPAN|SPAN [1|2]

Enter calibration mode

ASEQ number

Execute automatic sequence

COMPUTE ZERO|SPAN

Compute new slope/offset

EXIT

Exit calibration mode

ABORT

Abort calibration sequence

LIST

Print all I/O signals

name[=value]

Examine or set I/O signal

LIST NAMES

Print names of all diagnostic tests

ENTER name

Execute diagnostic test

EXIT

Exit diagnostic test

RESET [DATA] [CONFIG] [exitcode]

Reset instrument

PRINT ["name"] [SCRIPT]

Print DAS configuration

RECORDS ["name"]

Print number of DAS records

REPORT ["name"] [RECORDS=number] [FROM=][TO=][VERBOSE|COMPACT|HEX]
(Print DAS records)(date format: MM/DD/YYYY(or YY)
[HH:MM:SS]

Print DAS records

CANCEL

Halt printing DAS records

LIST

Print setup variables

name[=value [warn_low [warn_high]]]

Modify variable

name="value"

Modify enumerated variable

CONFIG

Print instrument configuration

MAINT ON|OFF

Enter/exit maintenance mode

MODE

Print current instrument mode

DASBEGIN [] DASEND

Upload DAS configuration

CHANNELBEGIN propertylist CHANNELEND

Upload single DAS channel

CHANNELDELETE ["name"]

Delete DAS channels

The command syntax follows the command type, separated by a space character. Strings in [brackets] are optional
designators. The following key assignments also apply.

A-34

06864B DCN6314

Teledyne API - T300/T300M and M300E/EM PN 04906H (DCN5840)

Table A-8:

APPENDIX A-7: MODBUS Register Map

Terminal Key Assignments

TERMINAL KEY ASSIGNMENTS
ESC

Abort line

CR (ENTER)

Execute command

Ctrl-C

Switch to computer mode
COMPUTER MODE KEY ASSIGNMENTS

LF (line feed)

Execute command

Ctrl-T

Switch to terminal mode

APPENDIX A-7: MODBUS Register Map
Table A-9: MODBUS Register Map

MODBUS
Register Address
(dec., 0-based)

Description

Units

MODBUS Floating Point Input Registers
(32-bit IEEE 754 format; read in high-word, low-word order; read-only)
0

Detector measure reading

Detector reference reading

M/R ratio.

none

Slope for range #1

none

Slope for range #2

none

Offset for range #1

none

Offset for range #2

none

Concentration for range #1 during zero/span calibration, just before
computing new slope and offset

PPM

Concentration for range #2 during zero/span calibration, just before
computing new slope and offset

PPM

Concentration for range #1

PPM

Concentration for range #2

PPM

Concentration stability

PPM

Bench temperature

C

Bench temperature control duty cycle

Fraction
(0.0 = off,
1.0 = on full)

Wheel temperature

Wheel temperature control duty cycle

C
Fraction
(0.0 = off,
1.0 = on full)

Sample temperature

C

Sample pressure

“Hg

Internal box temperature

C

Photometer detector temperature drive

06864B DCN6314

A-35

APPENDIX A-7: MODBUS Register Map

MODBUS
Register Address
(dec., 0-based)

Teledyne API - T300/T300M and M300E/EM PN 04906H (DCN5840)

Description

Units

Diagnostic test input (TEST_INPUT_7)

Diagnostic test input (TEST_INPUT_8)

Diagnostic temperature input (TEMP_INPUT_4)

C

Diagnostic temperature input (TEMP_INPUT_5)

C

Ground reference (REF_GND)

4096 mV reference (REF_4096_MV)

Purge pressure

PSIG

Sample flow

cc/m

Vacuum pressure

"Hg

58 1

Internal box temperature #2/oven

C

60 1

Internal box temperature #2/oven control duty cycle

Fraction
(0.0 = off,
1.0 = on full)

Auto-zero reading

M/R

100

O2 concentration

102

O2 concentration during zero/span calibration, just before computing
new slope and offset

104 2

O2 slope

—

106

O2 offset

108

O2 sensor cell temperature

C

200

CO2 concentration

202 3

CO2 concentration during zero/span calibration, just before
computing new slope and offset

204 3

CO2 slope

—

CO2 offset

206

MODBUS Floating Point Holding Registers
(32-bit IEEE 754 format; read/write in high-word, low-word order; read/write)
0
2

Maps to CO_SPAN1 variable; target conc. for range #1

Conc. units

Maps to CO_SPAN2 variable; target conc. for range #2

Conc. units

100

Maps to O2_TARG_SPAN_CONC variable

200

Maps to CO2_TARG_SPAN_CONC variable

A-36

06864B DCN6314

Teledyne API - T300/T300M and M300E/EM PN 04906H (DCN5840)

MODBUS
Register Address
(dec., 0-based)

Description

APPENDIX A-7: MODBUS Register Map

Units

MODBUS Discrete Input Registers
(single-bit; read-only)
0

Source warning

Box temperature warning

Bench temperature warning

Wheel temperature warning

Sample temperature warning

Sample pressure warning

Photometer detector temperature warning

System reset warning

Rear board communication warning

Relay board communication warning

Front panel communication warning

Analog calibration warning

Dynamic zero warning

Dynamic span warning

Invalid concentration

In zero calibration mode

In span calibration mode

In multi-point calibration mode

System is OK (same meaning as SYSTEM_OK I/O signal)

Purge pressure warning
Sample flow warning

21 1

Internal box temperature #2/oven warning

22 1

Concentration limit 1 exceeded

Concentration limit 2 exceeded

Auto-zero warning

Sync warning

26 1

In Hessen manual mode

100 2

In O2 calibration mode

101

O2 cell temperature warning

102

1,2

O2 concentration limit 1 exceeded

103 1,2

O2 concentration limit 2 exceeded

200

In CO2 calibration mode

201

1,3

CO2 concentration limit 1 exceeded

202

1,3

CO2 concentration limit 2 exceeded

06864B DCN6314

A-37

APPENDIX A-7: MODBUS Register Map

MODBUS
Register Address
(dec., 0-based)

Teledyne API - T300/T300M and M300E/EM PN 04906H (DCN5840)

Description

Units

MODBUS Coil Registers
(single-bit; read/write)
0

Maps to relay output signal 36 (MB_RELAY_36 in signal I/O list)

Maps to relay output signal 37 (MB_RELAY_37 in signal I/O list)

Maps to relay output signal 38 (MB_RELAY_38 in signal I/O list)

Maps to relay output signal 39 (MB_RELAY_39 in signal I/O list)

Triggers zero calibration of range #1 (on enters cal.; off exits cal.)

Triggers span calibration of range #1 (on enters cal.; off exits cal.)

Triggers zero calibration of range #2 (on enters cal.; off exits cal.)

Triggers span calibration of range #2 (on enters cal.; off exits cal.)

Optional

O2 option

CO2 option

Set DYN_ZERO or DYN_SPAN variables to ON to enable calculating new slope or offset. Otherwise a calibration check
is performed.

A-38

06864B DCN6314

APPENDIX B - Spare Parts

Note

Use of replacement parts other than those supplied by T-API may result in non
compliance with European standard EN 61010-1.

Note

Due to the dynamic nature of part numbers, please refer to the Website or call
Customer Service for more recent updates to part numbers.

06864B DCN6314

B-1

This page intentionally left blank.

B-2

06864B DCN6314

T300 Spare Parts List
PN 06849A DCN5809 08/18/2010
1 of 2 page(s)
Part Number
000940600
000940700
000941000
001760400
001761300
001763000
003291500
006110200
009450300
009550500
009560301
009600400
009690000
009690100
009840300
010790000
010800000
016290000
016300600
016910000
019340200
033520000
033560000
036020100
037250000
037860000
039260101
040010000
040030100
040370000
041350000
042410100
042410200
042580000
042680000
042690000
043250100
043250300
043250400
043420000
050320000
052830200
055010000
055100200

06864B DCN6314

Description
ORIFICE, 10 MIL, SPAN GAS FLOW CONTROL
ORIFICE, 5 MIL, FLOW CONTROL, 02 OPTION
ORIFICE, 13 MIL (SAMPLE FLOW)
ASSY, FLOW CTL, 800CC, 1/4" CONN-B
ASSY, SPAN GAS FLOW CONTROL
ASSY, FLOW CTL, 110CC, 1/8" -B
ASSY, THERMISTOR, BENCH/WHEEL
ASSY, MOTOR WHEEL HEATER
ASSY, ZERO/SPAN VALVES, CO
ASSY, SOURCE
FILTER WHEEL, CO
AKIT, EXPENDABLES, CO
AKIT, TFE FLTR ELEM (FL6 100=1) 47mm
AKIT, TFE FLTR ELEM (FL6, 30=1) 47mm
ASSY, SHUT-OFF VALVE W/FLOW CONTROL
INPUT MIRROR, REPLICATED(KB)
OUTPUT MIRROR, REPLICATED(KB)
WINDOW, SAMPLE FILTER, 47MM (KB)
ASSY, SAMPLE FILTER, 47MM, ANG BKT, 5UM
AKIT, EXP KIT, CO CATALYST
ASSY, SAMPLE THERMISTOR, BRASS
MIRROR, OBJECT, 32 PASS, (KB)
MIRROR, FIELD, 32 PASS, (KB)
ASSY, SENSOR, CO, (KB)
ASSY, HEATER, OPTICAL BENCH
ORING, TFE RETAINER, SAMPLE FILTER
DETECTOR, CO, w/BANDPASS FILTER *
ASSY, FAN REAR PANEL
PCA, FLOW/PRESSURE
ASSY, CO SCRUBBER, (KB)
PCA, RELAY BOARD, CO
ASSY, PUMP W/FLOW CONTROL
ASSY, PUMP, INT, SOX/O3/IR *
PCA, KEYBOARD, W/V-DETECT
ASSY, VALVE, FOR SAMPLE/CAL VALVE ASSY
ASSY, VALVE, SHUT-OFF
CONFIGURATION PLUGS, 115V/60Hz
CONFIGURATION PLUGS, 220-240V/50Hz
CONFIGURATION PLUGS, 220-240V/60Hz
ASSY, HEATER/THERMISTOR, O2 OPTION
PCA, PHOTO-INTERRUPTER
ASSY, MOTOR HUB, MR7
ASSY, MTR WHL HEATER w/THERM, 200W
ASSY, OPTION, PUMP, 240V *

B-3

T300 Spare Parts List
PN 06849A DCN5809 08/18/2010
2 of 2 page(s)
Part Number
058021100
062420200
066970000
067240000
067300000
067300100
067300200
067900000
068260100
068640000
068810000
069500000
072150000
CN0000458
CN0000520
FL0000001
FM0000004
HW0000005
HW0000020
HW0000036
HW0000101
HW0000453
KIT000032
KIT000178
KIT000219
OP0000009
OR0000001
OR0000034
OR0000039
OR0000041
OR0000088
OR0000094
PS0000011
PS0000024
PS0000025
PU0000022
RL0000015
SW0000051
SW0000059
WR0000008

B-4

Description
PCA, E-SERIES MOTHERBD, GEN 5-ICOP (ACCEPTS ACROSSER OR ICOP CPU)
PCA, SER INTRFACE, ICOP CPU, E- (OPTION) (USE WITH ICOP CPU 062870000)
PCA, INTRF. LCD TOUCH SCRN, F/P
CPU, PC-104, VSX-6154E, ICOP *
PCA, AUX-I/O BD, ETHERNET, ANALOG & USB
PCA, AUX-I/O BOARD, ETHERNET
PCA, AUX-I/O BOARD, ETHERNET & USB
LCD MODULE, W/TOUCHSCREEN
DOM, w/SOFTWARE, T300 *
MANUAL, T300, OPERATORS
PCA, LVDS TRANSMITTER BOARD
PCA, SERIAL & VIDEO INTERFACE BOARD
ASSY. TOUCHSCREEN CONTROL MODULE
CONNECTOR, REAR PANEL, 12 PIN
CONNECTOR, REAR PANEL, 10 PIN
FILTER, SS
FLOWMETER (KB)
FOOT, CHASSIS
SPRING
TFE TAPE, 1/4" (48 FT/ROLL)
ISOLATOR
SUPPORT, CIRCUIT BD, 3/16" ICOP
REPLACEMENT, CO FILTER WHEEL ASSY
RETROFIT, SYNC DMOD w/DETECTOR
PCA, 4-20MA OUTPUT, E-OPTION
WINDOW, IR SOURCE/BENCH
ORING, FLOW CONTROL
ORING, INPUT & OUTPUT MIRRORS
ORING, IR SOURCE/BENCH
ORING, OBJECT & FIELD MIRRORS
ORING, DETECTOR
ORING, SAMPLE FILTER
PWR SUPPLY, SW, +5V, +/-15V, 40W (KB)
COVER ENCLOSURE KIT,LPX 40/60 (KB)
PWR SUPPLY, SW, 12V, 40W (KB)
REBUILD KIT, FOR PU20 & 04241 (KB)
RELAY, DPDT, (KB)
SWITCH, POWER CIRC BREAK VDE/CE, w/RG(KB
PRESSURE SENSOR, 0-15 PSIA, ALL SEN
POWER CORD, 10A(KB)

06864B DCN6314

T300 Recommended Spare Parts Stocking Levels
(Reference 06563A DCN6306)

Recommended Spare Parts Stocking Level: Standard

Part Number
003290500
006110200
009550400
009550500
009560301
037250100
040010000
040030100
042410200 *
050320000
052830100
055010000
058021100
067240000
KIT000159
KIT000178
KIT000253
KIT000254
RL0000015
067900000
066970000
068810000
072150000

Description
Wheel Thermistor Assembly (885-071600)
Assembly, Motor Wheel Heater, 50W 120V
Source Assembly (with Adapter) < SN 65
Source Assembly > SN 65
Gas Filter Wheel
Bench Band Heater
Assembly, Fan
PCA, PRESS SENSORS (1X), w/FM4, E SERIES
Pump, 115V 50/60 Hz
PCA, Wheel Position Sensor
ASSY, MOTOR HUB, MR7, "A", 115V
ASSY, MTR WHL HEATER w/THERM, 200W
PCA, E-SERIES MOTHERBOARD, GEN 5-I
CPU, PC-104, VSX-6154E, ICOP *(KB)
REPLACEMENT, RELAY BD, M300E
RETROFIT, SYNC DMOD w/DETECTOR, M300E
KIT, SPARE PS37
KIT, SPARE PS38
Relay
LCD MODULE, W/TOUCHSCREEN(KB)
PCA, INTRF. LCD TOUCH SCRN, F/P
PCA, LVDS TRANSMITTER BOARD
TOUCHSCREEN CONTROL MODULE

Units
6-10

2-5

1
1

1
2
1

1
1
1

1
1
2
2

1
1
1
1
1
2

11-20

21-30

2
2
2
2
1
2
2
2
2
2
1
2
1
1
2
2
1
1
2
1
1
1
2

2
2
3
3
1
2
3
3
2
2
2
2
2
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
3

* Recommended Spare Parts Stocking Level: For Pump Assembly, 240V Option Installed
Part Number
055100200

Description

2-5

OPTION, PUMP ASSY, 240V

Units
6-10
1

11-20

21-30

11-20

21-30

11-20

21-30

1
1

2
2

Recommended Spare Parts Stocking Level: For O2 Option Installed

Part Number
OP0000030

Description

2-5

Units
6-10

OXYGEN TRANSDUCER, PARAMAGNETIC

Recommended Spare Parts Stocking Level: For IZS Option Installed

Part Number
042690000
042680000

06864B DCN6314

Description
Valve Assy, 2-Way, On/Off
Valve Assy, 3-Way

2-5

Units
6-10
1
1

B-5

T300M Spare Parts List
(Reference: 074660000, 01/17/2012/ 13:05)

PARTNUMBER
037250100
037860000
039260101
040010000
040030100
040360100
040370000
041350000
042410100
042410200
042680000
042690000
042990100
043250100
043250300
043250400
050320000
052830200
055010000
055100200
058021100
066970000
067240000
067300000
067300100
067300200
067900000
068640000
068810000
069500000
072150000
074650100
CN0000073
036100000
036090000
036080000
036070000
026070000
026060000
019340200
016300600
016290000
010800000
010790000
009840300
009690100
009690000
009600400
009560301

B-6

DESCRIPTION
ASSY, STRIP HEATER W/TC
ORING, TEFLON, RETAINING RING, 47MM (KB)
DETECTOR, CO, w/BANDPASS FILTER *
ASSY, FAN REAR PANEL (B/F)
PCA, PRESS SENSORS (1X), w/FM4
AKIT, SPARE PARTS, M300E/M
ASSY, CO SCRUBBER
PCA, RELAY BOARD, CO(KB)
ASSY, PUMP, INT, (CO) W/ 800CC FLOW
ASSY, PUMP, INT, SOX/O3/IR *
ASSY, VALVE (SS)
ASSY, VALVE , 2-WAY, 12V
ASSY, SENSOR, M300EM
ASSY, PWR CONF, 100-120V/60HZ, IR
OPTION, PWR CONF, 220-240V/50HZ, IR
OPTION, PWR CONF, 220-240V/60HZ, IR
PCA, OPTO-INTERRUPTER
ASSY, MOTOR HUB, MR7
ASSY, MTR WHL HEATER w/THERM, 200W
ASSY, OPTION, PUMP, 240V *
PCA, MOTHERBD, GEN 5-ICOP
PCA, INTRF. LCD TOUCH SCRN, F/P
CPU, PC-104, VSX-6154E, ICOP *(KB)
PCA, AUX-I/O BD, ETHERNET, ANALOG & USB
PCA, AUX-I/O BOARD, ETHERNET
PCA, AUX-I/O BOARD, ETHERNET & USB
LCD MODULE, W/TOUCHSCREEN(KB)
MANUAL, T300/T300M, OPERATORS
PCA, LVDS TRANSMITTER BOARD
PCA, SERIAL & VIDEO INTERFACE BOARD
ASSY. TOUCHSCREEN CONTROL MODULE
DOM, w/SOFTWARE, STD, T300M
POWER ENTRY, 120/60 (KB)
OPTION, IZS, CO (KB)
OPTION, Z/S, CO (KB)
OPTION, Z/S & SO VALVE, CO (KB)
OPTION, IZS & SO VALVE, CO (KB)
MIRROR, FIELD, 8 PASS
MIRROR, OBJECTIVE, 8 PASS
ASSY, SAMPLE THERMISTOR, BRASS
ASSY, SAMPLE FILTER, 47MM, ANG BKT, 5UM
WINDOW, SAMPLE FILTER, 47MM (KB)
OUTPUT MIRROR, REPLICATED(KB)
INPUT MIRROR, REPLICATED(KB)
ASSY, SHUT-OFF VALVE, (KB)
AKIT, TFE FLTR ELEM (FL6, 30=1) 47mm
AKIT, TFE FLTR ELEM (FL6 100=1) 47mm
AKIT, EXPENDABLES, CO
GF WHEEL, CO, (KB) *

06864B DCN6314

T300M Spare Parts List
(Reference: 074660000, 01/17/2012/ 13:05)
PARTNUMBER
009550500
009450300
009390000
003291500
001761300
001760400
000941000
000940600
CN0000458
CN0000520
FL0000001
FM0000004
HW0000005
HW0000020
HW0000036
HW0000101
HW0000453
HW0000685
KIT000178
KIT000219
OP0000009
OR0000001
OR0000034
OR0000039
OR0000041
OR0000088
OR0000094
PS0000011
PS0000024
PS0000025
PU0000022
RL0000015
SW0000025
SW0000059
WR0000008

06864B DCN6314

DESCRIPTION
ASSY, SOURCE
ASSY, ZERO/SPAN VALVES, CO
APERTURE (KB)
ASSY, THERMISTOR, BENCH/WHEEL
ASSY, FLOW CTRL, .010, 1/8", SS
ASSY, FLOW CTL, 800CC, 1/4" CONN-B
CD, ORIFICE, .013 BLUE/GREEN
CD, ORIFICE, .010 BROWN
PLUG, 12, MC 1.5/12-ST-3.81 (KB)
PLUG, 10, MC 1.5/10-ST-3.81 (KB)
FILTER, SS (KB)
FLOWMETER (KB)
FOOT
SPRING
TFE TAPE, 1/4" (48 FT/ROLL)
ISOLATOR
SUPPORT, CIRCUIT BD, 3/16" ICOP
LATCH, MAGNETIC, FRONT PANEL
RETROFIT, SYNC DMOD w/DETECTOR*
AKIT, 4-20MA CURRENT OUTPUT
WINDOW (KB)
ORING, 2-006VT *(KB)
ORING, 2-011V FT10
ORING, 2-012V
ORING, 2-136V
ORING, 2-011S, 40 DURO
ORING, 2-228V, 50 DURO VITON(KB)
PWR SUPPLY, SW, +5V, +/-15V, 40W (KB)
COVER ENCLOSURE KIT,LPX 40/60 (KB)
PWR SUPPLY, SW, 12V, 40W (KB)
REBUILD KIT, FOR PU20 & 04241 (KB)
RELAY, DPDT, (KB)
SWITCH, POWER, CIRC BREAK, VDE/CE *(KB)
PRESSURE SENSOR, 0-15 PSIA, ALL SEN
POWER CORD, 10A(KB)

B-7

T300M Recommended Spare Parts Stocking Levels
(Reference 2011-12-01)

Recommended Spare Parts Stocking Level: Standard

Part Number
003290500
009550500
009560301
037250100
040010000
040030100
042410200 *
050320000
052830100
055010000
058021100
067240000
KIT000159
KIT000179
KIT000253
KIT000254
RL0000015
067900000
066970000
068810000
072150000

Description
Wheel Thermistor Bench/Wheel
Source Assembly
Gas Filter Wheel
Bench Band Heater
Assembly, Fan
PCA, PRESS SENSORS (1X), w/FM4, E SERIES
Pump, 115V 50/60 Hz
PCA, Opto-Interrupter
ASSY, MOTOR HUB, MR7, "A", 115V
ASSY, MTR WHL HEATER w/THERM, 200W
PCA, E-SERIES MOTHERBOARD, GEN 5-I
CPU, PC-104, VSX-6154E, ICOP *(KB)
REPLACEMENT, RELAY BD, M300E
RETROFIT, SYNC DMOD UPDATE, M300EM
KIT, SPARE PS37
KIT, SPARE PS38
Relay
LCD MODULE, W/TOUCHSCREEN(KB)
PCA, INTRF. LCD TOUCH SCRN, F/P
PCA, LVDS TRANSMITTER BOARD
TOUCHSCREEN CONTROL MODULE

Units
6-10

2-5

1
1

1
2

1
1

1
2
1

1
1
1

1
1
1
1
1
2

11-20

21-30

2
2
1
2
2
2
2
2
1
2
1
1
2
2
1
1
2
1
1
1
2

2
3
1
2
3
3
2
2
2
2
2
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
3

11-20

21-30

11-20

21-30

11-20

21-30

1
1

2
2

* For 240V Operation, use 055100200
Part Number
055100200

Description

2-5

OPTION, PUMP ASSY, 240V

Units
6-10
1

Recommended Spare Parts Stocking Level: For O2 Option Installed

Part Number
OP0000030

Description

2-5

Units
6-10

OXYGEN TRANSDUCER, PARAMAGNETIC

Recommended Spare Parts Stocking Level: For IZS/ZS Option Installed

Part Number
042690000
042680000

B-8

Description
Valve Assy, 2-Way, On/Off
Valve Assy, 3-Way

2-5

Units
6-10
1
1

06864B DCN6314

APPENDIX C
Warranty/Repair Questionnaire
T300/T300M and M300E/EM
(04305G DCN5798)
CUSTOMER: ____________________________________

PHONE: ______________________________________

CONTACT NAME: ________________________________

FAX NO: ______________________________________

SITE ADDRESS: __________________________________________________________________________________
SERIAL NO.: ____________________________________

FIRMWARE REVISION: __________________________

1. Are there any failure messages? ____________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________________________________________

Please complete the following table:
PARAMETER

DISPLAYED AS

Range

UNITS

NOMINAL RANGE

Range

PPM, MGM1,2
PPB, UGM1

1 – 1000 PPM1
5 – 5000 PPM2

Stability

STABIL

PPM

CO Measure

CO MEAS

<1.0 PPM
with Zero Air
2500 – 4800 MV

CO Reference

CO REF

2500 – 4800MV

Measure/Reference Ratio

MR RATIO

–

1.1 – 1.3 W/ Zero Air

Pressure

PRES

In-Hg-A

-2”Ambient Absolute

Sample Flow

SAMP FL

cm3/min

800 ± 10%

Sample Temp

SAMPLE TEMP

°C

48 ± 4

Bench Temp

BENCH TEMP

°C

48 ± 2

Wheel Temp

WHEEL TEMP

°C

68 ± 2

Box Temp

BOX TEMP

°C

Ambient + 7 ± 10

Photo Drive

PHT DRIVE

250 mV – 4750 mV

Slope of CO Measurement

CO SLOPE

–

1.0 ± .3

Offset of CO Measurement

CO OFFSET

PPM

0 ± 0.3

Dark Cal Reference signal

REF DARK OFFSET

Dark Cal Measurement Signal

MEAS DARK OFFSET

Electric Test
1

OBSERVED
VALUE

T300, M300E

PPM

125 ± 50 mV
125 ± 50 mV
40 ± 2 PPM

T300M, M300EM

TELEDYNE API CUSTOMER SERVICE
Email: api-customerservice@teledyne.com
PHONE: (858) 657-9800 TOLL FREE: (800) 324-5190 FAX: (858) 657-9816
06864B DCN6314

C-1

APPENDIX C
Warranty/Repair Questionnaire
T300/T300M and M300E/EM
(04305G DCN5798)

2. Have you performed a leak check and flow check? ______________________________________________________
3. What are the failure symptoms? ____________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________________________________________
4. What test have you done trying to solve the problem? ___________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________________________________________
5. Please check these signals and verify the correctness. Look for the signals annotated on the diagram. What are the
peak-to-peak voltages?
TP 5

TP 2

TP 10

2v/DIV

10 mS

2v/DIV

.5 mS

5. If possible, please include a portion of a strip chart pertaining to the problem. Circle pertinent data.
Thank you for providing this information. Your assistance enables Teledyne API to respond faster to the problem that you
are encountering.
OTHER INFORMATION: ____________________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________________________________________

TELEDYNE API CUSTOMER SERVICE
Email: api-customerservice@teledyne.com
PHONE: (858) 657-9800 TOLL FREE: (800) 324-5190 FAX: (858) 657-9816
C-2

06864B DCN6314

APPENDIX D – Wire List and Electronic Schematics

06864B DCN6314

D-1

This page intentionally left blank.

D-2

06864B DCN6314

Interconnect List, T300/M T360/M
(Reference: 0691201B, DCN5947)

Revision
A
B

Cable PN
03995

04103

04105

04146

04237

04671

06737

06738

Date
DCN
9/3/10 5833
12/30/10 5947

Description
Initial Release
Added T360 & T360M

FROM
Signal
Assembly
PN
CBL, MOTOR TO RELAY PCA
GFC Drive - A
Relay PCA
041350000
GFC Drive - B
Relay PCA
041350000
Motor Return
Relay PCA
041350000
Chassis Gnd
Relay PCA
041350000
CBL, MOTHERBOARD TO THERMISTORS
+5V Ref
Motherboard
058021100
Bench Temp
Motherboard
058021100
+5V Ref
Motherboard
058021100
Wheel Temp
Motherboard
058021100
+5V ref
Motherboard
058021100
+5V Ref
Motherboard
058021100
Sample Temp
Motherboard
058021100
Motherboard
058021100
Motherboard
058021100
Relay PCA
041350000
Relay PCA
041350000
Relay PCA
041350000
CBL, LCD INTERFACE PCA TO MOTHERBOARD
Kbd Interupt
LCD Interface PCA
066970000
DGND
LCD Interface PCA
066970000
SDA
LCD Interface PCA
066970000
SCL
LCD Interface PCA
066970000
Shld
LCD Interface PCA
066970000
CBL, SYNC DEMOD
DGND
Opto Pickup
05032 or 05256
Segmentg Gate
Opto Pickup
05032 or 05256
No Connection
Opto Pickup
05032 or 05256
DGND
Opto Pickup
05032 or 05256
M/R Gate
Opto Pickup
05032 or 05256
+5V
Opto Pickup
05032 or 05256
CBL ASSY, 12V VALVE CBLS
+12
Relay PCA
041350000
Zero/Span Drv
Relay PCA
041350000
+12
Relay PCA
041350000
Samp/Cal Drv
Relay PCA
041350000
+12
Relay PCA
041350000
Shutoff Vlv
Relay PCA
041350000
CBL, MOTHERBOARD TO XMITTER BD (MULTIDROP OPTION)
GND
Motherboard
058021100
RX0
Motherboard
058021100
RTS0
Motherboard
058021100
TX0
Motherboard
058021100
CTS0
Motherboard
058021100
RS-GND0
Motherboard
058021100
RTS1
Motherboard
058021100
CTS1/485Motherboard
058021100
RX1
Motherboard
058021100
TX1/485+
Motherboard
058021100
RS-GND1
Motherboard
058021100
RX1
Motherboard
058021100
TX1/485+
Motherboard
058021100
RS-GND1
Motherboard
058021100
CBL, I2C TO AUX I/O PCA (ANALOG IN OPTION)
ATXMotherboard
058021100
ATX+
Motherboard
058021100
LED0
Motherboard
058021100
ARX+
Motherboard
058021100
ARXMotherboard
058021100
LED0+
Motherboard
058021100
LED1+
Motherboard
058021100
CBL, CPU COM to AUX I/O (USB OPTION)
RXD1
CPU PCA
067240000
DCD1
CPU PCA
067240000
DTR1
CPU PCA
067240000
TXD1
CPU PCA
067240000
DSR1
CPU PCA
067240000
GND
CPU PCA
067240000
CTS1
CPU PCA
067240000
RTS1
CPU PCA
067240000
RI1
CPU PCA
067240000

06864B DCN6314

TO
J/P

Pin Assembly

J/P

J6
J6
J6
J6

1
2
3
4

GFC Motor
GFC Motor
GFC Motor
GFC Motor

052380200
052380200
052380200
052380200

P1
P1
P1
P1

1
2
3
4

J27
J27
J27
J27
J27
J27
J27
J27
J27
J4
J4
J4

6
13
5
12
1
7
14
2
9
1
2
3

Bench Temp Snsr
Bench Temp Snsr
Wheel Temp Snsr
Wheel Temp Snsr
Shield
Sample Temp Snsr
Sample Temp Snsr
O2 Sensor Therm/Htr
O2 Sensor Therm/Htr
O2 Sensor Therm/Htr
O2 Sensor Therm/Htr
Shield

003291500
003291500
003291500
003291500

P1
P1
P1
P1

1
2
1
2

019340200, -06
019340200, -06
043420000
043420000
043420000
043420000

P1
P1
P1
P1
P1
P1

1
2
3
1
4
2

J1
J1
J1
J1
J1

7
2
5
6
10

Motherboard
Motherboard
Motherboard
Motherboard
Motherboard

058021100
058021100
058021100
058021100
058021100

J106
J106
J106
J106
J106

1
8
2
6
5

J2
J2
J2
J2
J2
J2

1
2
3
4
5
6

Sync Demod
Sync Demod
Sync Demod
Sync Demod
Sync Demod
Sync Demod

032960000
032960000
032960000
032960000
032960000
032960000

JP4
JP4
JP4
JP4
JP4
JP4

6
5
4
3
2
1

J7
J7
J7
J7
J7
J7

6
8
2
4
5
7

Zero/Span Vlv
Zero/Span Vlv
Samp/Cal Vlv
Samp/Cal Vlv
Shutoff Valve
Shutoff Valve

042680000
042680000
042680000
042680000
042690000
042690000

P1
P1
P1
P1
P1
P1

1
2
1
2
1
2

P12
P12
P12
P12
P12
P12
P12
P12
P12
P12
P12
P12
P12
P12

2
14
13
12
11
10
8
6
9
7
5
9
7
5

Xmitter bd w/Multidrop
Xmitter bd w/Multidrop
Xmitter bd w/Multidrop
Xmitter bd w/Multidrop
Xmitter bd w/Multidrop
Xmitter bd w/Multidrop
Xmitter bd w/Multidrop
Xmitter bd w/Multidrop
Xmitter bd w/Multidrop
Xmitter bd w/Multidrop
Xmitter bd w/Multidrop
Xmitter bd w/Multidrop
Xmitter bd w/Multidrop
Xmitter bd w/Multidrop

069500000
069500000
069500000
069500000
069500000
069500000
069500000
069500000
069500000
069500000
069500000
069500000
069500000
069500000

J4
J4
J4
J4
J4
J4
J4
J4
J4
J4
J4
J4
J4
J4

2
14
13
12
11
10
8
6
9
7
5
9
7
5

J106
J106
J106
J106
J106
J106
J106

1
2
3
4
5
6
8

AUX I/O PCA
AUX I/O PCA
AUX I/O PCA
AUX I/O PCA
AUX I/O PCA
AUX I/O PCA
AUX I/O PCA

067300000
067300000
067300000
067300000
067300000
067300000
067300000

J2
J2
J2
J2
J2
J2
J2

1
2
3
4
5
6
8

COM1 1
COM1 2
COM1 3
COM1 4
COM1 5
COM1 6
COM1 7
COM1 8
COM1 10

AUX I/O PCA
AUX I/O PCA
AUX I/O PCA
AUX I/O PCA
AUX I/O PCA
AUX I/O PCA
AUX I/O PCA
AUX I/O PCA
AUX I/O PCA

0673000 or -02
0673000 or -02
0673000 or -02
0673000 or -02
0673000 or -02
0673000 or -02
0673000 or -02
0673000 or -02
0673000 or -02

J3
J3
J3
J3
J3
J3
J3
J3
J3

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
10

D-3

Interconnect List, T300/M T360/M
(Reference: 0691201B, DCN5947)

Cable PN
06738

06739

06741

06746

06809

06811

06815

D-4

FROM
PN
Signal
Assembly
CBL, CPU COM to AUX I/O (MULTIDROP OPTION)
RXD
CPU PCA
067240000
DCD
CPU PCA
067240000
DTR
CPU PCA
067240000
TXD
CPU PCA
067240000
DSR
CPU PCA
067240000
GND
CPU PCA
067240000
CTS
CPU PCA
067240000
RTS
CPU PCA
067240000
RI
CPU PCA
067240000
CBL, CPU ETHERNET TO AUX I/O PCA
ATXCPU PCA
067240000
ATX+
CPU PCA
067240000
LED0
CPU PCA
067240000
ARX+
CPU PCA
067240000
ARXCPU PCA
067240000
LED0+
CPU PCA
067240000
LED1
CPU PCA
067240000
LED1+
CPU PCA
067240000
CBL, CPU USB TO LCD INTERFACE PCA
GND
CPU PCA
067240000
LUSBD3+
CPU PCA
067240000
LUSBD3CPU PCA
067240000
VCC
CPU PCA
067240000
CBL, MB TO 06154 CPU
GND
Motherboard
058021100
RX0
Motherboard
058021100
RTS0
Motherboard
058021100
TX0
Motherboard
058021100
CTS0
Motherboard
058021100
RS-GND0
Motherboard
058021100
RTS1
Motherboard
058021100
CTS1/485Motherboard
058021100
RX1
Motherboard
058021100
TX1/485+
Motherboard
058021100
RS-GND1
Motherboard
058021100
RX1
Motherboard
058021100
TX1/485+
Motherboard
058021100
RS-GND1
Motherboard
058021100
CBL ASSY, DC POWER TO MOTHERBOARD
DGND
Relay PCA
041350000
+5V
Relay PCA
041350000
AGND
Relay PCA
041350000
+15V
Relay PCA
041350000
AGND
Relay PCA
041350000
-15V
Relay PCA
041350000
+12V RET
Relay PCA
041350000
+12V
Relay PCA
041350000
Chassis Gnd
Relay PCA
041350000
CBL ASSY, BENCH HEATER
Wheel Heater
Relay PCA
041350000
AC Return
Relay PCA
041350000
Bench Htr, 115V
Relay PCA
041350000
Bench Htr, 230V
Relay PCA
041350000
AC Return
Relay PCA
041350000
Chassis Gnd
Relay PCA
041350000
CBL ASSY, AC POWER
AC Line
Power Entry
CN0000073
AC Neutral
Power Entry
CN0000073
Power Grnd
Power Entry
CN0000073
Power Grnd
Power Entry
CN0000073
AC Line Switched
Power Switch
SW0000025
AC Neu Switched
Power Switch
SW0000025
Power Grnd
Power Entry
CN0000073
AC Line Switched
Power Switch
SW0000025
AC Neu Switched
Power Switch
SW0000025
Power Grnd
Power Entry
CN0000073
AC Line Switched
Power Switch
SW0000025
AC Neu Switched
Power Switch
SW0000025
Power Grnd
Power Entry
CN0000073

TO
J/P

Pin Assembly

COM1 1
COM1 2
COM1 3
COM1 4
COM1 5
COM1 6
COM1 7
COM1 8
COM1 10

J/P

069500000
069500000
069500000
069500000
069500000
069500000
069500000
069500000
069500000

J3
J3
J3
J3
J3
J3
J3
J3
J3

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
10
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8

LAN
LAN
LAN
LAN
LAN
LAN
LAN
LAN

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8

AUX I/O PCA
AUX I/O PCA
AUX I/O PCA
AUX I/O PCA
AUX I/O PCA
AUX I/O PCA
AUX I/O PCA
AUX I/O PCA

067300100
067300100
067300100
067300100
067300100
067300100
067300100
067300100

J2
J2
J2
J2
J2
J2
J2
J2

USB
USB
USB
USB

8
6
4
2

LCD Interface PCA
LCD Interface PCA
LCD Interface PCA
LCD Interface PCA

066970000
066970000
066970000
066970000

JP9
JP9
JP9
JP9

P12
P12
P12
P12
P12
P12
P12
P12
P12
P12
P12
P12
P12
P12

2
14
13
12
11
10
8
6
9
7
5
9
7
5

Shield
CPU PCA
CPU PCA
CPU PCA
CPU PCA
CPU PCA
CPU PCA
CPU PCA
CPU PCA
CPU PCA
CPU PCA
CPU PCA
CPU PCA
CPU PCA

067240000
067240000
067240000
067240000
067240000
067240000
067240000
067240000
067240000
067240000
067240000
067240000
067240000

COM1
COM1
COM1
COM1
COM1
COM2
COM2
COM2
COM2
COM2
485
485
485

1
8
4
7
6
8
7
1
4
6
1
2
3

J14
J14
J14
J14
J14
J14
J14
J14
J14

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
10

Motherboard
Motherboard
Motherboard
Motherboard
Motherboard
Motherboard
Motherboard
Motherboard
Motherboard

058021100
058021100
058021100
058021100
058021100
058021100
058021100
058021100
058021100

J15
J15
J15
J15
J15
J15
J15
J15
J15

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9

P3
P3
P3
P3
P3
P3

1
4
2
3
4
5

Wheel Heater
Wheel Heater
Bench Htr
Bench Htr
Bench Htr

055010000
055010000
037250000
037250000
037250000

P1
P1
P1
P1
P1

1
2
1
2
3

L
N

Power Switch
Power Switch
Shield
Chassis
PS2 (+12)
PS2 (+12)
PS2 (+12)
PS1 (+5, ±15)
PS1 (+5, ±15)
PS1 (+5, ±15)
Relay
Relay
Relay

SW0000025
SW0000025

L
N
L
N
L
N

068020000
068020000
068020000
068010000
068010000
068010000
041350000
041350000
041350000

L
N

SK2
SK2
SK2
SK2
SK2
SK2
J1
J1
J1

1
3
2
1
3
2
1
3
2

06864B DCN6314

Interconnect List, T300/M T360/M
(Reference: 0691201B, DCN5947)

Cable PN
06816

06817

06917

06925

06746

WR256

Signal
Assembly
CBL ASSY, DC POWER
+15
PS1
+5
PS1
DGND
PS1
AGND
PS1
-15
PS1
+12
PS2
+12 RET
PS2
CBL, RELAY BD TO SOURCE
IR Source Drv
Relay PCA
IR Source Drv
Relay PCA
CBL, DC POWER & SIGNAL DISTRIBUTION
+5V
LCD Interface PCA
DGND
LCD Interface PCA
+5V
LCD Interface PCA
SDA
LCD Interface PCA
SCL
LCD Interface PCA
DGND
LCD Interface PCA
Shield
LCD Interface PCA
+12V Ret
Fan
+12V
Fan
AGND
Flow Module
+15V
Flow Module
Cell Pressure
Flow Module
Pump Vaccum
Flow Module
Sample Flow
Flow Module
Shield
Measure
Sync Demod
PD Temp
Sync Demod
Reference
Sync Demod
AGND
Sync Demod
Dark Switch
Sync Demod
Sync Error
Sync Demod
Etest
Sync Demod
CBL ASSY, SYNC DEMOD , DC POWER
DGND
Relay PCA
+5V
Relay PCA
AGND
Relay PCA
+15V
Relay PCA
AGND
Relay PCA
-15V
Relay PCA
DGND
Relay PCA
+5V
Relay PCA
+12V ret
Relay PCA
+12V
Relay PCA
O2O2 Sensor
O2+
O2 Sensor
Shield
CO2CO2 Sensor
CO2+
CO2 Sensor
CBL, MOTHERBOAD TO CPU
RXD(0)
CPU PCA
RTS(0)
CPU PCA
TXD(0)
CPU PCA
CTS(0)
CPU PCA
GND(0)
CPU PCA
RXD(1)
CPU PCA
RTS(1)
CPU PCA
TXD(1)
CPU PCA
CTS(1)
CPU PCA
GND(1)
CPU PCA
485+
CPU PCA
485CPU PCA
GND
CPU PCA
Shield
CBL, TRANSMITTER TO LCD INTERFACE PCA
LCD Interface PCA

06864B DCN6314

FROM
PN

J/P

068010000
068010000
068010000
068010000
068010000
068020000
068020000

SK1
SK1
SK1
SK1
SK1
SK1
SK1

6
1
3
4
5
1
3

041350000
041350000

J16
J16

066970000
066970000
066970000
066970000
066970000
066970000
066970000
040010000
040010000
040030100
040030100
040030100
040030100
040030100

Pin Assembly

J/P

Relay PCA
Relay PCA
Relay PCA
Relay PCA
Relay PCA
Relay PCA
Relay PCA

041350000
041350000
041350000
041350000
041350000
041350000
041350000

J13
J13
J13
J13
J13
J13
J13

4
3
1
5
6
8
7

1
2

IR Source
IR Source

009550500
009550500

P1
P1

1
2

J14
J14
J14
J14
J14
J14
J14
P1
P1
J1
J1
J1
J1
J1

1
2
3
5
6
8
10
1
2
3
6
4
2
5

032960000
032960000
032960000
032960000
032960000
032960000
032960000

J3
J3
J3
J3
J3
J3
J3

1
2
5
6
4
7
8

Relay PCA
Relay PCA
Relay PCA
Relay PCA
Relay PCA
Relay PCA
Relay PCA
Relay PCA
Relay PCA
Relay PCA
Relay PCA
Motherboard
Motherboard
Motherboard
Motherboard
Motherboard
Motherboard
Motherboard
Shield
Motherboard
Motherboard
Motherboard

041350000
041350000
041350000
041350000
041350000
041350000
041350000
041350000
041350000
041350000
041350000
058021100
058021100
058021100
058021100
058021100
058021100
058021100

J12
J11
J11
J5
J5
J12
J5
J11
J11
J11
J11
J109
J109
J109
J109
J109
J109
J109

2
1
2
2
1
1
5
7
8
3
4
5
6
2
9
4
1
3

058021100
058021100
058021100

J108
J108
J108

16
4
8

041350000
041350000
041350000
041350000
041350000
041350000
041350000
041350000
041350000
041350000

J15
J15
J15
J15
J15
J15
J15
J15
J15
J15
P1
P1

1
2
3
4
5
6
1
2
7
8
9
10

Sync Demod
Sync Demod
Sync Demod
Sync Demod
Sync Demod
Sync Demod
O2 Sensor
O2 Sensor
CO2 Sensor
CO2 Sensor
Motherboard
Motherboard
Motherboard
Motherboard
Motherboard

032960000
032960000
032960000
032960000
032960000
032960000
049210000
049210000

J2
J2
J2
J2
J2
J2
P1
P1

058021100
058021100
058021100
058021100
058021100

P110
P110
P110
P110
P110

1
2
3
4
5
6
5
6
GND
+L
10
4
7
8
2

Motherboard
Motherboard
Motherboard
Motherboard
Motherboard
Motherboard
Motherboard
Motherboard
Motherboard
Motherboard
Motherboard
Motherboard
Motherboard
Motherboard

058021100
058021100
058021100
058021100
058021100
058021100
058021100
058021100
058021100
058021100
058021100
058021100
058021100
058021100

J12
J12
J12
J12
J12
J12
J12
J12
J12
J12
J12
J12
J12
J12

14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
9
7
5
2

Transmitter PCA

068810000

0
V
067240000
067240000
067240000
067240000
067240000
067240000
067240000
067240000
067240000
067240000
067240000
067240000
067240000

COM1
COM1
COM1
COM1
COM1
COM2
COM2
COM2
COM2
COM2
CN5
CN5
CN5

066970000

J15

1
8
4
7
6
1
8
4
7
6
1
2
3

D-5

This page intentionally left blank.

D-6

06864B DCN6314

D-7

+5V RETURN

JP2
Power, Minifit, 10 Pin

VBIAS

-15V

499K

C17
10/35V, tantalum

R18 10K

C10
3

R17

1
2

0.1/100V, Film

C9
10/100V, Elect

R6
10M

MT1

R27
100

C33
0.1, Ceram

0.1, Ceram

+15V_A

R16
4.99K

+15V

+15V_B
TP

10.0K

+15V

ADJ

10/35V, tantalum

R34
7.5K

C27

+5VREF

10/35V, tantalum

C8
10/35V, tantalum
+5V RETURN

R50

6
3

2.2K

U3
OPA340UA

+15V_B

4.7UH

ETEST

R31
51K
R19

Analog GND
VCC

VOUT

C7
R30
51K

10K

VIN

R54

2 OHM 35W

10/35V, tantalum

DARKSWITCH

R25

LT1084CT

C19

4
1

SYNC ERROR

MICROFIT, 8 pin

+5VREF

10K

COREF TO A/D

10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1

Mounted on Bench
U14

-15V_A

JP1

Mounted on Bench

R35 2.2M

L2
C3 4.7UH
100UF/25V

VCC

C13

DETECTOR

R51
2.55k

JP1

0.022, Ceram

Signal

R26

75K

TP
TP3

-15V_A
TP

JP3

24.9K

DETECTOR+
0.047, Ceram, 1206 ChipC12

-15V

100K

C18

10/35V, tantalum

COMEAS TO A/D
PDETTEMP

R7 VALUE

+15V_A

4.7UH
C2
100UF/25V
C

PREAMP OUT

U2B
LF353
VERSION

MOUTING HOLE

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8

7
5

R7
See Below

-15V_A

C68

10K

U2A
LF353

0.01, 100V, CERAMIC

AGND

R55
100

TP
TP4

VBIAS
See Page 3 for Bias supply

C1
100UF/25V

+15V_A

V= 50-55 VOLTS
TP

VCC TP

+15V

PREAMP

VCC

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10

C11 100pf

+5V RETURN IS A SEPARATE GROUND
RETURN, IT MUST BE RUN DIRECTLY
BACK TO JP2-1. (30 MIL TRACE WIDTH)

DGND

R61
100

TEC CONTROL

VCC
PDETTEMP
B

GFC Wheel Position Interface

R71
0 ohm

JP4
Opto

1
2
3
4
5
6

-15V_B
TP

R28
10K
L4

-15V

M/R_DET

R73
10K

Thermistor

Thermistor Return

Detector

Detector Return

TEC Return

Detector is in a TO-37 package
(10 pin circular) with only pins
1,2,6,7,8 & 9 present.

-15V_B

4.7UH
C28
10/35V, tantalum

SEGMENT_DET

MICROFIT, 6 Pin

THERMISTOR+

Function

R74
0 ohm
VCC
+15V_A

U15
LM78L05ACM(8)

TDIN
TCK
TMS
TDOUT

C14
0.68uf/25V, Ceram
VCC

IN
NC

OUT
NC

+5VREF
1
5

C15
0.68uf/25V, Ceram

Note: 1. This schematics is for PCA 03296.
2. Use PCB 03295.

2
3
6
7

Programming

1
2
3
4
5
6

8
4

GND
GND
GND
GND

SEGMENT_DET

JP6

Revision History
Rev.K - DCN5067
-03 option, R7 value = 75K
Rev J - DCN 4242 - RJ
DCR 6270
Change C14 & C15 from 1206 to 1210,
From CA0000144 to CA0000201.
Clear out solder mask from Detector (JP1).
Add test points TP16 & TP17, 0.50 pad.

BM06B-SRSS-TB (mfg: JST)
A

DIGITAL GND

Printed documents are Uncontrolled.
1

D-8

The information herin is the
property of TAPI and is
submitted in strictest
confidence for reference only.
Unauthorized use by anyone
for any other purpose is
prohibited. This document or
any informatin contained in it
may not be duplicated without
proper authorization,.
5

A
APPROVALS
DRAWN

CHECKED

Schematics for PCA 03296, Sync Demod
DATE

SIZE

APPROVED

LAST MOD.

17-Sep-2008

DRAWING NO.

REVISION

03297

SHEET

06864B DCN6314

-15V_A
11

TP1
TP2

+15V_A

1
2

TP16

U5A
LF444

R56
619K

R401M

VCC

R9 100k

R20
10K

R11 100K
U10A
DG444

7
5

U5B
LF444

R57
3

324

TV1

R21

IN1

100K

10K

R29
10K

-15V_A

IN2

5
8

TV_ENAB'

IN1

U5D

R10

C30
0.22, Poly

100K

LF444

U5C

R58

COMEAS TO A/D

200

LF444

MEAS_2

R38

R39

C31
0.22, Poly

U10B
DG444

D5
R42
1M

C32
0.22, Poly

C21
1.0, Poly

R41
1M

110K
R14

U4A
LF444

TP17

U8A

-15V_A

R60
200

U8D
DG444

LM385

IN4

TP
TP10
D1

TP
14

DG444
2

R37

TP6

MEAS_1
-15V_A

+5VREF

R36

C29
0.22, Poly

R8
VR1
5K

+15V_A

C26
1000PF/50V, 0805

PREAMP_ENAB'

TP11

IN3

PREAMP OUT

C22 1.0, Poly

TP
C20
1.0, Poly

U8C
DG444
D

+15V_A

IN2

TP
TP7
DG444

REF_1

IN3

R13

U8B

R64
4.99K

TP
TP12

50K
R62
10

R43

R44

C34
0.22, Poly

U10C
DG444

39.2k
R15

R48
1M

R47

1
2

0.1, Ceram
C63

+5VREF

+15V_A

-VREF

C24 1.0, Poly

100k
R22

VCC

-15V_A

100K

6
7
5

C35
0.22, Poly

U4B
LF444

TV2

R12
100K

9
8
10

U4C
LF444

R59

COREF TO A/D

200

TP5
6

M/R Status

681

681 PREAMP_ENAB'
PCP
PC1

Segment Status

VCC IO
VCC INT
VCC INT

33
36
34
19
20
21
22
23
27
28
29
30
31
32
37
38
39

SYNC_10
TV2
TV_ENAB'
REF_2
REF_1
TP8
TP14
14
3

MEAS_2
MEAS_1

9
5

TV1
0.01 Ceramic

C61

R65
R53

16.9K
1M

6
7
11
12

AIN
BIN

SEGMENT_DET

80.6K

R24

PCP

5.1K

PC1

1N4148

C67

TP15
VCOUT

SF
ZEN

10
15

SYNC_10
R23

R66

0.1, Ceram

75K

10K

CD4046 PLL

0.1, Poly
C25
1.0, Poly

06864B DCN6314

PCP

PC2

CA
CB
R1
R2

51K

C39

R67

C23
1.0, Poly

R32

PC1
VCIN
INH

DARKSWITCH

R49
1M

C37
0.22, Poly

VCC

4
17
25

SYNC ERROR

IO/GSR
IO/GTS1
IO/GTS2
IO
IO
IO
IO
IO
IO
IO
IO
IO
IO
IO
IO
IO
IO

C36
0.22, Poly

REF_2

IO/GCK1
IO/GCK2
IO/GCK3
IO
IO
IO
IO
IO
IO
IO
IO
IO
IO
IO
IO
IO
IO

TDOUT

VCC

ETEST

43
44
1
2
3
5
6
7
8
12
13
14
16
18
40
41
42

TD OUT

R46

1M
U10D
DG444

GND

TD IN
TMS
TCK

R45

TP
TP9

GND
GND
GND

TDIN
TMS
TCK

9
10
11

U12
XC9536-15VQ44I(44)

26
15
35

VCC

IN4

M/R_DET

A
APPROVALS
DRAWN

CHECKED

Schematics for PCA 03296, Sync Demod
DATE

SIZE

APPROVED

LAST MOD.

17-Sep-2008

DRAWING NO.

REVISION

03297

SHEET

D-9

V= 65 +/- 1 VOLTS

BIAS SUPPLY

+15V_B

IN
NC

OUT
NC

C50
0.01, 100V, CERAMIC

C38
0.01, 100V, CERAMIC

1
5

VBIAS
C5

GND
GND
GND
GND

8
4

U1
LM78L12ACM(8)

D3
1N4148

10/35V, tantalum

D4
1N4148

D7
1N4148

D8
1N4148

C51
100/100V, ELECTROLYTIC

2
3
6
7

0.1, Ceram

C40
0.01, 100V, CERAMIC

R3 39.2k

+15V_B

C62
0.1, Ceram
+15V_A
3

C66

6
2

4
1

0.01, 100V, CERAMIC
F= 19-27 Khz

LF351

R33
20K
C64
0.1, Ceram

U10

C41
0.1, Ceram

C42
0.1, Ceram

C43
0.1, Ceram

C44
0.1, Ceram

C46
0.1, Ceram

V= 27 +/- 2 VOLTS
-15V_B

R52
100K

C65

C52
0.1, Ceram

330PF, Ceram, 0603 Chip

C53
0.1, Ceram

C54
0.1, Ceram

C55
0.1, Ceram

U10

C57
0.1, Ceram

-15V_A

MT2
MOUNTING HOLE

MT3
MOUNTING HOLE

MT4
MOUNTING HOLE

VCC

MT5
MOUNTING HOLE

U4D

C59
0.1, Ceram
MF1

MF2

MF3

MF4

MF6

C60
0.1, Ceram

U10

U12

C49
0.1, Ceram

C48
0.1, Ceram

14
12

LF444

MF5

D-10

A
APPROVALS
DRAWN

CHECKED

Schematics for PCA 03296, Sync Demod
DATE

SIZE

APPROVED

LAST MOD.

17-Sep-2008

DRAWING NO.

REVISION

03297

SHEET

06864B DCN6314

0.1

C4
1000PF

ISO_-15V

+12V

ISO_+15V

15
12
11

VOUT

VIN(10)

GATEDRV

U2
2
R1

4.75K

9.76K

GND
TP6

C5
220PF

3
5

OPA277
8

+VS2

VIN

TESTPOINT
TP1

7
1

+VS1

+V
SR
SSENSE

4
TESTPOINT
TP2

VREF
SENSE
VRADJ

D1
1N914

OFFADJ
OFFADJ
SPAN
4MA
16MA

VREFIN
VIN(5V)
GND

16
1

ISO_+15V

13
14

Q1
MOSFETP

7
6
8
10
9

IOUT+

XTR110

+12V

-VS1 GND1 -VS2
GND2
C7
0.1

-12V

ISO_+15V

HEADER 4X2

IOUT-

VINVIN+

ISO124

10
8

2
4
6
8

-12V
ISO_-15V

+15V

1
3
5
7

IOUTIOUT+

+15V
U1

C1
0.47

ISO+15
TP3

1
2
5
6
7

ISO_+15V

ISO_GND
TP5

C2
0.47

ISO_GND

ISO_-15V

0V
+VOUT
-VOUT

SIN

SOUT

DCP010515

C3
0.47
VIN-

TP4
ISO-15

VS
0V

JP1
JUMPER2

Error : LOGO.BMP file not found.

06864B DCN6314

Date

Rev.

Change Description

Engineer

8/9/00

INITIAL RELEASE (FROM 03039)

The information herein is the
property of API and is
submitted in strictest confidence for reference only.
Unauthorized use by anyone
for any other purposes is
prohibited. This document or
any information contained
in it may not be duplicated
without proper authorization.
5

APPROVALS

DATE

PCA 03631, Isolated 0-20ma, E Series
A

DRAWN

CHECKED

SIZE

B
APPROVED

DRAWING NO.

REVISION

03632

LAST MOD.

SHEET

19-Jul-2002

D-11

+15V

R2
1.1K

S1
ASCX PRESSURE SENSOR

1
2
3
4
5
6

VR2

D
3

C2
1.0UF
1
LM4040CIZ

TP4
TP5
S1/S4_OUT S2_OUT

TP3
S3_OUT

TP2
10V_REF

TP1
GND
3
2
1

S2
ASCX PRESSURE SENSOR

1
2
3
4
5
6

+15V

6
5
4

MINIFIT6
+15V

R1
499
S3
FLOW SENSOR
FM_4

1
2
3

+15V

1
2
3
4

C1
1.0UF
1

CN_647 X 3

VR1

LM4040CIZ

C3
1.0

CON4

D-12

APPROVALS

DATE

SCH, PCA 04003, PRESS/FLOW, 'E' SERIES

DRAWN

A
CHECKED

SIZE

APPROVED

LAST MOD.

DRAWING NO.

REVISION

04354

D
SHEET

3-Dec-2007

06864B DCN6314

VR1 2K

TP3

+5V

TP1

TP2

30Hz
+5V

R2
2K

C2
1.0uF

R1
180

100K

K
OPB804

U1A

30HzRaw

+30

10K
R4

VR2 2K

SN10502D

C1
1.0uF

TP5

+5V

1
2
3
4
5
6

30Hz

-30

220K

O1
1

TP4

360Hz

R8
100K
Mounting Holes

R11
180

K
OPB804

3
4

360HzRaw

+360

10K
R7

-360

5
6

100K

R9
162K

360Hz

SN10502D
+5V

MT2

U1B
B

O2
1

MT1

R10
2K

C4
1.0uF
C3
0.1uF

06864B DCN6314

APPROVALS
DRAWN

RJ
CHECKED

DATE

5/17/04

Schematics for PWB 05031
and PCA 05032
OPTO-INTERRUPTER
SIZE

DRAWING NO.

B
APPROVED

REVISION

05033
SHEET

LAST MOD.

8-Jun-2004

D-13

J1
AC_Line

1
2
3
4
D

5
JP1 Configurations

JP4 Configuration

Spare Powered: 7-14

Standard Pumps
60 Hz: 3-8
50 Hz: 2-7, 5-10

100V: 1-8, 5-12, 3-10, 4-11
115V: 6-13, 2-9, 3-10
230V: 6-2, 11-4

AC_Neutral

World Pumps
60Hz/100-115V: 3-8, 4-9, 2-7
50Hz/100-115V: 3-8, 4-9, 2-7, 5-10
60Hz/220-240V: 3-8, 1-6
50Hz/220-240V: 3-8, 1-6, 5-10
J3

CON4

R3
2.2K

RN1
330

R4
2.2K

WHEEL

1
3
5
7

2
4
6
8

SPARE
2

SLD-RLY

1
2
3

SLD-RLY

1
2
3
4

FUSE2
I2C_Vcc
16
U1
PCF8574
1
AO
2
A1
3
A2

D7
GRN

D8
GRN

4
5
6
7
9
10
11
12

P0
P1
P2
P3
P4
P5
P6
P7

14
13
12
11
10
9
8

U2D
9

11
JP8

U2E

1
2
3

C5
1.0

R5
10K

CON10

CON10THROUGH

D-14

CON10THROUGH

TP5
-15V

TP6
TP7
+12RT +12V

+5V

R6
10K

JP7

U2F
13

1
2
3
HEADER 3

R8
8.25K

CON2

+ C9
10/16

B
Date:
File:

1
2

+12V

Title

CON10THROUGH

SOURCE

J16

R9
1.0K
+ C10
10/16

Size

MOLEX8

C7
2200/25

NOTE: 1. Use PWB 04134

+5V

SPARE
J15
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10

TP3
TP4
AGND +15V

SYNC DEMOD
J14
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10

MTHR BRD
J13
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10

KEYBRD
J12
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10

U5
MIC29502

C8
10/16

+ C6
10/16

U2A

R1
1M

OUT4
K
OUT 3
OUT 2
K
OUT 1

VALVES
J7
SAMPLE
8
SPAN/ZERO
4
SHUTOFF
7
SPARE
3
6
2
5
1

1
2
3
6
7
8

UDN2540B(16)
11

WTCDG OVR

D9
RLS4148

MAX693

IN 4
IN 3
ENABLE
IN 2
IN 1

GND
GND
GND
GND

16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9

16
15
14
10
9

U2C

I2C_Vcc

IRF7205

RESET
RESET'
WDO'
CD IN'
CD OUT'
WDI
PFO'
PFI

+12V
U4

VCC

R7
10K

WATCHDOG TIMER

VBATT
VOUT
VCC
GND
BATT_ON
LOW LINE'
OSC IN
OSC SEL

DGND
+5V
AGND
+15V
AGND
-15V
+12RET
+12V
EGND
CHS_GND

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10

1
2
3
4

+5V

TP1
TP2
DGND +5V
DC PWR IN
J11

MINI-FIT 10

U2B

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8

C4
0.001

HEADER 1X2

PUMP
J2

13
12
5
4

+5V

JP5
2

10
9
8
7
6

SN74HC04

C2
1.3/250
C

5
4
3
2
1
SPW-3108

R2
20K

+5V

GFC MOTOR

JP4

MLX 7X2 HDR

7
6
5
4
3
2
1

INT

C3
0.3/250

CASE

SCL
SDA

Vss

CON5

D6
GRN

ENBL
IN
GND
OUT
ADJ

14
15

1
2
3
4
5

D5
GRN

1
2
3
4
5

D4
YEL

JP1
Vdd

D3
YEL

GND
VCC

C1
0.1

D2
YEL

SPARE

HEADER 4X2

D1
RED

WHEEL HTR
BENCH HTR

I2C_Vcc

JP6

BENCH

1
2
3
4
5

+5V

Schematic, PCA 04135 Revision A, M300E Relay PCA
Number

Revision

04136

17-Jul-2002
Sheet of
N:\PCBMGR\RELEASED\04135dn\Source\04135.ddb
Drawn By:
6

06864B DCN6314

B
JP1

R1
Not Used

R2
22

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8

Title

Size
A
Date:
File:
1

06864B DCN6314

SCH, E-Series Analog Output Isolator, PCA 04467
Number

Revision

04468

6/28/2004
N:\PCBMGR\..\04468B.sch

Sheet of
Drawn By:
4

D-15

',*287
6+'1
',*,2

6+'1
',*,2

'>@
,2:
',*,2

'>@

'>@
,2:
',*,2

E3VFK

',*287
6+'1
'>@

'>@

6+'1
'>@

,2:
',*,2
',*,2

,25
',*,2

E3VFK

'>@
',*,2

'>@

',*,1
'>@
',*,2
E3VFK
6(1625,1

7(0308;
'$&08;
7(03
,2:
'$&
'$&
'$&

'>@
'$&9
'$&
'$&9
'$&9
'$&9
6+'1

'>@

'>@
'$&9
'$&
'$&9
'$&9
'$&9
6+'1

E3VFK
$1$,1
,25
9)5($'
'>@
9)352*
'$&08;
&+*$,1

'>@

,25
9)5($'
'>@
9)352*
'$&08;
&+*$,1

7(0308;
,2:
6+'1
95()
7&
7&
7&

E3VFK
$1$287
,2:
'>@
'$&9
&6'$&$
&6'$&%
'$&
'$&
'$&
'$&
6+'$&

'>@

,2:
'>@
'$&9
&6'$&$
&6'$&%
'$&
'$&
'$&
'$&
6+'$&

'$&9
'$&9
'$&9
'$&9
:5'$&
95()
7&

E3VFK
VKHHW
E3VFK

'>@
,2:
,25
6+'$&
',*,2
',*,2
7(03
'$&9
:5'$&
9)352*
$

'>@

3&,)
'>@
,2:
,25
6+'$&
',*,2
',*,2
7(03
'$&9
:5'$&
9)352*

&+*$,1
9)5($'
6+'1
',*,2
',*,2
7&
6+'1
,&B5(6(7
,&B'59B567
,&B5(6(7
,&B'59B567

E3VFK
7LWOH
6L]H
2UFDG%
'DWH
)LOH

D-16

6FKHPDWLFIRU(6HULHV*0RWKHUERDUG3&$31

1XPEHU

5HYLVLRQ
%

0D\
6KHHWRI
1?3&%0*5?5-(VHULHV0RWKHUERDUG*HQHUDWLRQ?6RXUFH?EGGE
'UDZQ%\

06864B DCN6314

9&&

'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'

*1'

35(
&/.
'
&/5

,&B'59B567

,2(1

8$ +&
35(
&/.
'
&/5

4
4

,17
$

06864B DCN6314

5
5
. .

35(
&/.
'
&/5

4
4

'*1'
6'$
9&&
6&/

3&)

&/.
,$&.
,17
$
5(6(7

9&&

&6
5'
:5

6&/

'%
'%
'%
'%
'%
'%
'%
'%

,54
,54

6'$

'*1'
966

X)FHUDPLF
&
5
N

:',

9&&

6&/ '6
''
%/8(

56
5

6&/

6+'$&

6'$ '6
%/8(

8&
+&

6'$

+& ,&

/7&&6

7LWOH

1RWHV
7KLVVFKHPDWLFLVIRU3&$
7KLVVFKHPDWLFLVIRU3&%

6L]H
2UFDG%
'DWH
)LOH

0,&52),7

,'&+($'(5

5(6(7

-3

X)9

6&/

9&&
.%,17

-3

,1/,1(
73
73
-

.%,17
6'$
9&&

9&&

,'&+($'(5

,&B5(6(7

+&
-3

0,&52),7

6+'1

73 73 73

6+'1

,25
,2:

'6
/('5('VPW

6<6&/.

'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'

5
N

5
.

',
',
',
',
'2
'2
'2
'2
',
',
',
',
'2
'2
'2
'2

3&&'

9&&

;

9&&

,25
,2:

'2
'2
'2
'2
'2
'2
'2
'2
',
',
',
',
',
',
',
',

7&
-,72'&)2+0

9&&
9&&

,25
,2:

9&&

5
.

9&&

-3 ,'&+($'(5

4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4

'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
+&

,&B5(6(7

VKRUWHGVOGUVLGH

$
$
$
$
$
$
$
$

<
<
<
<
<
<
<
<

2&
&/.

*
*

9&&

'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'

51 .[

$''5 ['()$8/7
$''5 [-3,167$//('
3LQV VKRUWHGRQ3&%
-3
$(1

,2(1

&
+($'(5'()$8/7('
X)FHUDPLF

$+&*8

-3

,25

8
+&

,'&+($'(5

3 4

8$
+&

,2:

',*,2
',*,2
',*,2
7(03
'$&9
:5'$&
9)352*
&+*$,1
9)5($'

;&
;'
;(
;)

,2:

*
*

',*,2

-3

9&&

',*,2

,17

%
%
%
%
%
%
%
%
$
$
$
$
$
$
$
$

(1$%

<
<
<
<
<
<
<
<
<
<
<
<
<
<
<
<

9&&

$
$
$

$
$

127,167$//('
9&&

$
%
&
'

*1'
*1'
*1'

*1'
*1'
26&
9
%$/(
7&
'$&.
,54
,54
,54
,54
,54
6<6&/.
5()5(6+
'54
'$&.
'54
'$&.
,25
,2:
60(05
60(0:
.(<
9
(1';)5
9
'54
9
,54
9
5(6(7'59
*1'

'>@

'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'

$(1

5
N

-%
3&

$
$
$
$
$
$
$
$
$
$
$
$
$
$
$
$

VKRUWHGVOGUVLGH

*1'
$
$
$
$
$
$
$
$
$
$
$
$
$
$
$
$
$
$
$
$
$(1
,2&+5'<
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
,2&+(&.

-$
3&

6FKHPDWLFIRU(6HULHV*0RWKHUERDUG3&$31

1XPEHU

5HYLVLRQ
%

0D\
6KHHWRI
1?3&%0*5?5-(VHULHV0RWKHUERDUG*HQHUDWLRQ?6RXUFH?EGGE
'UDZQ%\

D-17

5;
7;
56*1'

/('*51VPW
5
.

5
127,167$//('

/('*51

6:
6:6/,'(3'7

9&&

95(7 9

02817,1*+2/( 02817,1*+2/( 02817,1*+2/(

02817,1*+2/(

9
07

02817,1*+2/( 02817,1*+2/( 02817,1*+2/(

79
60'$/&&

02817,1*+2/( 02817,1*+2/( 02817,1*+2/(

5;IRU&RP

79$55$<

'%0

'7(

127,167$//('

7;IRU&RP

02/(;

1&
5;'
7;'
1&
*1'
1&
576
&76
1&

'6
/('5('

9
5(7
'*1'
9
9
$*1'
9
$*1'
(*1'
&+$6*1'

9&&

127,167$//('

$8;&'&&32:(5&,1

5
.

9&&

,1/,1(

5
N

'&(VLGHRIVZLWFKLVVLGHWRZDUGVSLQ

5;
576
7;
&76
56*1'
5;
576
7;
&76
56*1'

79
79$55$<
60'$/&&

5
.

/('5('

&RP56$

7;IRU&RP

576
&76

5;IRU&RP

&RP56%56

-
'%)(0$/(

02817,1*+2/(

9&&

'
0%56&7
'

X)97$17$/80
&

''B

X)97$17$/80

'' 5PXVWEH
ZLWKLQRI-

0%56&7
5

127,167$//('

7LWOH
6L]H
2UFDG%
'DWH
)LOH

D-18

6FKHPDWLFIRU(6HULHV*0RWKHUERDUG3&$31

1XPEHU

5HYLVLRQ
%

0D\
6KHHWRI
1?3&%0*5?5-(VHULHV0RWKHUERDUG*HQHUDWLRQ?6RXUFH?EGGE
'UDZQ%\

06864B DCN6314

&6'$&$
&65$1*(
&6'$&%
&65$1*(

&6'$&%

'$&
'$&
'$&
'$&

5
56

:
%
$*1'

'>@

'*1'

'$&5$1*( 2))6(7352*5$0

&6'$&%
'

&/.

8 '$&%,7
'287
&6
',1
&/.

92$
*1'
9&&
92%

23$

6+'$&

8 327',*,7$/
$

:
%
$*1'

0%56&7

&
S)

23$8$

'$&

,QVWDOO-IRU
P$RQWK
FKDQQHO

:
%
$*1'

&
S)

,QVWDOO5
5LIP$
RQWKFKDQQHO
QRWXVHG

23$8$
8%
5

&
8$

X)FHUDPLF

0,&52),7

'$&9

9&&

&
X)FHUDPLF

:
%
$*1'

23$8$

'$&9
'$&9
'$&9
'$&9

'$&9

0%56&7

23$8$

5
N

7LWOH

6L]H

6FKHPDWLFIRU(6HULHV*0RWKHUERDUG3&$31

2UFDG%
'DWH
)LOH

06864B DCN6314

&
S)

&
9

'$&

&
S)

56
6+'1

&
S)
&
S)

'*1'

&
S)

X)FHUDPLF

'DQG'
0XVWEHORFDWHG
ZLWKLQRI8

&
S)

&6
6',
&/.
6'2

9&&

''B

'8$/'$&$

9&&

79$55$<

+($'(5,'&

&
X)FHUDPLF

'
&/.

23$8$

9&&

62&.(78

:
%
$*1'

X)FHUDPLF

5
N

23$

&
X)FHUDPLF

:
%
$*1'

23$8$

95()

5 .

9 X)FHUDPLF

73 73

6+'$&

,'&

'$&
&

,'&

9&&
&
X)FHUDPLF

79$55$<

56
6+'1
9&&

,'&

&
9

23$8$

&
8$

X)FHUDPLF
&6
6',
&/.
6'2

&6'$&$
9&&

60'$/&&

4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4

)(%($'

60'$/&&

'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'

$1$/2*92/7$*( &855(172873876
-
/

/
*

/
*
)(%($'
7(50%/2&.

:
%
$*1'

'
&/.

2&
&/.

327',*,7$/

23$8$

'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'

X)FHUDPLF
'8$/'$&$

62&.(78

&
X)FHUDPLF

&/.

9&&

'$&%,7

'287 92$

&6
*1'

',1
9&&

&/. 92%

:5'$&

&6'$&$
'
&/.

,2:

,62/$7('0$237,21$/%2$5'6

,2:

'$&9

1XPEHU

5HYLVLRQ
%

0D\
6KHHWRI

1?3&%0*5?5-(VHULHV0RWKHUERDUG*HQHUDWLRQ?6RXUFH?EGGE
'UDZQ%\

D-19

X)9

2(
&/.
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'

4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4

6(/

51
.[

9&&

%$6

5
.

''
'
%$6

9&&
&

'
'
'

'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'

8
+&

2(
&/.
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'

4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4

9&&

1&
96
1&
5()
1&
9,
2379
96
&26
&/.

$'.3

X)FHUDPLF
9&&

3/$&(
2+0
5(6,6725$6
&/26($6
3266,%/(72
;$1';

'%
5'0%<7(
'%
*1'
8
'%
7,(
7,(
'%
;LOLQ[&3/'
7',
706
7&.

D-20

;

0%+0+=

7&
7,(
7,(
7,(
7,(
)5(4
7,(
7,(
9&&,2
*1'
7'2
6(/

9&&

&
X)FHUDPLF
6(/

,25

6$
6%
6&
67$57

9)5($'

06%
0,'
/6%

$
7LWOH

'DWH
)LOH

2UFDG%

;

6L]H

&
X)FHUDPLF

X)FHUDPLF

X)97$17$/80

-,72'&$$(0+=
&

'
'
'

5
.

&203
&203
$*1'
*1'
)287

&
X)97$17$/80

5DQG5UHGXFHWKHJDLQ
IRUDQDORJLQSXWVE\VR
WKDWZHFDQUHDGVOLJKWO\
DERYHIXOOVFDOHWRSUHYHQW
RYHUIORZRI$'&UHDGLQJ

X)
9

,2:

&
X)

. 56

8
+&

5
.

'>@

9)352*

%$6

'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'

23287
23
23
9,
9,

&$B

6+'1
%

9&&

5
.

'
'
'
'
9&&
96
*1'
96

X)9

6
6
6
6
,1
,1
,1
,1

9&&

95()&/,3

,2:

9&&

8
'*'<

92/7$*(5()

&+*$,1

0&+,3
5

95()

8%
23$

1&
1&
1&
9,1
9287 15
75,0 *1'

5LQGXFHVDQ
RIIVHWLQDQDORJ
VLJQDOWRJLYHD

OLYH
IRUVHQVRUV
ZLWKRUVOLJKWO\
QHJDWLYHRXWSXW

X)FHUDPLF
&

&
X)FHUDPLF

23$

X)9FHUDPLF

$'&95()

5'/6%
'%
'%
7,(
7,(
7,(
'%
9)&/.
,&/.
9&&,17
7,(

*1'
95()
1&
1&
(1%
$
$
$
$

X)97$17$/80

5'06%
7,(
'%
9&&,17
,25
*1'
6$
6%
6&
5($'
67$57

X)FHUDPLF

51 .[

966

$108;

966

287

&+
&+
&+
&+

51 .[

,1
,1
,1
,1
,1
,1
,1
,1
,1
,1
,1
,1
,1
,1
,1
,1

&
X)FHUDPLF

&+
&+
&+
&+

$1$/2*,13876

73
73
95() $*1'

&+
&+
&+
&+

'$&08;

9 9

7(0308;

,&
23$8$

-
0,&52),7

&+
&+
&+
&+
&+
&+

6FKHPDWLFIRU(6HULHV*0RWKHUERDUG3&$31
1XPEHU

5HYLVLRQ

0D\
6KHHWRI
1?3&%0*5?5-(VHULHV0RWKHUERDUG*HQHUDWLRQ?6RXUFH?EGGE
'UDZQ%\

06864B DCN6314

9
%<3$66&$36
0867%(:,7+,1
2)7+(
5(*8/$725
,1387287387
3,16

9$1$

,1
287
212)) 1&
*1'

&
X)97$17$/80

/3,0
&
X)

'>@

9&&

7(0308;
&
'
'
'

6+'1

7(03

,2:

,QVWDOO;7WKURXJKKROH
25;760'
EXWQRWERWK

8
0$;&:1
287
966
*1'
9
(1%
$
$
$
56
:5

,1
,1
,1
,1
,1
,1
,1
,1

7+(50,67(5
7+(50,67(5
7+(50,67(5
7+(50,67(5
7+(50,67(5
7+(50,67(5
7+(50,67(5
7+(50,67(5

5
.

7+(50,67(5
;7

9$1$

7+(50,67(5

5
.

7+(50,67(5
7+(50,67(5
7+(50,67(5
7+(50,67(5
7+(50,67(5
7+(50,67(5
7+(50,67(5

0,&52),7

99
8
'$&08;
& X)FHUDPLF
9&&

X)FHUDPLF

5 .

'
'
'
'
9&&
96
*1'
96

6
6
6
6
,1
,1
,1
,1

'*'<

51 .[

'$&
'$&
'$&
'$&

'$&9
'$&9
'$&9
'$&9

$
7LWOH
6L]H
2UFDG%
'DWH
)LOH

06864B DCN6314

6FKHPDWLFIRU(6HULHV*0RWKHUERDUG3&$31

1XPEHU

5HYLVLRQ
%

0D\
6KHHWRI
1?3&%0*5?5-(VHULHV0RWKHUERDUG*HQHUDWLRQ?6RXUFH?EGGE
'UDZQ%\

D-21

&21752/,13876

9&&

5 5 5

/
/
/

5 5 5

S)9
S)9

S)9

3ODFHWKHVHWHUPLQDWLRQUHVLVWRUVDWWKHHQGRIHDFKGDWD
OLQH(DFKGDWDOLQH
VKRXOGEHODLGRXWDVDGDLV\FKDLQWKHVLJQDOSDVVLQJ
IURPRQH,&WRWKHQH[W

9&&

/ )(%($'

8
36

'>@

S)
(;7B9B287

<
<
<
<
<
<
<
<

'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'

$
$
$
$
$
$
$
$

',*,2
,25

7(50%/2&.

/ )(%($'

(;7(51$/
&21752/
,1
$

*
*

/
/
/

8
36

51
.[

51
[

51
.[

)(%($'
S)

(;7B9B287

$
$
$
$
$
$
$
$

6L]H
2UFDG%
'DWH
)LOH

D-22

,25

',*,2

'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'>@

$
7LWOH

<
<
<
<
<
<
<
<

7(50%/2&.

/
&

/
/
/
/

(;7(51$/
&21752/
,1
%

8
36

*
*

[

6FKHPDWLFIRU(6HULHV*0RWKHUERDUG3&$31

1XPEHU

5HYLVLRQ
%

0D\
6KHHWRI
1?3&%0*5?5-(VHULHV0RWKHUERDUG*HQHUDWLRQ?6RXUFH?EGGE
'UDZQ%\

06864B DCN6314

9&&

',*,2
,2:

6+'1

'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'

8
+&
2(
&/.
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'

4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4

'>@

',*,7$/2873876

51
[

&
S)
S)

/
/
/
/ )(%($'

)(%($'

)

9&&

5(6(77$%/()86($9
'

7(50%/2&.

$67$7862873876

/
)(%($'
(;7B9B287

',2'(6&+277.<

$
7LWOH
6L]H
2UFDG%
'DWH
)LOH

06864B DCN6314

6FKHPDWLFIRU(6HULHV*0RWKHUERDUG3&$31

1XPEHU

5HYLVLRQ
%

0D\
6KHHWRI
1?3&%0*5?5-(VHULHV0RWKHUERDUG*HQHUDWLRQ?6RXUFH?EGGE
'UDZQ%\

D-23

9&&

'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'

4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4

'>@

&
S)

/
/
/
/ )(%($'

/ )(%($'
&2B(;7B5(7

'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'

2(
&/.
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'

4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4

'
.

',2'(6&+277.<
4

/
/
/
/ )(%($'

5(/$<63'7

',2'(6&+277.<
5

5(/$<63'7

'
',2'(6&+277.<

,2:

',*,2

8
+&

(;7(51$/&211(&725
62/'(56,'(

6+'1

.
62

5(/$<63'7

',2'(6&+277.<

$
7LWOH

.
62

6L]H
2UFDG%
'DWH
)LOH

D-24

(;7(51$/
5($53$1(/
$/$502873876

7(50%/2&.

5(/$<63'7

95(7

S)
8

&21752/2873876

7(50%/2&.

51
[

/
/
/

/ )(%($'

9&&

'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'

2(
&/.

,2:

',*,2

8
+&

6+'1

',*,7$/2873876

51
[

6FKHPDWLFIRU(6HULHV*0RWKHUERDUG3&$31

1XPEHU

5HYLVLRQ
%

0D\
6KHHWRI
1?3&%0*5?5-(VHULHV0RWKHUERDUG*HQHUDWLRQ?6RXUFH?EGGE
'UDZQ%\

06864B DCN6314

MT1

MT2

MT3

CHASSIS

MT4

MT5

CHASSIS CHASSIS
TP3

MT6

MT7

CHASSIS

MT8

MT9

SDA

CHASSIS CHASSIS

SDA

TP1

TP4
3.3V

SCL
R6

10K
10K
DithB U/D

10K
L/R

10K
10K
10K
aHSync aVsync Mode

10
9
8
7
6

5
4
3
2
1

TP2

FBMH3216HM501NT
FB2

SCL

0039300100

aR2
aR4
aR6

aB2
aB4
aB6

1
3
5
7
9
11
13
15
17
19
21
23
25
27
29

FBMH3216HM501NT
2
4
6
8
10
12
14
16
18
20
22
24
26
28
30

aG3
aG5
aG7

aB3
aB5
aB7
aDCLK

R21
jumper

Default:R21B

bDCLK
CLK

BACKL

aData Enable

C2
0.0022
CA_112

aR3
aR5
aR7

B30B-PHDSS (LF)(SN)

C1
22uF/6.3V
JMK316BJ226KL

aG2
aG4
aG6

3.3V

R7
100K
C7
1.0
GMK107BJ105KA

+5V
5
4
3
2
1

A
FB16
FBMH3216HM501NT
FB17

0039300100
FBMH3216HM501NT

FBMH3216HM501NT
5V-GND
5V-GND

52
51
i BackLightDrive
R46
NI

R47
0

R48
NI

3.3V

+5V

JP2

Internal Dithering
0 = Enable
1 = Disable

1
3

Scan Direction
U/D L/R Scan Dir.
0
1
UD, LR
1
0
DU, RL
0
0
UD, RL
1
1
DU, LR
(1 = H, 0 = L)

FB4
5V-GND
J8
G0
G2
G4
R0
R2
R4
B0
B2
B4
DEN

1
3
5
7
9
11
13
15
17
19
21
23
25
27
29

2
4
6
8
10
12
14
16
18
20
22
24
26
28
30

FBMH3216HM501NT

NI
G1
G3
G5

4
6

7
9

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
DEN 9
10
11
12
B5 13
B4 14
B3 15
16
B2 17
B1 18
B0 19
20
G5 21
G4 22
G3 23
24
G2 25
G1 26
G0 27
28
R5 29
R4 30
R3 31
32
R2 33
R1 34
R0 35
36
37
38
39
40

10
11
12

R1
R3
R5

13
14
15
Mode

B1
B3
B5

C3
22uF/6.3V
JMK316BJ226KL
0 R28

B30B-PHDSS (LF)(SN)

DCLK

FB3

J14
10
9
8
7
6

+5V

FB1

J2
50
49
48
Bklght47
46
45
Vcom
44
Mode
43
aData Enable 42
aVsync
41
aHSync
40
aB7
39
aB7
aB6
38
aB6
aB5
37
aB5
aB4
36
aB4
aB3
35
aB3
aB2
34
aB2
33
aB1
32
aB0
aG7
31
aG7
aG6
30
aG6
aG5
29
aG5
aG4
28
aG4
aG3
27
aG3
aG2
26
aG2
25
aG1
24
aG0
aR7
23
aR7
aR6
22
aR6
aR5
21
aR5
aR4
20
aR4
aR3
19
aR3
aR2
18
aR2
17
aR1
16
aR0
15
14
13
L/R
12
U/D
11
10
Vgh
9
Vgl
8
AVdd
aReset
7
6
Vcom
5
DithB
4
3
2
1
Bklght+

C4
0.0022
CA_112

16
17
18
6X3 Jumper

C5
22uF/6.3V
JMK316BJ226KL

C6
0.0022
CA_112

5V-GND

JP3

L/R

GM800480X-70-TTX2NLW
CL586-0529-2

U/D

1
3

4
6

7
9

10
11
12

B
NI

41
42
CL586-0527-7

4X3 Jumper

Make
FEMA
Data Image
United Radiant Tech.

Model
GM800480W
FG0700A0DSWBG01
UMSH-8173MD-1T

JP2
1-2, 4-5, 7-8, 10-11, 13-14, 16-17
3-2, 6-5, 9-8, 12-11, 15-14, 18-17
2-3, 4/ 5/ 6 NC, 7/ 8/ 9 NC, 10-11, 13-14, 16/ 17/ 18 NC

JP3
1-2, 4-5, 7-8, 10-11
2-3, 5-6, 8-9, 11-12
2-3, 5-6, 8-9, 11-12

D
Title

GUI Interface
Size
B
Date:
File:

06864B DCN6314

Number

Revision
06698

6/24/2010
N:\PCBMGR\..\06696.P1.R3.schdoc

D
Sheet 1 of 4
Drawn By: RT
6

D-25

A
TP5
AVdd: +10.4V
R8

3.3V

R13
9.76

D3
BAT54S

R14
2.0

C16

0.33
21

CAT4139TD-GT3

FDV305N
1

D
S

C18
0.33

R16
464K

R18
80.6K

5V-GND

3.3V

8
13
22

BACKL

C35
0.1
R25
10K

R26
10K

14
15

SCL
SDA

AO
A1
A2
SCL
SDA

P0
P1
P2
P3
P4
P5
P6
P7
INT

4
5
6
7
9
10
11
12
13

FBP
VGH

PGND

VCOM
CTRL

C19
0.33

R17
806K

HTSNK

Vgh: +16V

3.3V

R31
A
B

C22
24pf

C23

C24

C25

C26

43pf

0.1

TP10
Vcom: +4V

C27
1.0
GMK107BJ105KA

Default:R31B

R22 jumper

Backlight Brightness Control
R22
R27
Control Mode
Remote – Video Port
NO
A
Remote – I2C
YES
B
Fixed Bright (default)
NO
B

S1
S2
SW_46

Vcom

3.3V

Default: NI

Maint_SW
Lang_Select

R19
66.5K

TP9

SW_46
Opt. Main Sw

Opt. Lang. Sw.

R31
NO
NO
B

PCF8574

+5V

CPI

PGND

R23
33K

10K

Vss

1
2
3

TPS65150PWP

Vgh

R27
jumper
Default:R27B

5V-GND
U3

C12
TMK325BJ226MM
22uf/25V

D4
BAT54S

C17
0.33

DRVP

GND

C21
470pf

R24
10K

Vdd

COMP

R11
806K

R15
100K

FBN

ADJ

C20
0.220

+5V

C13
24pf

SUP
FB

REF

GMK107BJ105KA
C15
1.0

DRVN

FDLY

Vgl

Bklght-

R12

5V-GND

DLY2

K A

MBRM120LT1G

SHDN

DLY1

GND

Vin

3.9uH

Vgl: -7V

TP7

C14
1.0
GMK107BJ105KA

VIN

TP8

R10
10K

C11
22uF/6.3V
JMK316BJ226KL

AVdd

Bklght+

22uH
C10
4.7uF/16V

487K

CD214A-B140LF
D1

L1
C9
4.7uF/16V

C8 0.001

+5V

309K

TP6

5V-GND
5V-GND

D
Title

GUI Interface
Size
B
Date:
File:
1

D-26

Number

Revision
06698

6/24/2010
N:\PCBMGR\..\06696.P2.R3.schdoc

D
Sheet 2 of 4
Drawn By: RT
6

06864B DCN6314

+5V

VBUS
DD+
ID
GND

USB-B-MINI
6

CHASSIS

SHTDN

A
JP4

C28
1uF

C29
470pf

C30
1uF

5V-GND

3.3V

U4
D_N
D_P

USB3.3V

3.3V-REG
OUT

1
2
3
4
5

GND

FB13
C38
USB3.3V

J11

SDA
R32

5V-GND

5V-GND
1
2
3
4

0.1uF
R39
100K

5V-GND

R33
100K

4
3
2
1

8
7
6
5

C39

28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36

VBUS
USB3.3V
FBMH3216HM501NT

CHASSIS

R36
12K

GND

SUS/R0
+3.3V
USBUSB+
XTL2
CLK-IN
1.8VPLL
RBIAS
+3.3PLL

C34
0.1

+5V

PWR3
OCS2
PWR2
3.3VCR
U8
+1.8V
USB2514-AEZG
OCS1
PWR1
TEST
+3.3V

18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10

CHASSIS

C32
1uF

5V-GND

C41

FB9

0.1

1
2
3
4

USB3.3V

C33
0.1uF

R38
5V-GND

DS2
GRN

C44
1uF

F2
+5V

5V-GND

0.1uF

5V-GND
1
2
3
4

FB11

8
7
6
5

+5V
FB12 0.5A/6V

5V-GND

0.1uF

C45

5V-GND

D
Title

GUI Interface
Size
B
Date:
File:

06864B DCN6314

USB-A_VERT
J6

Configuration Select
Mode
R32
R45
Default
A
A
MBUS
B
B
Install 100K for A, 0 Ohm for B

5V-GND

4
GND
3
D+
2
D1
+5V

U11

C36
0.1uF

5V-GND

C42

CHASSIS

5V-GND

USB-A_VERT
J5

FB10 0.5A/6V

USB3.3V
5V-GND

4
GND
3
D+
2
D1
+5V

C60
0.1uF

D4_P
D4_N
D3_P
D3_N
D2_P
D2_N

R37
100K

5V-GND

8
7
6
5

5V-GND

C40

5V-GND

D1_N
D1_P

C43
0.1uF

0.5A/6V
0.1uF

5V-GND

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9

5V-GND

B
USB-A_R/A
J4

5V-GND
37

0.1
C59

FB5

CHASSIS

+5V

0.1

GND
D+
D+5V
F1

FB8

27
26
25
24
23
22
21
20
19

R20
49.9

FB7

R45

5V-GND

SCL
SDA

C31

BUS +5

SCL

USB3.3V

2
1

5
4
3
2
1

VBUS-DET
RESET
HS-IND/S1
SCL/S0
+3.3V
SDA/R1
OCS4
PWR4
OCS3

CHS

-V

5V-GND

R30
100K

5V-GND

70553-004

+5V

OUT

D1D1+
D2D2+
+3.3V
D3D3+
D4D4+

CHS

R35
100K

6
7
8
9
10

GND
LL
GND
RL
D+ SHLD
DRT
+5
LT

TSHARC-12C
A1

+V
E
24MHZ

DS1

GND

R29

To old TScreen
J12

1
2
3
4
5

0.01uF

U5
4

70553-004

YEL

C37

To new TScreen

LL
RL
SD
RT
LT

1uF

5V-GND

1
2
3
4
5

JP5

R34
100K

J10
RT
RL
SD
LL
LT

Number

Revision
06698

6/24/2010
N:\PCBMGR\..\06696.P3.R3.schdoc

D
Sheet 3 of 4
Drawn By: RT
6

D-27

A
3.3V

TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE CIRCUITRY ( TBD)
FB15
FBMH3216HM501NT

C61
0.1

J13
J15

CHASSIS

7
2
9
4
5
6
3
8
1
12
11
10
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
G3168-05000202-00

Y0_P1

0 R49

Y0_N1
Y1_P1

0 R50

0 R51

Y1_N1 0 R52
Y2_N1
0 R54
Y2_P1
CLKOUT_N1
CLKOUT_P1

2
U6

Y0_P
Y0_N
Y1_P
Y1_N
Y2_N
Y2_P

6
7
8

0 R53
9

0 R55

9
8
11
10
14
15

11
12

0 R56

bDCLK

13
14

CLKOUT_N
CLKOUT_P

R40
3.3V
10K

FB18
3.3V

R41
100

R42
100

R43
100

28
36
42
48

R44
100

12
20

FBMH3216HM501NT

7
13
18

C62
FB6

19
21

0.1
FB14
Vcc PIN 28
C46
22uF/6.3V
JMK316BJ226KL

23
16
17
22

HEADER-7X2

Option

MH1
MH2
MH3
MH4

Vcc PIN 36

Vcc PIN 42

Vcc PIN 48

Y0P
Y0M
Y1P
Y1M
Y2M
Y2P

D0
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
D8
D9
D10
D11
D12
D13
D14
D15
D16
D17
D18
D19
D20

CLKOUT
CLKINM
CLKINP
SHTDN
NC
VCC
VCC
VCC
VCC
LVDS/VCC
PLLVCC
LVDSGND
LVDSGND
LVDSGND
PLLGND
PLLGND

GND
GND
GND
GND
GND

24
26
27
29
30
31
33
34
35
37
39
40
41
43
45
46
47
1
2
4
5

aR2
aR3
aR4
aR5
aR6
aR7
aG2
aG3
aG4
aG5
aG6
aG7
aB2
aB3
aB4
aB5
aB6
aB7

BACKL
aData Enable

NOTE:
To receive backlight control (BACKL) from CPU board
when using ICOP_0096 LVDS Transmitter.
The connection from pin 42 on the TTL video connector
(VSYNC) to U1-23 must be broken and connected to
pin 43.

3
25
32
38
44

SN75LVDS86A

C49

C47

C50

C48

C51

C53

C52

C54

0.1

0.01

0.1

0.01

0.1

0.01

0.1

0.01

C
C55

C56

C57

C58

0.1

0.01

0.1

0.01

D
Title

GUI Interface
Size
B
Date:
File:
1

D-28

Number

Revision
06698

6/24/2010
N:\PCBMGR\..\06696.P4.R3.schdoc

D
Sheet 4 of 4
Drawn By: RT
6

06864B DCN6314

MT1

MT2

From ICOP CPU

CHASSIS-0 CHASSIS

+3.3V

VAD6
VAD8
VAD10
B

VBD2
VBD4
VBD6
VBD10

VAD6
VAD7
VAD8
VAD9
VAD10
VAD11
VBD10
VBD11
VAD0
VAD1
VAD2
VAD3
VBD2
VBD3
VBD4
VBD5
VBD6
VBD7

44
45
47
48
1
3
4
6
7
9
10
12
13
15
16
18
19
20
22
BACKL 23
VBDE 25

Header 22X2
1
3
5
7
9
11
13
15
17
19
21
23
25
27
29
31
33
35
37
39
41
43

VAD0
VAD2

2
4
6
8
10
12
14
16
18
20
22
24
26
28
30
32
34
36
38
40
42
44

To LCD Display

VAD1
VAD3
VAD7
VAD9
VAD11

VBD3
VBD5
VBD7
VBD11
22.1

VBGCLK
VBDE

5
11
17
24
46

R1
10K

D0
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
D8
D9
D10
D11
D12
D13
D14
D15
D16
D17
D18
D19
D20
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND

Y0M
Y0P
Y1M
Y1P
Y2M
Y2P
CLKIN
CLKOUTM
CLKOUTP
SHTDN
NC
NC
VCC
VCC
VCC
LVDSVCC
PLLVCC
VLDSGND
VLDSGND
VLDSGND
PLLGND
PLLGND

41
40
39
38
35
34

Y0_N
Y0_P
Y1_N
Y1_P
Y2_N
Y2_P

J1
Y2_P
Y2_N
Y1_P

CLKIN
26
33 CLKOUT_N
32 CLKOUT_P
27

Y1_N
Y0_P
+3.3V

Y0_N
CLKOUT_P

14
43

CLKOUT_N

2
8
21
37
29
42
36
31

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19

30
28

MH1
MH2
MH3
MH4

CHASSIS

+3.3V

G3168-05000101-00

SN75LVDS84A
C

+3.3V

BACKL
J3
Y0_P
Y1_P
Y2_N
CLKOUT_N
+3.3V

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9 10
11 12
13 14

Y0_N
Y1_N
Y2_P
CLKOUT_P

Header 7X2

C1
22uF/6.3V
JMK316BJ226KL

C2
0.1

0.01

0.1

0.01

0.1

0.01

0.1

C10

0.01

0.1

C11

Title

0.01
Size
A
Date:
File:

06864B DCN6314

LVDS, Transmitter Board

Number

Revision
B

06882
5/7/2010
N:\PCBMGR\..\06882-P1-R0.SchDoc

Sheet 1 of 1
Drawn By: RT
4

D-29

R19

.01/2KV

A
75

R20

C18

1
CHASSIS

R13
0

J1
12

SP3050

11
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9

16
15
14
13
10

ATX+
ATXARX+
LED0LED0+
ARXLED1+
LED1-

2
1
4
3
6
5
8
7

STRAIGHT THROUGH ETHERNET

DF11-8DP-2DS(24)
CHASSIS

CONN_RJ45_LED

TP1

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8

+5V

SDA

Header 8

+5V-ISO

P3
U8

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8

SDA

SCL

4
12
11
1

R10
2.2k

Header 8

VDD1

VDD2

LME0505
GND1

GND2

5
14
13
7

+5V-OUT

TP2

L1
47uH
C

C28
4.7uF

R16
1k

C17
100uF

TP3
ISO-GND

DS3
GRN
GND
GND
Title

Size

DCN:6092

1
D-30

Auxiliary I/O Board (PWR-ETHERNET)
A

PRINTED DOCUMENTS ARE UNCONTROLLED

Date:
File:

Number

Revision
B

06731
5/6/2011
Sheet 1 of 3
N:\PCBMGR\..\06731-1_ETHERNET.SchDoc
Drawn By: RT
4

06864B DCN6314

V-BUS

C19
0.1uF
R11
2.2k

C22
0.1uF

3.3V

C24

DS4

6
9
11

12
J4
D+
D-

3
2
1
4

4
5
7
8

V-BUS

C23
0.1uF

GND

18
19
20
21
22

R12
4.75k

GRN

D+
DVBUS
GND

VDD
RST
SUSPEND

TXD
RTS
DTR

SUSPEND

RXD
CTS
DSR
DCD
RI
GND

D+ U10
DVREG-I
VBUS

17
16
15
14
13
10

CHASSIS

3
C

28
24
1
2

26
24
28

TXD-A
RTS-A
DTR-A

14
13
12

25
23
27
1
2
3

RXD-A
CTS-A
DSR-A
DCD-A
RI-A

19
18
17
16
15

U11

USB

C20
0.1uF

4.7uF

CP2102

21
22

GND
U9

C1+
C1C2+
C2-

VCC
ONLINE
VV+

TI1
TI2
TI3

TO1
TO2
TO3

RO1
RO2
RO3
RO4
RO5

RI1
RI2
RI3
RI4
RI5

STAT
SHTDN

RO2
GND

26
23
3
27

GND
J3

9 TXD-B
10 RTS-B
11 DTR-B

1
7
5
9
4
8
3
2
10
6

RXD-B
CTS-B
DSR-B
DCD-B
RI-B

4
5
6
7
8
20
25

C26
1uF

RXD
CTS
DSR
N/C
TXD
RTS
DTR
DCD
RI
GND

DF11-10DP-2DS(24)
0
R14

SP3243EU

C25
0.1uF

C21
0.1uF

GND

0
R15

NUP2202W1

GND

MT1

MT2
MT-HOLE

CHASSIS

MT-HOLE

CHASSIS
Title

Auxiliary I/O Board (USB)
Size

DCN:6092

PRINTED DOCUMENTS ARE UNCONTROLLED
06864B DCN6314

Date:
File:
3

Number

Revision
B

06731
5/6/2011
N:\PCBMGR\..\06731-2_USB.SchDoc

Sheet 2 of 3
Drawn By: RT
4

D-31

+5V-ISO

R9
4.99

A
+5V-ADC

C27
4.7uF

AGND

C2
0.1uF

C3
0.1uF

C5
0.1uF

C6
0.1uF

C7
0.1uF
U1
AN-CH0
AN-CH1
AN-CH2

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
B

C4
0.1uF

C1
0.1uF

AN-CH3
AN-CH4
AN-CH5
AN-CH6
AN-CH7

ANALOG INPUT

C8
0.1uF

1
2
3

C9
0.1uF

4
7
8
11
22
24
14

U3
6
5
4

1
2
3

6
5
4
SMS12

SMS12

15
16
17
18
19
20
21
23

CH0
CH1
CH2
CH3
CH4
CH5
CH6
CH7

1
2
13

VDD
VDD
SHTDN

ISO-GND

9
5
10
12
6

SDA
SCL
A2
A1
A0

NC
NC
REF
NC
REF-AJ
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
AGND DGND

ISO-GND

27
26

28
25
3

C10
4.7uF

C11
0.01uF

C30
1nF

MAX1270BCAI+
TP4

C15
.01/2KV

C29
1nF

AGND

ISO-GND
ISO-GND

AGND

49.9

R17
+5V-ISO

CHASSIS

49.9
+5V

R18

+5V-ISO

TP5

+5V-ISO

TP6

C13
0.1uF

C14
0.1uF

R5
2.2k

R6
2.2k

U5
14
15
12
13
10
11
16
9

GND
SDA

SCL

NC7WZ17P6X
6
U4A

VDD2
NC
SDA2
NC
NC
SCL2
GND2
GND2

VDD1
NC
SDA1
NC
NC
SCL1
GND1
GND1

TP8

3
2
5
4
8
6
1
7

ISO-GND

R3
1K

R4
1K

SDA
DS1

SCL
DS2

BLU

TP7

C12
0.1uF

ISO-GND
ISO-GND
3

4
U4B
NC7WZ17P6X

ADuM2250
Title

GND

Size

DCN:6092

PRINTED DOCUMENTS ARE UNCONTROLLED
1
D-32

Date:
File:
2

Auxiliary I/O Board (ADC)

ISO-GND

Number

Revision
B

06731
5/6/2011
N:\PCBMGR\..\06731-3_ADC.SchDoc

Sheet 3 of 3
Drawn By: RT
4
06864B DCN6314

Source Exif Data:

File Type                       : PDF
File Type Extension             : pdf
MIME Type                       : application/pdf
PDF Version                     : 1.6
Linearized                      : No
Author                          : 
Create Date                     : 2012:02:15 14:06:54-08:00
Modify Date                     : 2012:02:15 14:49:55-08:00
Has XFA                         : No
XMP Toolkit                     : Adobe XMP Core 4.2.1-c043 52.372728, 2009/01/18-15:08:04
Creator Tool                    : Acrobat PDFMaker 9.1 for Word
Metadata Date                   : 2012:02:15 14:49:55-08:00
Producer                        : Acrobat Distiller 9.4.2 (Windows)
Format                          : application/pdf
Creator                         : 
Title                           : 
Document ID                     : uuid:db2137a3-ce56-48bb-9418-132b0406337c
Instance ID                     : uuid:834bea35-6e4b-4f01-9811-fd4c2561b686
Page Layout                     : OneColumn
Page Count                      : 426

EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools

Teledyne T320 Users Manual

t320u to the manual 143577a8-6851-4124-b1df-dcd55bb6005b

Navigation menu

Versions of this User Manual:

Views

Navigation